Figo-Brm B517 PDF

GROUP
FORD FIGO B517
Body and Paint 5

SECTION TITLE PAGE
Body and Paint

Body System - General Information...............................................................................501-00
Front End Body Panels..................................................................................................501-02
Body Closures................................................................................................................501-03
Interior Trim and Ornamentation....................................................................................501-05
Rear View Mirrors..........................................................................................................501-09
Seating...........................................................................................................................501-10
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms....................................................................................501-11
Instrument Panel and Console.......................................................................................501-12
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems................................................................501-14
Wipers and Washers......................................................................................................501-16
Bumpers.........................................................................................................................501-19
Safety Belt System.........................................................................................................501-20A
Supplemental Restraint System.....................................................................................501-20B
Body Repairs - General Information..............................................................................501-25A
Body Repairs - Noise, Vibration and Harshness............................................................501-25B
Body Repairs - Plastic Repairs......................................................................................501-25C
Body Repairs - Paintless Dent Removal.......................................................................501-25D
Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks.............................501-26
Front End Sheet Metal Repairs......................................................................................501-27
Roof Sheet Metal Repairs..............................................................................................501-28
Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs....................................................................................501-29
Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs......................................................................................501-30
Paint - General Information............................................................................................501-36
Frame and Mounting
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System...................................................................502-00
http://vnx.su
501-00-1 Body System - General Information 501-00-1
.
SECTION 501-00 Body System - General Information
VEHICLE APPLICATION: 2010.25 Figo
CONTENTS PAGE
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Body.................................................................................................................................... 501-00-2
Front end design features................................................................................................... 501-00-2
Rear end design features................................................................................................... 501-00-4
NVH elements.................................................................................................................... 501-00-4
Attached parts.................................................................................................................... 501-00-5
http://vnx.su
Body
Front end design features
The newly designed front end structure of this
model consists mainly of the plastic front end
module and the sheet steel crash element.
E119865
This design allows repairs to be performed easily

Item Description
and economically, as the complete front end
1 Plastic front end module module can be detached together with the
flanged-on assemblies.
2 Sheet steel crash element (crossmember)
In areas subjected to more severe loads the plastic
front end module is additionally reinforced with
Plastic front end module high-resistance foam.
The plastic front end module acts among other

things as a mounting for various components like
the radiator, radiator fan and hood lock.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
Sheet steel crash element
x4
E119866
Item Description
Front longitudinal member
1 Securing bolts
2 Designated yield points
3 Towing eye mounting 2
1
The sheet steel crash element consists of a
crossmember to which two crash boxes are
welded.
The crash element absorbs the majority of the
impact energy in a crash.
Flange plates on the longitudinal members allow
the bolted crash element to be easily replaced. 1
E119867
Towing eye mounting
Item Description
2 Laser weld seam
As well as the sheet steel crash element, the front
longitudinal members also contribute to the passive
safety of the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
Two additional designated yield points in the front Front bumper
part of the longitudinal members absorb further
crash energy. The plastic bumper is positioned relative to the
fenders with two plastic lugs on each side of the
2-part frame construction in the deformation area
vehicle and bolted in place.
- increased ease of repair.
The fog lamps are integrated in the bumper, and
Laser butt weld seam directly behind the crash
the ventilation grille and the front apron are clipped
area - optional sectional replacement.
onto the bumper.
In the front area of the longitudinal members
(deformation area) there are no inward
reinforcements - increased ease of repair.
Rear end design features
1 1
2 2
E31054
damage on the body structure. Sectional

Item Description
replacements are possible in the area of the
1 Studs designated yield points.
NVH elements
Rear longitudinal member As already featured on some models of Ford, this

model also features three elements on each side
In more serious rear impacts the ends of the rear of the vehicle to reduce the transmission of
longitudinal members are also deformed in addition airborne noise to the body.
to the crossmember. Designated yield points in If any body repairs are carried out in these areas
this area allow the residual energy to be dissipated then the NVH elements must also be reinstalled
in a controlled manner and prevent follow-on or renewed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
1 3
E120350
Item Description
Attached parts
1 NVH element - C-pillar/inner wheel arch
2 NVH element - C-pillar/outer wheel arch
Doors
3 Clip connections
The dividable door hinges are attached with two
4 NVH element - A-pillar with leadthrough
bolts each to the body and the door. Adjustment
for the sun roof water drain hose
options are provided via the oversized bores in the
halves of the hinge, allowing adjustments to be
performed without removing trim panels.
A-pillar area
The central electrical power supply to the doors is
Separation of wet and dry areas. provided on the front doors via a round bayonet
connector and on the rear doors via a rectangular
Leadthrough for the sun roof water drain hose. clip connector.
The doors are only hung by the hinge halves on
C-pillar/wheel arch area pivot pins and can be simply unhinged when open.
The doors are locked in the closed position via a
2-part element. mechanical locking mechanism which is integrated
into the hinge half on the body side.
Mounting provided by a clip connection in the
intermediate panel of the wheel arch. Sealing for the doors is provided in the form of a
surrounding rubber seal on the body side.
Divides up the resonant space of the sill panel and
the C-pillar.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
1
4
3 5
E119909
Item Description Item Description

1 Hinge half, door side 3 Mechanical locking mechanism with the
door closed
2 Hinge half, body side
4 Door hinge mounting plate
5 Front door reinforcement
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
Hood
1 1
2 3
E119910
Due to the reinforcement of the panel areas (grey Hinge on the body side and hood side (3), each
areas), there are limited options for performing dent secured with 2 bolts. Adjustment options are
removal techniques without damaging the provided via oversized bores,
paintwork. The hood lock can be released via a cable from
Surrounding seals and sealing bead in the clinched the passenger compartment.
flange area. Some variants of diesel vehicles are equipped with
Windshield washer nozzles (1) integrated into the a hood insulation.
hood.
Mechanical hood prop (2) on the right-hand side
of the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
Forced ventilation
E31058
Item Description
1 Plastic mounting element
2 Moving plates
In the rear part of this model there are three
clipped-in elements for forced ventilation of the
passenger compartment and luggage
compartment.
• Two elements in the lower part of the
left/right-hand side panel.
• One central element in the area of the rear
panel.
Fascia/crash padding
The fascia/crash padding is secured to a cross-car

beam bolted between the two A-pillars.
Components like the passenger airbag, steering
column etc. are directly attached to this component.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en
http://vnx.su
501-02-1 Front End Body Panels 501-02-1
.
SECTION 501-02 Front End Body Panels
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-02-2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Fender............................................................................................................ (44 252 0) 501-02-3
Hood................................................................................................................................... 501-02-5
Radiator Grille Opening Panel............................................................................................ 501-02-7
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Hood hinge to hood retaining nuts 23 17 -
Hood hinge retaining bolts 23 17 -
Windshield wiper arm retaining nuts 20 15 -
Fender splash shield retaining screws 5 - 44
Fender retaining bolts 7 - 62
Washer reservoir to radiator grille opening panel 3 - 27
retaining bolt
Front bumper retaining bolts 25 18 -
Radiator grille opening panel retaining bolts 25 18 -
Hood release cable fitment to body 9 - -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225357en
http://vnx.su
Fender(44 252 0)
Removal
1. NOTE: For right side fender removal only.
Remove the hood.
x3
For additional information, refer to: Hood
(501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
E119641
E120988
2. Remove the front wheels.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel
and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal E119640
and Installation).
4. Remove the fender side cover moulding.
3. Remove the fender splash shield.
x2
E119643
E119642
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225361en
http://vnx.su
5. Remove the fender retaining upper bolt. 10. Remove the fender lower retaining bolts.
x2
E119644 E119647
6. Disconnect the turn signal electrical 11. Remove the fender front retaining bolts.
connector.
7 Nm
E0029911
E119645
12. Remove the fender.

7. Remove the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the fender inner retaining bolt. x3
E119648
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
E119646
9. Remove the front bumper cover.

For additional information, refer to: Front
Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal
and Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225361en
http://vnx.su
Hood
Removal
5. Remove the wiper arm covers on both sides.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the battery negative cable.
For additional information, refer to: Battery
Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery,
Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
3. Remove the wiper washer fluid hose.
E119634
6. Remove the wiper arm nuts on both sides.
E119632
4. NOTE: Mark the position of the hood hinge

in relation to the hood on both sides to aid
installation.
Remove the hood.
1. Remove the nuts on both sides.
E119635
7. Remove the wiper arms on both sides.
x4
E119633
E119636
8. Remove the cowl panel grill.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225359en
http://vnx.su
1. Remove the clips on both sides.
x2
E119637
9. Remove the hood hinges on both sides.

1. Remove the bolts on both sides.
x2
E119638
x2
E119639
Installation
1. NOTE: Align the hood and hood hinge bolts
to the previously marked positions.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225359en
http://vnx.su
Radiator Grille Opening Panel

Removal
Detach the air intake hose from the radiator
grille opening panel.
and Installation).
2. Remove the headlamp assembly.
For additional information, refer to:
Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior
Lighting, Removal and Installation).
3. Detach the windshield washer reservoir from
the radiator grille opening panel.
+
E122764
3 Nm
6. Detach the coolant tank and keep it aside.
TIE0031567
4. Release the hood latch release cable.
E119742
7. Detach the power steering pump (PSP)

reservoir from the radiator grille opening
panel.
TIE0031828
5. NOTE: Vehicles with 1.4L/1.6L Duratec

engines only.
TIE0031563
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225363en
http://vnx.su
8. Remove the radiator grill opening panel
retaining bolts attaching it to the front
reinforcement assembly.
x4
E119659
9. Remove the radiator grill opening panel

retaining bolts.
25 Nm
TIE0029915
10. Remove the radiator grille opening panel.
E119660
Installation
1.
CAUTION: The radiator grille opening
panel must be installed centrally between
the fenders, the hood and headlamps must
engage freely to prevent damage.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225363en
http://vnx.su
501-03-1 Body Closures 501-03-1
.
SECTION 501-03 Body Closures
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-03-2
http://vnx.su
501-03-2 Body Closures 501-03-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Door check strap to door retaining bolts 6 - 53
Door check strap to door pillar retaining bolts 23 17 -
Door striker plate retaining bolts 14 10 -
Door hinge retaining bolts 25 18 -
Front and rear door bezel screw tightening 2 - -
Front and rear trim board lower screw tightening 2 - -
Outer handle screw tightening 2 - -
Liftgate striker plate retaining bolts 11 8 -
Liftgate hinge retaining nuts 18 13 -
Liftgate hinge retaining bolts 11 8 -
Hood hinge retaining bolts 23 17 -
Check arm screw tightening (Front & Rear) 23 17 -
Liftgate damper pivot 23 17 -
Tailgate latch screw tightening 23 17 -
Latch assy to front and rear door 8 - -
Mechanical fuel door lever fitment 6 - -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268499en
http://vnx.su
501-05-1 Interior Trim and Ornamentation 501-05-1
.
SECTION 501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-05-2

Front Door Trim Panel.................................................................................... (43 705 0) 501-05-3
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel............................................................................................... 501-05-6
Loadspace Trim Panel........................................................................................................ 501-05-8
Rear Door Trim Panel..................................................................................... (43 706 0) 501-05-10
Headliner........................................................................................................ (43 612 0) 501-05-12
B-Pillar Trim Panel.......................................................................................... (43 617 0) 501-05-16
C-Pillar Trim Panel.......................................................................................... (43 618 0) 501-05-17
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel............................................................................................... 501-05-19
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Safety belt lower anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Safety belt upper anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268594en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Trim Panel(43 705 0)

Removal 4. Remove the screw.
All vehicles
1. Detach the rear door latch remote control
handle bezel.
1. Remove the screw cover.
2. Remove the retaining screw.
2
1
E119670
Vehicles with power windows

5. Remove the door pull handle screw cover.
VUE0026732
Vehicles with manual windows

2. Remove the window regulator handle.
E119661
6. Remove the screw.
E119663
3. Remove the door pull handle screw cover.
E119662
E119669
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en
http://vnx.su
Vehicles with manual mirrors 10. Disconnect the exterior mirror control
switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the exterior mirror adjustment lever
cover.
VUE0026737
E124236
All vehicles
8. Remove the exterior mirror trim panel. 11. Remove the door trim retaining screws.
x2
E124237 E119666
Vehicles with power mirrors 12. Detach the door trim panel.
9. Detach the exterior mirror trim panel. Pull the door trim panel out at the bottom to
detach the retaining clips.
Lift up the door trim panel to release from
the door.
E119665
E128034
All vehicles
13. Disconnect the front door latch remote
control cable from the front door latch
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en
http://vnx.su
remote control handle and remove the front
door trim panel.
E65845
14. Release the locking tangs and remove the

front door latch remote control handle from
the front door trim panel.
VUE0029962

15. Disconnect the window control switch
electrical connector.
E128035
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en
http://vnx.su
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Removal
2. Remove the rear door opening weatherstrips.
1. Remove the front door opening weatherstrips.
E119723
E119720
3. Remove the B-pillar trim panels.

Refer to: B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior
Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
4. NOTE: Seats and doors removed view shown
for clarity.
Pull the scuff plate towards centre of vehicle
and remove it.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234489en
http://vnx.su
E120353
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234489en
http://vnx.su
Loadspace Trim Panel
Removal
Detach the liftgate opening weatherstrip.
1. NOTE: Back door removed shown for clarity.
NOTE: Water leak test to be done after fitment
of liftgate weatherstrip and to be renewed if leak
is observed.
E119725
2. Pull the back door trim lower.
E120414
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234487en
http://vnx.su
3. Remove the clips and detach the load space
trim panel.
x4
E120415
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234487en
http://vnx.su
Rear Door Trim Panel(43 706 0)

Removal Vehicles with manual windows
All vehicles
• Use a suitable piece of hooked wire or
1. Detach the rear door latch remote control similar.
handle bezel.
2
1
TIT4301006
All vehicles
VUE0026732
5. Remove the door trim panel retaining screws.
x2
E119716
E119713
6. Remove the rear door inner trim quarter
panel.
E119717
E119714
7. Detach the door trim panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225367en
http://vnx.su
Pull the door trim panel out at the bottom to
detach the retaining clips.
Lift up the door trim panel to release from
the door.
E128036
8. Disconnect the door latch remote control

cable from the door handle and remove the
door trim panel.
E65845
9. Release the locking tangs and remove the

front door latch remote control handle from
the front door trim panel.
VUE0029962
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225367en
http://vnx.su
Headliner(43 612 0)
General Equipment Detach the rear washer tube from the A-pillar.
6 mm flat-bladed screwdriver
Removal
All vehicles
1. Detach the front door opening weatherstrips.
E119721
All vehicles
4. Detach the interior lamp.
E119720
2. Remove the A-pillar trim panels.
E119719
5. Disconnect the electrical connectors and

remove the interior lamp.
VUE0027052
3. NOTE: When disconnecting the rear washer

tube, allow the washer fluid to drain into a
suitable container.
VUE0003591
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225369en
http://vnx.su
All vehicles All vehicles
6. Remove the sun visors. 9. Detach the rear door opening weatherstrips.
TIE0000246 E119723
7. Remove the sun visor retaining clips. 10. Detach the B-pillar upper trim panels and
position them to one side.
• Unclip the upper trim panel.
3
1
VUE0022706
3
All vehicles
8. Remove the passenger assist handles. E124501
1. Pull the handle downwards.

2. Open the cover. 11. NOTE: Water leak test to be done after
3. Remove the screws. fitment of liftgate weatherstrip and to be
renewed if leak is observed.
2 Detach the liftgate opening weatherstrip.
x2
3
E127993
E119725
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225369en
http://vnx.su
12. Remove the C-pillar trim panel retaining 16. Remove the C-pillar retaining screw.
clips.
E119728
E119726
17. Unclip and detach the C-pillar trim panels,

13. Remove the rear parcel shelf. then position them to one side.
14. Remove the rear parcel shelf supports.
• Disconnect the load space lamp electrical
connector to remove the right-hand rear
parcel shelf support.
E119729
All vehicles
18. Remove the interior lamp bezel.
VUE0027177
15. Remove the C-pillar screw cover.
MPE0000922
E119727
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225369en
http://vnx.su
All vehicles
19. Remove the headliner rear retaining clips.
VUE0027172
All vehicles
20. Disconnect the rear washer tube from the
headliner.
E119724
21. Remove the headliner through the liftgate

opening.
E119722
Installation
1. NOTE: Fix foams to the roof header properly.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225369en
http://vnx.su
B-Pillar Trim Panel(43 617 0)

• Feed the safety belt webbing through the
1. Detach the door opening weatherstrips from
B-pillar upper trim panel.
the B-pillar.
3
1
E124501
TIE0027124
4. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel.

2. NOTE: Hold the safety belt webbing when
detaching the safety belt lower anchor from • Detach the retaining clips.
the floor panel.
Detach the safety belt lower anchor from the
floor panel.
• Remove the retaining bolt and spacer from
the anchor plate.
TIE0027136
40 Nm
Installation
TIE0027137
3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim panel.

3. Detach the retaining clips.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268287en
http://vnx.su
C-Pillar Trim Panel(43 618 0)

Removal 4. Remove the C-pillar trim panel retaining clip.
1. Remove the parcel shelf ( Back door

removed shown for clarity ).
E119726
5. Detach the rear door opening weatherstrips.

E120051
2. NOTE: Water leak test to be done after

fitment of liftgate weatherstrip and to be
renewed if leak is observed.
Detach the liftgate opening weatherstrip.
E119723
6. Fold the rear seat cushion.

detaching the lower anchor from the floor
panel.
E119725
Detach the rear safety belt lower anchor from
the floor panel.
3. Remove the parcel shelf supports.
40 Nm
TIE0027143
VUE0027177
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225371en
http://vnx.su
8. Remove the C-pillar screw cover.
E119727
9. Remove the C-pillar retaining screw.
E119728
10. Unclip and detach the C-pillar trim panel.
E119729
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225371en
http://vnx.su
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel

Removal
4. Tilt the rear seat cushion forward.
1. Remove the rear door opening weatherstrips.
5. Remove the rear scuff plate trim panel
retaining clip.
E119723
E63916
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: C-Pillar
Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and 6. Tilt the rear seat backrest forward.
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation). 7. Remove the rear scuff plate trim panel.
3. Detach the front scuff plate trim from the rear
scuff plate trim panel.
E64136
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234479en
http://vnx.su
E120352
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234479en
http://vnx.su
501-09-1 Rear View Mirrors 501-09-1
.
SECTION 501-09 Rear View Mirrors
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-09-2

Rear View Mirrors............................................................................................................... 501-09-3
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

Rear View Mirrors............................................................................................................... 501-09-4
Inspection and Verification.................................................................................................. 501-09-4

Exterior Mirror................................................................................................. (43 364 0) 501-09-13
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
External mirror retaining bolt 11 8 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225375en
http://vnx.su
Rear View Mirrors

There are two levels of exterior rear view mirror
available depending upon market options. All
models have a manual day/night interior rear view
mirror. Low series models have manually operated
remote exterior rear view mirrors. High series
models have electrically operated power mirrors
controlled by a multi-function switch mounted on
the drivers door panel.
Replacement mirror glasses are available for both
power and manually operated exterior rear view
mirrors.
The interior rear view mirror is attached to a
specially treated area of the front windshield by an
adhesive patch. The adhesive patch is available
as a service part.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230290en
http://vnx.su
Rear View Mirrors

Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 501-09, for
Visual Inspection Chart
schematic and connector information.
Mechanical Electrical
Inspection and Verification • Exterior mirror(s) • Fuse(s)

• Electrical
1. Verify the customer concern. connector(s)
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical • Switch
and electrical damage.
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported
concern is found, correct the cause before
proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the
symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Possible Sources Action
• The exterior mirrors are inoper- • Exterior mirror control switch • CARRY OUT the Exterior
ative Mirror Control Switch
Component Test. REFER to the
component test at the end of
the section.
• Circuit(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test A.
• A single exterior mirror is inop- • Exterior mirror control switch. • CARRY OUT the Exterior
erative Mirror Control Switch
the section.
• Exterior mirror motor(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test B.
• Circuit(s).
• A single exterior mirror does • Exterior mirror control switch. • CARRY OUT the Exterior
not function with switch logic Mirror Control Switch
the section.
• Exterior mirror motor(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test C.
• Circuit(s).
PINPOINT TEST A : THE EXTERIOR MIRRORS ARE INOPERATIVE

TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
NOTE: Use a digital multimeter for all electrical measurements.
A1: CHECK THE FUSE F6 (7.5A) (CJB)

1 Ignition switch in position 0.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
2 Disconnect the Fuse F6 (7.5A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to A2.
ൺ No
INSTALL a new fuse. TEST the system for
normal operation. If the fuse fails again repair
circuit SBP06 (BN/RD) using the wiring
diagram. INSTALL a new CJB if necessary.
A2: CHECK THE FUSE F6 (7.5A) (CJB) FOR POWER
1 Connect the Fuse F6 (7.5A) (CJB).
2 Measure the voltage between Fuse F6 (7.5A)
(CJB) pin 2, circuit SBP06 (BN/RD) component
side and ground.
V • Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
ൺ Yes
GO to A3.
ൺ No
Repair circuit SBP06 (BN/RD) using the wiring
E67858 TEST the system for normal operation.
A3: CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH

1 Disconnect Exterior Mirror Control Switch
CAPM20.
2 Measure the voltage between the exterior mirror
control switch CAPM20 pin 6, circuit SBP06
(BN/RD), harness side and ground.
• Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
ൺ Yes
GO to A4.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit SBP06 (BN/RD). TEST the
system for normal operation.
TIE0014407
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
A4: CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY
1 Measure the resistance between the exterior
mirror control switch CAPM20 pin 4, circuit
GD356 (BK/VT), harness side and ground.
• Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
ൺ Yes
CARRY OUT the Exterior Mirror Control
Switch Component Test.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD356 (BK/VT), ground
TIE0014408 connection G10 and splice SAD356 using the
wiring diagram. TEST the system for normal
operation.
PINPOINT TEST B : A SINGLE EXTERIOR MIRROR IS INOPERATIVE

B1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR CONTINUITY

CAPM20.
CPM18 (GN/BN), harness side and the exterior
CPM21 (YE/VT), harness side.
E96095

CPM17 (BU/GN), harness side.
ൺ Yes
E122760 ൺ No
GO to B2.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
B2: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH AND THE
EXTERIOR MIRROR
1 Disconnect Driver Side Exterior Mirror C54 or
Passenger Side Exterior Mirror C55.
2 Measure the resistance between the:
• Exterior mirror control switch CAPM20 pin 3,
circuit CPM18 (GN/BN), harness side and the
driver side exterior mirror C54 pin 1, circuit
CPM18 (GN/BN), harness side.
• Exterior mirror control switch CAPM20 pin 3,
circuit CPM18 (GN/BN), harness side and the
passenger side exterior mirror C55 pin 1, circuit
CPM18 (GN/BN), harness side.
E104565
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new exterior mirror.
REFER to: Exterior Mirror (501-09 Rear View
Mirrors, Removal and Installation).
TEST the system for normal operation.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPM18 (GN/BN). TEST the
PINPOINT TEST C : A SINGLE EXTERIOR MIRROR DOES NOT FUNCTION WITH SWITCH LOGIC
C1: CHECK THE EXTERIOR MIRROR FUNCTIONS WITH SWITCH LOGIC

2 Operate the exterior mirror control switch.
• Does the exterior mirror function with switch
logic?
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
Driver side exterior mirror up/down function
inoperative GO to C2.
Driver side exterior mirror left/right function is
inoperative GO to C4.
Passenger side exterior mirror up/down func-
tion is inoperative GO to C6.
Passenger side exterior mirror left/right func-
tion is inoperative GO to C8.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
C2: CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR UP/DOWN CIRCUIT
CAPM20.
CPM21 (YE/VT), harness side.
ൺ Yes
Switch Component Test. REFER to the
component test at the end of the section.
E96095
ൺ No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH AND THE
DRIVER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR
1 Disconnect Driver Side Exterior Mirror C54.
CPM21 (YE/VT), harness side and the driver
side exterior mirror C54 pin 2, circuit CPM21
(YE/VT), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new driver side exterior mirror.
E104570
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPM21 (YE/VT). TEST the
C4: CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR LEFT/RIGHT CIRCUIT
CAPM20.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
mirror control switch pin 5, circuit CPM20
(BN/WH), harness side.
ൺ Yes
E96096 ൺ No
GO to C5.
DRIVER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR
1 Disconnect Driver Side Exterior Mirror C54.
CPM20 (BN/WH), harness side and the driver
side exterior mirror C54 pin 3, circuit CPM20
(BN/WH), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new driver side exterior mirror.
E104566
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPM20 (BN/WH). TEST the
C6: CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR UP/DOWN CIRCUIT
CAPM20.
ൺ Yes
E96097 ൺ No
GO to C7.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
PASSENGER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR
1 Disconnect Passenger Side Exterior Mirror C55.
CPM17 (BU/GN), harness side and the
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new passenger side exterior
mirror.
E104567
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPM17 (BU/GN). TEST the
C8: CHECK THE PASSENGER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR LEFT/RIGHT CIRCUIT
CAPM20.
CPM16 (BN/BU), harness side.
ൺ Yes
E104568
ൺ No
GO to C9.
PASSENGER SIDE EXTERIOR MIRROR
1 Disconnect Passenger Side Exterior Mirror C55.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
CPM16 (BN/BU), harness side, and the
CPM16 (BN/BU), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new passenger side exterior
mirror.
E104569
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPM16 (BN/BU). TEST the
Power mirror adjust switch component testing procedure

Circuit to test Connect self–powered Move switch to these A good switch will
test light or ohmmeter positions indicate
to terminals
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Rest Open circuit
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Up Open circuit
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Down Closed circuit
Up/down 6 and 1 Rest Open circuit
Up/down 6 and 1 Up Closed circuit
Up/down 6 and 1 Down Open circuit
Power mirror, right side 6 and 3 Rest Open circuit
Power mirror, right side 6 and 3 Up Open circuit
Power mirror, right side 6 and 3 Down Closed circuit
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Rest Open circuit
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Left Closed circuit
Power mirror, left side 6 and 3 Right Open circuit
Left/right 6 and 7 Rest Open circuit
Left/right 6 and 7 Left Open circuit
Left/right 6 and 7 Right Closed circuit
Power mirror, right side 6 and 5 Rest Open circuit
Power mirror, right side 6 and 5 Left Open circuit
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
Circuit to test Connect self–powered Move switch to these A good switch will
test light or ohmmeter positions indicate
to terminals
Power mirror, right side 6 and 5 Right Closed circuit
Left/right 6 and 3 Left Closed circuit
Left/right 6 and 3 Right Open circuit
Left/right 4 and 3 Left Open circuit
Left/right 4 and 3 Right Closed circuit
7 5 3 1
6 4 2
E124614
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225377en
http://vnx.su
Exterior Mirror(43 364 0)

Removal 4. Disconnect the exterior mirror control switch
Vehicles with manual mirrors
1. Remove the exterior mirror adjustment lever
cover.
VUE0026737
5. Disconnect the exterior mirror electrical

E124236 connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror trim panel.
E124238
E124237 All vehicles

6. Remove the exterior mirror (power mirror
Vehicles with power mirrors shown).
3. Detach the exterior mirror trim panel. 1. Remove the exterior mirror retaining screw.
2. Remove the exterior mirror retaining bolt.
E119665
E124239
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234695en
http://vnx.su
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234695en
http://vnx.su
501-10-1 Seating 501-10-1
.
SECTION 501-10 Seating
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-10-2

Seats................................................................................................................................... 501-10-3

Front Seat........................................................................................................................... 501-10-4
Front Seat Backrest Cover............................................................................. (40 108 0) 501-10-5
Rear Seat Backrest Cover.................................................................................................. 501-10-8
Rear Seat Backrest Latch............................................................................... (40 534 0) 501-10-10
http://vnx.su
501-10-2 Seating 501-10-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front seat retaining bolts 35 - -
Front seat belt buckle 47 - -
Front seat cushion retaining bolts 23 17 -
Front seat backrest retaining bolts 48 35 -
Rear seat backrest latch retaining bolts 27 20 -
Rear seat cushion retaining bolts 25 18 -
Rear seat backrest retaining bolts 25 18 -
Rear center safety belt lower anchor and buckle 55 41 -
assembly retaining bolt
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225381en
http://vnx.su
501-10-3 Seating 501-10-3
Seats
Front seats have cut and sew covers over foam
padding supported by sprung wire on a steel frame.
The cushion and backrest are contoured for lateral
support with tie downs in the seat back to improve
rear seat knee clearance. Both front seats can be
fully reclined and are fitted with two way adjustable
head restraints with foam pads. A flow-through gap
between the head restraint and the front seat
backrest has been incorporated to allow cool air
to reach rear seat occupants. Seat tracks allow
forwards and rearwards travel. All front seats
incorporate an outer trim panel, inner trim panels
are fitted depending on vehicle specifications.
The rear seats are contoured with foam padding
supported on a sprung wire frame. The rear seat
backrest has two integral head restraints.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G109234en
http://vnx.su
501-10-4 Seating 501-10-4
Front Seat
1. Remove the components in the order
indicated in the following illustration(s) and
table(s).
35 Nm
x4
E119913
Item Description
1 Front seat retaining bolts
2 Front seat
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225413en
http://vnx.su
501-10-5 Seating 501-10-5
Front Seat Backrest Cover(40 108 0)

General Equipment 2. Pull the front seat cushion forward to detach
the cushion retaining hooks
Hog ring pliers
Removal 1
1. Remove the front seat. 2

Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
2. Remove the head restraint.
1. Press in the head restraint locking clip.
2. Pull the head restraint out of the front seat E64037
backrest.
5. Remove the front seat belt buckle.
2 47 Nm
1
E64035
E64038
3. Remove the front seat cushion retaining
bolts.
6. Remove the front seat base inner trim panel.
1. Detach the trim panel front retaining clip.
2. Lift the trim panel to release the upper
23 Nm retaining clip.
3. Detach the trim panel rear retaining clip.
E64036
4. Remove the front seat cushion. 3

1. Lift the front seat cushion upwards.
E64039
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234698en
http://vnx.su
501-10-6 Seating 501-10-6
7. Remove the front seat height adjustment 2. Lift the trim panel to release the upper
lever trim cover. retaining clip.
3. Detach the trim panel rear retaining clip.
3 1
E64040
E64043
8. Remove the front seat height adjustment

lever. 11. Remove the front seat head restraint guide
tubes.
• Remove the front seat height adjustment
lever retaining bolts. 1. Using a flat blade screwdriver, press in the
head restraint tube locking clip.
2. Lift the head restraint tube out of the front
seatback.
6 Nm
x3
2
1
E128043
9. Remove the front seat backrest tilt lever trim

E64044
cover.
1. Release the tilt lever trim cover retaining clip. 12. Remove the front seat backrest assembly.
2. Pull the tilt lever trim cover off of the tilt lever.
• Remove the front seat backrest retaining
bolts.
1 48 Nm
2
E64042
E66401
10. Remove the front seat base outer trim
panel.
1. Detach the trim panel front retaining clip.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234698en
http://vnx.su
501-10-7 Seating 501-10-7
13. Detach the front seat backrest cover strip. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
E0003004 V4001063
14. Remove the front seat backrest cover.
E66402
Installation
1. NOTE: Use hog ring pliers to close the
hogrings. Do not use any other tool. The hog
rings must be closed to overlap as
illustrated.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234698en
http://vnx.su
501-10-8 Seating 501-10-8
Rear Seat Backrest Cover

General Equipment and Ornamentation, Removal and
Installation).
Hog ring pliers
Removal
1. Remove the rear seat cushion assembly.
25 Nm
E63916
4. Fold the rear seat back by pressing the push

button on both the sides.
E128200
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
55 Nm
E119733
5. Remove the rear seat backrest frame bolts

(both sides).
E128199
3. Detach the retaining clip and remove the rear

scuff plate trim panel.
For additional information, refer to: Rear
Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim
x2
E119732
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234702en
http://vnx.su
501-10-9 Seating 501-10-9
6. Detach the retaining strip. 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
TIE0000373 V4001063
7. Remove the backrest cover.

1. Roll the backrest cover inwards to access
the pleating hog rings.
2. Cut the hog rings.
1
2
TIE0022147
8. Remove the rear seat backrest latch.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat
Backrest Latch (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
9. Remove the rear seat backrest cover.
Installation
NOTE: Use hog ring pliers to close the hog rings.
Do not use any other tool. The hog rings must be
closed to overlap as illustrated.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234702en
http://vnx.su
501-10-10 Seating 501-10-10
Rear Seat Backrest Latch(40 534 0)

Removal 2. Remove the rear seat backrest latch.
1. Remove the rear seat backrest frame from
1. Remove the rear seat backrest cover.
the rear seat backrest cover.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat 2. Remove the bolts.
Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal 3. Remove the latch.
and Installation).
20 Nm
E119730
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1234700en
http://vnx.su
501-11-1 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms 501-11-1
.
SECTION 501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-11-2

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms........................................................................................ 501-11-3
Opening Windows.............................................................................................................. 501-11-3
Fixed/Direct Glazed Windows............................................................................................ 501-11-3

Glass, Frames and Mechanisms........................................................................................ 501-11-4
Component Tests................................................................................................................ 501-11-16
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Door Window Glass Adjustment..................................................................... (42 001 0) 501-11-17

Windshield Glass............................................................................................ (42 115 0) 501-11-19
Liftgate Window Glass........................................................................................................ 501-11-26
Front Door Window Glass.............................................................................. (42 314 0) 501-11-29
Front Door Window Regulator........................................................................ (42 338 0) 501-11-31
Front Door Window Regulator Motor.............................................................. (33 782 0) 501-11-33
Rear Quarter Window Glass — 5-Door.......................................................... (42 514 0) 501-11-34
Rear Door Window Glass............................................................................... (42 315 0) 501-11-37
Rear Door Window Regulator......................................................................... (42 338 0) 501-11-39
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Description Specification
Cleaner/activator WSK-M2G342-A
Primer WSK-M2G343-A
2K Adhesive WSK-M11P57-A
2K Hardener/mixer WSK-M2G322-B2
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front door regulator motor retaining screws 4 - 35
Door latch retaining nuts 12 9 -
Door window regulator retaining nuts 2 - 18
Door window glass clamp retaining bolts 7 - 62
Windshield wiper arm retaining nut 20 - -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225426en
http://vnx.su
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

Opening Windows
Manually operated windows are fitted as standard.
There is a market option for power windows. The
power windows are activated by switches on
passenger door ( Passenger side only ) or by a
multiple switch on the driver door ( Driver &
passenger side only ).
Manually operated rear door windows are installed
as standard.
Fixed/Direct Glazed Windows

The windshield and the rear window are directly
glazed to the window opening flange by means of
a polyurethane (PU) adhesive bead. In addition to
fixing the glass to the opening flange, the adhesive
bead also forms a water tight seal around the inner
edge of the glass.
It is essential for good adhesion and sealing of
direct glazed windows that the correct materials
are used and that the PU adhesive is allowed to
cure.
NOTE: Should the ambient temperature fall below
10°C, warming of the adhesive using a hot air gun
should be employed. The curing time of the
adhesive depends not only on temperature, but
also on the relative humidity of the air. The cure
time for a warm humid environment will be shorter
than for a cool, dry atmosphere.
NOTE: A surface film of water on the bond line of
the glass or on the window opening flange will
prevent the adhesive correctly bonding the two
surfaces.
Any moisture on the bond line of the glass or on
the window opening flange must be removed using
a hot air gun before applying the PU bead.
To carry out direct glazing operations, an oscillating
cutter, an assortment of special cutting blades, a
cartridge gun and two glaziers suction cups will be
required, in addition to the contents supplied with
the Ford repair kit.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225428en
http://vnx.su
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms

Inspection and Verification • Window seal • Fuse(s)

• Door window frame • Electrical
1. Verify the customer concern. connector(s)
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical • Switch(es)
or electrical damage. • Circuit(s)

concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
• All power windows are inoper- • Driver power window control • GO to Pinpoint Test A.
ative switch.
• Circuit(s).
• A single power window is inop- • Driver power window control • GO to Pinpoint Test B.
erative - driver side switch.
• Power window motor.
• Circuit(s).
• A single power window is inop- • Driver power window control • GO to Pinpoint Test C.
erative - passenger side switch.
• Passenger power window
control switch.
• Power window motor.
• Circuit(s).
• The defrost system is inoper- • Heated rear window control • GO to Pinpoint Test D.
ative switch.
• BFC.
• Circuit(s).
• Heated rear window grid wire. • CARRY OUT the Heated Rear
Window Grid Wire Component
Test in this procedure.
• The defrost system will not shut • Heated rear window control • If switch is giving power supply
off automatically switch. continously. REPLACE the
• BFC. heated rear window control
switch.
• Renew the BFC, if the shut off
does not happen after 14
minutes.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
PINPOINT TEST A : ALL POWER WINDOWS ARE INOPERATIVE
A1: CHECK FUSE F57 (30A) (CJB)

2 Disconnect the Fuse F57 (30A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to A2.
ൺ No
normal operation. If the fuse fails again repair
circuit CDC21 (GY/BN) using the wiring
A2: CHECK FUSE F57 (30A) (CJB) FOR POWER
2 Ignition switch in position II.
3 Measure the voltage between fuse F57 (30A)
(CJB) pin no 2, circuit CBP57 (BN/GN)
component side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A3.
ൺ No
Repair circuit CDC21 (GY/BN) using the wiring
E67858 TEST the system for normal operation.
A3: CHECK THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LED

• Do the driver power window control switch LED
illuminate?
ൺ Yes
VERIFY the customer concern.
ൺ No
GO to A4.
A4: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
AND GROUND
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
2 Disconnect Driver Window Control Switch
CAPW10.
3 Measure the resistance between the driver
power window control switch CAPW10 pin 4,
circuit GD356 (BK/VT), harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A5.
ൺ No
LOCATE and RECTIFY the break in the circuit
E122936
GD356 (BK/VT) between the driver side power
window switch and soldered connection splice
SAD356, ground G10 using the Wiring
Diagram. CHECK the operation of the system.
A5: CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
2 Measure the voltage between the driver power
window control switch CAPW10 pin 3, circuit
CBP57 (BN/GN), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new driver side power window
switch. CHECK the operation of the system.
ൺ No
E122954
CBP57 (BN/GN) between the driver side
power window switch and soldered connection
splice SABP57 using the Wiring Diagram.
CHECK the operation of the system.
PINPOINT TEST B : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - DRIVER SIDE

B1: CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
• Does the driver power window control switch
LED illuminate?
ൺ Yes
GO to B2.
ൺ No
GO to B4.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
B2: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
AND THE MOTOR DOWN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect Driver Power Window Control Switch
CAPW10.
3 Disconnect Driver Power Window Motor
CAPW11.
circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness side and the
driver power window motor CAPW11 pin 2,
circuit CPW11 (BU/GY), harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to B3.
ൺ No
E122948
REPAIR circuit CPW11 (BU/GY). TEST the
AND THE MOTOR UP CIRCUIT
circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness side and the
driver power window motor CAPW11 pin 1,
circuit CPW10 (YE/VT), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new front door window regulator
motor.
E122949 REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator
Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechan-
isms, Removal and Installation).
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPW10 (YE/VT). TEST the
AND GROUND
2 Disconnect Driver Power Window Control Switch
CAPW10.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
circuit GD356 (BK/VT), harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to B5.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD356 (BK/VT), splice
E122952
SAD356 and ground G10. TEST the system
for normal operation.
B5: CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE DRIVER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
2 Measure the voltage between the driver power
window control switch CAPW10 pin 3, circuit
CBP57 (BN/GN), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new driver side power window
ൺ No
E122954
CBP57 (BN/GN) between the driver side
power window switch and soldered connection
splice SABP57 using the Wiring Diagram.
PINPOINT TEST C : A SINGLE POWER WINDOW IS INOPERATIVE - PASSENGER SIDE

C1: DOES THE PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATE FROM THE DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL SWITCH
2 Operate the passenger power window from the
driver power window control switch.
• Does the passenger power window operate?
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit CBP57 (BN/GN). TEST the
ൺ No
GO to B4.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
C2: CHECK THE DRIVER SIDE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH LED (IF
EQUIPPED)
1 Observe the driver side passenger power
window control switch LED (if equipped).
• Is the driver side passenger power window
control switch LED illuminated?
ൺ Yes
GO to C3.
ൺ No
between the driver side power window switch
and soldered connection using the Wiring
Diagram. CHECK the operation of the system.
C3: CHECK THE DOWN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW CONTROL
SWITCH
2 Disconnect Passenger Power Window Control
Switch CBPW19.
4 Operate the driver side passenger power
window control switch to the DOWN position.
5 Measure the voltage between the passenger
power window control switch CBPW19 pin 4,
circuit CPW12 (GN/OG), harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to C4.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPW12 (GN/OG). TEST the
E122995
C4: CHECK THE UP CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TO THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW CONTROL
SWITCH
1 Operate the driver side passenger power
window control switch to the UP position.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the voltage between the passenger
circuit CPW13 (BN/YE), harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new passenger side power window
ൺ No
E122996 REPAIR circuit CPW13 (BN/YE). TEST the
C5: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
DOWN CIRCUIT AND THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW MOTOR
2 Disconnect Power Window Motor CBPW20.
3 Measure the resistance between the passenger
circuit CPW19 (VT), harness side and the
passenger power window motor CBPW20 pin
1, circuit CPW19 (VT), harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to C6.
ൺ No
E122997
REPAIR circuit CPW19 (VT). TEST the system
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
C6: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
UP CIRCUIT AND THE PASSENGER POWER WINDOW MOTOR
circuit CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side and the
passenger power window motor CBPW20 pin
2, circuit CPW20 (WH/OG), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new front door window regulator
motor.
E122998 REFER to: Front Door Window Regulator
Motor (501-11 Glass, Frames and Mechan-
isms, Removal and Installation).
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPW20 (WH/OG). TEST the
PINPOINT TEST D : THE DEFROST SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE

D1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEATED REAR WINDOW

2 Activate on the heated rear window switch.
3 Observe the heated rear window switch
• Does the heated rear window LED illuminate?
ൺ Yes
GO to D2.
ൺ No
GO to D4.
D2: CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW FOR GROUND
1 Switch off the heated rear window switch.
3 Disconnect Heated rear window C4RD02-B.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between the heated
rear window C4RD02-B pin 1, circuit GD326
(BK/WH), harness side and ground.
• Is the resistence less than 2 ohms?
ൺ Yes
GO to D3.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD326 (BK/WH), splice
S4D326 and ground connection G17, using
E68556 the Wiring Diagrams. TEST the system for
normal operation.
D3: CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW FOR POWER

1 Disconnect Heated rear window C4RD02-A.
3 Switch on the heated rear window.
4 Measure the voltage between the heated rear
window C4RD02-A pin 1, circuit CRD06
(BN/YE), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
REFER to COMPONENT TESTS, Heated
Rear Window Grid Wire Test, at the end of
this pinpoint routine.
ൺ No
E68784 Repair circuit CRD06 (BN/YE) and splice
S2RD06 using the Wiring Diagrams. TEST
the system for normal operation.
D4: CHECK F26 (20 A) CJB AND F34 (3A) (CJB)
2 Disconnect F26 (20A) (CJB) and F34 (3A)
(CJB).
3 Check F26 (20A) (CJB) and F34 (3A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse OK?
ൺ Yes
GO to D5.
ൺ No
normal operation. If the fuse fails again,
REPAIR circuit SBP26 (YE/RD) using the
Wiring Diagrams. INSTALL a new CJB if
necessary.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
D5: CHECK F26 (20 A) (CJB) FOR POWER.
1 Measure the voltage between F26 (20 A) (CJB)
pin 2, circuit SBP26 (YE/RD), component side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D6.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit SBF05 (GY/RD), using the
E67858 necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D6: CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW SWITCH FOR IGNITION POWER
2 Switch ON the heated rear window.
E67858
3 Measure the voltage between the F34 (3 A)

(CJB) pin 2, circuit CBP34 (VT/BN), Component
side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D7.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CRD06 (BN/YE), using the
necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D7: CHECK THE BFC FOR HEATED REAR WINDOW BATTERY POWER.
2 Switch OFF the heated rear window.
3 Disconnect BFC C2AM02-C.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the voltage between the C2AM02-C
pin 4, circuit SBP26 (YE/RD), harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D8.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit SBP26 (YE/RD), using the
Wiring Diagrams. TEST the system for normal
E122955
operation.
D8: CHECK F38 (7.5 A) (CJB)

1 Connect BFC C2AM02-C.
2 Disconnect F38 (7.5A) (CJB).
3 Check F38 (7.5A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to D9.
ൺ No
normal operation. If the fuse fails again,
REPAIR circuit CBP38 (GY/BU), using the
necessary.
D9: CHECK F38 (7.5 A) (CJB) FOR POWER.
2 Measure the voltage between F38 (7.5 A) (CJB)
pin 2, circuit CBP38 (GY/BU), Component side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D10.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CBP38 (GN/BU), using the
E67858 necessary. TEST the system for normal
operation.
D10: CHECK THE BFC FOR IGNITION POWER

2 Disconnect BFC C2AM02-A.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the voltage between the BFC C2AM02-
A pin 33, circuit CBP38 (GY/BU), harness side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D11.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CBP38 (GY/BU), using the
E122953
operation.
D11: CHECK THE HEATED REAR WINDOW SWITCH FOR GROUND

2 Measure the resistence between the heated
rear window switch C2RD09 pin 4, circuit GD215
(BK/GY), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D12.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD215 (BK/GY), ground G12
and Splice S2D215, using the Wiring
E68558 Diagrams. TEST the system for normal oper-
ation.
D12: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF CIRCUIT CRD09 (BU/GY)

1 Disconnect BFC C2AM02-A.
2 Measure the resistence between the BFC
C2AM02-A pin 24, circuit CRD09 (BU/GY),
harness side and heated rear window switch
C2RD09 pin 1, circuit CRD09 (BU/GY), harness
side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new heated rear window switch.
E124042 If the problem still persists GO to D13.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CRD09 (BU/GY), using the
operation.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
D13: CHECK THE RESISTANCE OF CIRCUIT GD357 (BK)
1 Measure the resistence between the BFC
C2AM02-C pin 8, circuit GD357 (BK), harness
side and ground.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new BFC. TEST the system for
normal operation.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD357 (BK) and ground G13,
E122988
using the Wiring Diagrams. TEST the system
Component Tests 6. INSTALL a new heated rear window glass.

REFER to: Liftgate Window Glass (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
Heated Rear Window Grid Wire Test and Installation).
1. Using a bright lamp inside the vehicle, visually
inspect the grid wire from the outside. A broken
grid conductor line will appear as a brown spot.
2. Run the engine at idle. Set the heated rear
window control switch and lights to ON. The
heated rear window indicator light should
illuminate.
3. Working inside the vehicle with a multimeter,
contact the broad red/brown strips on the heated
rear window positive lead to battery side and
negative lead to ground side. The multimeter
should read 10-13 volts. A lower voltage reading
indicates a loose heated rear window ground
wire connection at the heated rear window
ground wire screw.
4. Contact a ground point with the negative lead
of the multimeter. The voltage reading should
not change.
5. With the negative lead of the multimeter
grounded, touch each grid line of the heated
rear window at its pinpoint with the positive lead.
A reading of approximately six volts indicates
that the line is OK. A reading of zero volts
indicates that the line is broken between the
midpoint and the battery side of the grid line. A
reading of 12 volts indicates that the circuit is
broken between the midpoint of the grid line and
ground.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225434en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Door Window Glass Adjustment(42 001 0)

Adjustment • Align the retaining screws with the access
hole.
1. Remove the door trim panel.
Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
2.
CAUTION: Do not touch the adhesive
surface as re-bonding will be impaired.
NOTE: Do not detach the water shield fully.
Detach the door panel watershield. x2
• Using a plastic knife (disposable cutlery), cut
through the Butyl strip to enable the E120496
watershield to be peeled back.
5. Make sure the glass is inside the door frame
outer seal.
E119739
3. Connect the window operating switch

E111958
6. Lower the glass to the bottom.

7. Standing inside the door, apply rearward
hand pressure on the outside of the window
glass, at the same time raising the glass to
its fully closed position.
E119738
4. Loosen the window glass clamp retaining

bolts.
TIW4201082
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230295en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
8. Tighten the window glass clamp retaining
bolts.
x2
E120496
9. Attach the door panel watershield.

10. Install the door trim panel.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230295en
http://vnx.su
Windshield Glass(42 115 0)

General Equipment 4. Remove the wiper arm covers on both sides.
Hot air gun
Direct glazing cutter for bonded glass
Direct glazing adhesive kit
Direct glazing adhesive oven
Glazing suction cups
Removal
All vehicles E119634
1. Remove the battery ground cable.
For additional information, refer to: Battery 5. Remove the wiper arm nuts on both sides.
2. Remove the hood.
and Installation).
3. Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap
and heat the PU adhesive for a minimum of
30 minutes.
E119635
6. NOTE: Make sure that the windshield wiper

motor is in the park position.
Remove the windshield wiper arms.
TIE0022871
E119636
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
7. Remove the cowl panel grille. All vehicles
10. Remove the interior mirror.
x2
E119637
E119736
8. Detach the front door opening weatherstrip
from the A-pillar on both sides.
Vehicles without roof opening panel
11. Detach the interior lamp.
E119720
E120057
9. Remove the A-pillar trim panels.
12. Disconnect the interior lamp electrical

connectors and remove the interior lamp.
VUE0027052
VUE0003591
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
All vehicles wear ear protectors. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
13. Remove the sun visors.
CAUTION: Make sure the cutting blades
are changed where the cutting depth
changes to avoid damage to the body and
trim panels.
NOTE: Care must be taken when cutting in the
area of the locating blocks along the lower edge
of the windshield glass.
From inside the vehicle, using a suitable
direct glazing cutter, cut the PU adhesive to
the given maximum depths.
TIE0000246 1. 23 mm.
2. 75 mm.
3. 160 mm.
14. Lever open the covers to expose the screws
and remove the sun visor retaining clips.
1 1
E119734
VUE0022706
17. With the aid of another technician, use
glazing suction cups to remove the
15. Detach the leading edge of the headliner windshield glass.
and place two blocks of suitable material
between the headliner and the roof panel
to act as spacers.
x2
E119735
TIE0000249
18. Remove the windshield glass locating
blocks.
16.
WARNING: Wear gloves and eye
protection when working with the glass
cutting tool as the cutting operation may
produce splinters. When using the cutter
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
• Discard the locating blocks. 3. Check the windshield glass flange for
damaged sheet metal, rust or foreign material
which may have caused, or may cause, glass
breakage.
4.
CAUTION: To make sure that the PU
adhesive cures, it is essential that all
bonding surfaces are free of moisture.
Using a hot air gun, apply warm air (25°C) to
the windshield glass flange and glass bond
line to remove all traces of moisture.
5. Clean the windshield with cleaner.
E119737
Installation
All vehicles
1.
Carefully trim the remaining polyurethane
(PU) adhesive from the windshield glass
flange to leave approximately 1 mm of
trimmed PU adhesive adhered to the flange. E122484
6. Apply primer on to the windshield. Make sure

that the width is approximately 2 cm as
shown in the picture below. Do not allow the
primer to dry more than 20 minutes.
20mm
TIE0001233
2. Install new windshield glass locating blocks.
E122483
E119737
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
7. Clean the body flange with cleaner & apply 10. NOTE: Discard the first 100 mm of PU
primer as shown in the adjacent picture. adhesive as this may have a reduced
working time.
Points to be taken care during sealant
application.
1. Sealant application should be done slowly to
achieve the bead height specified in step 5.
Take minimum10 minutes for sealant
application.
2. The sealant cartridge once opened should
be consumed within 20 – 30 minutes.
3. After sealant application the glass should be
fixed to body within 10 minutes.
E122481
4. All the operations including sealant
application should be carried out only in room
8. NOTE: If the ambient temperature falls below temperature & should not be exposed to
10°C, use a hot air gun and apply warm air direct sunlight.
(25°C) continuously for 15 minutes (inside 5. To avoid water leaks, any breakage in the
or outside the vehicle). continuous bead must be overlapped by 20
Apply sealant on the body flange as mm.
specified. Make sure that the bead height & CAUTION: During the curing period of the
width is maintained as specified. PU adhesive, the door windows must be
left open to avoid a build up of pressure
when the doors are opened and closed.
11. NOTE: Do not handle the windshield in bare
10mm
hands, use only glazing suction cups to

handle it.
8mm Locate the windshield on to the body flange
& fix it. Press firmly & evenly throughout the
area.
E122482
x2
9. If the ambient temperature falls below 10°C,
use a hot air gun and apply warm air (25°C)
continuously for 15 minutes (inside or
outside the vehicle).
E119735
12. Down the window glass & park the vehicle

for at least 4 hours.
50 mm
TIE0002380
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
13. Perform water leak test by spraying 17. Install the sun visors.
pressurised water on to the windshield
edges.
TIE0000246
E122485
Vehicles without roof opening panel
18. Connect the interior lamp electrical
14. Completely inspect for any leak in the
connectors.
passenger compartment.
15. Remove the spacers and attach the leading
edge of the headliner to the roof panel.
VUE0003591
19. Install the interior lamp.

TIE0000253
16. Install the sun visor retaining clips.
E120057
VUE0022706
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
20. Install the interior mirror. 23. Install the cowl panel grille.
x2
E119736 E119637
All vehicles 24. Install the hood.

21. Install the A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to: Hood
and Installation).
25. Raise the hood.
26. Install the windshield wiper arms.
18 Nm
VUE0027052
22. Attach the front door opening weatherstrip

to the A-pillar on both sides.
TIE0029882
27. Connect the battery ground cable.

Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).
28. Lower the hood.
E119720
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225440en
http://vnx.su
Liftgate Window Glass

General Equipment 4. Remove the liftgate window wiper motor
spindle grommet.
Hot air gun
Removal
1. Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap
E119780
30 minutes.
5. Disconnect the heated liftgate window glass

electrical connectors.
TIE0022871
2. Remove the parcel shelf ( If equipped ).

TIE0028862
6.
wear ear protectors. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in a personal injury.
TIE0001234
trim panels.
NOTE: Some resistance may be encountered when
3. Remove the liftgate window wiper motor. cutting through the glass locating pegs in the
For additional information, refer to: Rear corners of the glass.
Window Wiper Motor (501-16 Wipers and From inside the vehicle using a suitable
Washers, Removal and Installation). direct glazing cutter, cut the PU adhesive to
1. 22 mm.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225450en
http://vnx.su
2. 51 mm. flange to leave approximately 1 mm of
trimmed PU adhesive adhered to the flange.
2 2
TIE0028865
TIE0001233
7. With the aid of another technician, use
glazing suction cups to remove the liftgate 3. Check the liftgate window glass flange for
window glass. damaged sheet metal, rust or foreign material
which may have caused, or may cause, glass
breakage.
4.
adhesive cures, it is essential that all the
bonding surfaces are free of moisture.
the liftgate window glass flange and glass
bond line to remove all traces of moisture.
5. Prepare the glass, liftgate window glass
TIE0028866
flange and trimmed PU adhesive in
accordance with the instructions supplied
with the PU adhesive kit.
Installation 6. NOTE: Discard the first 100 mm of PU
adhesive as this may have a reduced working
1. Carefully remove the remaining part of the time.
locating pegs from the liftgate window glass
flange. NOTE: To avoid water leaks, any breakage in the
continuous bead must be overlapped by 20 mm.
2.
CAUTION: Do not touch the adhesive Apply the PU adhesive in a continuous bead
surface as re-bonding will be impaired. of between 8 and 10 mm in height to the
Carefully trim the remaining polyurethane liftgate window glass flange along the bond
(PU) adhesive from the liftgate window glass line.
TIE0002379
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225450en
http://vnx.su
7. With the aid of another technician, use 10. Connect the heated liftgate window glass
glazing suction cups to install the liftgate electrical connectors.
window glass.
• Press firmly and evenly into position.
TIE0028862
TIE0028866
11. Install the liftgate window wiper motor
spindle grommet.
8.
CAUTION: During the curing period of the
PU adhesive, the door windows must be left
open to avoid a build up of pressure when
the doors are opened and closed.
Using suitable tape, secure the liftgate
window glass in the correct position until
the PU adhesive has cured.
9. If the ambient temperature falls below 10°C,
use a hot air gun and apply warm air (25°C)
outside the vehicle). E119780
12. Install the liftgate window wiper motor.

Window Wiper Motor (501-16 Wipers and
Washers, Removal and Installation).
50 mm 13. Install the parcel shelf ( If equipped ).
TIE0002380
TIE0001234
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225450en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Window Glass(42 314 0)

Removal Vehicles with manual windows
4. Install the window regulator handle.
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. NOTE: Do not detach the water shield fully.
Detach the water shield and keep it aside.
TIE0028854
All vehicles
5. Remove the front door window sash.
E119739
x2
3. Connect the power window control switch
E119912
6. Loosen the front door window glass clamp

bolts.
• Align the window glass clamp bolts with the
access holes.
E119738
x2
E120496
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225452en
http://vnx.su
7. NOTE: The front door window glass must be
removed towards the outside of the window
opening.
Remove the front door window glass.
1. Lift the glass.
2. Tip the glass forwards and remove the glass
from the front door.
1
TIE0028861
Installation
1. NOTE: The front door window glass must be
installed from the outside of the window
opening.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225452en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Window Regulator(42 338 0)

Removal 4. Remove the power window regulator motor
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door window glass.
Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames
and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).

E120497
5. Remove the front door window regulator.

1. Remove the front door window regulator nuts.
x3
TIE0028854

3. Remove the power window electrical
connector.
E120498
6. Remove the power window regulator motor.

Door Window Regulator Motor (501-11
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms, Removal
and Installation).

7. Remove the front door window regulator.
E119738
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225454en
http://vnx.su
1. Remove the front door window regulator nuts.
x5
E124240
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225454en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Window Regulator Motor(33 782 0)

Removal
2. Remove the front door regulator.
Door Window Regulator (501-11 Glass,
Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
Installation).
3. NOTE: Support the window regulator.
Remove the window regulator motor.
1. Remove the screws.
x3
E119741
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225456en
http://vnx.su
Rear Quarter Window Glass — 5-Door(42 514 0)

General Equipment 4. Remove the parcel shelf support.
Hot air gun
Removal
1. Remove the polyurethane (PU) adhesive cap VUE0027177
30 minutes.
5.
wear ear protectors. Failure to follow these
trim panels.
TIE0022871
NOTE: Some resistance may be encountered when
cutting through the glass locating pegs in the
corners of the glass.
2. Remove the parcel shelf.
From inside the vehicle, using a suitable
direct glazing cutter, cut the PU adhesive to
1. 17 mm.
2. 52 mm.
3. 30 mm.
4. 70 mm.
5. 32 mm.
4 3
TIE0001234
3. Remove the C-Pillar trim panel. For additional 1

information, refer to Section 501-05 [Interior 3
Trim and Ornamentation].
2 1 5
TIE0028856
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G183795en
http://vnx.su
6. With the aid of another technician, use 5. Prepare the glass, rear quarter window glass
glazing suction cups to remove the rear flange and trimmed PU adhesive in
quarter window glass. accordance with the instructions supplied
with the PU adhesive kit.
6. NOTE: Discard the first 100 mm of PU
adhesive as this may have a reduced working
time.
NOTE: To avoid water leaks, any breakage in the
continuous bead should be overlapped by 20 mm.
Apply the PU adhesive in a continuous bead
of between 8 and 10 mm in height to the rear
quarter window glass flange along the bond
line.
TIE0028857
Installation
1. Carefully remove the remaining part of the
locating pegs from the rear quarter window
glass flange.
2.
Carefully trim the remaining PU adhesive
TIE0023155
from the rear quarter window glass flange to
leave approximately 1 mm of trimmed PU
adhesive adhered to the flange. 7. Use glazing suction cups to install the rear
quarter window glass.
• Press firmly and evenly into position.
TIE0001233
TIE0028857
3. Check the rear quarter window glass flange
for damaged sheet metal, rust or foreign
material which may have caused, or may 8.
CAUTION: During the curing period of the
cause, glass breakage. PU adhesive, the door windows must be left
4. open to avoid a build up of pressure when
the doors are opened and closed.
adhesive cures, it is essential that all
bonding surfaces are free of moisture. Using suitable tape, secure the rear quarter
window glass in the correct position until
the PU adhesive has cured.
the rear quarter window glass flange and
glass bond line to remove all traces of 9. If the ambient temperature falls below 10°C,
moisture. use a hot air gun and apply warm air (25°C)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G183795en
http://vnx.su
outside the vehicle).
50 mm
TIE0002380
10. Install the parcel shelf support.
VUE0027177
11. Install the C-Pillar trim panel. For additional

information, refer to Section 501-05
[Interior Trim and Ornamentation].
12. Install the parcel shelf.
TIE0001234
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G183795en
http://vnx.su
Rear Door Window Glass(42 315 0)

Removal Detach the water shield and keep it aside.
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the rear door inner trim quarter
panel.
E124256
5. Remove the rear door glass frame.
x2
E101940
3. Remove the rear door outer trim quarter

panel.
1. Remove the screw and tilt the outer trim
E124246
quarter panel away from the door.
2. Depress the locking tangs.
6. Install the window regulator handle.
1. Align the window glass clamp with the access
hole.
2 2
E83286
4. NOTE: Do not detach the water shield fully.
TIE0028854
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225498en
http://vnx.su
All vehicles 2. Tip the window glass forwards and remove
the window glass from the rear door.
7. Remove the rear window glass bolts.
1
x2
TIE0028850
E124247
8. Remove the rear door trim panel.

Installation
1. NOTE: The rear door window glass must be
installed from the outside of the window
opening.
E101914
9. Detach the rear door window glass

weatherstrip.
E83369
10. NOTE: The rear door window glass must

be removed towards the outside of the
window opening.
Remove the rear door window glass.
1. Lift the window glass.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225498en
http://vnx.su
Rear Door Window Regulator(42 338 0)

Removal
1. Remove the rear door window glass.
Installation).
TIE0028854
3. Remove the window regulator.

1. Remove the window regulator nuts.
x5
E124240
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225476en
http://vnx.su
501-12-1 Instrument Panel and Console 501-12-1
.
SECTION 501-12 Instrument Panel and Console
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-12-2

Floor Console................................................................................................. (43 814 0) 501-12-3
Instrument Panel............................................................................................ (43 644 0) 501-12-5
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Instrument panel upper retaining bolts 3 - 27
Instrument panel lower retaining bolts 19 14 -
Instrument panel side retaining bolts 19 14 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230298en
http://vnx.su
Floor Console(43 814 0)

Removal 1. Remove the screws on both sides.
All vehicles
1. Remove the screw cover cap (if equipped).
x2
E127998
All vehicles
E127995 5. Remove the gear knob.
2. Remove the screw.
E127999
E127996 6. Detach the gearshift lever boot retaining trim

panel.
3. Remove the parking brake upper trim panel
(if equipped).
E128000
E127997 7. Remove the gearshift lever trim panel from

the floor console.
4. NOTE: Seats removed shown for clarity.
Remove the parking brake trim panel (if
equipped).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225617en
http://vnx.su
• Disconnect the power socket electrical 10. Remove the floor console.
connector.
E128033
E128001
8. Remove the floor console center retaining Installation

screws.
x2
E128002
9. Remove the retaining screw and clips on

both sides.
x2
E119758
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225617en
http://vnx.su
Instrument Panel(43 644 0)

Removal 5. Remove the A-pillar trim panel (both sides).
WARNING: To avoid accidental

deployment, the air bag control module
backup power supply must be depleted.
Wait at least one minute after
disconnecting the battery ground cable(s)
before commencing any repair or
adjustment to the supplemental restraint
system (SRS). Failure to follow these
CAUTION: When removing or installing the
instrument panel, care must be taken not VUE0027052
to scratch or damage the instrument panel
surface.
6. Remove the glove box.
1. Remove the floor console.
1. Push glove box sides inwards.
For additional information, refer to: Floor 2. Tilt the glove box forward.
Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and
3. Pull the glove box away from the instrument
Console, Removal and Installation).
panel.
2. Remove the steering column.
For additional information, refer to: Steering
Column - 1.19L Duratec-16V (71PS) -
Sigma/1.6L Duratec-16V (74kW/100PS) - 1 1
Sigma/1.4L Duratec-16V (59kW/80PS) -
Sigma, 1.4L Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel
(211-04 Steering Column, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the climate control assembly.
For additional information, refer to: Climate 2
Control Assembly (412-04 Control E104581
Components, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the instrument cluster. 7. Remove the passenger airbag (if equipped).
For additional information, refer to: For additional information, refer to:
Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20
Cluster, Removal and Installation). Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
- and Installation).
8. Detach the data link connector (DLC) from
instrument panel.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225510en
http://vnx.su
• Tilt the DLC retaining clip forward. • Disconnect the luggage compartment remote
release switch electrical connector.
E67420
E67423
9. Disconnect the hazard switch electrical

connector. 12. Remove the instrument panel outer side
trim panel (both sides).
E67421
10. Detach the luggage compartment remote

release switch ( If equipped ).
• Push out the luggage compartment remote
switch from behind.
E67424
E67422
11. Remove the luggage compartment remote

release switch ( If equipped ).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225510en
http://vnx.su
13. Remove the instrument panel inner side 15. Remove the instrument panel right-hand
trim panel (both sides). side retaining screws and nuts.
E67427
16. Remove the instrument panel center

retaining screws.
E67425
E67428
14. Remove the instrument panel left-hand side
retaining screws and nut.
17. Disconnect the headlamp switch electrical
connector.
E67426
E67430
18. Remove the instrument panel (vehicles

without passenger airbag view shown).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225510en
http://vnx.su
E127994
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the instrument panel upper
guides locate correctly into the bulkhead
panel.
NOTE: Make sure that the instrument panel side
guides locate correctly into the cross-vehicle beam.
NOTE: Make sure the cross-vehicle beam lower
guides locate correctly into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Unlock the securing clip prior to removal
of instrument cluster from the instrument panel.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225510en
http://vnx.su
501-14-1 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems 501-14-1
.
SECTION 501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry
Systems
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-14-2

Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems..................................................................... 501-14-3

Locks, Latches and Entry Systems.................................................................................... 501-14-4

Door Lock Cylinder......................................................................................... (41 336 0) 501-14-27
Front Door Latch............................................................................................. (41 351 0) 501-14-29
Fuel Filler Door Release Handle and Cable....................................................................... 501-14-31
Ignition Lock Cylinder..................................................................................... (33 513 0) 501-14-34
Liftgate Latch.................................................................................................. (41 666 0) 501-14-36
Liftgate Lock Cylinder..................................................................................... (41 664 0) 501-14-37
Rear Door Latch............................................................................................. (41 352 0) 501-14-39
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Door inner panel retaining bolts 8 - 71
Door latch retaining screws 12 9 -
Door window glass clamp retaining nuts 7 - 62
Hood latch retaining bolts 20 15 -
Liftgate latch retaining bolts 22 16 -
Liftgate latch actuator retaining bolts 5 - 44
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G148248en
http://vnx.su
Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems

The passenger compartment doors, luggage
compartment and hood are of the conventional
latch to striker design.
The door latches are operated by the conventional
actuating rod system connected to the exterior door
handles and the door latch remote controls, with
the front door latches also connected to the door
lock cylinders.
The door latch remote controls have a single lever
to lock, unlock and open the doors from the interior.
The hood latch is operated by a cable and release
handle while the luggage compartment latch is
operated by a cable and lock cylinder.
The door and luggage compartment lock cylinders
may be overhauled using a service kit which
consists of a lock housing, tumbler magazine,
tumbler set, barrel return spring, operating lever
and a sachet of grease.
For additional information, refer to: Door Lock
Cylinder (501-14 Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems, Removal and Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225620en
http://vnx.su
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems

General Equipment Visual Inspection Chart
Ford Approved Diagnostic Tool Mechanical Electrical
Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 501-09, for – Latches – Door latch actu-
schematic and connector information. – Misaligned door(s) ator(s)
– Misaligned luggage – Battery
Inspection and Verification compartment lid – Fuse(s)
– Misaligned hood – Loose or corroded
1. Verify the customer concern. – Door latch(es) electrical connectors
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical – Actuating rod(s) – Wiring Harness
or electrical damage – BFC
– Exterior door
handle(s)
– Door lock cylinder(s)
– Luggage compart-
ment lock cylinder
– Cable(s)

concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
symptom and refer to Ford Approved Diagnostic
Tool to diagnose the system.
• All door locks inoperative • Circuit, BFC, Door latch unit • GO to Pinpoint Test A.
• Driver door lock inoperative • Circuit, BFC, Front driver door • GO to Pinpoint Test B.
latch unit
• Front LH door lock inoperative • Circuit, BFC, Front LH door • GO to Pinpoint Test C.
latch unit
• Rear RH door lock inoperative • Circuit, BFC, Rear RH door • GO to Pinpoint Test D.
latch unit
• Rear LH door lock inoperative • Circuit, BFC, Rear LH door • GO to Pinpoint Test E.
latch unit
• Tailgate release not working • Circuit, BFC, Tailgate • GO to Pinpoint Test F.
decklid/ajar release switch,
Tailgate decklid motor
• All doors lock and unlock • Door latch unit, Circuit • GO to Pinpoint Test G.
immediately
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
• Tailgate release not working via • BFC, Tailgate decklid/ajar • Check tailgate release via
remote switch, Tailgate decklid motor, interior switch mounted on
Remote battery Instrument Panel. If that works,
check remote key for other
functions.
• Check charge of the remote
key by pressing other remote
functions. If no function works
then replace the remote
battery.
• If none of the functions work
with new battery, then learn the
key again.
• If none of the above actions
solved the concern, then
replace the BFC.
• On unlocking, only driver door • • This is a personalisation feature
unlocks enabled on BFC. press remote
lock & unlock together for more
than 5 seconds and the mode
toggles between all door unlock
to driver door unlock & vice
versa.
• Drive away locking (if • • On vehicles equipped with drive
equipped) away locking, check the input
on C2AM02-A, pin 15 for speed
signal. Since this cannot be
checked on multimeter (use
Ford Approved Diagnostic
Tool), replace the BFC & VSS
PINPOINT TEST A : ALL DOOR LOCKS ARE INOPERATIVE

A1: CHECK FUSE NO 24 (20A) (CJB).
2 Disconnect F24 (20A) (CJB).
3 Check F24 (20A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to A2.
ൺ No
Install a new fuse. Test the system for normal
operation. If the fuse fail again, Repair circuit
SBF05 (GY/RD) using the wiring diagrams.
Install a new CJB if necessary.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
A2: CHECK FUSE NO 24 (20A) CJB FOR POWER.
1 Measure the voltage between F24 pin 2 circuit
SBP24 (VT/RD) component side and ground.
V
ൺ Yes
GO to A3.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit SBF05 (GY/RD) using the
wiring diagram, Install a new CJB if necessary,
Test the system for normal operation.
E67858
A3: CHECK FUSE NO 32 (10A) (CJB).

2 Disconnect F32 (10A) (CJB).
3 Check F32 (10A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to A4.
ൺ No
operation. If the fuse fail again, Repair circuit
SBF05 (GY/RD) using the wiring diagrams.
A4: CHECK FUSE NO 32 (10A) CJB FOR POWER.
1 Connect the fuse.
SBP32 (VT/RD) component side and ground.
V
ൺ Yes
GO to A5.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit SBF05 (GY/RD) using the
wiring diagram, Install a new CJB if necessary,
E67858
A5: CHECK THE BFC FOR DOOR LOCK POWER.

1 Disconnect BFC connector C2AM02-C.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the voltage between C2AM02-C pin 7
circuit SBP24 (VT/RD) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A6.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit SBP24 (VT/RD) using the
wiring diagram, test the system for normal
operation.
E124265
A6: CHECK THE BFC FOR UNLOCK POWER.

1 Disconnect BFC connector C2AM02-B.
2 Measure the voltage between C2AM02-B pin
10 circuit SBP32 (VT/RD) harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A7.
ൺ No
wiring diagram, test the system for normal
E124266
operation.
A7: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT.
1 Disconnect the BFC connector C2AM02-C.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the resistance between the BFC
connector C2AM02-C pin 8 circuit GD357 (BK)
wiring harness side and ground.
• Is the resistance 2 ohms registered?
ൺ Yes
All door locks inoperative with key. GO to A8.
Driver door lock in operative. GO to Pinpoint
Test B.
Front LH door lock in operative. GO to Pinpoint
E124268
Test C.
Rear LH door lock in operative. GO to Pinpoint
Test D.
Rear RH door lock in operative. GO to Pinpoint
Test E.
ൺ No
Locate and rectify the break in the circuit
GD357 (BK) between the BFC and ground
connection G13 using the wiring diagram.
Check the operation of the system.
A8: CHECK CIRCUIT CPL27 (WH/BN) BETWEEN THE BFC AND DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect the BFC C2AM02-A.
3 Disconnect the driver door latch unit connector
CAPL63.
C2AM02-A, pin 25, circuit CPL27 and driver
door latch unit connector CAPL63, pin 10, circuit
CPL27 wiring harness side.
• Is the resistance less than 2 ohms ?
ൺ Yes
RENEW driver door latch unit. Check the
operation of the system.
ൺ No
E124652
between the driver door latch unit and BFC
using the wiring diagram. Test the system for
normal operation.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
A9: CHECK CIRCUIT CPL30 (BU/BN) BETWEEN THE BFC AND DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
C2AM02-A, pin 23, circuit CPL30 (BU/GN) and
driver door latch unit connector CAPL63, pin 9,
circuit CPL30 (BU/GN) wiring harness side.
ൺ Yes
RENEW driver door latch unit. Check the
ൺ No
E124653
between the driver door latch unit and BFC
normal operation.
A10: CENTRAL LOCK INOPERATIVE WITH KEY
1 Check whether lock and unlock function works
by using remote (tailgate is ok).
• If yes?
ൺ Yes
RENEW BFC. Check the operation of the
system.
ൺ No
GO to B.
PINPOINT TEST B : DRIVER DOOR LOCK IS IN OPERATIVE

NOTE: Remaining doors are OK.
B1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE DOOR LOCK.

1 Check for binding or struck condition by manu-
ally operating the driver door lock.
• Is the lock struck or binding?
ൺ Yes
Repair the binding component as necessary.
ൺ No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE BFC/DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT CIRCUIT.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
CAPL63.
4 Measure the resistance between the driver door
latch unit connector CAPL63, pin 4, circuit
CPL26 (GN/VT) and BFC C2AM02-A, pin 39,
circuit CPL26 (GN/VT) wiring harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to B3.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit CPL26 (GN/VT) using the
E124654
wiring diagram. Test the system for normal
operation.
B3: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT.

1 Disconnect the front driver door latch unit
connector CAPL63.
latch unit connector CAPL63 pin 8 circuit GD353
(BK/YE) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to B4.
ൺ No
GD353 (BK/YE), and splice S3D353 between
E124270
the front driver door latch unit ground
connection G8, using the wiring diagram. Test
B4: CHECK THE OPERATION OF DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT (LOCK POSITION).
CAPL63.
2 Connect the 20A fused jumper wire between
the driver door latch unit connector, pin 4, circuit
CPL26 (GN/VT) wiring harness side and ground.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
3 After pressing remote lock position, measure
the voltage between the driver door latch unit
connector CAPL63, pin 5, circuit CPL11
(GY/BN) wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the driver door latch unit. CHECK the
system for operation.
ൺ No
E124655
Repair the circuit CPL11 (GY/BN) and splice
S2PL11 using the wiring diagram. Test the
B5: CHECK THE OPERATION OF DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT (UNLOCK POSITION).
CAPL63.
the driver door latch unit connector, pin 4, circuit
CPL26 (GN/VT) harness side and ground.
3 After pressing remote unlock position, measure
the voltage between the driver door latch unit
connector CAPL63 pin 7, circuit CPL51 (BU/GN)
harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
system for operation.
ൺ No
E124656
GO to B6.
B6: CHECK THE CIRCUIT CPL51 (BU/GN) BETWEEN THE BFC AND DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT.
2 Disconnect the BFC C2AM02-B.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
C2AM02-B, pin 9, circuit CPL51 (BU/GN) and
driver door latch unit connector CAPL63, pin 7,
circuit CPL51 ((BU/GN) wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
E124657 ൺ No
LOCATE and RECTIFY break in the circuit
between BFC and door latch unit using the
operation.
PINPOINT TEST C : FRONT LH DOOR LOCK IN OPERATIVE

C1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE FRONT LH DOOR LATCH.

1 Check for binding or stuck condition by manually
operating the front LH door lock.
• Is the lock stuck or binding?
ൺ Yes
Repair the binding components as necessary.
ൺ No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE BFC FRONT LH DOOR LATCH UNIT CIRCUIT.
2 Disconnect the front LH door latch unit
connector CBPL64.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between the front LH
CPL31 (WH) and BFC C2AM02-A, pin 10, circuit
CPL31 (WH) wiring harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to C3.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit CPL31 (WH) using the wiring
E124658
diagram. Test the system for normal operation.
C3: CHECK THE FRONT LH DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR GROUND

1 Measure the resistance between front LH door
latch unit connector CBPL64, pin 1, circuit
GD353 (BK/YE) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to C4.
ൺ No
GD353 (BK/YE) between the splice SBD353
E124276
and ground connection G8, using the wiring
C4: CHECK THE OPERATION OF FRONT LH DOOR LATCH UNIT (LOCK POSITION).
connector CAPL64.
the front LH door latch unit connector, pin 4,
circuit CPL31 (WH) wiring harness side and
ground.
the voltage between the front LH door latch unit
ൺ Yes
RENEW the front LH door latch unit. CHECK
the system for operation.
ൺ No
E124659
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
C5: CHECK THE OPERATION OF FRONT LH DOOR LATCH UNIT (UNLOCK POSITION).
connector CAPL64.
the front LH door latch unit connector, pin 4,
circuit CPL31 (WH) wiring harness side and
ground.
the voltage between the front LH door latch unit
(BN/GN) wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the front LH door latch unit. CHECK
ൺ No
E124660
Repair the circuit CPL13 (BN/GN) and splice
PINPOINT TEST D : REAR RH DOOR LOCK IN OPERATIVE

D1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE REAR RH DOOR LOCK

operating the rear RH door lock.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THE CIRCUIT CPL36 (GN) BETWEEN BODY FUNCTION CONTROLLER AND REAR
RH DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
3 Disconnect the rear RH door latch unit connector
CCPL72.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between Body Function
Controller connector C2AM02-A, pin 18, circuit
CPL36 (GN) and rear RH door latch unit
connector CCPL72, pin 4, circuit CPL36 (GN)
wiring harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to D3.
ൺ No
E124661
between BFC and rear RH door latch unit
normal operation.
D3: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE REAR RH DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
CCPL72.
2 Measure the resistance between the rear RH
door latch connector CCPL72 pin 8 circuit
GD327 (BK/BU) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D4.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit GD327 (BK/BU) and ground
connection G18. using the wiring diagram.
E124280
D4: CHECK THE OPERATION OF REAR RH DOOR LATCH UNIT (LOCK POSITION).
2 Connect the BFC connector C2AM02-A.
CCPL72.
the rear RH door latch unit connector CCPL72,
pin 4, circuit CPL36 (GN) wiring harness side
and ground.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
the voltage between the rear RH door latch unit
connector CCPL72, pin 5, circuit CPL11
ൺ Yes
RENEW the rear RH door latch unit. CHECK
ൺ No
E124662
D5: CHECK THE OPERATION OF REAR RH DOOR LATCH UNIT (UNLOCK POSITION).
the rear RH door latch unit connector CCPL72,
pin 4, circuit CPL36 (GN) wiring harness side
and ground.
the voltage between the rear RH door latch unit
connector CCPL72, pin 7, circuit CPL13
ൺ Yes
RENEW the rear RH door latch unit. CHECK
ൺ No
E124663
PINPOINT TEST E : REAR LH DOOR LOCK IN OPERATIVE

E1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE REAR LH DOOR LOCK

operating the rear LH door lock.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
GO to E2.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
E2: CHECK THE CIRCUIT CPL39 (YE) BETWEEN THE BODY FUNCTION CONTROLLER AND
REAR LH DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect the BFC connector C2AM02-A.
3 Disconnect the rear LH door latch unit connector
CDPL71.
4 Measure the resistance between BFC connector
C2AM02-A, pin 19, circuit CPL39 (YE) and rear
LH door latch unit connector CDPL71 pin 4
circuit CPL39 (YE) harness side.
• Is a resistance less than 2 ohms Registered?
ൺ Yes
GO to E3.
ൺ No
E124664
between BFC and rear LH door latch unit
using the wiring diagram. Check the operation
of the system.
E3: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE REAR LH DOOR LATCH UNIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the rear LH door latch unit connector
CDPL71.
2 Measure the resistance between rear LH door
latch unit connector CDPL71 pin 1 circuit GD326
(BK/WH) harness side and ground.
• Is a resistance less than 2 ohms Registered?
ൺ Yes
GO to E4.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit GD326 (BK/WH) soldered
connection splice S4D326 and ground
E124284
connection G17,using the wiring diagram.
Check the operation of the system.
E4: CHECK THE OPERATION OF REAR LH DOOR LATCH UNIT (LOCK POSITION).
the rear LH door latch unit connector CDPL71,
pin 4, circuit CPL39 (YE) wiring harness side
and ground.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
the voltage between the rear LH door latch unit
connector CDPL71, pin 7, circuit CPL11
ൺ Yes
RENEW the rear LH door latch unit. CHECK
ൺ No
E124665
E5: CHECK THE OPERATION OF REAR LH DOOR LATCH UNIT (UNLOCK POSITION).
the rear LH door latch unit connector CDPL71,
pin 4, circuit CPL39 (YE) wiring harness side
and ground.
the voltage between the rear LH door latch unit
connector CDPL71, pin 5, circuit CPL13
ൺ Yes
RENEW the rear LH door latch unit. CHECK
ൺ No
E124666
PINPOINT TEST F : TAIL GATE NOT WORKING

F1: CHECK FUSE NO 24 (20A) CJB
2 Disconnect F24 (20A) CJB.
• Is the fuse Ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to F2.
ൺ No
operation. If the fuse fails again Repair circuit
SBP24 (VT/RD) using the wiring diagram.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
F2: CHECK FUSE 24 (20A) CJB FOR POWER
SBP24 (VT/RD). component side and ground.
• Is the Voltage greater than 10 Volts?
V
ൺ Yes
GO to F3.
ൺ No
Repair circuit SBF05 (GY/RD) using the wiring
diagram. Install a new CJB if necessary Test
E67858
F3: CHECK FUSE F7 (10A) (CJB).

1 Disconnect the fuse F7 (10A) (CJB).
• Is the fuse ok?
ൺ Yes
GO to F4.
ൺ No
operation. If the fuse fails again Repair circuit
SBP07 (WH/RD) using the wiring diagram.
F4: CHECK FUSE NO 7 [10A] CJB FOR POWER.
1 Measure the voltage between fuse no 7 pin 2
circuit SBP07 (WH/RD), component side and
ground
ൺ Yes
GO to F5.
ൺ No
Repair circuit SBF08 (VT/RD) using the wiring
diagram. Install a new CJB if necessary Test
E67858 the system for normal operation.
F5: CHECK THE BFC FOR POWER

1 Disconnect the BFC connector C2AM02-C.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the volts between BFC connector
C2AM02-C pin 7 circuit SBP24 (VT/RD) harness
side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to F6.
ൺ No
E124667
operation.
F6: CHECK THE BFC FOR OPEN

1 Disconnect the BFC connector C2AM02-B.
2 Measure the voltage between BFC connector
C2AM02-B pin 2 circuit CPL79 (BN/VT) harness
side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to F7.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit CPL79 (BN/VT) using the
E124668
operation.
F7: CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TAIL GATE RELAY

1 Connect the BFC connector C2AM02-B.
2 Measure the voltage between tail gate release
relay connector C2BP02-R10 pin 3 circuit
SBP07 (WH/RD) harness side and ground.
• Is the voltage greater than 10 Volts?
ൺ Yes
GO to F8.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit SBP07 (WH/RD) using the
E124287
operation.
F8: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN TAIL GATE RELEASE RELAY AND TAIL GATE DECKLID
MOTOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect the tail gate decklid motor connector
C4PR57.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the resistance between tail gate
release relay connector C2BP02-R10 pin 5,
CPL84 (GN/BN) and tail gate decklid motor
connector C4PR57 pin 1, CPL84 (GN/BN)
harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to F9.
ൺ No
E124288
Repair the circuit CPL84 (BN) using the wiring
F9: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE TAIL GATE DECKLID MOTOR FOR OPEN
1 Measure the resistance between tail gate decklid
motor connector C4PR57 pin 2 circuit GD326
(BK/WH) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to F10.
ൺ No
Locate and rectify in the circuit GD326 (BK)
and soldered connection splice S4D326 and
E124669
Using the wiring diagram. Check the operation
of the system.
F10: CHECK THE CONTINUITY BETWEEN BFC AND TAIL GATE DECKLID RELEASE SWITCH
1 Connect the tail gate decklid motor connector
C4PR57.
2 Disconnect the BFC connector C2AM02-A.
3 Disconnect the tail gate decklid release switch
connector C2PL45.
4 Measure the resistance between BFC connector
C2AM02-A pin 2 circuit CPL45 (BN) and tail
gate decklid release switch connector C2PL45
pin 6 harness side.
ൺ Yes
GO to F11.
ൺ No
Repair the circuit CPL45 (BN) between BFC
E124670
and tailgate decklid release switch. Test the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
F11: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE TAIL GATE DECKLID RELEASE SWITCH FOR
OPEN
1 Measure the resistance between tail gate decklid
release switch connector C2PL45 pin 3 circuit
GD265 (BK) harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to F12.
ൺ No
Locate and rectify circuit GD265 (BK) splice
S2D265 using the wiring diagram. Check the
E124671
F12: CHECK GROUND CONNECTION OF BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

2 Measure the resistance between the BFC,
– Connector C2AM02-C, pin 8, circuit GD357
(BK), wiring harness side and ground.
• Is a resistance of less than 2 ohms registered?
ൺ Yes
RENEW the BFC. CHECK the operation of
the system.
ൺ No
E122943
GD357 (BK), ground G13 between the BFC
using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the oper-
ation of the system.
PINPOINT TEST G : CHECK ALL THE DOOR LATCH UNIT CIRCUITS

G1: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION AT DRIVER DOOR LATCH UNIT
2 Disconnect door latch unit connector CAPL63.
3 Connect fused jumper wire between the driver
CPL26 (GN/VT) wiring harness side and
ground..
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
• Are all other doors locks normally by using

remote?
ൺ Yes
GO to G2.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPL26 (GN/VT) using the
Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the operation of the
system.
E125244
G2: CHECK THE CIRCUIT GD353 (BK/YE)

latch unit connector CAPL63, pin 8, circuit
GD353 (BK/YE), wiring harness side and
ground.
• Is a resistance of less than 2 Ohm registered?
ൺ Yes
Install a door latch unit, if necessary
ൺ No
LOCATE and REPAIR the break in circuit
E125245
GD353 (BK/YE), between soldered S3D353
connection and ground connection G8 using
the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the operation
of the system..
G3: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION AT PASSENGER DOOR LATCH UNIT
2 Disconnect passenger door latch unit connector
CBPL64.
3 Connect fused jumper wire between the
passenger door latch unit connector CBPL64,
pin 4, circuit CPL31 (WH) wiring harness side
and ground..

remote?
ൺ Yes
GO to G4.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPL31 (WH), using the Wiring
Diagrams. CHECK the operation of the
system.
E125244
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
G4: CHECK THE CIRCUIT GD353 (BK/YE)
door latch unit connector CBPL64, pin 1, circuit
GD353 (BK/YE), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
E125246
GD353 (BK/YE), between soldered SBD353
of the system..
G5: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION AT REAR RHS DOOR LATCH UNIT
2 Disconnect R/RH door latch unit connector
CCPL72.
3 Connect fused jumper wire between the R/RH
door connector CCPL72, pin 4, circuit CPL36
(GN) wiring harness side and ground..

remote?
ൺ Yes
GO to G6.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPL36 (GN) using the Wiring
system.
E125244
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
G6: CHECK THE CIRCUIT GD327 (BK/BU)
1 Measure the resistance between the R/RH door
latch unit connector CCPL72, pin 8, circuit
GD327 (BK/BU), wiring harness side.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
GD327 (BK/BU), between ground connection
E125245
G18 using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the
operation of the system..
G7: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION AT REAR LHS DOOR LATCH UNIT
2 Disconnect R/LH door latch unit connector
CDPL71.
3 Connect fused jumper wire between the R/LH
door connector CDPL71, pin 4, circuit CPL39
(YE) wiring harness side and ground..

remote?
ൺ Yes
GO to G8.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CPL39 (YE) using the Wiring
system.
E125244
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
G8: CHECK THE CIRCUIT GD326 (BK/WH)
1 Measure the resistance between the R/LH door
latch unit connector CDPL71, pin 1, circuit
GD326 (BK/WH), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
E125247
GD326 (BK/WH), between soldered S4D326
of the system..
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225622en
http://vnx.su
Door Lock Cylinder(41 336 0)

Removal 4. Remove the exterior front door handle
gasket.
1. Remove the front door window glass.
Installation).
2. Remove the front door lock cylinder cover
retaining screw and remove the front door
lock cylinder cover.
VUE0026988
5. Remove the exterior front door handle

reinforcement plate retaining nut.
VUE0026990
3. Remove the exterior front door handle.
VUE0026987
6. Disconnect the front door latch electrical

connector.
VUE0026989
E124244
7. Remove the front door latch.

Door Latch (501-14 Handles, Locks,
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225648en
http://vnx.su
Latches and Entry Systems, Removal and 3. Press the door lock cylinder out of the door
Installation). lock cylinder lever.
8. Push the front door lock cylinder and exterior
front door handle reinforcement plate into
the door by releasing the clips.
1
3
2
E66925
11. Remove the door lock cylinder ( continued

VUE0031460 ).
9. Remove the door inner handle assembly and

detach the connecting rods.
VUE0030958
Installation
E120388
10. Remove the door lock cylinder. 2. Install the front door window glass.
1. Rotate the door lock cylinder lever clockwise For additional information, refer to: Front
to expose the door lock cylinder retaining Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass, Frames
clip. and Mechanisms, Removal and
2. Release the door lock cylinder retaining clip Installation).
using a suitable flat blade screwdriver.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225648en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Latch(41 351 0)

Removal 4. Detach the exterior front door handle and
lock cylinder connecting rods.
2. Disconnect the front door latch electrical
connector.
E124244
3. Remove the front door window sash.
E66003
x2
5. Remove the front door latch retaining
screws.
E119912
VUE0026991
6. Remove the front door latch.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225636en
http://vnx.su
Installation
12 Nm
VUE0028449
2. Install the front door trim panel.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225636en
http://vnx.su
Fuel Filler Door Release Handle and Cable

Removal
5. Remove the floor carpet.
1. Remove both side front seats.
Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and
Installation).
2. Remove the rear seat cusion.
E122465
6. Remove the secondary carpets.
E119914
3. Remove the rear seat back rest cover.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat
Backrest Cover (501-10 Seating, Removal
and Installation).
4. Remove the center console, front door, rear
door scuff plates, B pillar trims and all
required parts. For additional information, E122466
refer to:
Floor Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and 7. For removal of the cable, reverse the
Console, Removal and Installation), installation procedure.
B-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation),
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Installation
Installation), 1. The general routing of the cable routing, tape
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior fitment locations are shown.
Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1249761en
http://vnx.su
E122470
st 3. Route the cable in to the panel.

2. Make sure that the 1 notch of the cable is
fitted in the lever.
1
E122467
E122464
4. Route the cable inside the RH seat bracket
reinforcement.
1. Ensure that the tapes are pasted in the
location.
2. Fit a tie strap through the seat bracket.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1249761en
http://vnx.su
3. Make sure that the cable is routed above the 2. Route the cable in to the panel.
edge of the body embossing near the heal
kick area.
E122473
E122468
8. NOTE: Removed view shown for clarity.
Insert the cable end to the fuel lid housing
5. Route the cable inside the LH seat bracket
slot & turn clockwise (half rotation) to lock
reinforcement & put the tie strap.
it.
E122469
E122472
6. Lock the cable into the wiring loom clip.

9. For installation of the removed parts, reverse
the removal steps 1 to 6.
E122471
7. Insert the grommet into the body hole.

1. Ensure that the tapes are pasted in the
location.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1249761en
http://vnx.su
Ignition Lock Cylinder(33 513 0)

Removal 2. Release the steering column locking lever (
If equipped ).
Vehicles with driver air bag
1. Detach the driver air bag module from the
steering wheel.
1
1
1. Pull the top of the air bag module away from
the steering wheel.
2. Push the air bag module upwards to detach
the lower retaining clips. 2
1
E104584
Vehicles with PATS

5. Disconnect the passive anti-theft (PATS)
transceiver electrical connector.
E104576
Vehicles without driver air bag

2. Remove the steering wheel.
For additional information, refer to: Steering
Wheel (211-04 Steering Column, Removal
and Installation).
All vehicles E63156
3. Detach the steering column upper shroud.

6. Remove the PATS transceiver (steering
• Using a thin bladed screwdriver, release the column multifunction switch shown removed
two clips, (one each side). for clarity).
• Release the locking tangs.
E63152
VUE0030842
4. Remove the steering column lower shroud
(steering wheel shown removed for clarity).
1. Remove the retaining screws.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225645en
http://vnx.su
All vehicles
7. Disconnect the ignition switch and turn
signal electrical connectors.
E63155
Vehicles with driver air bag

8. Remove the clock spring assembly.
Clockspring (501-20 Supplemental
Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
All vehicles
9. Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Right-hand drive vehicles

10. Remove the ignition lock cylinder.
• Depress the 1 detents at the top and bottom
of the housing and pull out the cylinder.
E119760
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225645en
http://vnx.su
Liftgate Latch(41 666 0)

Removal 2. Rotate the end of the cable clockwise to
release it from the liftgate latch actuator.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2
1
VUE0027228
VUE0027231
5. Detach the liftgate latch from the liftgate.

2. Detach the liftgate latch cable from the
liftgate lock cylinder retaining plate
22 Nm
VUE0027229
VUE0030845
6. Detach the liftgate ajar switch and remove
the liftgate latch.
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch cable from the
liftgate lock cylinder actuator.
VUE0027230
VUE0030846
Installation
4. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuator cable 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
from the liftgate latch actuator.
1. Push the cable from the retaining bracket.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G189094en
http://vnx.su
Liftgate Lock Cylinder(41 664 0)

Removal 4. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder retaining
plate retaining screws and the liftgate lock
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. cylinder actuator.
VUE0027231 VUE0030847
2. Detach the liftgate latch cable from the 5. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder retaining
liftgate lock cylinder retaining plate. plate.
• Rotate the retaining plate counterclockwise.
VUE0030845
VUE0030848
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch cable from the

liftgate lock cylinder actuator. 6. Remove the liftgate lock cylinder.
• Push the liftgate lock cylinder through the
liftgate.
VUE0030846
VUE0030849
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G189092en
http://vnx.su
Installation
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G189092en
http://vnx.su
Rear Door Latch(41 352 0)

Removal 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle.
1. Remove the rear door window glass.

Installation).
2. Disconnect the door latch electrical
connector.
VUE0026949
5. Remove the exterior rear door handle gasket.
E124245
3. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover

retaining screw and the exterior rear door
handle cover.
VUE0026950
6. Remove the exterior rear door handle

reinforcement plate retaining nut.
VUE0026948
VUE0026987
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225640en
http://vnx.su
7. Detach the rear door latch connecting rod. 10. Remove the rear door latch and rear door
handle from the rear door inner panel.
E66794
E67096
8. Push the exterior rear door handle

reinforcement plate into the door by Installation
releasing the clips.
2. Install the rear door window glass.
Installation).
VUE0031460
9. Remove the door latch retaining screws.
VUE0026947
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225640en
http://vnx.su
501-16-1 Wipers and Washers 501-16-1
.
SECTION 501-16 Wipers and Washers
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-16-2

Wipers and Washers.......................................................................................................... 501-16-3
Windshield wash/wipe system............................................................................................ 501-16-3
Rear window wash/wipe system......................................................................................... 501-16-3

Wipers and Washers.......................................................................................................... 501-16-4
Inspection and Checking.................................................................................................... 501-16-4
Symptom Chart................................................................................................................... 501-16-4
System Check.................................................................................................................... 501-16-5
Component testing, RHD:................................................................................................... 501-16-30
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment......................................................... (32 591 0) 501-16-33
Wiper Rubber Replacement Procedure.............................................................................. 501-16-33
Do's & Don'ts...................................................................................................................... 501-16-34

Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft........................................................................ (32 554 0) 501-16-35
Windshield Wiper Motor................................................................................. (32 524 0) 501-16-36
Windshield Washer Pump.............................................................................. (32 624 0) 501-16-38
Windshield Washer Reservoir........................................................................ (32 622 0) 501-16-40
Rear Window Wiper Motor............................................................................. (32 530 0) 501-16-42
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Angle of wiper arms to windshield
Description Angle
Front (RHD) + 5°
Rear + 5°
Tightening torques
Description Nm lb.ft lb.in
Nut, windshield wiper arm 18 13 -
Bolts, crossbrace 20 15 -
Suspension strut top nuts 25 18 -
Bolts, windshield wiper motor unit to bulkhead 20 15 -
Bolts, windshield wiper motor 12 9 -
Nuts, windshield wiper linkage 20 15 -
Nut, rear wiper arm 15 11 -
Bolts, rear wiper motor 7 - 62
Specification
Description Finis Code Specification
Washer fluid - WSD-M8B16-AA
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225664en
http://vnx.su
Wipers and Washers

Windshield wash/wipe system If the switch for the rear window washer is pressed,
then washer fluid is sprayed onto the rear window,
The windshield wash/wipe system will only operate and the wiper operates continuously. When the
if the ignition switch is in ON position. switch is released the rear window wiper performs
another 2-3 wipes.
Four wash functions are available: "Off", "Single
wipe", "Normal Speed", "High Speed" and
"Intermittent".
When the intermittent wipe mode is switched on
the windshield wipers operate at normal speed with
the following wiper delays:
• Wiper delay 1: 1 second
• Wiper delay 2: 3.5 seconds
• Wiper delay 3: 6 seconds
• Wiper delay 4: 9,5 seconds
• Wiper delay 5: 15.5 seconds
• Wiper delay 6: 22 seconds
NOTE: In the event of a failure, or if the control
resistor is not connected the default time for the
wiper delay is 8 seconds.
When the windshield washer switch is operated
washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield. After
a short delay designed to protect the wiper blades
the wipers perform 2 or 3 wipes at low speed.
If, when the windshield washer switch is activated,
the windshield wipers are switched off, then a
single wipe is performed 4 seconds after the wipers
have returned to the home position after performing
the 2 or 3 wipes.
If, when the windshield washer switch is activated,
the wipers are in intermittent mode, and if the
selected wiper delay time is longer than 6 seconds,
then a single wipe is performed 6 seconds after
the wipers have returned to the home position after
performing the 2 or 3 wipes. If the selected delay
time is less than 6 seconds then no post wipe is
required.
The post wipe function on the windshield ensures
that any water remaining on the windshield after
washing is wiped away. It is only required if the
wipers are switched off or they are set to
intermittent mode.
Rear window wash/wipe system

The rear window wash/wipe system will only
operate if the ignition switch is in the position "II".
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225681en
http://vnx.su
Wipers and Washers

Special Tool(s)
Terminal Probe Kit • Wiper blade(s) • Fuse(s)
29-011 A • Rotating shaft – • Connectors
wiper arm • Wiring harness
• Washer reservoir • Washer pump
• Hose(s) • Front window wiper
29011A
• Nozzles motor
• Front Wiper Module
• BFC
Inspection and Checking
3. Resolve any obvious causes or concerns found
1. Verify the customer concern. during the visual inspection before carrying out
2. Visually check for any obvious mechanical or any further tests.
electrical damage. 4. If the concern is not visually evident, refer to the
Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart

• Wipers inoperative • Fuse • GO to Pinpoint Test A.
• Circuit(s)
• Wash/wipe system switch
• Windshield wiper motor
• BFC
• Central junction box (CJB)
• Rear wiper • GO to Pinpoint Test G6.
• Brief wipe is inoperative (slow • Wash/wipe switch • RENEW the wash/wipe switch.
wipe OK) CHECK the operation of the
system.
• Wipers permanently switched • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test B.
on • Wash/wipe system switch
• BFC
• Slow/fast wipe not working • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test C.
• Intermittent wipe mode of • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test D.
windshield wiper inoperative • Wash/wipe switch
(fast/slow wipe OK) • BFC
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
• Wash/wipe function inoperative • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test E.
• BFC
• Windshield wiper do not return • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test G.
to park position after switching • Wash/wipe system switch
off • Windshield wiper motor
• BFC
• Washer pump motor inoper- • Circuit(s) • GO to Pinpoint Test F.
ative • Washer pump motor
System Check
NOTE: Use a digital multimeter for all electrical
measurements.
PINPOINT TEST A : WIPERS INOPERATIVE
A1: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION
2 SWITCH ON front wiper.
3 SWITCH ON rear window wiper.
• Are both wipers inoperative?
ൺ Yes
Front wiper inoperative. GO to A2.
Rear wiper inoperative. GO to G6.
A2: CHECK THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO FUSE F46 (20A) (CJB) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Connect Fuse F46 (20 A) (CJB), pin 2.
4 Measure the voltage between fuse F46 (20 A)
(CJB), circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and ground.
• Is battery voltage measured?
V
ൺ Yes
GO to A3.
ൺ No
LOCATE and REPAIR the circuit CDC21
(GY/BN) using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK
the operation of the system.
E67858
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
A3: CHECK THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect wash/wipe system switch from
connector C2RW08.
4 Measure voltage between wash/wipe switch,
connector C2RW08, pin 6, circuit CBP46
(WH/BU), wiring harness side and ground.
• Does the meter display battery voltage?
ൺ Yes
RENEW the wash/wipe system switch.
ൺ No
VFE0022258 CBP46 (WH/BU) between fuse F46 (CJB),
splice S2BP46 and the wash/wipe system
switch using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the
A4: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH
connector C2RW08.
3 CHECK the wash/wipe system switch according
to the component check at the end of this
section.
– Perform the check on the rear wiper circuit at
the wash/wipe system switch.
• Is the wash/wipe system switch OK?
ൺ Yes
Vehicle with BFC
GO to A5.
Vehicle without BFC
GO to A6.
ൺ No
A5: CHECK VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect BFC from connector C2AM02-B.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the voltage between the BFC,
connector C2AM02-B, pin 17, circuit CBP46
(WH/BU), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A8.
ൺ No
CBP46 (WH/BU) between the wash/wipe
E122938
system switch, Splice S2BP46 and BFC using
of the system.
A6: CHECK VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO FRONT WIPER MODULE (FWM) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
E122940
2 Disconnect Front Wiper Module (FWM) from

connector C2RW03.
4 Measure the voltage between the Front Wiper
Module (FWM), connector C2RW03, pin 6,
circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to A7.
ൺ No
CBP46 (WH/BU) between the wash/wipe
system switch, Splice S2BP46 and Front
Wiper Module (FWM) using the Wiring
system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
A7: CHECK GROUND CONNECTION OF FRONT WIPER MODULE (FWM) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
connector C2RW03.
3 Measure the resistance between the Front Wiper
Module (FWM) connector C2RW03, pin 4, circuit
GD216 (BK/VT), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the Front Wiper Module (FWM).
ൺ No
E122987
GD216 (BK/VT) between the Front Wiper
Module (FWM) and ground G14 using the
Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the operation of the
system.
A8: CHECK GROUND CONNECTION OF BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect BFC.
connector C2AM02-C, pin 8, circuit GD357 (BK),
wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
the system.
ൺ No
E122988
GD357 (BK) between the BFC and ground
G13 using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK the
A9: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH
connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
section.
– Perform the check on the fast and slow front
wipe circuit at the wash/wipe system switch.
• Is the wash/wipe switch OK?
ൺ Yes
GO to A10.
ൺ No
A10: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Disconnect front wiper motor from connector
C1RW01.
2 Measure the resistance between the front wiper
motor, connector C1RW01, pin 5, circuit GD123
(BK/GY), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the wiper motor. CHECK the opera-
tion of the system.
ൺ No
E124045
GD123 (BK/GY) between the wiper motor and
ground G5 using the wiring diagrams. CHECK
PINPOINT TEST B : WIPERS PERMANENTLY SWITCHED ON

B1: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION
connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 CHECK the front and rear wipers.
• Does the rear window wiper motor run
continuously?
ൺ Yes
GO to G11.
ൺ No
- The front wiper motor is running continually
at the slow wipe speed: GO to B2.
- The front wiper motor is running continually
at the fast wipe speed: GO to B11.
- No malfunction detected: The front wiper
motor is running continuously at fast wipe
speed: RENEW the wash/wipe switch. CHECK
- No malfunction detected: The front wiper
motor is running continually in intermittent wipe
mode: GO to B6.
B2: CHECK THE FRONT WIPER MOTOR
2 Disconnect windshield wiper motor from
connector C1RW01.
4 Measure the voltage between front wiper motor
connector C1RW01, pin 1, circuit CRW10
(BU/GN), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
LOCATE and RECTIFY the short to battery
voltage in the circuit CRW10 (BU/GN) between
the wash/wipe system switch and wiper motor
E122984 ation of the system.
ൺ No
RENEW the windshield wiper motor. CHECK
B3: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH.
2 Disconnect wash/wipe system switch.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the voltage between the wash/wipe
system switch, connector C2RW08, pin 7, circuit
CRW01 (WH), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
Vehicles with BFC
GO to B6.
Vehicles without BFC
GO to B5.
VFE0022280 ൺ No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE BFC/FRONT WIPER MODULE AND WASH/WIPE
SYSTEM SWITCH
2 Disconnect wash/wipe system switch and
BFC/Front Wiper Module.
E124690
3 Measure the resistance between the wash/wipe

system switch connector C2RW08, pin 7 circuit
CRW01 (WH) and
– C2AM02-B, pin 8, circuit CRW01 (WH) for
vehicles with BFC harness side.
– C2RW03, pin 2, circuit CRW01 (WH) for
vehicles with Front Wiper Module (FWM)
harness side.
• Is the resistance less than 2 ohms registered?
E124689
ൺ Yes
RENEW wash/wipe system switch. CHECK
ൺ No
between the wash/wipe system switch and
BFC using the wiring diagrams. CHECK the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
B5: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE FRONT WIPER
MODULE (FWM) FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
connector C2RW03.
ൺ Yes
voltage in the circuit CRW01 (WH) between
the wash/wipe system switch and Front Wiper
Module (FWM) using the Wiring Diagrams.
VFE0022280
ൺ No
B6: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW01 (WH) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE BFC FOR
SHORT CIRCUIT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
2 Disconnect BFC from connector C2AM02-B.
ൺ Yes
voltage in the circuit CRW01 (WH) between
the wash/wipe system switch and BFC using
VFE0022280
of the system.
ൺ No
the system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
B7: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH.
switch, connector C2RW08, pin 10, circuit
CRW17 (GN/VT), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
Vehicles with BFC
GO to B10.
VFE0028504
GO to B9.
ൺ No
RENEW the wash/wipe switch. CHECK the
B8: CHECK THE CONTINUITY BETWEEN WASHER WIPE SWITCH AND BFC/FRONT WIPER
MODULE (FWM) CIRCUIT
E124692
1 Measure the resistance between the wash/wipe

system switch connector C2RW08, pin 10,
circuit CRW17 (GN/VT) and
– C2AM02-A, pin 7, circuit CRW17 (GN/VT) for
vehicles with BFC harness side.
– C2RW03, pin 8, circuit CRW17 (GN/VT) for
harness side.
• Is the resistance less than 2 ohms registered?
E124691
ൺ Yes
RENEW the washer wipe switch. CHECK the
ൺ No
LOCATE and RECTIFY the break in the
circuit. CHECK the operation of the system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
B9: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW17 (GN/VT) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE FRONT
WIPER MODULE (FWM) FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
connector C2RW03.
ground.
ൺ Yes
voltage in the circuit CRW17 (GN/VT) between
the wash/wipe system switch and Front Wiper
VFE0028504
ൺ No
B10: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW17 (GN/VT) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE BFC FOR
SHORT CIRCUIT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
2 Disconnect BFC from connector C2AM02-A.
ground.
ൺ Yes
voltage in the circuit CRW17 (GN/VT) between
the wash/wipe system switch, Splice S2RW17
VFE0028504
and BFC using the Wiring Diagrams. CHECK
ൺ No
the system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
B11: NARROW DOWN THE FAULT CONDITION
1 Measure the voltage between the front wiper
motor, connector C1RW01, pin 2, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to B12.
ൺ No
RENEW the front wiper motor. CHECK the
E122946
B12: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH

connector C2RW08.
section.
– Perform the check on the fast front wipe speed
circuit at the wash/wipe system switch.
ൺ Yes
LOCATE and RECTIFY the break in circuit
CRW08 (VT/OG) between the wash/wipe
system switch and the front wiper motor using
of the system.
ൺ No
B13: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW08 (VT/OG) BETWEEN WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE FRONT WIPER
MOTOR FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO BATTERY VOLTAGE
1 Measure the voltage between wiper switch
connector C2RW08. pin 8, circuit CRW08
(VT/OG) wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
voltage in the circuit.
ൺ No
RENEW wash/wipe switch. CHECK the oper-
E124693
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
PINPOINT TEST C : SLOW/FAST WIPE NOT WORKING.
C1: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION
2 SWITCH ON slow and fast wipe speed in
succession.
3 CHECK front wipers.
• Do the wipers operate at fast speed?
ൺ Yes
Slow wipe speed inoperative: GO to C4.
ൺ No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (FAST WIPE SPEED)
connector C1RW01.
4 SWITCH ON fast wipe speed.
5 Measure the voltage between:
– front wiper motor, connector C1RW01, pin 2,
circuit CRW08 (VT/OG), wiring harness side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the windshield wiper motor. CHECK
ൺ No
E122946
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH

connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
section.
– Perform the check on the fast front wipe speed
circuit at the wash/wipe system switch.
ൺ Yes
CRW08 (VT/OG) between the wash/wipe
of the system.
ൺ No
C4: CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (SLOW WIPE SPEED)
connector C1RW01.
4 SWITCH ON slow wipe speed.
circuit CRW10 (BU/GN), wiring harness side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the front wiper motor. CHECK the
ൺ No
E122984
GO to C5.
C5: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH

connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
section.
– Perform the check on the slow front wipe
speed circuit at the wash/wipe system switch.
ൺ Yes
CRW10 (BU/GN) between the wash/wipe
of the system.
ൺ No
PINPOINT TEST D : INTERMITTENT WIPE MODE OF FRONT WIPER INOPERATIVE, VEHICLES

WITHOUT RAIN SENSOR (FAST/SLOW WIPE OK)
D1: NARROW DOWN THE POSSIBLE CAUSES FOR THE FAULT
2 SWITCH slow wipe ON and OFF.
• Do the wipers return to the park position after
switching them off?
ൺ Yes
GO to D2.
ൺ No
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
D2: NARROW DOWN THE FAULT CONDITION
1 SWITCH ON intermittent mode at the wash/wipe
system switch.
2 Adjust the wipe cycle at the wash/wipe system
switch.
• Is intermittent mode of front wipers inoperative?
ൺ Yes
GO to D3.
ൺ No
Verify the customer concern.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
D3: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH.
connector C2RW08.
section.
– Perform the check on the intermittent front
wipe circuit at the wash/wipe system switch.
• Is the wash/wipe switch OK?
ൺ Yes
Vehicles with BFC
-GO to D5.
GO to D4.
ൺ No
RENEW the wash/wipe switch. CHECK the
D4: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW17 (GN/VT) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE FRONT
WIPER MODULE (FWM) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
connector C2RW03.
2 Connect Wash/wipe system switch to connector
C2RW08.
4 SWITCH ON intermittent wiping.
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D6.
ൺ No
E124694
CRW17 (GN/VT) between the wash/wipe
system switch and Front Wiper Module (FWM)
D5: CHECK CIRCUIT CRW17 (GN/VT) BETWEEN THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH AND THE BFC FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
1 Connect Wash/wipe system switch to connector
C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
3 SWITCH ON intermittent wiping.
ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D7.
ൺ No
E124695
CRW17 (GN/VT) between the wash/wipe
system switch, Splice S2RW17 and BFC using
of the system.
D6: CHECK GROUND CONNECTION OF FRONT WIPER MODULE (FWM) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1 SWITCH OFF the front wiper.
3 Measure the resistance between the Front Wiper
Module (FWM):
– Connector C2RW03, pin 4, circuit GD216
(BK/VT), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
E122987
GD216 (BK/VT), ground G14 between the
Front Wiper Module (FWM) and ground
connection using the Wiring Diagrams.
D7: CHECK VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect BFC from connector C2AM02-A.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the voltage between the BFC:
– connector C2AM02-A, pin 33, circuit CBP38
(GY/BU), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to D8.
ൺ No
CBP38 (GY/BU) between the wash/wipe
E122953
system switch and the BFC using the Wiring
system.
D8: CHECK GROUND CONNECTION OF BFC FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Measure the resistance between the BFC,
– Connector C2AM02-C, pin 8, circuit GD357
(BK), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
the system.
ൺ No
E122943
GD357 (BK), ground G13 between the BFC
PINPOINT TEST E : WASH/WIPE FUNCTION INOPERATIVE

E1: DETERMINE THE FAULT CONDITION
2 SWITCH ON the front and rear wash/wipe
functions in turn.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
3 CHECK the front and rear wash/wipe functions.
• Is the wash/wipe function inoperative at the
front ?
ൺ Yes
Vehicles with and without BFC
GO to E3.
ൺ No
- Windshield wipe function inoperative (washer
OK):
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE FRONT WIPER SWITCH
2 Disconnect Front wiper switch from connector
C2RW08.
4 Measure the voltage between the Front wiper
CRW07 (GY/BN), wiring harness side and
ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the Front wiper switch. CHECK the
ൺ No
E124696
Vehicles without BFC : LOCATE and
RECTIFY the break in the circuit CRW07
(GY/BN) between the wash/wipe system
switch, splice S2RW07 and Front Wiper
Vehicles with BFC : LOCATE and RECTIFY
the break in the circuit CRW07 (GY/BN)
between the wash/wipe system switch, Splice
S2RW07 and BFC using the Wiring Diagrams.
E3: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE WASH/WIPE SYSTEM SWITCH FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
3 Measure resistance between wash/wipe switch,
connector C2RW08, pin 3, circuit GD215
(BK/GY), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
VFE0025221 LOCATE and RECTIFY the break in the circuit
GD215 (BK/GY) between the wash/wipe
system switch, ground G12 and splice S2D215
PINPOINT TEST F : WASHER PUMP MOTOR INOPERATIVE

F1: CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE WASHER PUMP MOTOR
NOTE: Wash/wipe system switch in the OFF position

2 Disconnect washer pump motor at front/rear
from connector C1RW14.
4 Measure the voltage between the washer pump
(GY/BN), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to F2.
ൺ No
CRW07 (GY/BN) between the wash/wipe
VFE0008568 system switch and washer pump motor using
of the system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
F2: CHECK THE VOLTAGE AT THE WASHER PUMP MOTOR
1 Measure the voltage between the washer pump
(GY/OG), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
RENEW the washer pump motor. CHECK the
ൺ No
VFE0015948 CRW12 (GY/OG) between the wash/wipe
system switch and washer pump motor using
of the system.
PINPOINT TEST G : WINDSHIELD WIPERS DO NOT RETURN TO PARK POSITION AFTER

SWITCHING OFF
G1: DETERMINE THE CAUSE OF THE FAULT
2 SWITCH the front and rear wipers ON/OFF in
turn.
3 CHECK the front and rear wipers.
• Does the windscreen wiper return to the park
position?
ൺ Yes
Rear window wiper not returning to the initial
position: GO to G6.
ൺ No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
connector C1RW01.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), wiring harness side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to G3.
ൺ No
E122999
CBP46 (WH/BU) between splice S2BP46 and
wiper motor using the wiring diagrams.
G3: CHECK THE WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
1 Check the wiper motor according to the
component check at the end of this section.
• Is the wiper motor OK?
ൺ Yes
GO to G4.
ൺ No
tion of the system.
G4: CHECK THE WASH/WIPE SWITCH
2 Connect Front wiper motor to connector
C1RW01.
4 SWITCH ON slow wipe speed.
6 Wipers should NOT be in the parked position.
connector C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
VFE0022280 GO to G5.
G5: MEASURE THE CONTINUITY BETWEEN WIPER MOTOR AND FRONT WIPER MODULE
(FWM)/BFC CIRCUIT CRW09 (BN/BU)
NOTE: Wiper is still NOT in the park position

2 Disconnect Body Function Controller/Front
Wiper Module (FWM) connector C2AM02-
B/C2RW03.
3 Disconnect wiper motor connector C1RW01.
E124697
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between the wiper motor
connector C1RW01, pin 4, circuit CRW09
(BN/BU) and
– C2AM02-B, pin 16, circuit CRW09 (BN/BU)
for vehicles with BFC harness side and
ground.
– C2RW03, pin 2, circuit CRW09 (BN/BU) for
E124698
ൺ Yes
Renew the Front Wiper Module (FWM)/BFC.
check the operation of the system.
ൺ No
CRW09 (BN/BU) between the Front Wiper
Module (FWM)/BFC and the front wiper motor
G6: CHECK THE VOLTAGE SUPPLY TO FUSE F47 (10A) (CJB) FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Measure the voltage between fuse F47 (10 A)
(CJB), pin 2, circuit CBP47 (GN/BU) and ground.
V
ൺ Yes
GO to G7.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CDC21 (GY/BN) using the
wiring diagram. If necessary INSTALL A NEW
CJB. CHECK the operation of the system.
E67858
G7: CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR

2 Disconnect rear window wiper motor from
connector C4RW02.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
– Rear wiper motor, connector C4RW02, pin 2,
circuit CBP47 (GN/BU), wiring harness side
and ground.
ൺ Yes
GO to G8.
ൺ No
E124046
CBP47 (GN/BU) between fuse F47 and the
rear wiper motor using the Wiring Diagrams.
G8: CHECK THE GROUND CONNECTION OF THE REAR WIPER MOTOR FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
2 Measure the resistance between the rear wiper
motor, connector C4RW02, pin 3, circuit GD326
(BK/WH), wiring harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
tion of the system.
ൺ No
E124047
GD326 (BK/WH) between the wiper motor,
ground G17 and splice S4D326-B using the
wiring diagrams. CHECK the operation of the
system.
G9: CHECK FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN THE REAR WIPER SWITCH AND REAR WIPER MOTOR
CIRCUIT
2 Disconnect Wiper switch connector C2RW08.
3 Disconnect rear wiper switch connector
C4RW02.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between the wiper
washer switch connector C2RW08, pin 5, circuit
CRW13 (GN) harness side and rear wiper motor
connector C4RW02, pin 1, circuit CRW13 (GN).
• Is a resistance of less than 2 ohms?
ൺ Yes
GO to G10.
ൺ No
E124048
between the wiper washer switch, circuit
CRW13 (GN) and the rear wiper motor circuit
CRW13 (GN) using the Wiring Diagrams.
G10: CHECK VOLTAGE AT THE REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
connector C4RW02.
4 Switch ON the rear wiper.
5 Measure the volatge between the rear window
wiper motor, connector C4RW02, pin 1, circuit
CRW13 (GN), wiring harness side and ground.
• Is the battery voltage measured?
ൺ Yes
RENEW the rear wiper motor. CHECK the
ൺ No
LOCATE and RECTIFY the break in the
E124699
circuit.
G11: REAR WIPER MOTOR RUNNING CONTINOUSLY

connector C4RW02.
3 Disconnect wiper washer switch connector
C2RW08.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
5 Measure the voltage between the rear wiper
motor connector C4RW02, pin 1, circuit CRW13
(GN), wiring harness side and ground.
• Is the battery voltage measured?
ൺ Yes
CRW13 (GN) between wiper washer switch
and wiper motor.
ൺ No
E124699
RENEW the wiper washer switch. CHECK the
Component testing, RHD: • If yes then the front wiper motor is OK.
• If not, RENEW the front wiper motor.
Front wiper motor
1. CHECK the front wiper motor in the park

position:
• Measure the resistance at the front wiper
motor, between pin 3 and pin 4.
• Is a resistance of less than 2 ohms
registered?
• If yes, go to 2.
• If not, RENEW the front wiper motor.
VFE0028561
Wash/wipe switch
Pin assignment:
VFE0033942 1 2 3 4 5
2. CHECK the front wiper motor outside the park 6 7 8 9 10

position:
1. Measure the resistance at the front wiper
motor, between pin 2 and pin 3.
2. Is a resistance of less than 2 ohms VFE55117
registered?
Circuit to test Connect a digital Set the switch to the Switch is OK when the
multimeter with the following position following test readings
following connections are seen
Variable wipe times 1 and 10 1 0.5 - 4 kOhm
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
2 4 -14 kOhm
3 14 -24 kOhm
4 24 -34 kOhm
5 34 -43 kOhm
6 43 -57 kOhm
Flick wipe, front wiper 6 and 9 Flick wipe Circuit closed
Off Circuit open
Intermittent Circuit open
Slow Circuit closed
Fast Circuit open
Intermittent, front wiper 6 and 10 Flick wipe Circuit open
Off Circuit open
Intermittent Circuit closed
Slow Circuit open
Fast Circuit open
7 and 9 Flick wipe Circuit open
Off Circuit closed
Intermittent Circuit closed
Slow Circuit open
Fast Circuit open
Slow wipe, front wiper 6 and 9 Flick wipe Circuit closed
Off Circuit open
Slow Circuit closed
Fast Circuit open
Fast wipe, front wiper 6 and 8 Flick wipe Circuit open
Off Circuit open
Slow Circuit open
Fast Circuit closed
Front washer system 6 and 2 Off Circuit closed
Front washer system on Circuit open
2 and 3 Off Circuit open
Front washer system on Circuit closed
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
Rear window washer 6 and 5 Off Circuit open
Rear wiper on Circuit closed
Rear washer system on Circuit closed
Rear wiper on Circuit open
Rear wiper 5 and 3 Off Circuit closed
Rear wiper on Circuit open
Rear washer system on Circuit open
4 and 6 Off Circuit closed
Rear washer system on Circuit open
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225683en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment(32 591 0)

Special Tool(s) Using an open-ended wrench on the special
tool, adjust the wiper arm. For additional
Aligner, Wiper Arm
information, refer to Specifications.
501-027 (32-006)
ES32006
General Equipment
Aero-Wiper Measuring and Adjusting Tools AWPE
02 (Order No. 511 5124 001 00)
Vehicles without beam blade wipers E108506
1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the wiper motor
is in the park position. 5. Remove the special tool.
Remove the wiper blade. 6. Install the wiper blade.
2. Insert the wiper arm in the special tool and

place the special tool on the windshield. Wiper Rubber Replacement Procedure
3. NOTE: All three support points of the special Removal
tool must be in contact with the glass. 1. Remove the wiper blade from Wiper Arm.
NOTE: The angle of the wiper on the scale must 2. Hold the wiper blade firmly on your left hand
point from the zero center line to the center of the closer to the notch side as shown in the
windshield/rear window. Ignore the sign (+/-) on picture.
the alignment tool.
Using the special tool, read off the angle
between the wiper arm and the windshield.
1. Center of windshield
501-027
1
E122491
3. Use a nose plier to press and pull out the old

wiper refill from wiper blade. While removing
E56969 the blade refill ensure that the metallic
holding claws are not damaged.
4. NOTE: Lift the special tool away from the
glass when correcting the angle, in order to
prevent damage.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225685en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
4. Pull out the entire rubber element with steel NOTE: Starting from inserting the refill into first
strips from wiper blade. claw, the entire inserting operation should
experience free sliding movement of rubber
element on wiper blade.
Hold the wiper blade assembly firmly on your
left hand and push the refill with metal strip.
Till the notch of the steel strip is locked in
between the claws the refill should be
pushed.
E122493
5. After removal of the steel strips, inspect

them for any damage or bend. If found to be
damaged do not reuse them.
6. Check the condition of metallic claws present
in the wiper blade.
E122495
7. Carefully dispose the removed rubber
elements from wiper blade.
Do's & Don'ts
Installation
Do's
8. Hold the wiper blade firmly on your left hand.
Hold the Non-notch side of the new refill with 1. Always’s use Ford's genuine screen wash
metal strips on your other hand. concentrate to clean your vehicles
windscreen.
9. Insert the non-notch side of the wiper refill
in between the metallic claws. 2. Use washer fluid to wash the windscreen
before every first operation of wipers.
3. Clean the wiper rubber lip with pure water
and lint free cloth often.
Don'ts
4. Never attempt to clean your windscreen
using any other cleanser which is not
recommended by Ford.
5. Never operate wipers without washer
solution spray.
E122494
6. Never attempt to lift the passenger’s side
wiper blade standing from driver side and
vice versa.
10. Insert the refill in all the claws one by one
up to the last claw.
11. Stop after inserting the refill into the last
claw of the wiper blade. Refill should be
seated perfectly in between the metallic
claws.
12. NOTE: Gently try to pull the rubber refill.
The notch present in the steel strip should
immediately stop the pulling of rubber refill.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225685en
http://vnx.su
Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft(32 554 0)

Removal • Remove the upper rubber bushes.
1. Remove windshield wiper motor.

Windshield Wiper Motor (501-16 Wipers x2
and Washers, Removal and Installation).
2. Remove the bolt.
E119763
Installation
1. Install the components in the reverse order.
E119761
3. Unscrew and remove the nuts from the

windshield wiper linkage.
x2
E119762
4. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm

bracket.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225687en
http://vnx.su
Windshield Wiper Motor(32 524 0)

Removal 1. Remove the clips on both sides.
1. Remove the hood.

and Installation).
2. Remove the wiper arm covers on both sides.
x2
E119637
6.
CAUTION: Do not raise the vehicle.
Remove the suspension strut nuts.
1. Discard the retaining nuts.
E119634
3. Remove the wiper arm nuts on both sides.
x3
E119764
7. Remove the bolts from the bracket for the

windshield wiper motor assembly.
E119635
4. Remove the wiper arms both sides.
x3
E119765
E119636
5. Remove the cowl panel grill.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225695en
http://vnx.su
8. Detach the windshield wiper motor assembly. 12. Detach the windshield wiper motor nut.
E119767 E119769
9. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor 13. Remove the windshield wiper motor by
electrical connector. removing the screws.
x3
E119766 E119770
10. Remove the mounting arm and pivot shaft. Installation

Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft (501-16 1.
CAUTION: Move the windshield wiper
Wipers and Washers, Removal and motor to park position before installing the
Installation). wiper arms.
11. Detach the windshield wiper linkage from NOTE: Install new suspension strut nuts.
the windshield wiper motor lever arm.
Install the components in the reverse order.
E119768
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225695en
http://vnx.su
Windshield Washer Pump(32 624 0)

Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to: Jacking
(100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description
and Operation)
/ Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting,
Description and Operation).
2. Remove the wheels.
x2
and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal E119642
and Installation).
4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump
3. Remove the fender splash shield. connector.
E119640 E119771
5. Disconnect the hoses from the windshield

washer fluid reservoir.
x3
E119641
E119772
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225699en
http://vnx.su
6. Remove the windshield washer pump.
E119773
Installation
1. NOTE: Coat the rubber seal on the
windshield washer pump with soap prior to
installation.
Install the components in reverse order.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225699en
http://vnx.su
Windshield Washer Reservoir(32 622 0)

Removal 5. Remove the fender splash shield.
1. Remove the upper bolt on the windshield

E119640
E119774
2. Remove the centre bolt on the windshield

washer fluid reservoir. x3
E119641
E119775
3. Raise and support the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: Jacking
(100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description
and Operation) x2
/ Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting,
E119642
Description and Operation).
4. Remove the wheels.
and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal
and Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225707en
http://vnx.su
6. Disconnect the windshield washer pump
connector.
E119771
7. Disconnect the hoses from the windshield

E119772
8. Remove the washer reservoir.

Remove the windshield washer fluid washer
bolt.
E119776
Installation
1. Install the components in reverse order.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225707en
http://vnx.su
Rear Window Wiper Motor(32 530 0)

Removal 4. Remove the rear wiper arm rubber bush.
1.
CAUTION: Check that the wiper motor is
in the parked position.
Remove the rear wiper arm cover.
E119780
5. Remove the tailgate trim panel.

1. Unscrew the bolts.
E119777 2. Disengage the clips.
2. Remove the rear wiper arm nut.

1 1
2 2 2 1
2
VFE0026389
E119778 6. Disconnect the rear wiper motor electrical

connector.
3. Remove the rear wiper arm.
E119781
E119779
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225709en
http://vnx.su
7. Remove the rear wiper motor.
7 Nm
VFE0026391
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Move the wiper motor to the
parked position before installing the wiper
arm.
Install the components in reverse order.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225709en
http://vnx.su
501-19-1 Bumpers 501-19-1
.
SECTION 501-19 Bumpers
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-19-2

Front Bumper.................................................................................................. (43 423 0) 501-19-3
Front Bumper Cover....................................................................................... (43 427 0) 501-19-4
Rear Bumper Cover........................................................................................ (43 447 0) 501-19-6
http://vnx.su
501-19-2 Bumpers 501-19-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Front bumper retaining bolts 25 18 -
Front bumper side screws securing 3 - -
Front bumper centre screws securing 11 - -
Radiator grille opening panel reinforcement 10 7 -
retaining bolts
Fender splash shield retaining screws 5 - -
Bumper cover to fender retaining screws 5 - -
Radiator support panel retaining bolts 20 15 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225711en
http://vnx.su
501-19-3 Bumpers 501-19-3
Front Bumper(43 423 0)

General Equipment • Remove the radiator support panel retaining
bolts on both sides.
Transmission jack
Wooden block
Removal
20 Nm
and Installation).
2. Remove the headlight assy.
E57352
Headlamp Assembly (417-01 Exterior
Lighting, Removal and Installation). 6. Remove the bumper.
3. Using a suitable transmission jack and
wooden block, support the radiator.
25 Nm
TIE0026868
TIE0031297 Installation
4. Detach the bumper from the radiator grille
opening panel reinforcement.
10 Nm
TIE0026880
5. Remove the radiator support panel (if

equipped).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225715en
http://vnx.su
501-19-4 Bumpers 501-19-4
Front Bumper Cover(43 427 0)

Removal 4. Remove the front bumper bottom bolts.
All vehicles
1. Raise and support the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to: (100-02 Jacking and
Lifting)
Jacking (Description and Operation),
Lifting (Description and Operation).
2. Remove the clip on both sides.
x3
E119787
5. Detach the fender splash shield from the

bumper cover on both sides.
E119786
3. Remove the front bumper center bolt.
TIE0031291
6. Remove the front bumper fender bolts on

both sides.
x4
E119785
E119788
7. Remove both the fog lamps (if equipped).

Fog Lamp (417-01 Exterior Lighting,
Removal and Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225719en
http://vnx.su
501-19-5 Bumpers 501-19-5
All vehicles
8. NOTE: Vehicle without front fog lamps view
shown.
Remove the bumper cover.
E119789
Installation
All vehicles
All vehicles
2. Lower the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225719en
http://vnx.su
501-19-6 Bumpers 501-19-6
Rear Bumper Cover(43 447 0)

Removal • Remove the retaining screw on both sides.
All vehicles
1. Raise and support the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to: (100-02 Jacking and
Lifting)
Jacking (Description and Operation),
Lifting (Description and Operation).
2. Remove the screws on both sides of the
bumper.
TIE0031320
5. Remove the pushpin retainers.
E119782
x2
3. Detach the bumper cover from the fender
splash shield on both sides.
E119783
All vehicles
6. Remove the bumper cover.
TIE0031321
4. Detach the bumper cover from the fender.
E119784
Installation
All vehicles
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225713en
http://vnx.su
501-19-7 Bumpers 501-19-7
All vehicles
2. Lower the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225713en
http://vnx.su
501-20A-1 Safety Belt System 501-20A-1
.
SECTION 501-20A Safety Belt System
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-20A-2

Safety Belt System............................................................................................................. 501-20A-3
Principles of Operation ...................................................................................................... 501-20A-3
Inspection and Verification ................................................................................................. 501-20A-3
Component Test ................................................................................................................ 501-20A-3

Front Safety Belt Retractor............................................................................. (40 222 0) 501-20A-5
Rear Safety Belt Retractor — 5-Door............................................................. (40 248 0) 501-20A-7
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Safety belt upper anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Safety belt lower anchor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Front safety belt retractor retaining bolts 35 26 -
Safety belt buckle retaining bolt 47 35 -
Safety belt buckle and pretensioner retaining bolt 47 35 -
Rear safety belt buckle retaining bolts 55 41 -
Rear seat backrest latch bracket retaining nuts 23 17 -
Rear safety belt retractor retaining bolts 40 30 -
Rear center safety belt retaining nuts 47 35 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225721en
http://vnx.su
Safety Belt System

Principles of Operation seat backrest, depending on which safety
belt is being tested. Failure to follow these
WARNING: All safety belt components instructions may result in personal injury.
including retractors, buckles, front safety • Select for this test a quiet or private stretch of
belt buckle support assemblies, child road. Make sure that the road is clear and that
safety seat leather brackets and attaching full visibility is maintained at all times.
hardware in use during a collision must be • Both driver and passenger should adopt a
removed and new components must be normal, comfortable seating position. Both
installed. New safety belt components occupants should wear the safety belts and the
should also to be installed where safety safety belt webbing must be correctly adjusted,
belts not in use during a collision, are with no slack.
inspected and found to be damaged or
operate incorrectly. Failure to follow these • Proceed at a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Do not
instructions may result in personal injury. exceed 10 km/h (6 mph) for this test.
• Apply the foot brake sharply to stop the vehicle.
Rear seat safety belt are equipped with a If the vehicle motion sensitive lock mechanism
conventional retractor. is operating correctly, the safety belt webbing
will lock and restrain the wearer.
Inspection and Verification • Conduct the test twice in each front and rear
passenger seat position.
1. Verify the customer concern. • Any safety belt retractor which does not restrain
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical the wearer during this test must not be reused.
and electrical damage. A new safety belt must be installed.
Mechanical Test Method 2 (turning circle)
• Safety belt retractor
This method requires a flat open area of private
• Safety belt buckle road, sufficient for the vehicle to be driven in a
continuous circle on full steering lock.
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported • The driver should wear the safety belt provided
concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) and the belt webbing must be correctly adjusted,
before proceeding to the next step. with no slack.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the • The passenger should occupy a rear seat with
symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart. the safety belt correctly adjusted, with no slack.
• Start the engine and, with the steering on full
Component Test right-hand lock, drive the vehicle in a continuous
circle at 16 km/h (10mph). Do not exceed 16
km/h (10 mph) for this test.
Test Method 1 (braking) • When the speed is stable, the passenger should
attempt to slowly extract the safety belt webbing
WARNING: It is important that during this from each safety belt retractor in turn. If the
test, the driver and passenger allow the vehicle motion sensitive lock mechanism is
safety belts to provide the restraint and do operating correctly, it will not be possible to
not attempt to anticipate the sudden extract the webbing.
deceleration. The steering wheel should
• Any safety belt retractor from which it is possible
not be used as a brace. However, both
to extract the webbing during this test must not
driver and passenger should prepare
be used. A new safety belt must be installed.
themselves for the possibility that the
safety belt will not lock. The passenger
should hold their hands in front of them,
just clear of the instrument panel or front
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225723en
http://vnx.su
Static Test
With the vehicle stationary and on level ground
take firm hold of the safety belt webbing (on the
tongue side of the upper safety belt anchor) and
pull out quickly. The retractor should lock within
0.25 meter (10 inches), preventing further webbing
payout. Any safety belt retractor from which it is
possible to extract further webbing must not be
used. A new safety belt must be installed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225723en
http://vnx.su
Front Safety Belt Retractor(40 222 0)

Removal • Feed the safety belt webbing through the
B-pillar upper trim panel.
1. Detach the door opening weatherstrips from
the B-pillar.
2
3
1
E124501
TIE0027124 4. Remove the B-pillar lower trim panel.

• Detach the retaining clips.
detaching the safety belt lower anchor from
the floor panel.
Detach the safety belt lower anchor from the
floor panel.
• Remove the retaining bolt and spacer from
the anchor plate.
TIE0027136
40 Nm 5. Remove the front door scuff panel.

• Detach the retaining clips.
TIE0027137
3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim panel.

3. Detach the retaining clips from the B-pillar.
TIE0027564
6.
CAUTION: The bolt securing the safety
belt anchor is held captive by a paper
washer. The bolt, spacer and paper washer
must remain on the safety belt anchor at all
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230300en
http://vnx.su
times when the safety belt is detached or 2. Lift the retractor to detach the locating tang.
removed.
Detach the safety belt upper anchor bolt.
40 Nm 35 Nm
1
E119911
E124502 Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
7. Detach the guide loop from the B-pillar.
Make sure the safety belt retractor
1. Rotate the guide clockwise. locating tang is correctly located.
2. Slide the guide downwards.
The safety belt retractor retaining bolt
must only be used five times, inspect the
markings on the retaining bolt and install a
1 new retaining bolt if necessary.
E0027139
8.
CAUTION: The safety belt retractor
retaining bolt must only be used five times.
NOTE: After removal, stamp the safety belt
retractor retaining bolt with a center punch to
indicate usage.
Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1. Remove the bolt.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230300en
http://vnx.su
Rear Safety Belt Retractor — 5-Door(40 248 0)

Removal
1. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. For additional
information, refer to Section 501-05 [Interior
Trim and Ornamentation].
2.
CAUTION: The bolt securing the safety
belt anchor is held captive by a paper
washer. The bolt, spacer and paper washer
must remain on the safety belt anchor at all
times when the safety belt is detached or
removed.
Detach the safety belt upper anchor from the
D-pillar.
40 Nm
TIE0027145
3. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.

1. Remove the retaining bolt.
2. Lift the retractor to detach the locating tangs.
1 40 Nm
TIE0027144
Installation
1.
CAUTION: Make sure the safety belt
retractor locating tangs are correctly located.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G149924en
http://vnx.su
501-20B-1 Supplemental Restraint System 501-20B-1
.
SECTION 501-20B Supplemental Restraint System
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-20B-2
Special Tool Usage......................................................................................................... 501-20B-2

Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).................................................................. 501-20B-3
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).............................................................................. 501-20B-3

Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).................................................................. 501-20B-6
Diagnosing Customer Concerns Without Hard DTCs........................................................ 501-20B-6
Diagnosing Customer Concerns with Hard DTCs.............................................................. 501-20B-6
Deactivation........................................................................................................................ 501-20B-6
Reactivation........................................................................................................................ 501-20B-7
Glossary............................................................................................................................. 501-20B-7
Principles of Operation....................................................................................................... 501-20B-7
Inspection and Verification.................................................................................................. 501-20B-8
Pinpoint Tests..................................................................................................................... 501-20B-10
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Clockspring Adjustment...................................................................................................... 501-20B-29
Deployed Air Bag Disposal................................................................................................. 501-20B-30
Scrapped Vehicle Undeployed Air Bag Disposal................................................................ 501-20B-31
Unserviceable Air Bag Disposal......................................................................................... 501-20B-33

Air Bag Control Module.................................................................................. (33 650 0) 501-20B-34
Clockspring......................................................................................................................... 501-20B-36
Driver Air Bag Module.................................................................................... (40 700 0) 501-20B-40
Driver Air Bag Module Wiring Harness............................................................................... 501-20B-42
Passenger Air Bag Module............................................................................. (40 701 0) 501-20B-44
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Special Tool Usage
Description Simulator Test and Deployment Lead (Part of Test and
Deployment Lead, Air Bag/Pyrotechnic Safety Belt
[418-S055])
Driver air bag module 501-073A 418-141
Passenger air bag 501-073A 418-141
module
Simulator, Occupant 501-092
Restraint Systems
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Air bag control module retaining nuts 9 - 80
Passenger air bag module bracket to cross-vehicle 10 - 89
beam retaining bolts
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225725en
http://vnx.su
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

System overview (5-door shown)
1 4
2 3
E120366

1 Driver air bag module 3 Air bag module
2 Passenger air bag module 4 Clockspring
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269618en
http://vnx.su
System structure Driver and Passenger Air Bag Modules
The following components form part of the

supplemental restraint system (SRS):
• Air bag control module
• Driver and passenger air bag modules
• Clockspring
• Air bag warning indicator
Air Bag Control Module
E55577
The driver air bag module is fitted to the steering

wheel, the cover forming the outer surface of the
steering wheel boss. The cover has invisible 'split
lines' moulded in its surface allowing the air bag
to easily exit through the cover when the system
deploys. A new driver air bag module and driver
air bag module wiring harness must be installed
following deployment.
E124162
The air bag control module is located under the

floor console, near to the gearshift lever. The
installation marks on the air bag control module
are to make sure it is aligned correctly.
A micro mechanical sensor is incorporated into the
air bag control module; this measures the
acceleration/deceleration in the event of a collision.
The calculated value is evaluated by the air bag
control module to determine the severity of the E55578
impact.
The passenger air bag module is located above
The air bag control module compares the values
the glove compartment and is secured to the
it receives from the micro mechanical sensor. If
in-vehicle crossbeam and the instrument panel.
the deceleration due to a frontal impact exceeds
The cover is integrated into the instrument panel
a stored value then the air bag control module
to provide an unobtrusive appearance. The cover
triggers the air bags.
has invisible 'split lines' moulded in its surface
If the vehicle battery is destroyed in the collision, allowing the air bag to easily exit through the cover
a voltage hold circuit in the air bag control module when the system deploys.
will still enable the air bags to be triggered up to
The passenger air bag is deployed simultaneously
150 ms after the start of the impact.
with the driver air bag.
If a system fault is detected by the air bag control
A new passenger air bag module must be installed
module, the air bag warning indicator is illuminated.
following deployment.
The fault can be located by carrying out a
diagnostic check using the Ford approved
diagnostic tool.
The air bag control module can be used again after
a collision for up to 5 times, provided that the air
bag control module is not physically damaged and
that it passes a self-test.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269618en
http://vnx.su
Clockspring The automatic detach circuit is designed to
illuminate the air bag warning indicator
continuously, if the air bag control module circuit
is broken, either by:
• Loss of the air bag control module circuit power
supply.
• Loss of the air bag control module circuit ground
circuit.
• Disconnection of the air bag control module
Diagnostic evaluation of the SRS can be made
through the DLC and Ford approved diagnostic
E55582 tool to establish the nature of the concern.
The clockspring is designed to carry signals
between the air bag control module and the driver
air bag module. The clockspring is installed on the
steering column and consists of fixed and moving
parts connected by a coiled Mylar tape with internal
conducting tracks. The Mylar tape is able to 'wind
up' and 'unwind' as the steering wheel is rotated,
maintaining electrical contact at all times between
the air bag control module and the driver air bag
module.
Air Bag Warning Indicator
E120367
The air bag warning indicator is located in the

instrument cluster. In the event of a fault being
detected by the air bag control module, the air bag
warning indicator flashes at a rate of 5Hz or
remains illuminated. The corresponding Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) can be read out with the aid
of Ford approved diagnostic tool.
The air bag warning indicator illuminates for three
seconds at key ON. If the system self-tests OK the
air bag warning indicator extinguishes, if a fault is
detected the air bag warning indicator will flash
after five seconds, illuminate continually from key
ON or not illuminate at all, depending on the nature
of the fault.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269618en
http://vnx.su
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Refer to Wiring Diagrams Section 501-20B, for Speak with the customer to determine if a particular
schematic and connector information. set of conditions must be met in order for a fault to
Special Tool(s) occur. If a LFC is reported by the customer but is
not present when the vehicle comes in for repair,
Test and Deployment Lead,
pinpoint test diagnostics cannot be used. Instruct
Driver, Passenger Module
the customer on how to count a LFC.
418-141
Diagnosing Customer Concerns with

418141 Hard DTCs
Simulator, Driver and deployment, the air bag control module
Passenger Air Bags backup power supply must be depleted.
501-073A Wait at least one minute after
disconnecting the battery ground cable(s)
before commencing any repair or
501073 adjustment to the SRS, or any
component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors.
Failure to follow these instructions may
Simulator, Occupant result in personal injury.
Restraint Systems Most air bag system diagnostic procedures require
501-092 the use of system deactivation and system
reactivation procedures. These procedures require
the air bag module(s) to be disconnected from the
501092 SRS, thereby removing the risk of an air bag
deployment while diagnostics are carried out.
General Equipment Air bag simulators are required to carry out
diagnosis and testing of the air bag system. The
Ford Approved Diagnostic tool
simulator contains a resistor, used to simulate an
Driver air bag module wiring harness air bag module connection to the system. It is not
acceptable to short-circuit the air bag module
connections with a 0 ohm jumper wire. If a 0 ohm
Diagnosing Customer Concerns jumper wire is used to short-circuit the air bag
Without Hard DTCs module connections, a LFC will be displayed and
a DTC logged by the air bag control module.
deployment, the air bag control module
backup power supply must be depleted. Deactivation
Wait at least one minute after
disconnecting the battery ground cable(s) WARNING: To avoid accidental
before commencing any repair or deployment, the air bag control module
adjustment to the supplemental restraint backup power supply must be depleted.
system (SRS), or any component(s) Wait at least one minute after
adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to disconnecting the battery ground cable(s)
follow these instructions may result in before commencing any repair or
personal injury. adjustment to the SRS, or any
component(s) adjacent to the SRS sensors.
NOTE: Following the pinpoint tests when a Failure to follow these instructions may
diagnostic trouble code/lamp fault code (DTC) is result in personal injury.
not present, or the air bag warning indicator is not
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
permanently illuminated, will result in needless
replacement of air bag system components and
repeat repairs.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power 3. NOTE: If a new driver air bag module wiring
supply in the air bag control module to deplete harness has been used for testing the wiring
its stored energy. harness should be retained for future test
use only.
WARNING: Place the air bag module on a
ground wired bench, with the trim cover Remove the driver air bag simulator from the
facing up to avoid accidental deployment. driver air bag module wiring harness at the top
Failure to follow this instruction may result of the steering column.
in personal injury. 4. Remove the driver air bag module wiring
3. Remove the driver air bag module from the harness from the clockspring.
vehicle. 5. Connect and install the driver air bag module.
REFER to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20 REFER to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation). Installation).
4. NOTE: REFER to FordEcat for a compatible 6. Remove the passenger air bag simulator from
driver air bag module wiring harness to use the passenger air bag module harness.
as a test lead. 7. Connect and install the passenger air bag
Connect a test driver air bag module wiring module.
harness to the clockspring. REFER to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20
5. Connect the driver air bag simulator to the driver Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
air bag module wiring harness in place of the Installation).
driver air bag module at the top of the steering 8. Connect the battery ground cable.
column.
REFER to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
6. Disconnect the passenger air bag module (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
electrical connector. General Procedures).
REFER to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-20 9. Prove out the system.
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and
Installation).
7. Connect the passenger air bag simulator to the Glossary
wiring harness in place of the passenger air bag
module. Air Bag Simulator
8. Connect the battery ground cable. Air bag simulators are used to simulate air bag
module connections to the system.
REFER to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Deactivate The System
General Procedures).
Deactivate the system means to carry out
deactivation. REFER to Deactivation in this
Reactivation procedure.
WARNING: The air bag simulators must be Prove Out The System
removed and the air bag modules The air bag warning indicator will illuminate for
reconnected when reactivated to avoid three seconds.
non-deployment in a collision. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in Reactivate The System
personal injury.
Reactivate the system means to carry out
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. reactivation. REFER to Reactivation in this
REFER to: Battery Disconnect and Connect procedure.
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,
General Procedures).
Principles of Operation
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power
supply in the air bag control module to deplete SRS Operation
its stored energy.
The SRS is DC fired.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
In the event of a severe frontal or three-quarter Air Bag Warning Indicator
frontal impact, in excess of a predetermined limit,
The air bag warning indicator is incorporated into
the driver and passenger (if equipped) front air
the instrument cluster, together with the automatic
bag(s) will deploy.
detach detect circuit. The air bag warning indicator
In the event of a severe full side impact, in excess illuminates for three seconds at key ON. If the
of a predetermined limit, either the driver or system self-tests OK the air bag warning indicator
passenger side air bags (if equipped) and side air extinguishes, if a fault is detected the air bag
curtains (if equipped) will deploy. warning indicator will flash after five seconds,
Air bag deployment will only occur, in the event of illuminate continually from key ON or not illuminate
a severe collision when the ignition key is in the at all, depending on the nature of the fault.
RUN position. The passenger air bag deactivation The automatic detach detect circuit is designed to
(PAD) switch (if equipped) will deactivate the illuminate the air bag warning indicator
passenger air bag in the event of a severe frontal continuously, if the air bag control module circuit
or side impact; it will not deactivate the passenger is broken, either by:
side air bag.
• Loss of the air bag control module circuit power
Air Bag Control Module supply.
• Loss of the air bag control module circuit ground
The air bag control module is mounted horizontally circuit.
to the floor pan beneath the floor console, to
facilitate impact sensing along the longitudinal axis. • Disconnection of the air bag control module
The air bag control module retains full control of electrical connector.
the whole system, providing continual system Diagnostic evaluation of the SRS can be made
checks and full diagnostic capabilities. The through the DLC and Ford approved diagnostic
non-volatile memory stores the fault codes, which tool to establish the nature of the concern.
are down loaded through the data link connector
(DLC) to Ford approved diagnostic tool. A visual
air bag warning indicator housed within the Inspection and Verification
instrument cluster, is illuminated when the ignition
is switched ON for approximately three seconds 1. Verify the customer concern.
and then goes out. If a fault occurs, after five 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical
seconds the air bag warning indicator either begins or electrical damage.
to flash or illuminates continuously depending on
the nature of the fault. Visual Inspection Chart
Electrical
In the event of a failure in the vehicle power supply
during an accident, the air bag control module • Fuse(s)
provides an auxiliary power supply, sufficient to • Loose or corroded connector(s)
deploy the front air bag(s) for a minimum of 150 • Air bag module(s)
ms. The auxiliary power supply is discharged by
the air bag control module within 60 seconds of • Circuit(s)
the battery ground cable being disconnected. Thus
making sure that the SRS remains operational. 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported
The air bag control module contains a concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
micro-controller to evaluate and process impact before proceeding to the next step.
data. In the event of a frontal impact, in excess of 4. If the cause is not visually evident, connect Ford
a predetermined limit, the air bag control module approved diagnostic tool to the DLC and select
will evaluate the signal received from the internal the vehicle to be tested from the Ford approved
crash sensor against stored data and deploy the diagnostic tool menu.
frontal air bags. 5. Retrieve the DTCs and refer to the Symptom
Chart.
Symptom Chart
NOTE: It is only allowed to repair circuits between connectors. If damage has occurred within a connector
a connector replacement kit, if available, must be installed. If a connector replacement kit is not available
a new wiring harness must be installed. Connectors must not be disassembled.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
• No communication with the • DLC. • GO to Pinpoint Test A.
module • Air bag control module.
• Circuit(s).
• DTC B1317: Battery voltage • Charging system. • CHECK the charging system.
high Repeat the self-test, CLEAR
the DTCs.
• DTC B1318: Battery voltage • Battery. • GO to Pinpoint Test B.

low • Charging system.
• Circuit(s).
• DTC B1342: Air bag control • Air bag control module. • INSTALL a new air bag control
module is defective module. REPEAT the self-test,
CLEAR the DTCs.
REFER to: Air Bag Control
Module (501-20 Supple-
mental Restraint System,
• DTC B1868: Air bag warning • Instrument cluster. • CHECK the instrument cluster.
indicator open circuit or short
to ground
• DTC B1916: Driver air bag • Clockspring. • GO to Pinpoint Test C.

short to battery • Circuit(s).
• DTC B1925: Passenger air bag • Circuit(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test D.
short to battery
• DTC B1932: Driver air bag • Driver air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test E.
open circuit • Clockspring.
• Circuit(s).
• DTC B1933: Passenger air bag • Passenger air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test F.
open circuit • Circuit(s).
• DTC B1934: Driver air bag • Driver air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test G.
circuit low resistance • Clockspring.
• Circuit(s).
• DTC B1935: Passenger air bag • Passenger air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test H.
circuit low resistance • Circuit(s).
• DTC B1936: Driver air bag • Driver air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test I.
circuit short to ground • Clockspring.
• Circuit(s).
• DTC B1938: Passenger air bag • Passenger air bag module. • GO to Pinpoint Test J.
circuit short to ground • Circuit(s).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
• DTC B2477: Air bag control • Air bag control module. • CONFIGURE the air bag
module configuration failure control module. REFER to Ford
approved diagnostic tool.
REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR
the DTCs.
• DTC B2792: Cross link • Circuit(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test K.
between firing circuits
• DTC P1796: CAN controller • Circuit(s). • GO to Pinpoint Test L.
circuit (BUS off)
• Air bag control module discon- • Air bag control module. • GO to Pinpoint Test M.
nected or inoperative • Circuit(s).
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE MODULE
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment, the air bag control module backup power supply
must be depleted. Wait at least one minute after disconnecting the battery ground cable(s)
before commencing any repair or adjustment to the SRS, or any component(s) adjacent to
the SRS sensors. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
A1: CHECK THAT FORD APPROVED DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS COMMUNICATING THROUGH THE
DLC
1 Select an alternative system to check the DLC.
• Is Ford approved diagnostic tool able to
communicate with the selected system?
ൺ Yes
GO to A2.
ൺ No
CHECK the DLC. For additional information,
REFER to the Wiring Diagrams. REPEAT the
self-test, CLEAR the DTCs.
A2: CHECK THE AIR BAG WARNING INDICATOR
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
2 The air bag warning indicator should illuminate
when the ignition is in the ON position for three
seconds and then go out. If a fault is present,
the air bag warning light will then begin to flash.
• Is the warning indicator operating?
ൺ Yes
GO to A3.
ൺ No
CHECK the instrument cluster.
A3: CHECK THE DLC CIRCUIT

2 Deactivate the SRS.
3 Disconnect Air Bag Control Module C3R114-A.
4 Measure the resistance between the DLC
C2DB04 pin 7, circuit VDB10 (GY) and the air
bag control module C3R114-A pin 17, circuit
VDB10 (GY), harness side.
ൺ Yes
INSTALL a new air bag control module.
REFER to: Air Bag Control Module (501-20
E104574
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
and Installation).
. REACTIVATE the system. If the air bag
warning indicator is flashing, count the lamp
flash code and REFER to the Symptom Chart
in this section.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit VDB10 (GY). REPEAT the
self-test, CLEAR the DTCs. REACTIVATE the
system.
PINPOINT TEST B : DTC B1318: BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
B1: CHECK THE IGNITION SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT

3 Measure the voltage between the air bag control
module C3R114-A pin 1, circuit CBP39
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
• Is the voltage between 9 and 16 volts?
ൺ Yes
GO to B2.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CBP39 (VT/WH). REPEAT the
TIE0030178 system.
B2: CHECK THE AIR BAG CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT

2 Measure the resistance between the air bag
control module C3R114-A pin 20, circuit GD374
ൺ Yes
and Installation).
TIE0030179 .REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR the DTCs.
REACTIVATE the system.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD374 (BK/WH). REPEAT the
system.
PINPOINT TEST C : DTC B1916: DRIVER AIR BAG SHORT TO BATTERY

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
C1: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY OR IGNITION
2 Disconnect Driver Air Bag Module Simulator.
5 Measure the voltage between the:
• Air bag control module C3R114-A pin 9, circuit
RR101 (YE/GN), harness side and ground.
CR101 (VT/BN), harness side and ground.
• Is any voltage present?
ൺ Yes
GO to C2.
ൺ No
TIE0030191
CONNECT the driver air bag module simulator
and the air bag control module C3R114-A.
REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR the DTCs.
C2: CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY OR IGNITION
2 Disconnect Clockspring C2R115.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) and circuit
RR101 (YE/GN). REPEAT the self-test,
TIE0030191 CLEAR the DTCs. REACTIVATE the system.
ൺ No
INSTALL a new clockspring.
REFER to: Clockspring (501-20 Supplemental
Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
. REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR the DTCs.
PINPOINT TEST D : DTC B1925: PASSENGER AIR BAG SHORT TO BATTERY

D1: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY OR
IGNITION
2 Disconnect Passenger Air Bag Module Simu-
lator.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
CR103 (GN/WH), harness side and ground.
RR103 (BK/WH), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GN/WH) or circuit
RR103 (BK/WH). REPEAT the self-test,
TIE0030192 CLEAR the DTCs. REACTIVATE the system.
ൺ No
CONNECT the passenger air bag module
simulator and the air bag control module
C3R114-A. REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR the
DTCs. REACTIVATE the system.
PINPOINT TEST E : DTC B1932: DRIVER AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT

E1: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

3 Carry out the self-test with the simulators
installed.
• Does the system prove out correctly?
ൺ Yes
GO to E2.
ൺ No
GO to E3.
E2: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE SQUIB RESISTANCE
WARNING: Do not proceed with this test unless using Ford approved diagnostic tool. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
1 Connect the Test and Deployment Lead to the

driver air bag module.
2 Select DMM specific on Ford approved
diagnostic tool.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
3 Connect the Test and Deployment Lead to Ford
4 Measure the resistance of the driver air bag
module squib.
• Is the resistance between 2 and 3 ohms?
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
INSTALL a new driver air bag module.
TIE39388 REFER to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
and Installation).
E3: CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR HIGH RESISTANCE - VEHICLES
WITHOUT STABILITY ASSIST
RR101 (YE/GN), harness side and the Clocks-
pring C2R115 pin 2, circuit RR101 (YE/GN),
harness side.
CR101 (VT/BN), harness side and the Clocks-
pring C2R115 pin 1, circuit CR101 (VT/BN),
harness side.
• Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
E65047
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) or circuit
CLEAR the DTCs. REACTIVATE the system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
PINPOINT TEST F : DTC B1933: PASSENGER AIR BAG OPEN CIRCUIT
F1: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

installed.
ൺ Yes
GO to F2.
ൺ No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE SQUIB RESISTANCE

passenger air bag module.
diagnostic tool.
4 Measure the resistance of the passenger air
bag module squib.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
INSTALL a new passenger air bag module.
TIE39388 REFER to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-
20 Supplemental Restraint System, Removal
and Installation).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
F3: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT OR HIGH
RESISTANCE
lator.
CR103 (GN/WH), harness side and the
passenger air bag module C2R103 pin 1, circuit
CR103 (GN/WH), harness side.
RR103 (BK/WH), harness side and the
passenger air bag module C2R103 pin 2, circuit
RR103 (BK/WH), harness side.
• Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
TIE0030194
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GN/WH) and circuit
PINPOINT TEST G : DTC B1934: DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT LOW RESISTANCE
G1: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

installed.
ൺ Yes
GO to G2.
ൺ No
GO to G3.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
G2: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE SQUIB RESISTANCE

diagnostic tool.
4 Measure the resistance of the driver air bag
module squib.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
TIE39388 REFER to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
and Installation).
G3: CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR LOW RESISTANCE
control module C3R114-A pin 9, circuit RR101
(YE/GN), harness side and the air bag control
module C3R114-A pin 10, circuit CR101
(VT/BN), harness side.
• Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
ൺ Yes
TIE0030195 Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
ൺ No
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
PINPOINT TEST H : DTC B1935: PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT LOW RESISTANCE
H1: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

installed.
ൺ Yes
GO to H2.
ൺ No
GO to H3.
H2: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE SQUIB RESISTANCE
diagnostic tool.
4 Measure the resistance of the passenger air
bag module squib.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
TIE39388 REFER to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-
and Installation).
H3: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR LOW RESISTANCE
2 Disconnect Passenger Air Bag Simulator.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
control module C3R114-A pin 7, circuit CR103
(GN/WH), harness side and the air bag control
module C3R114-A pin 8, circuit RR103
(BK/WH), harness side.
• Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
ൺ Yes
TIE0030196 ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GN/WH) and circuit
PINPOINT TEST I : DTC B1936: DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
I1: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT

installed.
ൺ Yes
GO to I2.
ൺ No
GO to I3.
I2: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

diagnostic tool.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
4 Measure the resistance between each of the
terminals and the driver air bag module casing.
• Are the resistances greater than 10,000 ohms?
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
REFER to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20
E39389
and Installation).
I3: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
3 Disconnect Driver Air Bag Module Simulator.
4 Measure the resistance, while turning the
steering wheel from lock to lock, between the:
ൺ Yes
TIE0030197 REACTIVATE the system.
ൺ No
GO to I4.
I4: CHECK THE CLOCKSPRING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
2 Measure the resistance, while turning the
steering wheel from lock to lock, between the:
ൺ Yes
TIE0030197 REFER to: Clockspring (501-20 Supplemental
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CR101 (VT/BN) or circuit
PINPOINT TEST J : DTC B1938: PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
J1: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG CIRCUIT RESISTANCE

installed.
ൺ Yes
GO to J2.
ൺ No
GO to J3.
J2: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
diagnostic tool.
4 Measure the resistance between each of the
terminals and the passenger air bag module
casing.
ൺ Yes
ൺ No
E39389
REFER to: Passenger Air Bag Module (501-
and Installation).
J3: CHECK THE PASSENGER AIR BAG WIRING HARNESS FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
lator.
CR103 (GN/WH), harness side and ground.
RR103 (BK/WH), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
TIE0030198
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CR103 (GN/WH) or circuit
PINPOINT TEST K : DTC B2792: CROSS LINK BETWEEN FIRING CIRCUITS

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: CHECK for signs of damage or signs of foreign material in the air bag control module connector.
K1: CHECK THE DRIVER AIR BAG CIRCUIT FOR A CROSS LINK TO THE PASSENGER AIR BAG
CIRCUIT
3 Disconnect Driver Air Bag Simulator.
4 Disconnect Passenger Air Bag Simulator.
RR103 (BK/WH), harness side and the air bag
control module C3R114-A pin 9, circuit RR101
(YE/GN), harness side.
CR103 (GN/WH), harness side and the air bag
control module C3R114-A pin 10, circuit CR101
(VT/BN), harness side.
E65421
ൺ Yes
VERIFY the customer concern. REPEAT the
system.
ൺ No
CR103 (GN/WH) or circuit RR101 (YE/GN)
and circuit RR103 (BK/WH). REPEAT the self-
test, CLEAR the DTCs. REACTIVATE the
system.
PINPOINT TEST L : DTC P1796: CAN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT (BUS OFF)

L1: CHECK THE CAN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT FOR LOW RESISTANCE

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
control module C3R114-A pin 3, circuit VDB06
(GY/OG), harness side and the air bag control
module C3R114-A pin 4, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG),
harness side.
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit VDB06 (GY/OG) and circuit
VDB07 (VT/OG). REPEAT the self-test,
TIE0020915
ൺ No
GO to L2.
L2: CHECK THE CAN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
control module C3R114-A pin 3, circuit VDB06
(GY/OG), harness side and ground.
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit VDB06 (GY/OG). REPEAT the
system.
ൺ No
E65426 GO to L3.
L3: CHECK THE CAN CONTROLLER CIRCUIT FOR A SHORT TO BATTERY

module C3R114-A pin 4, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG),
ൺ Yes
REPAIR circuit VDB07 (VT/OG). REPEAT the
system.
ൺ No
E65427 VERIFY the customer concern. REPEAT the
system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
PINPOINT TEST M : AIR BAG CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED OR INOPERATIVE
M1: CHECK THE AIR BAG CONTROL MODULE ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS

2 Check the air bag control module electrical
connectors.
• Are the air bag control module electrical
connectors fully engaged?
ൺ Yes
GO to M2.
ൺ No
CONNECT the air bag control module elec-
trical connectors. REPEAT the self-test,
M2: CHECK THE IGNITION SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
• Is the voltage between 9 and 16 volts?
ൺ Yes
GO to M3.
ൺ No
GO to M4.
TIE0030178
M3: CHECK THE AIR BAG CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
control module C3R114-A pin 20, circuit GD374
ൺ Yes
and Installation).
TIE0030179 . REPEAT the self-test, CLEAR the DTCs.
ൺ No
REPAIR circuit GD374 (BK/WH). REPEAT the
system.
M4: CHECK THE IGNITION SUPPLY CIRCUIT
ൺ Yes
CHECK the charging circuit.
TIE0030178 ൺ No
REPAIR circuit CBP39 (VT/WH). REPEAT the
system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1269619en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Clockspring Adjustment
General Equipment
Adhesive tape
WARNINGS:
If there is a break between installing the
clockspring and steering wheel rotation
sensor assembly and installing the
steering wheel, the centralizing of the
clockspring must be repeated.
If the centralization of the clockspring is
in doubt, the centralizing of the clockspring
must be repeated.
NOTE: Make sure that the road wheels are in the
straight ahead position.
1. 1. Turn the clockspring in a clockwise direction
until a resistance is felt.
2. Turn the clockspring in a counterclockwise
direction 2.5 revolutions, until the arrow
marked on the rotor of the clockspring aligns
with the raised 'V' section on the outer cover
of the clockspring.
2 1
2
E103063
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the

clockspring rotor does not rotate.
General Equipment: Adhesive tape
E102968
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1063191en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Deployed Air Bag Disposal

WARNING: After deployment, the air bag
module surface may contain deposits of
sodium hydroxide, a product of the gas
generate combustion, that is irritating to
the skin. Use protective gloves when
handling any deployed air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
1. Remove the deployed air bag module(s). For
additional information, refer to the relevant
procedure in this section.
2. Seal the deployed air bag module(s) in the
packaging from the new air bag module(s)
or a suitable polythene bag, and then
dispose of in accordance with local
contaminated waste regulations.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G18618en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Scrapped Vehicle Undeployed Air Bag Disposal

Special Tool(s)
Single stage air bag modules
Test and Deployment Lead,
Air Bag/Pyrotechnic Safety 3. Connect the test lead to the air bag module
Belt and the adapter (driver air bag module
418-S055 (40-007A) shown).
IA40007
General Equipment
12 volt battery
All vehicles
WARNINGS:
To minimize the possibility of injury in the TIE0022048
event of premature deployment, always
carry a live air bag module with the bag
and trim cover pointed away from the body. All air bag modules
Failure to follow this instruction may result 4.
CAUTION: To protect the test lead
in personal injury.
electrical connector(s) from damage during
To minimize the possibility of premature deployment, raise the air bag module off the
deployment, live air bag modules must ground on two wooden blocks.
only be placed on work benches which
Place the air bag module inside a suitable
have been ground bonded. Failure to follow
rigid wire cage with the air bag module cover
this instruction may result in personal
uppermost.
injury.
2. Remove the air bag module(s) to be
deployed. For additional information, refer
to the relevant procedure(s) in this section.
TIE0004023
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225731en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
5. Connect the deployment lead to the adapter. Depress both switches to deploy the air bag.
DTL4003008 DTL4003010
6.
WARNING: Before proceeding make sure
All air bag modules
that all personnel in the vicinity are aware 8. Deployed air bag module(s) should be sealed
that a loud noise (bang) is about to occur. in a suitable bag and then disposed of in
Do not let anybody approach closer than six accordance with local contaminated waste
meters. Failure to follow this instruction may regulations.
result in personal injury.
Move as far away as possible from the air
bag module and connect the deployment
lead to the battery.
DTL4003009
7. CAUTIONS:
The air bag module should not be
handled immediately following deployment
as the air bag module will be very hot.
After deployment, the air bag module

surface may contain deposits of sodium
hydroxide, a product of the gas generate
combustion, that is irritating to the skin. Use
protective gloves when handling any
deployed air bag module.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225731en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Unserviceable Air Bag Disposal

Takata Petri AG, Grossostheimer Strasse
1. WARNINGS:
223, D-63741 Aschaffenburg, (Supplier Code
To minimize the possibility of injury in P790M) Germany.
the event of premature deployment, always
carry a live air bag module with the bag and
trim cover pointed away from the body.
in personal injury.
To prevent premature deployment, live

air bag modules must only be placed on work
benches which have been ground bonded.
in personal injury.
NOTE: All unserviceable air bag modules have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All
discolored or damaged air bag modules should be
treated the same as any unserviceable live air bag
module being returned.
Remove the unserviceable air bag module.
For additional information, refer to the
relevant procedure in this section.
2.
WARNING: Under no circumstances is
an unserviceable air bag module(s) to be
returned through the local mailing system.
in personal injury.
Seal the unserviceable air bag module(s) in
the packaging from the new air bag
module(s) and address to the appropriate
manufacturer. The package should then be
forwarded to the Exchange Plan Center (as
appointed through the national sales
company) who will arrange forwarding to the
manufacturer.
3. NOTE: Autoliv air bag modules and seat belt
pretensioners.
Autoliv Gmbh, Theodor Heuss Strasse 2,
85221, Dachau, Germany.
4. NOTE: TRW air bag modules.
TRW Occupant Restraint Systems, FAO Rene
Getto, Industriestr 20, 73551, Aldorf,
Germany.
5. NOTE: TRW seat belt pretensioners.
TRW Occupant Restraint Systems, FAO
Helmut Goss, Industriestr 20, 73551, Aldorf,
Germany.
6. NOTE: Takata Petri air bag modules.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G18617en
http://vnx.su
Air Bag Control Module(33 650 0)

General Equipment 4. Detach the console panel by removing the
screws on both sides.
Ford Approved Diagnostic Tool
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the air
bag control module backup power supply x2
must be depleted. Wait at least one minute
after disconnecting the battery ground
cable(s) before commencing any repair or
system (SRS), or any component(s) E119753
adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in
personal injury. 5. Disconnect the air bag control module
electrical connectors.
To minimize the possibility of premature
deployment, do not use radio key code
savers when working on the supplemental
restraint system. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
Never probe the electrical connectors of
air bag modules or any other supplemental
restraint system component. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
E119839
Mounting and Cables, General Procedures). 6. Remove the air bag control module.
2. Raise the parking brake control lever.
3. Remove the parking brake control lever trim
panel.
9 Nm
TIE0026895
Installation
E119752
WARNING: Never probe the electrical
connectors of air bag modules or any other
supplemental restraint system component.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225739en
http://vnx.su
in personal injury.
2.
WARNING: New air bag control modules
must be configured following installation.
in personal injury.
If installing a new air bag control module,
configure the air bag control module using
Ford Approved Diagnostic Tool.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225739en
http://vnx.su
Clockspring
General Equipment Centralize the steering and lock it in position.
Ford Approved Diagnostic Tool
Removal
WARNINGS:
To avoid accidental deployment, the air
bag control module backup power supply
must be depleted. Wait at least one minute
after disconnecting the battery ground
cable(s) before commencing any repair or
adjustment to the supplemental restraint TIE0026862
system (SRS). Failure to follow these
3. Remove the steering wheel.
personal injury.
45 Nm
1. Detach the driver air bag module from the
steering wheel. TIE0026893

the steering wheel. 4. Remove the spring.
the lower retaining clips.
E104583
E104576
5. Detach the steering column upper shroud
from the lower shroud.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the road wheels are
1. Using a thin bladed screwdriver, release the
in the straight ahead position.
two clips (one each side).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225737en
http://vnx.su
2. Detach the shroud. 8. Disconnect the clockspring electrical
connector.
2
1
TIE0027109
E0027112
6. Remove the steering column lower shroud.
1. Remove the retaining screws. 9. Remove the clockspring retaining screw.
2. Release the steering column locking lever (
If equipped ).
1
1
2
1
E104586
E104584
10. Remove the clockspring.
7. Detach the multifunction switches from the • Release the locking tangs from the steering
clockspring and position them to one side. column.
• Depress each locking tang in turn and slide

each switch upwards.
x2
x2
E104587
E104585
Installation
All vehicles
WARNING: Never probe the electrical
connectors of air bag modules or any other
supplemental restraint system component.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225737en
http://vnx.su
Failure to follow this instruction may result 4. Attach the multifunction switches to the
in personal injury. clockspring.
1. Install the clockspring.
• Make sure the retaining tangs lock into
position on the steering column.
x2
x2
E104585
5. Install the steering column lower shroud.

E104587
• Lock the steering column locking lever ( If
equipped ).
2. Install the clockspring retaining screw.
x3
E104588
E104586
6. Attach the steering column upper shroud to

the lower shroud.
3. Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
TIE0027425
E0027112
All vehicles
7.
WARNING: Incorrect centralization may
result in premature component failure. If in
doubt when centralizing the clockspring,
repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225737en
http://vnx.su
follow this instruction may result in personal Centralize the steering and lock it in position.
injury.
Centralize the clockspring.
1. Turn the clockspring in a counterclockwise
direction until resistance is felt (approximately
two and one half turns).
2. Turn the clockspring in a clockwise direction,
until the arrow marked on the rotor of the
clockspring aligns with the raised 'V' section
at the 12 o'clock position on the outer cover
of the clockspring (approximately two and
one half turns).
TIE0026862
10.
CAUTION: If there is any break between
centralizing the clockspring and installing
1 2 the steering wheel, or the vehicle is left
unattended by the technician, the
centralizing procedure MUST be repeated.
Install the steering wheel nut.
E0027115
All vehicles
8. Install the spring.
45 Nm
TIE0026893
11. Attach the driver air bag module to the

steering wheel.
E104583
9. NOTE: Make sure that the road wheels are

in the straight ahead position.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225737en
http://vnx.su
Driver Air Bag Module(40 700 0)

Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNINGS: For additional information, refer to: Battery
To avoid accidental deployment, the air Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
bag control module backup power supply
must be depleted. Wait at least one minute 2. NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to access the
after disconnecting the battery ground steering column upper shroud retaining
cable(s) before commencing any repair or clips.
adjustment to the supplemental restraint Detach the steering column upper shroud
system (SRS), or any component(s) from the steering column lower shroud
adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to (steering wheel removed for clarity).
personal injury. 1. Using a thin bladed screwdriver, release the
two clips (one each side).
Always wear safety glasses when working 2. Detach the shroud.
on an air bag equipped vehicle and when
handling an air bag module. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in 2
personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of injury in the
event of premature deployment, always 1
TIE0027109
and trim cover pointed away from the body.
Failure to follow this instruction may result 3. NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to access the
in personal injury. air bag module retaining clips.
To minimize the possibility of premature Using a thin bladed screwdriver, detach the
deployment, live air bag modules must driver air bag module upper clips from the
only be placed on work benches which steering wheel (driver air bag module
have been ground bonded and with the removed for clarity).
trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these
personal injury.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim
cover or instrument panel could lead to
deterioration of the trim cover and air bag
modules. Do not for any reason attempt to
paint discolored or damaged air bag TIE0026912
module trim covers or instrument panel.
Install a new component. Failure to follow 4. Detach the driver air bag module from the
this instruction may result in personal steering wheel.
injury.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225733en
http://vnx.su
1. Pull the top of the air bag module away from Installation
the steering wheel.
2. Push the air bag module upwards to detach WARNINGS:
the lower retaining clips. Always wear safety glasses when working
personal injury.
in personal injury.
E104576 To minimize the possibility of premature
5. Disconnect the driver air bag module ground
connector.
deployment, live air bag modules must
have been ground bonded and with the
TIE0027120 personal injury.
Painting over the driver air bag module trim
6. Remove the driver air bag module. cover or instrument panel could lead to
deterioration of the trim cover and air bag
• Disconnect the driver air bag module modules. Do not for any reason attempt to
electrical connector. paint discolored or damaged air bag
module trim covers or instrument panel.
Install a new component. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal
injury.
CAUTION: Make sure that the driver air bag
module retaining clips are correctly
engaged and the trim cover is flush with
the steering wheel.
TIE0027121
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225733en
http://vnx.su
Driver Air Bag Module Wiring Harness

Removal
All vehicles 1. Detach the driver air bag module from the
steering wheel.
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when working the steering wheel.
the lower retaining clips.
personal injury.
carry a live air bag module with the air bag
in personal injury.
E104576
instructions may result in personal injury. Single stage air bag modules
Never probe the electrical connectors of 2. Detach the driver air bag module wiring
air bag modules or any other supplemental harness from the driver air bag module.
restraint system (SRS) component. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
event of premature deployment, do not
work on the air bag module with the trim
cover facing downwards. Support the air
bag module vertically and work to the side
of the air bag module. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal
injury.
E55574
CAUTIONS:
Note the position and routing of the driver
3. Remove the driver air bag module wiring
air bag module wiring harness to aid
harness.
assembly. An incorrectly routed driver air
bag module wiring harness may become
damaged when the steering wheel is
rotated.
This procedure must only be used if
referred to from the Diagnosis and Testing
procedure in this section. Under no other
circumstance must the driver air bag
module wiring harness be disconnected
from the air bag module.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225741en
http://vnx.su
• Release the driver air bag module wiring
harness locking tangs.
E55575
Installation
WARNINGS:
Always wear safety glasses when working
personal injury.
in personal injury.
air bag modules or any other SRS
component. Failure to follow this
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the driver air bag module
electrical connectors are free from any wiring
harness connector fragments.
Make sure that the driver air bag module

wiring harness is correctly routed and is
secure under the locating clips. An
incorrectly routed driver air bag module
wiring harness may become damaged when
the steering wheel is rotated.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225741en
http://vnx.su
Passenger Air Bag Module(40 701 0)

Removal 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
All vehicles
WARNINGS: Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).
To avoid accidental deployment, the air 2. Remove the glove box.

bag control module backup power supply 1. Push glove box sides inwards.
must be depleted. Wait at least one minute 2. Tilt the glove box forward.
after disconnecting the battery ground 3. Pull the glove box away from the instrument
cable(s) before commencing any repair or panel.
system (SRS), or any component(s)
adjacent to the SRS sensors. Failure to
personal injury. 1 1
personal injury.
To minimize the possibility of premature 2
E104581
restraint system. Failure to follow this 3. Detach the passenger air bag module bracket
instruction may result in personal injury. from the in-vehicle crossbeam.
in personal injury.
trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these 10 Nm
instructions may result in personal injury. TIE0027356

air bag modules or any other supplemental 4. NOTE: If necessary, use a trim pad removal
restraint system component. Failure to tool to aid the release of the passenger air
follow this instruction may result in bag module cover retaining clips from the
personal injury. instrument panel.
Painting over the air bag module trim Detach the passenger air bag module from
covers or instrument panel could lead to the instrument panel.
deterioration of the trim cover and air bags.
Do not for any reason attempt to paint
discolored or damaged air bag module trim
covers or instrument panel. Install a new
component. Failure to follow this
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225735en
http://vnx.su
• Push the air bag module upwards to detach Disconnect the passenger air bag module
the air bag cover from the instrument panel. electrical connector.
TIE0028357 E124264
5.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the Installation
instrument panel, use the plastic edge on
the air bag module wiring harness shield to WARNINGS:
support the passenger air bag module on
Make sure the air bag module electrical
the instrument panel.
connectors are correctly installed and are
Support the passenger air bag module. secure. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
personal injury.
E122516 in personal injury.
Vehicles with passenger air bag deployment, live air bag modules must
6. only be placed on work benches which
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the have been ground bonded and with the
passenger air bag module electrical trim cover facing up. Failure to follow these
connectors, use a pair of circlip pliers to instructions may result in personal injury.
release the passenger air bag module
electrical connector locking tangs. Never probe the electrical connectors of
personal injury.
Painting over the air bag module trim
covers or instrument panel could lead to
deterioration of the air bag module trim
cover and air bags. Do not for any reason
attempt to paint discolored or damaged air
bag module trim covers or instrument
panel. Install a new component. Failure to
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225735en
http://vnx.su
personal injury.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the passenger
air bag module trim cover retaining clips
are correctly engaged and the passenger
air bag module trim cover is flush with the
instrument panel.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225735en
http://vnx.su
501-25A-1 Body Repairs - General Information 501-25A-1
. PAGE 1 OF 3
SECTION 501-25A Body Repairs - General Information
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-25A-4

Description and Usage of Body Repair Literature.............................................................. 501-25A-5
Symbols.............................................................................................................................. 501-25A-6
Health and Safety Precautions........................................................................................... 501-25A-9
General............................................................................................................................... 501-25A-9
Measures to prevent accidents........................................................................................... 501-25A-9
Establishment of Safety Regulations.................................................................................. 501-25A-10
Fire Danger and Fire Control.............................................................................................. 501-25A-11
Safety Work........................................................................................................................ 501-25A-12
Protection of the vehicle..................................................................................................... 501-25A-17
Protective equipment.......................................................................................................... 501-25A-17
Electronic components....................................................................................................... 501-25A-17
5S Implementation,Periodical Audit and Sustenance........................................................ 501-25A-18
Environmental Regulations................................................................................................. 501-25A-20
Body Construction.............................................................................................................. 501-25A-21
General............................................................................................................................... 501-25A-21
Integral body-frame............................................................................................................ 501-25A-21
Frame structures................................................................................................................ 501-25A-22
Diagnosis and Damage Evaluation.................................................................................... 501-25A-26
Visual recording of the damage.......................................................................................... 501-25A-26
Hidden damage.................................................................................................................. 501-25A-26
Body Damage Characteristics............................................................................................ 501-25A-26
Body Sheet Metal............................................................................................................... 501-25A-32
Types of steel..................................................................................................................... 501-25A-32
Characteristics of Steel Sheet............................................................................................ 501-25A-34
Aluminum............................................................................................................................ 501-25A-42
Tools and Equipment for Body Repairs.............................................................................. 501-25A-45
Alignment systems............................................................................................................. 501-25A-45
Measuring systems............................................................................................................. 501-25A-46
Panel beating tools............................................................................................................. 501-25A-49
Pull Clamps........................................................................................................................ 501-25A-53
Welding gear...................................................................................................................... 501-25A-54
Separating tools.................................................................................................................. 501-25A-55
Establish Repair Method.................................................................................................... 501-25A-61
General............................................................................................................................... 501-25A-61
Planning.............................................................................................................................. 501-25A-61
Chronological sequence of repair....................................................................................... 501-25A-61
Repair Outline..................................................................................................................... 501-25A-61
Commodity Depreciation Guidelines- India........................................................................ 501-25A-62
Alignment Check................................................................................................................. 501-25A-63
Straightening....................................................................................................................... 501-25A-68
Repairing Major Damage/Collision..................................................................................... 501-25A-68
http://vnx.su
. PAGE 2 OF 3
General Straightening sequence........................................................................................ 501-25A-98
Off-road vehicles................................................................................................................ 501-25A-98
Complete Panel Replacement/Partial Replacement.......................................................... 501-25A-100
Complete replacement.......................................................................................................501-25A-100
Sectional replacement........................................................................................................501-25A-100
Corrosion Prevention.......................................................................................................... 501-25A-102
Panel coatings and corrosion protection............................................................................501-25A-102
Corrosion protection measures during repair work............................................................501-25A-102
Corrosion protection for the floor pan (example)................................................................501-25A-106
Corrosion Damage/Corrosion Repair................................................................................. 501-25A-107
Sealer, Underbody Protection Material and Adhesives...................................................... 501-25A-109
Sealer Application in Critical Area......................................................................................501-25A-109
Sealer Application in other Areas.......................................................................................501-25A-110
Cutting Technique............................................................................................................... 501-25A-112
Spot weld milling tool..........................................................................................................501-25A-112
Rod sander.........................................................................................................................501-25A-113
Short stroke saw.................................................................................................................501-25A-113
Orbital saw..........................................................................................................................501-25A-113
Panel Beating Technique and Smart Repairs..................................................................... 501-25A-114
General...............................................................................................................................501-25A-114
Hollow leveling (removing dent without a dolly).................................................................501-25A-114
Dent removal using hammer and dolly...............................................................................501-25A-114
Dent removal from the outside using the slide hammer ....................................................501-25A-115
Dynamic puller with counter bearing .................................................................................501-25A-115
Dent removal using special panel beating levers...............................................................501-25A-116
Heat working of panels.......................................................................................................501-25A-116
Heat-induced material shrinking.........................................................................................501-25A-116
Lead loading.......................................................................................................................501-25A-118
Paintless Dent Removal..................................................................................................... 501-25A-131
Joining Techniques............................................................................................................. 501-25A-133
Types of joint......................................................................................................................501-25A-133
Welding of Automobile Body .............................................................................................501-25A-133
Welding Equipment............................................................................................................501-25A-133
Carbon-dioxide Gas shield Arc welding..............................................................................501-25A-139
Metal Inert Gas (MIG) welding............................................................................................501-25A-146
Oxyacetylene Gas Welding................................................................................................501-25A-148
Welding...............................................................................................................................501-25A-154
MIG brazes.........................................................................................................................501-25A-158
Rivets..................................................................................................................................501-25A-159
Brazed connections............................................................................................................501-25A-159
Lead loading.......................................................................................................................501-25A-160
Bonding..............................................................................................................................501-25A-160
Bonding and welding..........................................................................................................501-25A-161
Bonding and riveting...........................................................................................................501-25A-161
Plastic Repairs.................................................................................................................... 501-25A-163
General...............................................................................................................................501-25A-163
Plastic welding....................................................................................................................501-25A-165
Adhesive bonding of plastics..............................................................................................501-25A-166
GRP repairs........................................................................................................................501-25A-167
Paint Repair Process..........................................................................................................501-25A-168
Plastic repair quick reference chart....................................................................................501-25A-169
Identify plastic & determine repair method.........................................................................501-25A-170
Clean surface and align damage........................................................................................501-25A-175
Repair Method A: thermoset urethane...............................................................................501-25A-176
Repair Method B: fusion welding........................................................................................501-25A-177
Repair Method C: FiberFlex...............................................................................................501-25A-178
http://vnx.su
. PAGE 3 OF 3
Repair Method D: Hot air welding.......................................................................................501-25A-180
Padded dash repair............................................................................................................501-25A-182
Repair Method E: Epoxy repair..........................................................................................501-25A-183
Repair Method F: Insta-Weld repair...................................................................................501-25A-183
Repair Method G: PlastiFix repair......................................................................................501-25A-184
Repairing broken tabs........................................................................................................501-25A-187
Repairing broken bolt holes................................................................................................501-25A-187
Applying epoxy filler............................................................................................................501-25A-188
Repairing living hinges and tabs.........................................................................................501-25A-189
Retexturing plastic..............................................................................................................501-25A-189
Priming Plastics: primer selection & use............................................................................501-25A-190
Impact of Insufficient Repair Quality................................................................................... 501-25A-195
Water Leaks........................................................................................................................ 501-25A-197
General...............................................................................................................................501-25A-197
Testers................................................................................................................................501-25A-197
Test method........................................................................................................................501-25A-197
Sequence...........................................................................................................................501-25A-199
Possible complaints and corrective actions........................................................................501-25A-200
Wind Noise......................................................................................................................... 501-25A-204
Diagnosis............................................................................................................................501-25A-204
Sequence for performing a wind noise diagnosis...............................................................501-25A-206
Workshop diagnosis...........................................................................................................501-25A-206
Gaps and Flushness...........................................................................................................501-25A-207
Noise, Vibration and Harshness......................................................................................... 501-25A-210
Intake system.....................................................................................................................501-25A-214
Exhaust system..................................................................................................................501-25A-215
Bodywork............................................................................................................................501-25A-215
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Underbody protection 5 030 492 -
Anti-corrosion wax 1 219 834 WSK-M7C89-A
Cavity wax 5 030 081 -
Profiled butyl seal 1 128 983 S-M3G4620-A
Weld primer 1 205 996 -
Clinched flange protection 1 136 479 WSK-M4G245-B
Seam sealing compound 1 205 817 WSS-M4G364-A
Body sealing compound 1 143 255 -
Windshield sealant 1 613 838 WSK-M4G329-A
Adhesive spoiler set 1 219 837 -
Metal adhesive kit 1 203 241 -
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225744en
http://vnx.su
Description and Usage of Body Repair Literature

The purpose of development and existance of this
document is to inform the Ford India Dealerships
Body shops of the latest technology and also the
materials and repair techniques currently used in
body making. It provides information on bodyshop
equipment and tools and on the most fundamental
body repair methods.
In addition, ongoing information will be provided in
the Technical Service Bulletins.
Ford approved body and collision repair equipment
suppliers in India equipped with state of the art
training facility including best in class workshop
facility to demonstrate and provide On the job
practical assistance.
The general section is divided into the following
chapters:
• Specification lists technical information about
the various materials used in current body
applications.
• The chapter Description and Operation
provides information on the fundamentals of
vehicle body construction and materials. In
addition you will also find there notes about
tools, materials as well about fundamental body
repair methods.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1071362en
http://vnx.su
Symbols
to follow them at all may result in damage
Warnings and hazard notices to the vehicle or to components.
Warnings and hazard notices are shown in this NOTE: This notice is used when the operator
literature by WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE should be made aware of special or extra
indicators. These notices are always shown before information.
a job step which can be associated with an
immediate personal or material danger. Symbols used
WARNING: This notice is used when failure Symbols are used to graphically represent
to exactly follow the instructions given in additional information about the operation, tool or
this literature or failure to follow them at materials. This information will not be shown
all may result in a hazard to persons and/or separately again in the text.
in persons being injured. The symbols used in this and other body repair
CAUTION: This notice is used when failure manuals may be used alone as well as in
to exactly follow the instructions or test combination in a diagram.
procedures given in this literature or failure
1 4 7 9
12
2 5
5mm 10
170 8
13
6 11
5mm
3 6mm 14 15
E122487
Des Description Des Description

cript cript
ion ion
1 Measuring tape 8 Drill through two panel thicknesses with
a 5 mm dia. drill
2 Saw
9 Drill through one panel thickness
3 Abrasive cutter
10 Drill through two panel thicknesses
4 hot air blower
11 Apply substance
5 Temperature specification (170°C in this
example) 12 Soldering iron
6 Drill with 6mm diameter 13 Metal-Inert Gas (MIG) weld
7 Drill through one panel thickness with a 14 Resistance Spot Weld
5 mm dia. drill
15 Welded seam (full or intermittent seam)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468063en
http://vnx.su
Color coding
Different colors or shading can be used to depict
special areas and components.
E113739
Magnified and detailed views

If a detail cannot be clearly seen in the illustration
because of its size or location, it is shown enlarged
in a separate window.
E112052
• Blue: Main component which will be removed

or installed. Only actual movements will be
shown in blue in the diagram.
• Magenta: Materials or fixings, e.g. spot welds
or adhesives.
In an assembly operation, the colors show the
sequence of removal steps.
• Green: First component or the first partial
replacement section.
• Blue: Second component or the second partial
• Brown: Third component or the third partial
Movement arrows
Necessary work such as clinching flanges or
E113412
moving lugs etc. will be represented by broken
arrows.
Position lines within a diagram
A position line is used to indicate a special position
or a component. A spot weld which must be drilled
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468063en
http://vnx.su
out through two panel thicknesses is indicated
here, different to all the others.
E113757
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468063en
http://vnx.su
Health and Safety Precautions

General necessary to understand the features and
construction of the equipment to carry out safe
Appropriate repair methods and carrying out repairs operation.
correctly are particularly important for the operating
safety of vehicles and for the safety of people. Equipment and Safety Measures
WARNING: There is danger of injury Usually many painting related tools and
through: devices,explosive, combustible, and toxic
substances exist in the painting booth. Always keep
• High voltage when electrical welding.
the equipment in good working order and correctly
– Do not perform welding work in a damp handle and store the paint and thinner.
environment or on a wet substrate. Use
suitable insulation underneath. Ventilating Equipment
• Flammable substances in the welding area. In order to prevent poisoning by organic solvents
– Remove flammable substances from the (inhalation of toxic gas), the most important
danger area. Remove the fuel tank and element is good ventilation. it is desirable to design
components which supply fuel. When welding the painting booth with high ventilation flow or to
in the battery area, the battery must be install high performance ventilation equipment.
completely removed.
• Welding fumes, which are harmful to health. Drying Equipment
– Ventilate the workplace well and use the Always pay attention to the following items:
welding fumes extraction system. • Appoint a responsible overseer for the painting
• Welding spatter and UV radiation. and drying equipment.
– Wear protective clothing, gloves and welding • Master safe operation of equipment and check
mask or welding goggles. it more often than yearly.
• Pyrotechnic components. • Do not use direct heating hot air type in the
– Disconnect the battery negative clamp and booth.
cover the battery terminal. Remove any • Position the power switch of the infrared heater
airbag components. outside the painting booth.
All the regulations governing Health and Safety at • Take measures to prevent electrostatic buildup
Work must be complied with during body repairs. and connect a ground cable to the equipment.
Regularly sprinkle the booth with water.
• Before baking vehicle paint, remove gasoline
Measures to prevent accidents from the gasoline tank.
Outline Electrical Equipment
Almost all paints and thinners used in vehicle repair Explosion-proof construction is desirable for the
are combustible or highly inflammable. As there is electrical equipment as it is installed in a highly
a high danger of fire or explosion, care in handling inflammable environment. Pre-check them for no
and storage is necessary. Because paints and sparks or leakage. install the equipment’s lamps
thinners include organic solvents, there is a danger and switches outside the painting booth. Connect
of poisoning if they are used in poorly ventilated a ground cable, and take the necessary steps to
areas or use them for longer than the specified prevent static electricity buildup.
time.
Fire Extinguishing Equipment
Furthermore, even if a worker is familiar with using
the equipment, he/she should always operate it Liquid fuels and thinners have high inflammability
carefully and correctly. if not, a serious accident and present a fire risk. As their inflammability is
may result. more dangerous than other types of fire, the worker
To prevent fire and poisoning, understand the should fully understand the methods of fire
explosive, combustible, and toxic characteristics extinguishment. If a fire breaks out, using the
of the paints and thinners in use. It is also
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
appropriate type of fire extinguisher during the Solvents Handling
initial stages is important in reducing damage.
Solvent Toxicosis
Important notice:
Typically solvent toxicosis is caused by breathing
When you find a fire, do not panic. judge from the its vapour or direct skin contact. Toxicosis consists
look of the fire and take appropriate measures. of two forms: acute poisoning which occurs in a
When you fight a fire, extinguish fire from the comparably high solvent concentration
windward side considering wind speed and environment, and chronic poisoning which occurs
direction. at low vapor concentration. Urethane paint has
increasing market demand, however it is said that
Understand the circumstances of the fire, then start isocyanate, a component of the urethane paint
extinguishing it. hardening agent, has toxic effects.
Consider preventing the spread of the fire if there The organic solvents have the capacity to
are some inflammable materials nearby. decompose fat. If the skin is often in contact with
organic solvents, this may reduce the resistance
Establishment of Safety Regulations of skin and solvents will accumulate in the kidneys
and the liver and affect the blood.
Even if a worker has sufficient knowledge and If a worker gets organic solvent poisoning, he/she
skills, it is difficult to work safely if sufficient safety suffers irritation of the skin, the mucous membrane,
regulations are not in place. It is very important to the respiratory tract, the trachea and/or the eyes
establish work standards and safety rules and to and has nausea, dizziness and/or headache.
post them in a prominent place. All workers should Especially, if a worker puts up with his/her chronic
observe these rules. toxicosis, it will result in serious organ damage.
Any worker who has an allergic disease should
Preparation of Handling Manuals avoid painting work.
An accident happens easily when a worker gets
too familiar with the painting procedure and he/she
cuts corners or becomes inattentive to the painting Preventive Measure for Toxicosis
work. Prepare handling standards and manuals for
all painting steps and for all equipment. For safe Ventilation Equipment
operation, all workers must always check the Always carry out painting work with sufficient
painting procedure. ventilation.
Proper Arrangement WARNING: The vapor of the organic
solvents is heavier than air, it always flows
The first step in safe painting and fire prevention to a lower place and stays there. Therefore,
is the proper arrangement of the equipment in the install a discharging outlet as close as
painting booth. possible to the floor.
• Do not leave things in people’s way. Always
keep the tools, paints, and thinners in their own Post Warnings Inside/Outside
place. Post the following board in a place where it is easily
• Clean the painting booth every day and remove visible to all the workers.
combustibles and hazards from the booth. The workers must completely understand the
• Always clean-up and do not leave things to message on the board and follow the notice for
block the emergency exit, the fire extinguisher, safe painting.
electric switches, etc.
• If paint or thinner spills on the floor or a shelf, Wearing Protective Clothes
immediately wipe it up. Dispose of the saturated Always wear protective clothes and a gas mask.
cloth in a safety hazardous materials container.
After finishing the painting work, clean hands and
• Unnecessary waste paints, solvents, used cloth, face and apply barrier cream.
paper, etc. must be disposed of immediately.
• Securely cap any used empty containers and
containers with residual paint or thinner
remaining. Store them in a cool dark place.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
1 4
2 5
3 6
E114289
Item Description Precautions in using paint and thinner:

1 Welding Mask Prepare the necessary amount of the paint and
2 Protective Goggles thinner. Always pay attention not spill the paint or
thinner and close the cap to prevent evaporation
3 Safety Shoes of solvent.
4 Face Mask
5 Safety Gloves Fire Danger and Fire Control
6 Overall with long sleeves Paint and thinner used for vehicle repair have low
flash and ignition points which can result in fire. If
the paint or thinner reaches the critical temperature,
it will produce combustible vapor and will be
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
ignited. The flash point is the standard of Always check that the exhaust fan dose not contact
flammability of the paint/ thinner. The flash point the wall of the painting booth and check for wear
is defined as the lowest temperature at which the of the fan belt. Use safe tools (spark-free tools)
solvent can be ignited while increasing toward the when possible and use other equipment and tools
ignition point. The ignition point is defined as the carefully and correctly. Pay attention not to drop
lowest temperature at which the solvent ignites them or subject them to shocks.
while its temperature is being increased. The
ignition point is far higher than the flash point. Electrostatic Prevention Measures
Solvents have poor electrical conductivity. If paint
or thinner is stirred in a container, static electricity
is produced and when the electrostatic level
reaches a critical value, it may cause a spark and
ignite the solvent. Always connect a ground cable.
To maintain a certain humidity in the painting booth,
spray water on the floor. Wear anti-static coated
cotton overalls avoiding synthetic fiber clothes.
Handling Organic Solvents

The organic solvent categories include:
E112752 inflammable, explosive, toxic, and radioactive. In
order to prevent fire, pay attention to the following
items:
• Never have a naked flame in the painting booth.
If there is no choice but to have a naked flame,
suspend the painting work.
• When the paint or thinner is not being used,
always cap its container. If it is spilt on the floor,
wipe it up with a cloth.
• Do not put the paint and thinner in the sun or in
a hot place.
• Always spray water in the painting booth to
E112751 maintain enough humidity in order to reduce the
danger of ignition.
• If the spray dust from the oil paint, the sanding
Fire Prevention in the Factory waste of polyester putty or used cloth are
massed together, there is a danger of auto
Ventilation ignition. Keep them in a container filled with
As the vapor of organic solvent is heavier than the water until they are disposed of.
air, it always flows to a lower place. When the
vapor of the solvent and air are mixed at a given Safety Work
ratio, and an ignition source is located near the
mixed gas, it may explode below the flashing point
temperature. Therefore install the discharging outlet Maintenance of Equipment
as low as possible.
NOTE: The explosive limit is the concentration of In order to carry on the painting work safely, the
solvent below which it does not explode. equipment in the painting booth must be fully
utilized. Periodic checks of the equipment and daily
• Gasoline: 1.4 (7.6%) maintenance before operation are necessary.
• Thinner: 1.0 (7.0%)
Check the work environment carefully, especially
Check the Equipment and Tools the ventilation conditions, and the storage of
poisonous chemicals.
Always lubricate the sliding portion of any
equipment (where metal friction generates heat.)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
E112753 E112754
Notice of Work
Worker
Worker must always wear long-sleeved overalls,
hat and safety shoes. Depending on the type of
painting work, wear protective glasses, gloves,
earplug and/or gas mask.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
1 5 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
E114290

1 Protective Goggle 8 Cap
2 Work Gloves 9 Protective apron
3 Shield for Eyes Jack Up
4 Safety Shoes Do not use a floor jack on a slope or on a weak
5 Overall with long sleeves floor. If a floor jack is used on a such floor, it may
result in the vehicle falling.
6 Ear Plugs
If a vehicle has weight imbalance due to cargo on
7 Face Mask board, do not use a floor jack.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
When a floor jack is used for the front wheels, set
the wheel chock under the rear wheels. When a
floor jack is used for a rear wheel, set the wheel
chock under the front wheels. When a vehicle is
jacked up, always set the wheel chock under the
wheels contacting the ground.
After a vehicle is jacked up, always secure the
vehicle with a safety stand. 1
Never crawl under the vehicle while the vehicle is

jacked up. Even if it is a short time to work, do not 2
3
work while only a jack is supporting a vehicle. If E121781
the vehicle falls, it may result in serious injury or
even death. Item Description
1 Wheel Stopper
2 Safety Stand
3 Floor Jack
Lift Up
Set the lift blocks securely at the specified points.
If the lift blocks are positioned at places other than
those specified, this may result in damage to the
vehicle or the vehicle falling from the lift blocks.
E112756 After the main rear parts are removed, put weight
in the trunk compartment equivalent to that of the
removed parts in order to maintain the weight
balance.
Never lift one whole side of a vehicle using only
one lift block. When lifting up a vehicle, always
watch the vehicle’s condition and confirm that a
safe environment is maintained.
In order to lift a vehicle up, raise it until all four
wheels float a little and confirm that the lift secures
it completely.
E112757
Never crawl under the vehicle while the lift is
operating.
After the vehicle is lifted up, deploy the safety
equipment to lock the lift completely.
E112759
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
1
E121782
Item Description
1 Safety Wire
1 3
2 4
E121897
Drawing Work E112762
Before starting the frame drawing work, check the Item Description
condition of the clamps and chains. If any
deformation or crack exist, do not use them. 1 Clamp
Use appropriate capacity clamps and chains. If the 2 Chain
size and/or the capacity are different, the clamp
3 Pump
may be removed or the chain break and be
scattered. 4 C-Clamp
If a frame correction jig is being used for rough
frame correction, do not enter the chain drawing Welding Work
area. Furthermore, be sure to connect safety wires Remove the fuel tank and /or fuel lines if welding
to the frame to prevent its sudden movement. equipment is to be used near the fuel system.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
Carbon fibre blankets are used directly around the
working area. They offer maximum protection to
the areas of the vehicle.
In addition, take into account:
• Remove fuel supply components as necessary.
• Protect working areas which are in danger of
catching fire with a fireproof blanket.
1 • The welding must not cause components of the
air conditioning system to become heated.
E121898
• Removal of any attached components in the
space adjoining the repair area.
Item Description • Use covering paper to protect the interior from
grinding dust.
1 Fuel Tank • Create a definite barrier between the work area
and the interior by using a carbon fibre blanket.
Drying Work
Do not put inflammable things near the painting
Protective equipment
booth or dryer. Furthermore, do not use electrical
apparatus near the painting booth or dryer. In either
The following protective equipment must always
case, there is a risk of an explosion.
be used:
• Protective helmet or welding mask.
• Ear defenders and breathing protection.
• Protective gloves and safety boots.
• Welding fume extraction.
Electronic components
Increased use of comfort and safety electronics in
modern motor vehicles also requires the greatest
E112763
attention to be paid during body work.
Overvoltages produced during welding and in
alignment work during bodyshell rectification may
Protection of the vehicle cause electronic systems to be damaged. In
particular, the safety instructions for performing
Protect affected areas from weld spatter and dust welding work on vehicles with airbag systems must
during all welding and grinding work on the vehicle. be adhered to.
If metallic dust stays on the vehicle for some time,
there is the likelihood of film rust formation. NOTE: After disconnecting the power supply and
Grinding or sanding work produce tiny spots of before performing further work, a wait time of up
damage to the paint surface, which may cause to 15 minutes must be maintained, depending on
corrosion. the vehicle. Work on airbag systems may only be
performed by persons who have a relevant
For this reason, make sure to: certificate of competence.
• Use carbon fibre blankets to protect the vehicle Pay attention to the following points:
body.
• Disconnect the battery negative clamp and
• Use covering film to protect the vehicle body cover the battery terminal.
from sanding dust and metal dust.
• Disconnect the electrical connector at the airbag
Use suitable protective measures to protect the control module.
interior when performing repair operations which • If welding is to be performed directly near a
relate to the inside of the vehicle. control module, it must be removed before hand.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
• Never connect the negative cable of the welder SEITON: ORGANISING
near an airbag or a control module.
This is the second step of the 5S. You have
• Connect the negative cable of the welder close quantified and identified all the useless objects and
to the location of the weld. made a list of all the objects which are 'in doubt'.
All you have left are the necessary objects, which
5S Implementation,Periodical Audit and everyone agrees with. But even then the remaining
Sustenance objects seem to be in a mess and it is as difficult
as before to find what is needed. Here again, the
most important action is not tidying up but the way
Understanding the 5S Principles and you do it. You have to define a methodical
Philosophy approach to storage. This method must be
established by the frequency of use of the useful
The 5S's are 5 Japanese PRINCIPLES beginning objects. The useful objects must be stored in a
with the letter S: practical way.
SEIRI - SEITON - SEISO - SEIKETSU - The objective is to have a spot for each thing in
SHITSUKE order to systematically put them back in place. You
have to eliminate the needs for searching an object
Like most of the Japanese words, the literal for more than 30 seconds: tools, equipment's,
translation of each into English has very little documents, parts. Store useful things = Define a
significance in identifying their true meaning. To proper way of storage
truly understand each of them the 5S's need to be
explained in detail. SEISO: CLEANING
SEIRI : CLEARING UP This is the third step of the 5S. You have defined
SEITON : ORGANISING and build up a working area where useful objects
are stored and tagged and also where it is quick
SEISO : CLEANING and easy to find them. But even then, the working
SEIKETSU : STANDARDIZING area is not clean; dust, dirt, leaks are causing
inefficiencies & health & safety hazards. Avoid
SHITSUKE : TRAINING & DISCIPLINE making dirt in order not to have to clean up. Inspect
and detect failures or a drop in standards.
SEIRI : CLEARING UP
The objective is not just to clean up to have a better
It is the first step of the 5S. Initially, the significance
working environment, but to use the clean area to
is not just "clearing up" objects or things in a
identify the problems and the sources of dirt &
working area, but it concentrates more on
eliminate them. Keep these objectives in mind:
identifying the objects. In this particular case, the
Inspect in order to repair, eliminate the sources of
objective is to differentiate the useful from the
dirt, and look to prevent damage by taking good
useless. You have to throw away the unnecessary
care of the material and search for the most
items, and keep only what you really need, what
practical way to spend less time cleaning up.
is necessary for the work in the bodyshop. What
is useless takes extra space and can be the source SEIKETSU: STANDARDIZING
for error.
This is the fourth step of the 5S. The objects are
During this first step, which consists in throwing all useful, stored, and easy to use, the cleaning
away the useless, there might be tools or time is reduced and there is an improved working
equipment items which cannot be 'classified' area that is clean. Despite all of that, the dirt &
immediately. In other words, nobody can say rubbish reappear, the way people approach their
immediately they are useful or not. What is useful job is not the same for everyone; we do things we
for someone may not be for someone else. are asked, but often with a degree of resentment.
Therefore a list of "questionable objects" should The objective of SEIKETSU is to establish visual
be made and be observed for a time, in order to operational rules to prevent returning to the 'bad
be able to classify them correctly. During this old ways'.
observation period, the objects will have to prove
their usefulness, otherwise they will have to be SEIKETSU is achieved by consensus; it is a critical
thrown away. phase where everyone agrees to put into practice
the same agreed operational rules. This is where
people have to learn how to work together. To
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
reach this state of mind, you should use as many 5. Arrange equipment for Special 5S, as necessary
visual signs as possible: position marking, labels, e.g.:
etc. In order to respect the rules and make the
Tools
problems visible, everyone must understand and
respond to the visual signs installed. Anyone • Empty Skip(s)
should be able to see if everything is alright at a • Brooms
glance. Signs must be clear, easily understood, • Shovels
and accepted by all.
• Buckets
SHITSUKE: TRAINING & DISCIPLINE • Mops
This is the fifth step of the 5S. There is now a good • Camera & Film
working environment, the rules are well defined, • Tags tape & pens
the suggestions increase and there is a real team • Trolleys / Barrows
spirit. Despite that, we need to ensure that it stays
that way, we need more personal and collective Clothing
discipline. • Overalls
The final objective is to make the 5S become a • Gloves
daily behaviour, a working reflex against losses • Goggles
and wastes. DISCIPLINE must be understood as • Heavy-duty footwear
self-demanding, and respect towards others.
SHITSUKE must develop the cleaning habits, the Refreshment
communication, the training of others as often as • Soft drinks / teas, etc.
possible.
• Sandwiches
The 4 basic principles of SHITSUKE are: • Fish & Chips
• Apply the 5S so that it becomes a 'way of life'.
• Train the others in adopting the right habits,
without forgetting yours.
• Be as demanding with yourself as you are with
others.
• Make sure that the commitment to produce a
more effective and efficient working environment
is maintained & meets the required visual
standards continuously.
5S Implementation in Bodyshop
1. Obtain or draw outline plan of the department.

Should be of sufficient size for laminating and
notice board display.
2. Divide the department up into individual areas
of responsibility. Technicians will normally have at
least their own bays but may also have
responsibility for common areas. Semi-productive,
testers, foremen, apprentices should all have
assigned areas. Ideally, offices and office staff
should be included.
3. Develop a marking sheet for each 5S zone.
4. Decide date/time of Special 5S event. Inform all
staff / pay arrangements, etc., DP and Manager
must participate. Arrange refreshments and food
for the event.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225761en
http://vnx.su
Environmental Regulations
Orderly and responsible waste management is not
only very important for the protection of health and
the environment, but it also has great importance
where saving natural resources is concerned.
In body repair shops, since the introduction of the
EU directives on the avoidance of vehicle waste
and the promotion of return, re-use and recycling
of vehicles and their components (2000/53/EU),
more rigorous attention than before is also paid to
avoidance and recycling of waste materials.
NOTE: The organization of disposal in the
operation must comply with the country specific
waste regulations:
In this respect, body repair shops must take into
account and comply with the following
requirements:
• Separate waste according to its recycling and
disposal methods.
• Produce evidence for the correct transport and
disposal of waste.
NOTE: The organization of disposal in the plant
must comply with the requirements of the Waste
Avoidance and Management Act.
The avoidance and recycling of waste must always
take priority. However, despite all measures which
may be taken, waste cannot be completely
avoided.
NOTE: Usable waste which is not allowed in
household rubbish, must be disposed of as special
waste.
All remaining waste must be treated as commercial
waste and disposed of according to the local
requirements.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225767en
http://vnx.su
Body Construction
General The use of modern design and manufacturing
methods, and the use of body panels whose
Two design principles have prevailed in body reshaping and strength properties have been finely
design. The body design can either be an integral balanced, mean that despite the reduced weight,
body-frame or a frame with all attached all safety-related aspects and requirements can
superstructures. Mixed versions are also possible, be met.
with the design significantly increasing the stability
of the frame. In all versions, the passenger cell
must be preserved in the event of an accident. To Integral body-frame
this end, the front and rear ends are designed so
that they absorb the energy of the impact via In the car market, the integral safety body-frame
crumple zones. is the result of this technological development and
manufacturing technology.
E120510
NOTE: Always follow the repair instructions • High torsional rigidity and high flexural strength.
published in the existing workshop literature,
• Weight reduction.
particularly for repairs in the crumple zone. All of
the specified safety requirements must be met after • Economical manufacturing technology.
the work has been carried out. The safety of the driver and passengers is
The integral body-frame is completed with ancillary paramount for every body design. There are two
components, such as doors, hood, bumpers and key safety aspects in the body:
other components. The advantages of this are: • Safety body cell.
• Maximum passive safety due to the stable • Crumple zone.
passenger cell. The safety body cell is characterized by the
• Defined deformation behavior at the front and following design features:
rear.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225771en
http://vnx.su
• Stable pillars, door sills and door profiles. Deformation behavior
• Integrated side impact protection in the doors.
Different materials and design features lead to
• The doors are designed to open even in the
staged deformation of the front and rear of the
event of extreme deformation.
vehicle in an accident. The passenger cell remains
undamaged, and the driver and passengers are
not shut in.
3
2
1
E120511
The rear of the vehicle, like the front of the vehicle,

Item Description
has structures which protect the passenger cell
1 Bolted sheet metal crash element through staged deformation in the event of an
accident. The design layouts, however, are adapted
2 Front side member
to the requirements of the rear area.
3 Rear side member
NOTE: For more information on types of steel, Frame structures
please refer to the section on body materials.
Frame structures are used for off-road vehicles
The bolted crash element is made of high-strength
and light commercial vehicles. With these
steel. Built-in pre-determined folding points prevent
structures, a distinction is made between a
damage to the cross member during gentle
separate frame structure, as on an off-road vehicle,
impacts. The use of bolts means that this can be
and the composite structure of a light commercial
quickly and cheaply replaced.
vehicle.
Side members can be manufactured from panels
The entire body structure of the commercial vehicle
of different thicknesses. These are joined together
body differs fundamentally from that of the saloon
through laser welding. These panels are called
car. The requirements of such a body cannot be
tailored blanks.
compared with a passenger car body. The payload
NOTE: Please note the model-specific instructions is paramount here. Accordingly, the stability
when repairing tailored blanks. requirements must also be taken into account in
the body design.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225771en
http://vnx.su
These are: A monocoque body is a combination of a number
of rigid frame (Rahmen) structures that are
• Floor pan as frame structure with high torsional
assembled into one with rigid fixed points
rigidity and flexural strength.
connecting their component member parts. It is so
• Thicker materials and greater reinforcements designed and manufactured that, when the body
in the frame area. takes forces such as stress or impacts coming from
• Partly large surface panels and high volume starting, acceleration and braking or from the road
shaped parts. surface, or twists, bending moments or twisting
• Side panels only make a small contribution to moments at cornering, it resists those outer forces
the overall stability of the body. by dispersing them over all of the body.
• Longitudinal crimping, reinforcements and
bonded connections prevent the panel surfaces
from oscillating during drive mode. Impact Absorbtion Structure
Monocoque Body Structure
2 1
E120837
Item Description
1 Front Compartment
2 Center Compartment
3 Rear Compartment
The monocoque body has a crushable structure
to absorb collision. impact energy through
deformation of its body structure.The front and rear
compartments are constructed to abosrb the
impact/collision energy.
Concentration of Stress
During impact, the stress is concentrated where
the body shape is altered. For example, to bend a
E113497
metal plate, first open a hole at the bending
position. When the plate is bent, the stress
A monocoque body is made up of a rigid frame concentrated at the area of reduced width and it is
structure (commonly called Rahmen Structure) easily bent here.
rigidly connecting more than one basic member.
Here, Rahmen structure refers to a skeletal
structure that is composed of basic members that
are connected to each other through rigidly fixed
points of which jointed angles never change.
Exposed to an outer force, a Rahmen structure
resists it or, if needed, is deformed as a whole
because the structure consists of fixed rigid joints.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225771en
http://vnx.su
E113499 E120839
The actual monocoque body has reduced cross Item Description

section area in the front side frames, and the upper
member of the front wheel house has bends and 1 Impact Absorbing Portions
holes to disperse the stress of collision through
deformation of the chassis structure.
Impact Dispersion
The impact (outer force) consists of three variables,

3 input point, angle and magnitude. When impact is
1 applied to a vehicle, its direction and magnitude
can be divided into two or more variables. When
the specified force “F1-O” is applied at input point
“O” with angle (vector) “ ”, F1-O for an actual
vehicle is divided into the horizontal forces, F2 and
F3 and the vertical force F4.
2 • F2: To push the front wheel house backward
E120838 • F3: To push the bulkhead upper frame to the
center
Item Description • F4: To push the bulkhead downward
1 Reduction of Cross Section Area
2 Bend
3 Hole
The collision energy passes the stiffest portions
without bending and seeks the weaker portions,
deforming (damaging) these areas until the energy
is expended.
E113502
Collision Angle and Damage
The collision can be categorized into two types

depending on its direction of impact, one is the
centripetal-force collision toward the vehicle’s
center of gravity and another is the tangential- force
collision directed off the center of gravity.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225771en
http://vnx.su
Centripetal Forced Collision degree of deformation is smaller but the area of
damage is larger.
When the impact force is added directly to the
center of the gravity center, the resulting damage
is the most serious.
2
E121682
E120774 Item Description

1 Impacted Area
Item Description
When the impacted area is small as in the case of
1 Center of Gravity an electric pole, the impact force per unit area on
2 Impact Force the car is the greatest, so the degree of
deformation is accordingly the greatest.
Tangential Forced Collision
When the impact force is added to a point out of
the gravity center, the damage is less serious as 1
the vehicle rotates to avoid the impact.
2
E121683
Item Description
1 Impacted Area
E120775
Item Description
1 Center of Gravity
2 Impact Force
Impact Force and Impact Area
Even if the car weight and speed are the same

between the two cases at the time of a crash, the
degree of the damage will be significantly different
according to the object the car crashes.
As the total impacted area is wider, the impact
force per unit area is smaller and accordingly the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225771en
http://vnx.su
Diagnosis and Damage Evaluation

In order to correctly determine the extent of the • Outer panel including seam seals for cracks or
damage caused by an accident, in-depth technical flakes in the paint caused by the accident.
knowledge, practical experience with the technical • Size of the gap on doors and hoods for
equipment and the testing and measuring devices evenness.
is required.
• The vehicle roof for folds (gap measurement on
Assessment of the extent of the damage includes vehicles with sunroof)
visual inspection and dimensional inspection of the • Dotted flange in door section for deformation
vehicle. If damage to the chassis geometry is and cracked weld spots.
visible even during the visual inspection, the vehicle
• The side members and crash components for
is to be inspected on an axle alignment jig.
crumpling and folding.
• Trunk floor and floor pan from above and below
Visual recording of the damage for crumpling.
From a profitability perspective, the possibility of

a sectional replacement must be taken into Hidden damage
consideration when assessing the damage to a
vehicle damaged in an accident. In addition to external indicators, such as flaked
off paint or cracks in the underbody protection, it
NOTE: Training courses are offered on this subject. is vital to check for deformations that are not visible
For an overview, please refer to the Ford Service from the outside (hidden body damage) during a
Organisation's training course brochure. damage assessment. Unless ancillary components
Positive accidental damage assessment can only are removed, it is often impossible to achieve
be achieved if the service technician is able to accurate diagnosis of the underlying body parts.
reconstruct the effect of an impact on the body Particular attention must be paid to the following
structure. components:
For example: • The A, B and C pillars in the roof area.
If the impact occurs on the front left-hand side • Floor pan.
member, the right-hand side member will usually • Rear ancillary components, such as bumper,
also have been damaged. Often the length of this lights, etc.
side member will not have changed, but because
• Trunk floor, spare wheel cavity.
of the rigid body design, it may have become
deformed. This damage can be detected through • Rear coverings, such as interior trim, carpet,
the size of the gap between the door and fender etc.
or by measuring the vehicle. • Lower rubber seals, e.g. in door area (welded
flange).
In the case of more severe impacts, in which the
front part of the vehicle cannot absorb all of the • Area under the rear seat.
impact energy, the passenger cell is also used to • Attachment points of transmission system,
absorb the energy. Here, the energy is transferred steering, engine, drive shafts, front and rear
via the A pillar and distributed there. This results axles.
in deformations in the roof and the door sill. • Electrical components, e.g. radio (damage
NOTE: In order to determine the damage as through shaking).
accurately as possible, it may be necessary to
remove ancillary components, such as bumpers Body Damage Characteristics
and inner fenders.
It is possible to draw conclusions about the extent
of the damage through a visual inspection of the Front Body Damage
external damage. In general, the following areas
are to be checked during the visual inspection: According to the magnitude of the impact force,
the front body, as the first stage, absorbs the
impact before it reaches the suspension-installed
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
points that exert the influence of the impact on the
front wheel alignment. And, as the second stage,
4
the front body prevents the impact dispersion to
the dashboard panel. Finally, as the third stage, it
decrements and weaken the impact that has
reached the dashboard.
3 1
2
E121265
Item Description
1 Fender
2 Front Side Frame
3 Front Bumper Reinforcement
4 Hood
2. When the impact force is greater, the front fender
collides with the outer panel getting rid of the
clearance between the front fender and the front
door. At this time, the engine hood hinge is bent
or broken in its middle.
E121354
1. When the impact from the front is comparatively

small, the bumper is pushed inward causing the
deformation of the front side frame through the
bumper beam, further leading to the deformations
of the front fender, bulkhead and engine hood. E113030
3. The front side frame will be collapsed before the

damper housing and the front wheelhouse will be
greatly deformed. In some serious cases, the
pushed sub-frame will deform the side frame on
the other side, too.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
3
4
E120840
Item Description
1 Damper Housing
1
2 Front Wheel Housing
3 Front Bumper Reinforcement
4 Front Side Frame
4. In a head on collision the front side frame may
be pushed down or pushed up. In both the cases,
with the root of the side frame as the center of 2
rotation, bending moment is generated, causing E121355
the deformation of the front side frame and the

dashboard lower panel. Item Description
• If the front side frame is pushed down, the root 1 Front Door
of the front door hinge is deformed and
2 Front Side Frame
consequently the door is raised.
• Inversely if the front side frame is pushed up, Pushed down
the root of the hinge installed area is also
deformed causing the door to move down.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
2
E121356
Item Description
1 Front Door
2 Front Side Frame
Pushed up
Rear Body Damage
The rear body is composed of the rear frame that

is made up of spot-welded panel parts such as the
rear panel, rear side outer panel, inner panel and E121357
rear floor and skeletal members. If the rear body
takes an impact force, those panels mostly absorb 1. If the impact force is not so big, the rear bumper,
the shock. The rear frame is reinforced particularly rear panel, trunk lid and or tailgate absorb the
with the parts for absorbing the impact because shock through the deformation of either or some
the rear frame has, as a whole, great resistance of them. At this point, it may happen that the rear
against deformation. side outer panel swells.
E121287
Item Description
1 Quarter Panel
2 Skirt Panel
2. The rear floor is also deformed further causing
the deformation of the rear end of the rear frame.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
1
2
E121288
Item Description
1 Rear Frame
2 Rear Floor Panel
3. When the impact force is too great, even the
lower end of the rear pillar and the roof panel are
deformed. The center pillars may also deform.
Sometimes, it goes far enough to deform the rear
frame kick-up area.
1 E121638
1. Depending upon the configuration of the car, the

level of the damage caused by the crash becomes
2 different. When the hit is from the side of the car,
4 first the door is pushed inside causing the
deformation of the outer panel. If the impact is
great, the front pillar, center pillar and side sill are
deformed. Depending upon the level of the impact,
3 the floor is also deformed.
E120841
Item Description
1 Quarter Panel
2 Kick-Up Area
3 Rear Frame
4 Center Pillar
1 2
Side Body Damage
E121289
In order to raise the ability to resist the resistance

deformation, the front pillar, and the side sill center Item Description
on the side body are enhanced with stiffeners and 1 Front Door
the doors with beams inside. The impact force
taken by these members are dispersed to the cross 2 Rear Door
members of the floor and the roof arch.
2. If the front pillar, rear side outer panel of the car
takes a great impact force sideways, that force
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
extends its influences as far as the opposite side
of the car.
2
E121290
Item Description
1 A-Pillar
2 B-Pillar
3 Quarter Panel
3. When the impact force hits the center area of
the front fender, the front wheel takes the impact.
But, depending upon the level of the impact, its
effect may reach the damper housing and the front
side frame. If this happens, more than one part of
the suspension system will be damaged and the
wheel alignment and the wheel base will be out of
adjustment. Not only that, the steering system will
become affected.
E121291
Item Description
1 Damper Housing
2 Front Side Frame
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225774en
http://vnx.su
Body Sheet Metal

Types of steel Example of the use of high-strength steel in side
pillar
The types of steel sheets used for automobile body
are mostly carbon steels (carbon-ferrous alloy)
because of the necessity of meeting molding and
processing requirements and heavy-load conditions 1
on the road. Depending upon the content of carbon
in the steel, the technical feature of the metal is
different. The higher the carbon content is, the
stronger the anti-impact ability is, but the easiness
of its molding and welding processing becomes
lower. Even paneling jobs becomes difficult. For a
body, therefore, low carbon steels, of which carbon
contents are from 0.1 to 0.4 %, are mostly used.
The recent trend is to use high-tension steel,
though much thinner than the conventional soft 2
steel, but capable of providing the same level of
strength.
Types of steels are classified by their properties of
strength and elasticity.
• Normal strength steel has a minimum yield
strength of up to about 210 N/mm².
• High strength steels have a minimum yield
strength of about 150 to 600 N/mm².
• Ultra-high-strength steels have a minimum yield
strength of about 400 to 1200 N/mm².
High-strength and ultra-high-strength steels are E120770
mostly installed in safety relevant locations

(structural components). Among others, these are Item Description
side members, pillars, roof frames. 1 Normal strength steel
Body component parts have various kinds of 2 High strength steel
sections. Because all of them are usually press
formed from a thin steel sheet, they are designed
so as to have different rigidities, depending upon
where it is needed, with reinforcements or with
Normal strength steels
different thicknesses.
Normal strength steels are most often used in body
construction. They are relatively soft and are
therefore particularly suitable for the deep drawing
processes used in body manufacturing. As well as
very good reshaping properties, the panels also
have a relatively high rigidity.
High strength steel panels
The strength of the material and the nature of the

surface can be changed as required by different
engineering processes. In order to achieve suitable
configuration and a good match between
construction specifications and what is possible in
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
production, a large range of high strength panels • Cutting tools have a shorter useful life.
is available. • NOTE: High-strength and ultra-high-strength
The range of the minimum yield strength is from steel panels must not be heated during
180 N/mm² to 460 N/mm². High strength thin steel straightening work.
panels usually have a surface finish. Electrolytic Work without applying heat when carrying out
surface sealing is preferred. straightening work. Losses of strength will occur
Within the group of high strength steels, various at temperatures as low as 400°C.
types of steel are used in body construction: The basic working methods and the tools to be
• Micro-alloyed high strength steels for very used are the same however.
difficult drawn components such as fenders, the
internal components of doors, hoods and
luggage compartment lids or load bearing Coated steel panels
components such as sidemembers,
crossmembers etc. In a similar way to high-strength steel panels,
coated steel panels are finding more applications
• Bake-hardening steels and phosphorus
because of the better corrosion protection which
alloyed steels for external panel components
they offer. There are basically two different process
with higher draw depth and subject to higher
which are used to apply a zinc layer:
operational demands.
• Isotropic materials for flat shaped outer steel • Hot dip zinc coating (no longer used in vehicle
panels on doors, hoods, luggage compartment construction).
lids, roofs. • Electrolytic zinc plating.
The following points must be noted when welding:
Ultra-high-strength steels NOTE: Welding fumes are harmful to health. Make
certain that the workspace is well ventilated and
These steels are predominately used for body use welding fume extraction.
structural components which are relevant to safety. • Zinc starts to melt at about 420°C.
Despite the reduced thicknesses of the panels
• The zinc vaporizes at a temperature of about
used, weight reduction is often achieved together
900°C.
with greater strength.
• The amount of heating determines the damage
As with high-strength steels, special types of steel to the zinc coating, and therefore to the
are used in the ultra-high-strength steels group: corrosion protection.
• Complex phase steels are used for door side • NOTE: Coated panels have a higher electrical
impact carriers, bumper carriers and body resistance, but this can be compensated for by
components relevant to crashes. Besides high increasing the welding current by 10 - 20% .
strength, they have good cold reshaping
properties and are easily welded. Resistance spot welding is particularly suitable
for welding zinc-coated panels, because no
• Dual phase steels have the same properties widespread warming occurs.
as complex phase steels. Because of their high
strengthening properties they are suitable for • With electrolytically zinc-plated panels there is
body reinforcements. no need for any special preparation because
the zinc coating does not need to be removed.
• Residual austenite steels and martensite
phase steels have very high strength levels of
up to 1200 N/mm² and are mostly used in body Tailored blanks
structures relevant to crashes.
Because of the use of such steels, some special Tailored blanks are panels which are made up of
points must be taken into account during body at least two separate panels with different material
repair: thicknesses and/or material properties. The panels
are joined together by a laser weld seam and then
• Increased force required during straightening. shaped in a press.
• Strong springback tendency during alignment
work.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
This technique allows panel shapes to be produced deformation behavior, strength and weight.
which meet special requirements with regard to
Laser weld seams at the sidemember
E120512
NOTE: No cutting, no welding and therefore no Even if a steel plate is bent with your fingers it
sectional repairs are permitted in the immediate returns to the original shape when the force is
area of the laser weld seams. The model specific removed from the plate without leaving any
requirements are documented in the respective deformation. This returnable deformation is called
Body Repair Manuals. an elastic deformation and this characteristic of
Typical examples of application are: metals is referred to as elasticity.
• Sidemember.
• Door inner reinforcement/door frames.
• Wheelhouses.
• Rocker panel inner reinforcement.
• Roof rail inner reinforcement.
When repairing the vehicle body, pay special
attention that such a connection is never separated.
The possible cut line locations are given in the
respective repair manuals.
Characteristics of Steel Sheet

Elasticity
Elasticity is a property that metal has which allows
the metal returns to the original shape when the
force, which caused the deformation, is removed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
Elastic deformation:
E113016
E113015
Automotive body panels such as fenders, engine
If a further pressure is added to the plate beyond hood, roof panel and others are press formed into
a certain point that is determined in relation each required shape from large steel sheets. In
between a load and its resulting amount of this way, the characteristic that the shape of an
deformation, the deformation remains even after object remains changed after a pressure is applied
the pressure is removed and dose not return to the is plasticity. It is also possible to change the shape
original shape. This situation is called the force has of an object by pulling or pressing it. The
reached the elastic limit. The harder the steel is, deformation caused by pulling is called ductility
the greater the elasticity is. Therefore, as the steel and the one by pressing is called malleability. The
is hardened, its elasticity is increased. result of ductile deformation is an elongation and
the one of pressing deformation is compression.
Plasticity
Work Hardening
When a steel plate is bent strongly, it may return
a little toward the original shape, but it remains If a metal wire is repeatedly bent and bent back, it
bent. This is called a plastic deformation and the is gradually hardened. The same way, a steel sheet
characteristic of not returning to the original shape becomes hardened and strong through plastic
is called plasticity. deformation.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
E113017 E113018
If a flat steel sheet is repeatedly bent, the first bent On an actual crashed car, the same work
area (A) remains and the new bent areas are hardening is taking place where it was crashed
formed on both sides of the sheet. It happens due to the external impact force. Work hardening
because the first bent area becomes hardened and also takes place when it is repaired.
strong. In the same way, when a body panel is
press-formed (plastic molding), a work hardening Heat Change
takes place on the sheet. The changes that heat extends to steel sheets can
be divided into the following three kinds.
• Scale (Thin oxidized layer that appears on
heated steel)
• Change to molecular structure
• Expansion and shrinkage
Those changes take place on the steel panel
through heating by welding work including
oxygen/acetylene and others, and friction by
grinding or grindstone work.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
At 392 to 482°F (200 to 250°C), blue heat
brittleness happens to the sheet and if 1328°F
(720°C) is exceeded, red brittleness takes place.
Further, if it goes to over 1652°F (900°C), the steel
grains become large and rough causing oxidization
and worsening the material. Generally, as one of
the heating body repair methods, spotting is widely
used.
Brittleness
Generally, the more heated a metal is, the softer
it becomes and the easier to be worked. But, as
long as soft steel is concerned, its hardness and
tensile strength reaches the highest and after that
at higher temperature, its elongation decreases.
Heat Treatment
As temperature increases, structural change
(transformation) takes place in the metal. If the
cooling speed is quickened, the progress of the
transformation is delayed and, as a result, a metal
structure that is unusual at a normal temperature
can be obtained. Heat treatment is a technical
process to obtain metallic features to meet desired
requirements through heating and cooling.
E120833
Hardening and Tempering
Temperature and Color Change by Heat A kind of heat treatment used for cutting tools and
NOTE: As the heat added to the steel sheet blades that have to be harder than works to be
increases, the color changes until it starts to melt processed.
at 2732°F (1,500°C). • Hardening: If these steel objects are heated
about to 1472°F (800°C) and then submerged
Color Temperature range °F in water or oil, they are quick hardened. As the
(°C) result of this process, the objects become
Dark red 1112 (600) almost 5 times harder. Steel can be hardened
but, at the same time, it becomes brittle.
Red 1292 (700)
• Tempering: In order to provide stickiness to
Rose-pink 1562 (850) steel, the object is heated up to around 1112°F
Yellowish red 1652 (900) (600°C) and then after that, it is gradually and
slowly cooled.
Yellow 1832 (1,000)
Normalizing
Orange 2012 (1,100)
This heat treatment process makes the metallic
White 2192 (1,200) grains minute that have been made large and
Bright white Over 2282 (1,250) rough after being heated or cast and remove
eccentric crystallization and residual stress, thus
Heating Temperature and Material Change returning its property to normal. Usually the metal
is heated up to 1472 to 1652°F (800 to 900°C) and
As steel sheet is heated, its plasticity becomes then gradually cooled down to normal temperature.
higher. However, if the temperature of the sheet
exceeds a certain point, changes to the material Annealing
or hardening brittleness takes place. It is, therefore,
In order to soften a material that has increased in
important in steel process not to exceed 1333.4°F
rigidity and hardness but reduced its elongation,
(723°C) because of its structural change (structural
as the result of the work hardening caused by cold
transformation) that happens at this temperature.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
working or a material that became hard after Steel Sheet Bending
hardening, they are gradually cooled down after
While considering its design (external appearance),
heating in the furnace. Depending upon the kinds
automotive body panels are press formed with
of materials and desired requirements, heating
sharp bent areas where it is necessary for higher
temperature, time duration of holding temperature,
strength. Those sharply bent areas are called
cooling temperature, its speed has to be adjusted.
Crown and has the following categories.
• Low crown: Its curved surface or edge is very
Bending and Strength gently sloping.
• High crown: Its curved surface or edge is very
In considerations of external appearance and sharp.
strength, automotive body panels are press-formed • Combination crown: A low crown and high
in various shapes and configurations. By giving a crown are combined on panel.
steel panel its own designed shape and
configuration, it heighten its strength and, likewise, • Reverse crown: An edge curved inward toward
obtain its needed strength from other parts with the panel.
which it is assembled into a unit.
1 1
2 2
3
4 1
E121264
Item Description Angle Bending
1 High Crown When a panel is bent at a right angle, this bending

is called an angle bending. The angle bending is
2 Low Crown mainly used for door panels and fenders.
3 Combination Crown
4 Reverse Crown
In repairing a damaged body or panel, a smaller
load is required for a low crowned panel because
it has a small curvature, while a high crowned panel
(deep-drawn panel with a high curvature) has some
restoring force against the deformation of the
damaged area. On the other hand, a reverse crown
is incorporated in a panel that has a sharp inward
curvature. Because of this, the strength is so
concentrated that the repairing work becomes E113020
difficult.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
Channel Bending
This way of bending a steel sheet has a greater
strength than angle bending. It is mainly used for
under-body component parts such as a rear frame,
a cross member or a floor frame.
E113023
Hemming
2 It is used at panel joints where an outer panel and
inner panel are press-jointed.
E120834
Item Description 3
1 Rear Cross Member

2 Front Cross Member
1
Box Gutter
2
A skeletal component part with a box-shaped
section. It is used for a side sill, pillar, side rail, front
side frame etc. that require high strength.
E120835
Item Description
1 Door Inner Skin Panel
2 Door Outer Skin Panel
3 Hemming
Burring
It is used around the cutting holes for water drains
on floor panels. The projected edge around a hole
E113022 increases its panel strength.
Beading
It is used for large panels (floor panel, roof panel),
and its panel strength.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
4. Slab making: By heating ingots in the furnace
until the temperature needed for rolling and by
2 using a slab roller to remove bubbles in ingots, the
internal steel structure and also the steel quality
are improved. The thick slabs “normally 100 to
1 300mm (4.0 to 12.0in.) thickness” are produced.
Surface defects and of the slabs that contain
impurities more than limits are cut off.
5. Hot-rolling: Slabs produced through the slab
making process are heated in the furnace until they
reach the temperature required for the hot rolling
E120836
process. The slabs taken out of the furnace have
all the scales on the surfaces removed by a scale
Item Description breaker and then rolled flat to about 25 to 40 mm
1 Rear Floor Panel (1.0 to 1.6 in.) thickness by a rough roller. After the
scales on the surfaces are again removed, they
2 Burring are rolled flat to the required thickness as a product
by a finishing roller. Most of the cool-rolled steel
sheets used for automotive body components are
Manufacturing Process of Steel Sheets further processed by the following process.
6. Picking process: On hot-rolled steel sheets
The alloy of iron (Fe) and carbon ©) is called
rolled at 1472 to 1652°F (800 to 900°C) lots of
“Carbon Steel”. As compared to other metallic
scales grow that impair external appearance and
materials, it is easily mass-produced and thus
lower the quality. They are, therefore, washed with
cheaper in price. Because it is possible to change
sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid before the cool
the property of a carbon steel as is required by
rolling process.
adding other elements or by heat-treating it, carbon
steel is very widely used in the industries. Steel 7. Cold rolling process: After washed with acid,
sheets made from rolling of carbon steel ingots are they are press-rolled to the required thickness.
used widely in the automotive industry because it 8. Annealing process: Because the crystal
is especially good on presswork process. Carbon structures in steel sheets are elongated in the
steel accounts for more than 50% of the total direction of press rolling after cold rolling, the
weight of a car. structures are left deformed causing work
1. Iron manufacture: Iron is contained in iron ore hardening. As the result of that, they are not good
as iron oxide. The iron oxide is further tightly mixed on work the process. In order to ease work
with other minerals called gangue. In order to processing, the steel sheets are heated up to about
extract only iron from iron ore it is first necessary 1202 to 1292°F (650 to 700°C) and held at that
to remove oxygen (reduce) from the iron oxide and temperature for a certain time so that their
then separate gangue from the reduced iron. Coke structures are correct and re-crystallized.
(carbon) heated together with iron oxide plays the 9. Thermal refining rolling process: Thermal
role of reducer and limestone the role of gangue refining rolling process is carried out to improve
separator. the steel sheets mechanical characteristics and
2. Steel making: The pig ore extracted after the give a final finish on the sheet surfaces. After this
washing process includes excess carbon and other process, the elongation rate is improved to 0.3 to
impurities that make the ore too hard and brittle. 3 %.
Therefore, it can be used only for limited purposes
so that it is necessary through this process to
reduce carbon contents and other impurities in Characteristics of Steel Sheets
order to obtain the desired chemical contents.
Steel sheets are of two types. One is a hot rolling
3. Ingot making Process to make ingots by pouring steel sheet (JIS mark SPH) and a cold rolling sheet
molten steel into a mold. The quality of ingots (JIS mark SPC). A hot rolling steel sheet is rolled
dominates the surface and inside quality of steel above re-crystallization temperature “normally 1472
sheets. to 1652°F (800 to 900°C)”. In order to make it
thinner, it is again cold rolled, but as it becomes
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
hard due to the rolling process, it is softened On the other hand, the surface of a cold rolling
through an annealing process for better forming. steel sheet is smooth with gloss (often called
This is called a cold rolled steel sheet. In polished sheet) as it is subjected to the pickling
automotive body components, while hot rolling process, cold rolling , annealing, and thermal
steel sheets are used for frames and other parts refining rolling process after the hot rolling process.
of load vehicles like trucks and vans, cold rolling
steel sheets are mostly used for monocoque bodies Easiness on Work Process and Strength
of passenger car. Because anti-corrosion feature Most of the body component parts are press
is required for such panel parts as outer panels, formed. The easiness on presswork is determined
side frame panels and wheelhouses, zinc treated by technical specifications of materials. Those
cold rolling steel sheets are widely used. technical specifications are, in turn, determined by
material contents as well as the extent of thermal
Sheet Thickness
refining rolling. If the easiness of presswork is
During the hot rolling process, slabs must be rolled compared in terms of elongation rate obtained by
while they are still hot. As they are cooled while an elongation test, a hot rolling steel sheet (SPHC)
being rolled, they cannot be rolled thin flat. On the has about 35 % elongation rate while a cold rolling
other hand, cold rolling steel sheets can be rolled sheet (SPCC) has about 43 %, indicating that a
at normal temperature; it is possible to manufacture cold rolling steel sheet has better easiness than
thin steel sheets. presswork. If compared with pulling strength, a hot
rolling steel sheet (SPHC) has a 320 Mpa (33
Sheet Surface kgf/mm2) nominal value, while a cold rolling steel
As hot rolling steel sheets are rolled at a high sheet (SPCC) has a 290 Mpa (30 kgf/mm2),
temperature, a black oxidized (black skin sheets) showing no substantial difference between the two,
grows on the sheet surface. The surface of the but when it comes to high grade materials, their
sheets that have been washed with oxide is gray. pulling strength come down to 270 Mpa (28
kgf/mm2).
Types Marks Purpose Carbon Mangan Phos- Sulphur Classific Mark

©) (Mn) phor (P) (S) ation
Type 1 SPCC General Less than Less than Less than Less than Annealed A
Use 0.12 0.05 0.040 0.045 only
Type 1 SPCC General Less than Less than Less than Less than Normal S
Use 0.12 0.05 0.040 0.045 thermal
refining
Type 2 SPCD Drawing Less than Less than Less than Less than 1/8 hard- 8
0.10 0.45 0.035 0.035 ness
Type 2 SPCD Drawing Less than Less than Less than Less than 1/4 hard- 4
0.10 0.45 0.035 0.035 ness
Type 3 SPCE Deep Less than Less than Less than Less than ½ hard- 2
Drawing 0.08 0.04 0.030 0.030 ness
Type 3 SPCE Deep Less than Less than Less than Less than Full hard- 1
Drawing 0.08 0.04 0.030 0.030 ness
Anti-rust Steel Sheets require high anti-rust conditions. Some of the

well-known zinc-plated steel sheets are an
In order to raise the anti-rust feature, the anti-rust electro-zinc plated steel sheet, molten zinc plated
steel sheets are electro-plated with zinc, tin or steel sheet, and alloyed molten zinc plated steel
aluminum on their surfaces. Among them, sheet.
zinc-plated steel sheets have the most reliable
anti-rust feature so that these steel sheets are most
widely used for automotive component parts that
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
Electro Zinc Plated Steel Sheet much improved high-tension steel sheet in
easiness in press forming, and welding has been
This is an anti-rust steel sheet on which surface
developed, it is now used for skeletal members
high purity zinc is crystallized through electric
and reinforcement members and even for body
plating process. Though its zinc-plated thickness
panels. As the high-tension steel sheet is thinner
is thinner than that of the molten plated steel sheet,
than the conventional soft steel sheet, though it
this sheet is better that in press forming, welding
provide the same level of strength, its use reduces
and surface plating because it surface is much
to the body weight.
evener. But, it is inferior to the molten zinc plated
steel sheet in anti-corrosion feature as it cannot Technical Characteristics
be think-plated. • High tensile strength
• High yield point (the point where material
changes from elastic to plastic)
• High yield rate (yield point/tensile strength)
Sheet Thickness Guidelines

Coating
Manufacturers use coated and non-coated steel
sheets for building the vehicle. In most of the cases
E113026
the sheet blanks are coated either in single side
or in both sides. Coating provides better resistance
against corrosion and improves the welding and
Molten Zinc Plated Steel Sheet
other parameters of the steel.
Steel sheets are covered with zinc by dipping them
However pretreatment of BIW (body In White) in
into molten zinc. This sheet has better
the early painting stages and adequate sealer
anti-corrosive features than others but is inferior
application provides sufficient resistance to fight
to the electro-zinc plated steel sheet in welding
with corrosion.
and painting.
Sheet Thickness
This model is produced using sheet panels of
various thickness. Where strength and rigidity is
required combination and tailor panels are
deployed. Given below are the thickness of the
sheets for general understanding.
0.63, 0.75, 0.80, 0.85, 0.90, 1.00, 1.13, 1.25, 1.38,
1.50, 1.75, 2.00, 2.25, 2.50, 2.75 & 3.00
Aluminum
E113027
Aluminum is becoming ever more important in body

construction because of the trend to reduce weight.
High-tension Steel Sheets Doors, hoods and body outer panels are
increasingly being made of aluminum alloy panels.
Though thick high-tension steel sheets, of which
Although at the time of publication of this
tensile strength is more than 550 MPa (55
document, Ford of Europe has not yet introduced
kgf/mm2), have been used for frames or other
any aluminum body or aluminum body components,
component parts of heavy-duty vehicles, its yield
this topic is briefly described in this section.
point and yield rate are too high to provide the
desired easiness of press forming and welding NOTE: Fine aluminum dust may catch fire if a
strength, so it has been determined not to use it flame or spark touches it. All persons working in
for automotive body panels. Later, however, as a
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
the workshop should pay special attention to this NOTE: If uncontrolled heating is used on an
danger. aluminum panel, it will very quickly be destroyed,
All the tools needed for body repair must be and a new one must then be installed. The
suitable for working aluminum, and they must be necessary specialist knowledge cannot be given
only used on aluminum. in theory, special courses must be attended
instead.
The main properties of aluminum are:
In contrast to steel, aluminum does not display any
• Low weight. surface color change when heated. This therefore
• High resistance to corrosion. means that the level of heating of the material
• High strength. cannot be seen.
• High deformation rigidity. Only once the material is overheated does a
• Very good heat conductivity. change in the material structure of the surface
occur. By the time this has occurred, the structure
• Very good electrical conductivity. of the material is already seriously damaged, and
NOTE: When working aluminum components pay its strength very much reduced.
particular attention to avoid the danger of contact Overheated aluminum components must always
induced corrosion. The workplace must be free of be replaced.
steel swarf, and tools which have worked steel
panels must not be used.
In the electrochemical potential series, aluminum Aluminum welding
has a negative potential of 1.23V in relation to
steel. Because of this, when aluminum and steel Aluminum welding requires a welder which is
touch and an electrolyte is present, contact specially designed to meet these requirements.
corrosion occurs. NOTE: As a rule, vehicle manufacturers require
The following points should therefore be noted: that persons who wish to weld aluminum must
show evidence of having completed special training
• Use only checked and coated connecting
in aluminum welding. Please study the guidelines.
components (bolts, nuts, washers etc.).
• Always use new bolts. Both repair welding processes are based on fusion
welding.
• Use adhesives and sealants which are tolerant
towards aluminum. • MIG welding (metal-inert gas welding).
• No steel swarf in the workplace. Clean the • MAG welding (metal-active gas welding).
workplace and pay attention to any Success of aluminum welding partly depends on
steel-sanding dust from neighboring workplaces. how well the surface oxidation can be removed.
• Use a separate set of aluminum working tools. Because aluminum oxide remains solid at the
• Use wire and rotating brushes made of stainless melting point of pure aluminum, it is important to
steel. remove it before welding.
NOTE: In-depth knowledge and skill in panel • Melting point of aluminum (approx. 660 °C).
beating techniques are the basic requirements for • Melting point of aluminum oxide (approx. 2040
the repair of aluminum panels. °C).
In the main, aluminum panels can be worked using The aluminum surface must be cleaned before
the same processes as used for steel panels. welding. Cleaning improves the later fusion
There are however some special features to pay penetration and prevents contamination of the
attention to: welding wire.
• Do not use steel hammers or sharp-edged panel NOTE: If a stainless steel brush is used, it must
beating tools. never come into contact with steel components,
• Only use hammers with smooth surfaces. so that it does not become contaminated.
• Working cold aluminum leads quickly to The following three steps are to be performed in
embrittlement. For this reason, perform more preparation:
extensive mechanical deformation removal
under exact temperature controlled heating.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
• Clean the surface. Use a chemical cleaner to
remove all traces of wax and other
contaminants.
• Remove the oxide. This can be done using
abrasive paper or a stainless steel brush.
• Wipe the oxide dust away with a lint-free cloth.
Aluminum oxide forms very quickly, therefore steps
2 and 3 should be performed immediately before
welding.
Before working on the vehicle body, create a test
seam on scrap which is made of identical material.
Test the test piece visually and destructively, to
make certain that all welding parameters are
correctly set, and an acceptable weld seam can
be achieved.
An optimum weld can be recognized by the
following quality features:
• All visible weld surfaces are clean, light and
have the same profile.
• The weld seam should have the same height
and width over its complete length.
• There must have been complete melting
between the surfaces of the work piece and the
weld metal.
• The correct penetration has been achieved
when a thin continuous line can be seen on the
reverse side.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225776en
http://vnx.su
Tools and Equipment for Body Repairs

Alignment systems Straightening and alignment repairs are often
required to restore a vehicle body to its original
NOTE: Please refer to the Ford Service Equipment shape after accident damage.
Catalog for information on the body tools Universal aligning and measuring systems and
recommended by Ford. universal alignment angle systems are suitable for
this work.
Item Description • Simple to use.

– Stationary design with drive-on ramp.
1 Universal aligning and measuring system
– Height-adjustable aligning platform.
2 Universal alignment angle system – Universal gauge extensions with fast
Basically, the aligning and measuring system must anchoring ability around the whole
satisfy the following requirements: circumference of the aligning platform.
• Facility to test individual body measurement
• Universally applicable to all types of passenger
points, with or without aggregates being
car. Can also be used on light commercial and
removed.
off-road vehicles.
• Accepts the forces involved during straightening. Alignment angle devices survey the vehicle at
several points on the body. These are usually
• High stability and mobility.
points which are also used in production. In
• Can accept all or part of the weight of the addition, a recording over the rocker panels is
vehicle. possible. A measuring system is not needed,
• Quick to set up. because the necessary body points are specified
with gauges. For this purpose, vehicle specific or
universal gauges are available.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Universal alignment systems consist of a vehicle As a basic principal, body reference points should
mounting (universal clamps at the rocker panels) be chosen which are shown in the body frame
and a pulling device. In addition, a measuring measurement data sheet.
system is required.
NOTE: To be able to determine difference in
NOTE: Because universal clamps are used, the measurements, the same reference points must
rocker panel area must be reworked for optical and always be chosen on both sides. For this purpose
corrosion protection reasons after the repair is the beam compass must be positioned
completed. symmetrically.
Pay attention to the following points: Comparison measurements can also be made on
• Clean the attachment areas. the outside of the body. Depending on the damage,
left/right measurements (symmetry measurements)
• Anchor the vehicle free of stress on the relevant and diagonal measurements can be made using
system. the beam compass, telescopic rod or a measuring
• Support the aggregates to take strain off the tape.
body.
Wheel Base Gauge
Measuring systems Used to measure the wheel base length,

dimensions of a body, and an under body.
In order to exactly diagnose a damaged vehicle Using together with a centering gauge, it is possible
body, measuring systems are required. Depending to numerically evaluate the level of the damages.
on the measuring method, the systems vary in
having mechanical, optical and acoustic measuring
devices. In some cases, hybrid versions of
particular systems are found.
NOTE: When working with each measuring system,
the manufacturer's instructions provided in the
description of the measuring equipment must be
followed.
Basically, the measuring systems must meet the
following requirements:
• Universally applicable to all types of passenger
E121045
car. Also can be used on light commercial and
off-road vehicles.
Tram Tracking Gauge
• Suitable for all accident damage.
Used to measure the size of a damage of a body
• Fast capture of body measurement points in the
and other large parts.
underfloor and external areas.
• Data catalog to record all measurement points Because of its expandable measuring probes, it
(length, width and height) both with and without can be widely used for a variety of measurements.
the aggregates being installed.
NOTE: Basic and in-depth training is offered on
the following topics. You will find an overview of
the complete range of training offered in the Ford
Service Organization training brochure.
Beam compass
The beam compass is a very practical and
straightforward aid for measuring bodywork and
especially floor assemblies. The beam compass
can be used to detect dimensional variations
across the length and the width by means of
comparison measurements and diagonal
measurements.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Centering Gauge Laser measuring systems

Used to measure the twists, bending in a side or These systems use laser beams which are
forward/ rearward way of the body and frame. projected in one or more planes.
The deformation of a body and frame can be easily
viewed by eye.
By the use of two parallel laser heads which can

be turned, symmetrical points of a vehicle body
can be tested and compared. Using the linear
scales which are attached to the measuring points,
the measurement data is read off with the aid of
the projected laser beams.
The integral inclination gauge also allows
differences in height to be quickly checked.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Mechanical measuring system • Fast deployment.
The use of mechanical measuring equipment is an • Simple to use.
easy and effective way to check a vehicle frame • Can be extended using adapters, measuring
and chassis assembly quickly, exactly and reliably. probes and measuring tubes.
In many cases an assessment of the damage can Measuring systems which are firmly mounted on
be made with the help of this system, without the an aligning platform require more work in setting
need for elaborate setting up. them up. They are used to constantly check
measurements during alignment work.
This type of mechanical measuring system has
measuring scales and measuring slides in three
measuring axes. So that the body can be
measured, the vehicle is secured on the aligning
platform base frame using four universal chassis
clamps. The exact fixing points are given in each
respective data sheet.
Acoustic-electronic measuring systems

These measuring systems can be combined with
all current aligning platforms. In addition these
measuring systems can be used independently of
Because of its self-centering mount, measurement an aligning platform by using a vehicle lift or
can be carried out by one person. suitable support stands.
Further advantages:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Item Description those of the acoustic measuring systems. They
can also be set up on a suitable understructure,
1 Ultrasound measuring instrument without an alignment jig.
2 Mechanical-electronic measuring system After this system has been arranged under the
vehicle floor and adjusted to three undamaged
Acoustic measuring systems use ultrasonic vehicle measuring points, the measuring arm is
emitters and sensors to survey a body. brought up to the required measuring points and
To do this, ultrasonic emitters are mounted on the the readings compared with the reference values.
vehicle using special attachments. During the The data is transmitted to a computer where it is
measuring process the ultrasonic emitters evaluated and the results displayed on a screen.
constantly send out signals which are received by
sensors (microphones) and then passed to a
computer. The measurements are displayed on Panel beating tools
the computer screen and are compared with the
required values supplied by the vehicle Depending on the type and extent of the damage
manufacturer. to the vehicle body, very different tools may be
needed to repair it. The most usual tools and the
Mechanical-electronic measuring system way they are used are described below.
The ways in which mechanical-electronic
measuring systems can be used are similar to

1 Aluminum hammer 5 Pulling lever and spoon
2 Tapered hammer 6 Caulkers
3 Universal hand dolly 7 Body plane
4 Box file 8 Body file
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Item Description • Straightening of a dent from the inside without
a counterhold (hollow leveling).
9 Gas torch
• Working a panel from outside with or without a
10 Soft soldering equipment counterhold.
11 Shape gauge Tapered hammer
12 External dent remover/puller The tapered hammer is chiefly used to rectify small
high-spots.
Aluminium hammer
Some other type of hammers are shown below.
The aluminum hammer is the most important and
most commonly used tool during body panel repair.
The most usual areas of application are:
E113058
Universal hand dolly Using the file-cut imprint on the panel surface, the
effect and extent of the blows from the panel
Because of its versatile shape, the universal hand
beating hammer can be judged.
dolly can be used as a counterhold in almost all
areas of the vehicle body. Pulling lever and spoon
It is particularly suitable for use as a counterhold If access to the rear of the damage with the panel
when rectifying material excess. beating hammer is not possible, a panel beating
Because of its weight, the universal hand dolly can lever can be employed.
also be used as a hammer to straighten a dent Once the worst of the damage is rectified, work
from inside without counterhold (hollow leveling). continues with the spoon. This also allows short
Box file
striking movements to be made in inaccessible
areas.
The box file is mainly used as counterhold in fine
A spoon is often used as a counterhold in work
straightening work with the aluminum hammer. It
with the panel beating hammer.
is available in various shapes and sizes.
The most common type of spoons are shown
The corrugated surface (file-cut) prevents the panel
below.
from stretching during fine straightening work (barb
effect).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
E113060
Caulkers • The zero-cut file grade is used in the first

working operation to remove the paint layer.
A caulker is mostly used in edge areas. In this case
the caulker is inserted on the inside of the damaged • The finer 1st and 2nd cut grades are used in
area. the second working operation to remove as little
material as possible from the panel.
Selected blows on the shaft of the tool allow the
damaged edge area to be reworked. Gas torch
Caulkers can however also be used for The main area of use of the gas torch is heat
straightening small areas which can only be working of small and mild dents. It is also suitable
reached from the back through small openings. for soft soldering work on body panels.
Body plane The ready-to-use gas torch consists of the following
parts:
The body plane consists of the two-faced plane
blade and the solid plane body, which prevents • Gas canister with fixing.
pressure deformation of the plane blade. • Burner with self-light facility.
The body plane is available in half-round and flat • Small and large burner heads.
versions. The main application areas are: Compare with oxy-acetylene equipment, the gas
• Recognition of surface high spots by creation burner has the advantage of easier handling due
of a so-called plane image. to its lower weight and shorter set-up times
• Removal of excess solder after its application because of the quick-change burner heads.
to uneven areas. Soft soldering equipment
Body file Despite good panel beating technique, it is not
The body file is used solely during heat treatment always possible to rectify all unevenness. For that
working of dents. reason, application of filling solder is an important
part of surface treatment. Similarly the surface of
Because of the solid body of the file, it can absorb weld seams created during partial repairs can be
much heat. It stabilizes repair areas which are optimized.
being straightened by warming. It does this by rapid
removal of heat from the repair area, which has Dollys
the effect of stabilizing the body panel. The most common type of dollys used are shown
Body files are graded by the size of their teeth below.
(file-cut):
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
E113059
NOTE: New wooden paddles must be soaked in achieving an economical repair to a vehicle body
clean engine oil before use, so that the filling solder outer skin. These repair methods are used on
does not attach to the wooden block. vehicle body components which are inaccessible
A complete soft soldering kit consists of tinning from the inside. Small dents such as those caused
paste, soft solder and brush. In addition, a set of during parking and larger areas of damage such
wooden paddles with a variety of shapes and a lint as on the side panel, rocker panel etc. can be
free cloth rag are needed. rectified.
NOTE: Since 07/2003, no lead compounds are Basically there are three different methods:
permitted to be used in production. In the workshop • Straightening using a slide hammer attached to
suitable lead-free solder must also be used. U-washers, pull bits or corrugated wire.
• Straightening using the slide hammer attached
Shape gauge
to a pull electrode.
The shape gauge is used to check the contours of • Straightening using a pulling assembly and
the area to be reshaped, when there is no other fulcrum.
way of recognizing and checking the basic shape.
Hydraulic tools
There are various designs of shape gauge. The
short design made of steel is used for smaller Use: A universal tool for minor adjustments of
repair areas. Because its segments are very thin, body, such as pillars, doors and roofs.
it allows a very exact fit at a contour. The longer
Maintenance: Check for leakage and change
design made of plastic is applied to larger areas.
gaskets if necessary.
Because of its wider segments, it is better suited
to large surface contours. Keep the hydraulic couplings clean.
Put on the coupling protector when the tool is not
External dent remover/puller
in use.
Because of their multi-purpose nature, external
dent removers and pullers are very useful in
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
E113803
Pull Clamps
There is a clamp for almost every need. Always
choose a clamp that withstand the pull force.
USES: Universal self-locking clamps for pulling
work.
E113804
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Welding gear
As in the past, the dominant process in body
construction is resistance welding, in particular
spot welding. Depending on body type, up to 5000
spot welds are applied, either by welding robots or
in the multi-point welding machine.
total thickness of over 3 mm need to be made,

Item Description
puddle welding must be used.
1 MIG welding machine Although in principle high-strength panels are
2 Resistance spot welding machine adequately- or well-suited to resistance spot
welding, problems may arise, especially where
During repairs the resistance spot welds used in large panel thicknesses or three layers of panel
production must be re-created accordingly. need to be welded together in the workshop, but
NOTE: If a suitably powerful welding machine is these problems can be overcome.
not available and multi-layer panel joints with a In particular, older welding equipment does not
have the latest welding technology nor welding
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
power and therefore cannot reliably join panel prevents the milling cutter from slipping while
thicknesses greater than 3 mm. working.
Modern equipment with inverter technology allows Spot Cutter (Drill Type)
better spot weld quality because of a constant high
welding current. In addition the high welding current Used with an air drill to cut off spot welded areas.
makes shorter welding times possible and the Makes work easy, because it does not leave any
electrodes therefore have a longer working life. nuggets on the base plate.
In the case of resistance spot welded connections,
faults in the weld are difficult to see from the
outside. It is therefore absolutely vital to know the
particular properties of the welding machine being
used. A test weld with subsequent peeling test will
provide information on the quality of the weld. The
spot weld itself must not separate, it must tear
away leaving a hole.
In the production of vehicle bodies, MIG welding
plays a minor role as a joining technique. It is used
for components subject to high demands, such as
threaded plates for axle mountings, or at locations
which cannot be spot welded for access reasons.
Spot Cutter (Holso Type)
Separating tools Used with an air drill to cut off spot welded areas.
Because its cutting depth is adjustable the base
NOTE: Without exception, before starting work you plate is not damaged.
must read the safety and warning instructions in
the chapter "Safety Instructions". In addition, pay Grind off the remaining nuggets with a sander.
attention to the warning instructions of the particular
equipment manufacturer.
A variety of tools are available to the body
specialist for the separation of body components.
The use of the different tools depends on the
joining technique involved and the access available
to the repair location.
Spot weld milling tool

The spot weld milling tool is suitable for releasing
spot welded connections.
Spot Peeling off Special Air Drill

Used to cut off spot welded areas.
The cutter not dislodged during cutting work.
In contrast to a normal drill, the milling depth can

be set. This prevents the underlying panel from
being damaged. In addition a safety fixing system
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Rod sander
Spot welds which are not accessible to the spot
weld milling tool can be ground out using the rod
sander.
Rotary Cutter
Used with an air drill to cut off cornered welded
areas on aluminum alloy bodies.
It is also suitable for releasing MIG spot welds and
MIG seam welds.
Short stroke saw

The short stroke saw is most often used to
separate vehicle body components.
Spot Cutter Grinder

Used for grinding spot cutters (drill type).
Easily grinds dull spot cutters within a short time.
It is also very flexible in its ability to access

hard-to-reach areas.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Orbital saw
Among other things the orbital saw is suitable for
the creation of narrow and straight cuts.
In addition the cut can be made to an exact depth

limit. This prevents damage to underlying
components.
After any work with swarf producing machines, all
swarf must always be removed from cavities,
otherwise there is the danger of corrosion.
Air Auto Hammer

Used to roughly cut panels.
Compact and light in weight. Superb in Air Saw
hammering-out work. Used to cut outer panels.
As a panel cutter, it can cut in a straight or curved Speedy cutting but vibration and noise significant.
lines.
No cutting chips produced.
Vibration and noise significant.
Air Chuck Grinder

Used to cut panels with a grinding wheel attached.
Compact and light in weight. Superb in cutting
work.
Speedy cutting.
Protection needed to avoid contacting sparks
splattered during cutting.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Installation Tools
Vise Grip Wrench
Used to install panels and tightening welded areas.
Adjustments of openings’ dimensions and
tightening forces can be easily made.
Panels not scratched easily.
E122026
C-Clamps
Some other type of C-Clamps are shown below
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
1 2
3 4
E121044
Item Description
1 Door Opening Clamp
2 U-Shaped Clamp
3 C-Shaped Clamp
4 Clamp with Straight Jaws
Screw Clamp
Used for clamping panel for joining.
E113053
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Safety Protection Gear Anti-mist treated.
Light weight and good visibility.
Welding Mask
Used during welding work.
It protects the technician from flying sparks.
E113056
Ear Plugs
Used during panel sheet work.
Small and light weight. Does not cause fatigue.
E113054
E113057
Anti Dust Mask

Used during putty grinding/polishing work.
Light weight and comfortable to wear.
Authorized by governmental agency as 2nd grade
item.
E113055
Face Protector
Used during sanding work on welded areas.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225778en
http://vnx.su
Establish Repair Method

General NOTE: Refer to each vehicle specific chapter in
the workshop literature for details on the individual
Before starting an accident repair, a sequence plan points.
must be compiled, containing an outline of the Job steps:
individual job steps.
• Establish separating cuts and mark them.
Similarly, the availability and preparation of all the – Take into account the requirements given in
necessary materials, spare parts, tools, workshop the repair instructions.
equipment such as alignment and measuring
systems must also be checked. – Place the new part ready for use and include
it in the repair plan.
– Decide on the joining method.
Planning • Separate and remove the old part.
NOTE: The body interconnection is to be – Take into account the special features
maintained if possible. Repair is preferred to particular to the vehicle.
renewal of body components. Furthermore, check • Prepare the joint locations.
if it is possible to perform a partial repair. – Sand and align the weld flanges.
During planning the following job steps must be – Offer up the new part.
observed and adhered to: – Apply corrosion protection measures.
• Determine the direction of the main impact and • Weld the new part into place.
the extent of the damage. • Perform sealing and corrosion protection
• Establish the repair method. measures.
• Work out which repair components will be • Create an outer surface ready for painting.
needed and obtain them. • Insert cavity protection.
• Establish what disassembly work is needed. • Perform a quality control check.
• Check for specific features such as airbags,
route of water drain hoses, electric cables and
the location of NVH elements.
Repair Outline
• Cut out the old parts (only when the new parts On a minor damaged body or panel, the repair is
are waiting ready). processed through first repairing the damaged part
• Install the new parts. by washer welding or using hammers and dollies
• Apply solder/seal the repair location. (curve master models), reforming with putty and
• Recreate the corrosion protection. finally finishing it.
• Constantly check all the job steps. On a major damaged vehicle, vehicle is first roughly
reformed using a frame correction machine and
After the scope of the work has been determined, then replacing damaged panel and frame parts
before making the repair, check all own technical with new ones. After panel repairing work follow
prerequisites: with anti-rust treatment, sealing, and partial painting
• All tools required must be to hand. processes. Depending upon the condition of the
• The same applies to materials, replacement damage, the repair of plastic parts may became
parts, sealants and adhesives. necessary.
• You must have the knowledge needed to use Minor damaged vehicle
all the necessary technology. • Remove related parts (If necessary).
• Pulling out work by washer welding.
Chronological sequence of repair • Hammering out correction by hammers and
dollies.
The actual sequence of repair can be divided into
• Reforming by applying putty/body filler.
the following steps:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225780en
http://vnx.su
• Anti-rust treatment. Commodity Depreciation Guidelines-
• Vehicle ready for further process. India
Major damages vehicle Commoditywise Depreciation
• Remove related parts (If necessary). Commodity Depreciation %
• Rough pulling out by body pulling/alignment
Rate of depreciation for 50%
machine.
all rubber nylon/ plastic
• Replace damaged parts. parts, tyres and tubes,
• Panel repairs and parts positioning. batteries and air bags
• Anti-rust treatment. Rate of depreciation for 30%
• vehicle ready for further process. all fibre glass compon-
ents
Repair or Replace Rate of depreciation for Nil

all parts made of glass
This is a critical decision often practiced in the Rate of depreciation for ~
bodyshop. Depending upon nature and severity of all other parts including
the damage this decision is taken. wooden parts is to be
Often this decision is influenced by various factors: as per the following
table
• Severity of the damage
• Availability of the parts (Body panels) as Aging Factor
serviceable Age of the vehicle % of Depreciation
• Estimated cost of overall repair
Not exceeding 6 Nil
• Time required to complete the repair months
• Body shop capability in carrying out the repair
Exceeding 6 months 5%
• Manufacturers direction
but not exceeding 1
Ford has made list of serviceable parts exclusively year
to improve the quick turn around in the body repair
Exceeding 1 year but 10%
and thus reduce the overall repair cost burden to
not exceeding 2 years
customers.
All panels are available as a replacement and it is Exceeding 2 years but 15%
essential to replace them to complete the repair not exceeding 3 years
quickly and economically. However, the damage Exceeding 3 years but 25%
is small it is better to perform spot repair and rectify not exceeding 4 years
the damage.
Exceeding 4 years but 35%
Country specific insurance policies and governance not exceeding 5 years
also plays pivotal role in deciding the repair or
replace the component during repair. Exceeding 5 years but 40%
not exceeding 10 years
An experienced bodyshop manager in association
with Body repair manual and parts guidelines can Exceeding 10 years 50%
take decision to improve quick turn around and
increase the satisfaction of customers.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225780en
http://vnx.su
Alignment Check
General Measuring Slides
If there is concern that the body has been
deformed, the body must be measured. Several
measuring procedures and tools can be used for
this purpose.
With simple measuring scale/tool, it is possible in
most cases to draw a conclusion about the extent
of the damage through a quick measurement
without time-consuming assembly work
(straightening jig).
Measuring System
To measure the body imperfections and to aid and
improve collision repair efficiency and accuracy,
measuring system is inevitable equipment plays
vital role in collision repair shop along with Body
repair bench.
Ford India as per BSQC guidelines and as per
performance approved CAR-O-LINER (conditions
apply) measuring system to be used in body shops
for damage measurement and to improve repair
efficiency and accuracy.
Mechanical Measurement
CAR-O-MECH (conditions apply) mechanical
E113063
measuring system is deployed for taking
measurements. It shall be used with MARK - 6
collision repair bench. Slide and Bar arrangement
Suppliers provide and support wide range of

extensive trainings in car body measurement
techniques.
Measuring Bars
E113064
E113062
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225782en
http://vnx.su
Measuring exercise with part out Universal measuring slide and stylus
E113065 E113068
Measuring exercise with part in Data reception and computer table
E113066
Flexible measuring bar
E113069
E113329
Electronic (Computer Based) measuring system Measurement screen
CAR_O-TRONIC (conditions apply) electronic

computer based measuring equipment provides
high flexibility, data accuracy and high reliability in
body measurement. Simplifies the measuring
process and measurements shall be completed
quickly.
E113070
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225782en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: For the floor pan and the exterior of the
vehicle, measuring data is contained in the
vehicle-specific repair instructions for each vehicle.
Manufacturers of measuring and straightening jigs
create corresponding measurement sheets for each
vehicle.
Data sheets with the body frame dimensions for
body measurement are specified in the
model-specific repair instructions in each case.
All dimensions were measured with the aggregates
removed, starting from the center of the hole, using
an electronic measuring system and are specified
in mm. Measuring points that are specified in a curve are
A tolerance of ± 3 mm applies to all specified to be measured so that the greatest distance from
dimensions. All detailed illustrations correspond to the opposite measuring point is reflected.
the left-hand side of the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225782en
http://vnx.su
Measuring data example
5
3
2 4
9
8
7
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1343 1580
14
12
63
987
17 188
87
49
36 7
12
749 594 1118

803 1658 806
10 56
E113821
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225782en
http://vnx.su
Underbody Frame Dimension
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12
10 11
8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1298
980
980
934
440
1298
1298
1170
954
954
998
630
227 276
907 713
1537 902
1581
1669
1956
2200
2402
E113822
For exact determination of the measuring points,

enlarged sections are shown.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225782en
http://vnx.su
Straightening
Repairing Major Damage/Collision the damages over the whole vehicle. The man/
hours and repair estimation is heavily depended
upon whether the preliminary diagnose is correct
Basic Repair Work Processes or not.
It is possible that the crash impact reaches the

body’s skeletal member parts and the damaged Diagnose Damaged Areas
range is so extensive that the core body parts may
be under bending, twisting and stress. Therefore, Check the damaged portion of the traffic accident
it may become necessary to use a large frame vehicle by eye and touch to estimate the extent of
reforming machine. Depending upon the level of the crash damage.
the crush, it may be also necessary to replace a 1. Know the damaged areas. Observe the entire
large size part like an outer panel. At any rate, in vehicle and count the number of impacts, evaluate
repairing a major damage on a vehicle, it is vitally their magnitude and work out the damage
important to correctly diagnose the dispersions of sequence.
E121792
2. Check external flaws and deformations. Observe

the vehicle from the front, rear, and sides and
check lateral and vertical bends, twists, out-of-true
lines, on the side view, swellings and depressions
of the body. At the same time, check for
deformation of the outer panel or any other
connected areas away from the crashed area.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
5. Check the engine compartment. Check for
deformation of the engine mounts and transmission
mount bracket, contact between the auxiliary
system and the chassis and between wire
harnesses and the chassis. Check for deformation
in each part of the body and for sealer peeling off
any welds.
1
E121793
Item Description
1 Deformation
3. Check the alignment of the exterior body parts.
Carefully inspect the gap, steps, clearance, and
state of opening and closing on all installing parts E121879
with hinges such as an engine hood, doors, trunk
lid, or tailgate. 6. Check the under body. Lift up the vehicle and
check for damage in the suspension or the
subframe. Check for leakage of the engine oil,
transmission fluid, brake oil or radiator coolant.
Check for deformation in each part of the body and
for sealer peeling off any welds.
E121794 1
4. Check on cabin and trunk room areas. Inspect

the damages caused secondary objects inside the
cabin or trunk compartment due to the impact
momentum. Inspect the damages on the steering E121783
column, dashboard, interior panel, seat, seat belt
and other upholsteries caused by the driver or Item Description
cargo.
1 Undercoat
7. Check the functions. Start the engine and check
whether any abnormal vibration noise or contact
noise exists. Operate the clutch, brake, parking
brake lever and the shift lever to check the vehicle
functions normally. Check the function of electrical
systems including on/ off function of the lights and
accessories.
Measuring Dimensions
E121651
With reference to the center of the symmetry (right
and left direction) of the body, measure the major
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
dimensions of the damaged body with the use of
a universal tram gauge, a convex rule, tram
tracking gauge, etc. By doing so it becomes
possible numerically to evaluate the level of the
damages. Particularly, the precision front body and
under body that influence the wheel alignment is
important. Just visual inspection is not enough.
Measuring Method
Measurement with reference to the drawing of body
dimensions (incl. Actual measurement figures).
E121343
Diagonal measurements (X measurements).
Measurements with the use of a centering gauge. Reference to the Drawing of Body Dimensions
Measurements with the use of a repair chart (incl. While referring to the body dimensional drawing
flat view data). shown in the Body Repair Manual-Models,
NOTE: It is possible to diagnose the overall level measure the corresponding dimensions on the
of the damages by using a single or combination actual vehicle in fore and aft, right and left and
of the measurement methods above. diagonal directions. Compare the measured lengths
with the corresponding dimensions in the manual
to evaluate the level of the damages. The
measured lengths from the undamaged part can
also be used for the correct evaluation of the
damage level.
Diagonal Measurement
Using a part installation hole or reference hole,
which is one of the two positions that are
symmetrical in a right and left direction as a
measuring point, measure the lengths diagonally
to the front body, window, cabin, trunk room or
E113078
tailgate opening or under body. From this data, the
deformation of the vehicle as a whole can be
judged.
NOTE: Always combine the diabolical
measurement with another measuring method.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E121502
Measurements with a Centering Gauge hung from the damaged and undamaged parts to
inspect for parallelism or lack of it, displacement,
From the reference holes and part installing holes
twist, or bending of the centering pin.
that are located in the symmetrical positions (right
and left) of the under frame, hang centering gauges
to inspect for the deviation of the body center line.
Vehicle loading in MARK 6 Collision Repair
From the body part for which the damage did not Bench
reach, hang centering gauges and compare the
gauge indications being shown by both the gauges 1. Position the vehicle in the ramp for loading.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E121575
2. Move the vehicle and align the front pair of

wheels on front roller stopper.
E121576
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
3. All the wheels are on the ramp roller stopper.
x2
x2
E121797
Anchor clamps to be tightened in sill at 4 locations.
x2
E121577
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
x8
E106605
Lift the bench to required working height for repair.
E121798
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
x4
E113429
E121578
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Rough Panel Reforming
In spite of the word ”rough”, this work is very

important in body and panel repair. Using a frame
correction machine, the deformed area of the
crushed vehicle is pulled out nearly to the original
shape. In order to complete this work satisfactorily,
the measurements must be made correctly before
beginning this work. if the body is not correct in its
dimensions, the precise wheel alignment cannot
be expected. If the body has not been correctly
restored to the original dimensions, in spite of its E105245
satisfactory external appearance, the drivability,
steering handle, movement, tire wear not only 2. Secure the body at the four reinforced points so
greatly influenced but also the driving safety will that they can receive force evenly.
be greatly impaired.
E121619
E105243
Item Description
1 Pulling-out direction
Preparation for Pulling-out
Auxiliary anchor points:
Fixing of Body
Depending on the pulling-out force and direction,
In pulling-out work using a frame correction auxiliary anchor points may need to be added to
machine, it is extremely important to fix the body prevent body deformation and protect the weld
firmly. It will become necessary, depending upon points.
the state of the accident, to pull out the body from
more than one direction.
Basic anchor points:

1. It may become slightly different depending upon
the state of damage, but basically, fix the body at
the lifting points, which is strongly reinforced,
located under the side sills.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
WARNING: In installing clamp, align the
extended line of the pulling direction to the
3
2 center of the clamp. If out of alignment, it
is dangerous because the clamp may be
disengaged while being pulled.
1
E121620
Item Description
1 Pulling-out direction
2 Reinforced Point E105249
3 Auxiliary anchor point Pay attention there is no adherence to the teeth of

clamp.
NOTE: Do not tighten the clamp screw excessively.
2 Excessive tightness may result in teeth breaking.
3
E113082
Pulling-out Direction
3 The impact force (F) deforms the body. The force
(F) can be divided into elements (A) and (B). Apply
2 an equivalent or greater force to the body from the
opposite direction in order to restore the deformed
E121621
shape to normal. As the body stiffness varies from
section to section, it is necessary to adjust the
pulling forces and directions accordingly. The
Item Description pulling-out direction is determined by the worker’s
1 Cancel the moment skill and the performance of the frame correcting
machine. NOTE: Before correcting deformation of
2 Auxiliary anchor point the body, read the instruction manual of the frame
3 Pulling-out direction correcting machine and its specifications.
Setting Pulling-out Clamp

Install the pulling-out clamp at the impact point.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
B F
E113083 E113086
Diagonal Pulling-out On estimating the restored shape of the body, set

the pulling-out anchor point on an extended line in
Change the pulling-out angle to adjust magnitude the required direction. By gradually pulling-out that
(A) and/or (B). part of the body, the damaged section is finally
restored to the proper shape.
E113084
E105255
Perpendicular Pulling-out
Add the pulling-out forces (A) and (B)
perpendicularly while adjusting their magnitude. Rough Panel Reforming on Front Damage
The following case as an example is that, together

with the side bulkhead, the front side frame and
the front wheelhouse are crushed on one side. If
the impact is great, the damper housing, dashboard
B
side member, the front pillar, and even the front
side frame on the opposite side are damaged and
A the impact force disperses as far as the roof panel
causing distortions on it.
CAUTION: Always attach a safety cable
when using a hydraulic ram or a frame
E113085
straightening tale; do not stand in direct
line of the chains used on such equipment.
By pulling-out the body from two perpendicular
directions, it is easy to control the change of Reforming Procedures
direction of the composite force. This allows easier, 1. Decision on how to proceed with the repair work.
step by step restoration of the body. By pulling out the damaged area, restore the
opposite side to the original position to repair.
Remove the damaged part (one side) and install
a new part. Repair and reform the part to which
the replaced part is installed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
2
3 4
E121473 E121795

1 Damper Housing Replace or Reform 1 Front Crossmember to be repaired
2 Front Wheelhouse Replace 2 Front Side Frame to be repaired
3 Front Crossmember Replace
4 Front Side Frame Replace
2. Fix the body. If the support point under the side
sill cannot be fixed, weld a steel plate near the side 1
sill of the outrigger to fix.
WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns
when welding, wear an approved welding
helmet, gloves, and safety shoes.
2
E121796
Item Description
1 Front Side Frame repaired side
2 Front Side Frame to be repaired
4. Measure the dimensions and determine the
pulled out position.
NOTE: On a subframe installed vehicle, inspect
E113088 the position with the subframe placed in position.
3. Determine the direction of pulling first and then 5. If the front side frame on the repaired side is
pull out slowly and gradually. While pulling out, bent, After almost acceptable diagonal dimensions
reform the joint areas where the replaced parts are and under body dimensions are secured by the
installed. At the same time, reform the front side pulling-out process, cut the front lower cross
frame, front wheelhouse and the damper housing member and side bulkhead, clamp the bent area
on the repaired side. If the front side frame on the of the front side frame, and reform it then by pulling
repaired side is inclined toward the inside, pull out the bent area toward the front while pulling toward
toward the front. If the front side frame on the the inside at the same time, or pushing it from the
repaired side is inclined toward the outside, pull outside. After reforming, bring the actual
out toward the front and side. dimensions to the standard diagonal and
under-body dimensions, by rolling the front side
frame sideway. Also reform the front wheel housing
and damper housing and check if they are in right
positions or not on the upper body dimensions.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Rough Panel Reforming on Rear Damage
The following is an example of how the rear panel,

the rear floor, and the rear frame are crushed. If
the crash is great, the rear frame is bent at the
hollowed part of the rear wheelhouse. As for the
upper body, the damage will disperse as far as the
rear wheelhouse, rear inner panel, and rear pillar
with distortion on the roof panel.
CAUTION: Always attach a safety cable
when using a hydraulic ram or a frame
E105267
6. If the damper housing, dashboard, upper side
member and front pillar cannot be fully reformed, Reforming Procedures
cut the front side frame and damper housing.
1. Decision on how to proceed with the repair. Pull
WARNING: To prevent eye injury,wear out the damaged area to its original shape.
goggles or safety glasses whenever Remove the damaged part and replace it with a
cutting. new part. Reform the area to which the replaced
part is installed.
1
2
3
E105268
E121556
7. Pull out the dashboard upper side member and
outrigger.
Item Description
8. As for the front pillar, push it from the door
opening side up to the standard position using a 1 Rear Floor Panel Replace
port power. 2 Quarter Panel Cut and Replace
3 Rear Frame End Replace
2. Fix the body.
3. In the direction contrary to the impact force, pull
out the rear panel, rear floor, and the rear frame
all at the same time. While pulling them out, reform
the rear floor. To repair the outer panel, do not pull
it out directly.
4. If it is impossible to pull it out fully, cut the rear
panel and restore the rear pillar and rear door
E105269 opening after pulling out the rear inner panel and
rear wheelhouse.
5. Measure the dimensions and decide the pulling
out point.
6. If any of the rear frame and rear floor cross
member is bent. Cut the rear floor and reform the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
rear frame and rear floor cross member. After the
re-forming, align the rear frame to the standard
position. At the same time, reform the rear 1
wheelhouse and determine the rear damper
position. Determine the rear frame position using
the under body dimensions.
Rough Panel Reforming on Side Damage

2
The following is an example of how the impact from
the side, the floor is crushed together with the side E121474
sill and the center pillar is bent. The whole body is
bent like a boomerang and the wheel base is Item Description
shrunk. The impact is great, distortions grow on
the side surface on the opposite side. 1 Quarter Panel Cut and Replace
CAUTION: Always attach a safety cable 2 Center Pillar Reinforcement Member
when using a hydraulic ram or a frame Reform or Replace
2. Fix the body.
3. The most effective way is to pull it out in three
directions at the same time. While pulling out the
side sill and the center pillar in the direction
contrary to that of the impact force, pull out the side
sill in the front and rear direction. While pulling out,
reform the floor panel and door opening area.
E121911
Reforming Procedures
1. Decision on how to proceed with the repair work.
Pull out the damaged area to its original shape.
Remove the damaged part and replace it with a
E105276
new part. Reform the area to which the replaced
is installed. 4. Measure the dimensions and determine the
pulling-out point.
5. If it is impossible to pull out fully. Cut as many
of the side reinforcement members as many as
needed, such as the front pillar stiffener, center
pillar stiffener, side sill stiffener, center pillar
stiffener. Pull out from the inside sill, inner panel
and floor cross member and reform them and
determine their positions after making
measurements.
WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear
goggles or safety glasses whenever
cutting.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E113096
6. Measure the wheel base.
Parts Replacement Description 2
After the body has been restored to the original

shape by the pulling -out process, remove the parts
that cannot be repaired and replace them with new
ones. There are two cases of replacing parts, to
replace a part as a whole and to replace only part
of it that would be called “cut and joint
replacement.”
E121371
Cut and Joint Part Replacement
Cut and joint replacement is usually for the Item Description
replacement of a large part like an outer panel or
floor panel. The replacement of these large parts 1 Rear Floor Panel
as a whole is usually costly and not effective 2 Quarter Panel
because it takes more man/hours and space.
Complete Part Replacement
This complete part replacement is usually for core
structural component parts such as a front side
frame, rear frame (except front end replacement),
wheelhouse, damper housing.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
• In order to perform speedy work, cut off the
replaced part except the welding flange with a
cutter.
• Use the most appropriate cutter according to
the type of parts.
cutting.
1 2 1 2
2 1
3
2
3 4
E121373
Item Description
1 B-Pillar Inner Panel
2 Tail Lamp Support Panel
3 Rear Crossmember
2
E121580
Part Replacement Work
Item Description
Removal
1 Reinforcement Member
1. Selection of cut and joint point (cut and joint
replacement only). In order to maintain the strength 2 Outer Panel
of the body, select the cut and joint point in 3 Front Pillar
consideration of the following points:
4 Rear Side
• Number of parts needed to be removed, as little
as possible
• Easy to work with safety
• No reinforcement member inside
• Distortion hard to occur
• No stress concentration
• Less surface to be finished
• Cut and joint point hidden by external part
2. Rough cutting on damaged side (removal)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
3. Decision on where to weld
• Because it is impossible to identify the welding
spots (nuggets) in the area where undercoat or
sealer is applied, remove the undercoat or
sealer with a plastic sanding disk attached to
the air chuck grinder.
1 • If the welding spots (nuggets) cannot be
identified even after the paint layer has been
removed, insert a chisel into the welding joint
area.
2
E121557 WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear
Item Description cutting.
1 Rear Floor Panel
2 Rear Frame
Complete Parts
2 E105284
E121408
Item Description
1 Damper Housing
2 Front Wheelhouse
3 Front Side Frame
E113102
4. Cut off welded area.

1 WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear
cutting.
• Cut off welded areas left after the rough cutting.
• Most of the welds are made by spot welding,
2 the remaining being by MIG welding on a
mass-produced body.
E121558 • In cutting off the welded areas, use a drilling
tool or peel off tool depending upon the state of
Item Description welding joint.
1 Rear Gutter NOTE: Check the panel structure so as not to
damage the welding flange of the mating part.
2 Skirt Panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Cutting off of spot welded area:
If the part to be replaced is welded above the
welding nugget, cut it off with a spot cutter.
E113103
E105286 If the welding flange is located where it is

impossible to use a drill, cut it off with an air chuck
grinder. When the nugget comes to the surface,
strike the chisel in between the panels to separate
If the part to be replaced is welded below or in it off.
between the welding nugget, drill it through.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E113106
For the plug welded area, grind it off with a grinding

wheel.
E113104
E113107
To separate a wide or long area, grind off the
nugget completely and separate the panels with a
sliding hammer. Preparation for Installation
1. Reforming and anti-rust treatment on a part
installing area.
• Reform the welding flange on the part installing
side with a hammer and dolly. If a hole or crack
is found, reform it by plug welding.
• Sand both sides of the welded area with a disk
sander or belt sander to get rid of undercoat
layer, rust, or dirt.
• Apply electro-conductive spot sealer evenly to
the welded joint area.
E113105 WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear
Cutting off carbon de-oxide arch welding (MIG Weld) sanding.
area: NOTE: Do not grind too much.
If the fillet welding is at the corner, cut off the
welding bead with an air chuck cut grinder or a disk
sander.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Reforming • Remove the undercoat layer. Because new
parts are all painted with an undercoating, they
are not electro conductive when welded. Before
welding it, be sure to remove the paint layers
from both sides. Remove the paint layer using
a belt sander.
• Apply electro-conductive spot sealer evenly on
the mating surface that has had the paint layer
removed. Wipe off the excess.
Sanding
E113108
Sanding
E113109
Anti rust treatment
E113111
Anti-rust treatment
1
E121559
Item Description
1 Spot Sealer
2. Anti-rust treatment and processing of a new part
To spot weld the new part:
E113112
3. Make drill holes or punch holes for plug welding

a new part. Plug-weld on the new part about 20 to
30 % more than the welding spots on the old part.
Determine the number of spots referring to the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Body Repair Manual, for welding diagram, if
available, or the old part itself. 1 2
1
E121344
Item Description
E113113
1 Overlapping
4. Rough cutting of the new part (cut and joint
replacement). As for a new part to be cut and 2 Outer Panel
jointed such as an outer panel, cut the old and new
parts, using an air saw or air chuck grinder, so that 5. Positioning the new part. Align the new part to
the joint area can be overlapped about 20 to 30 the reference hole or old part position and fix it to
mm (0.8 to 1.2 in.). the body with the use of a vise, grip wrench, or
screw clamp. In case fixing tools cannot be used
WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear due to lack of space, fix the new part with bolts or
goggles or safety glasses whenever tapping screws. It is extremely important to fix the
sanding. frame and damper housing to the correct positions
If the overlapping margin to the body side is too because they influence the wheel alignment. The
much, it may become hard to put the mating parts, well-fitting of the outer panel and the rear panel to
like a door, in position. the externally attached parts is also very important,
influencing the external appearance, too.
1 2
E121570
E113078
Item Description
Complete Part Installation
1 Air Saw
1. Fix the new part.
2 Outer Panel New Part
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E113115 E121581
2. Measure the dimensions and determine the Item Description

position. Measure the under body in different
directions and determine the positions of the front 1 Sub Frame
side frame and front lower cross-member. Measure
4. Check the fitting of the external attachment parts
the upper body in different directions and determine
Temporarily install the front fender, headlight,
the positions of the damper housing and front
bumper, engine hood and door and see if the
bulkhead.
clearances, steps, or operations are proper or not.
1
3
E121345
Item Description
1 Hood
2 Fender
3 Front Door
Cut and Joint Part Installation

1. Rough-cut the new part (reinforcement) leaving
about 20 to 30 mm (0.8 to 1.2 in.) margin to be
overlapped with the body side. Overlap the cut new
E121491 part ( reinforcement member) with the body and,
after confirming the position, weld it temporarily.
3. Temporarily weld the new part. NOTE: Carefully install the front pillar stiffener and
WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns center pillar stiffener in correct positions because
when welding, wear an approved welding they have the door hinges. Unless they are properly
helmet, gloves, and safety shoes. installed, the smooth opening and closing of the
doors are not expected.
On a subframe mounted vehicle, determine the
position of the new part in the state of the
temporarily positioned subframe.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
2. After rough cutting, fix the outer panel (new part).
Make sure that the door hinge installing holes of
both the front pillar and center pillar are aligned.
Considering that the door is temporarily installed
in position, fix the door opening at an angle of 90°
using a vise grip.
E113118
1 E105308
2
3
1
E121346
Item Description
1 Front A-Pillar
2 Front Door
E121912
3 Door Hinge
Item Description
1 Quarter Panel
E121347
Item Description
1 Front B-Pillar E113122
2 Rear Door 3. Measuring the diagonal dimensions on the door

3 Door Hinge opening, determine the position of the outer panel.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E121348
4. Check fitting of external attached parts. Inspect

the clearances and steps between the body and
the front window glass or rear window glass to
determine proper alignment. Temporarily install
the front fender, hood, door, trunk lid, and tailgate
to check if the clearances, steps and the movement
of opening and closing are appropriate. Install the
headlight, taillight, and bumper temporarily to
inspect if the clearances, steps are appropriate.
Inspect to determine if the external bodylines are
within the standards.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1
1 Wind Shield
2 Rear Window Glass
E121349
6 2
5 3
E121350
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Trunk Lid
2 Rear Door
3 Front Door
4 Fender
5 Front Bumper
6 Hood
7 Roof E121353
5. Cut off the cut and joint areas and make

butt-welding connection.
1
cutting.
• After making sure that the fitting is satisfactory,
cut off the cut and joint areas of the front pillar
and side sill and rear pillar.
• Carefully cut so that no overlapping area or
E121912
cutting gap remains.
• If the overlapping area cannot be cut off
Item Description because of the reinforcement inside, cut the
body side after the making line is drawn.
1 Quarter Panel • Cut along the marking line with an air saw.
E121351
E121352
E113129
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
6. Remove the outer panel and weld the the outer panel, view the whole body once again
reinforcement members to the body. After installing to make sure that the bodylines are satisfactory
the outer panel, weld where it was impossible to viewed from any angle.
weld with the outer panel in position. Plug-weld the
upper and lower portions of the front pillar stiffener
and center pillar stiffener. Fillet weld the overlapped
area along the edge.
1
E113130
E121569
Item Description
E105320
1 Body Sealer
7. Weld a patch (reinforcement plate) to the cut
and joint area of the outer panel. For the patch, Main Welding
use a plate cut off from an old or new part. Make Weld the new part.
a 5 to 6 mm (0.20 to 0.24 in.) plug hole in the outer
panel on the body side and plug-weld the patch. NOTE: Before starting the welding work, protect
the glasses, and painted surfaces in the cabin with
heat resistant covers (splatter covers).
E105321
8. Fix the new part that has been positioned again E105323
to the butt joint position. Before fixing the rear side
outer panel to the body, apply body sealer to the Key points in spot welding:
rear wheel arch and fuel adapter. After installing
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
• Make the contact surfaces tight with the use of • Using a vise grip or the like, make the welding
a vise grip or the like. point tight contact with no gap.
• Avoid old welded points as much as possible • Where a vise grip cannot be used because of
for new welding points. Weld at the same space. the space available, make tight contact using a
• Increase the number of welding spots about 20 hammer and dolly.
to 30 % more than those of the mass-production
body.
• Where spot welding cannot be done, use the
MIG welding for plug or fillet welding.
• If the part to be welded is of zinc-plated steel
sheet, raise the welding current about 10 to 20
% or lengthen the welding time.
• Use a welding arm as short as possible. Do not
use an unnecessarily long one.
• Always keep the tip in a correct shape using a
tip cutter.
• In stead of welding continuously, allow the tip
to cool every 5 to 6 spot welds.
E105326
E105324
Welding Steps and Finishing

1. Align the press lines using a shadow chisel.
2. Align the butt joint area by lightly plying a
screwdriver and temporarily weld the press line
corner starting from the end in spots.
E105325
Key points in MIG welding:

NOTE: Be sure to attach the ground cable to the
welding machine. Attach the ground cable as close
as possible to the point where it is being welded.
If it is attached to a place other than the body, there
is a possibility that the electric components may
be damaged.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
E113134
5. Weld the patch to the new part.
E113132
E113135
3. Temporarily weld the mating surface while plying 6. Conduct a welding strength test. When a
with a screwdriver. reinforcement member is replaced, inspect, before
NOTE: The welding pitch is about 15 to 30 times finishing the welded area, that the corresponding
the plate thickness. part is firmly welded.
7. Finishing the welded area. To finish, grind the
plug or joint welded area with a disk sander or
equivalent. Where a glass pane contacts,
completely remove any steps or projected areas.
If the welded areas are hidden beneath the
undercoat or behind the attached part, they should
be lightly grinded.
E113133
4. Weld permanently between the temporary

welding spots. Do not weld from one point
continuously.
E113136
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Anti-rust Treatment before Painting
Process
Sealing
To prevent entry of water and rust, apply sealer
where the panels are put together. As for where
sealer should be applied, refer to the Body Repair
Manual-Models or see the corresponding parts on
the opposite side of the vehicle.
1. Remove grease, oil and fat with grease remover
and clean the area where sealer is applied. If
excess spot sealer is on the area where the sealer
is to be applied, remove it with thinner, apply primer
and then sealer.
2. Apply sealer evenly on the outer panel, engine
compartment, and trunk gutter that influence the
external appearance of the vehicle. If needed, use
masking tape.
E121501
Underbody coat
In order to prevent damages caused by road debris
or flying stones, apply undercoat over the surfaces
E121879 of the under body and wheelhouses.
As for where sealer should be applied, refer to the
3. Attach a sealer cartridge to the sealer gun and
Body Repair Manual-models for the vehicle you
apply sealer without gaps.
are repairing.
1. Remove grease, oil with grease remover and
clean the area where undercoat is applied.
2. Use a masking tape, where necessary, to
prevent undercoat from being applied to the
suspension, drive and exhaust related parts and
parts installing surfaces.
3. Apply undercoat with the use of its exclusive
gun.
E105333
4. For a part installing surface for the taillight or

like, be careful of the height of the sealer applied
surface. Where necessary, make the sealer flat
using a brush.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
• During the straightening repairs, monitor the
attachment of the pulling unit to the vehicle.
• Carry out the straightening work in several
stages, never in one pulling process. This
prevents the risk of overstretching and of joints
tearing out.
During individual straightening steps (under a
pulling load), relieve tension by striking the
deformed areas with an aluminum hammer while
they are still under tension.
E121913
Off-road vehicles
Straightening repairs on off-road vehicles are
different to repairs on normal bodies due to the
two-part construction of the vehicle.
This means there are two areas that must be taken
into consideration separately:
• Straightening the body.
• Straightening the body with chassis frame.
E105336
Straightening the body
If only the body is damaged in an accident, light

General Straightening sequence
straightening repairs can be carried out.
Body straightening requires practice and NOTE: With strong straightening forces, these
experience. Before starting, the exact direction of bolted connections may be damaged. Monitor the
impact must be determined. bolted connections continuously during the
straightening work.
The straightening force must have the exact
opposite direction of the impact force. Only in this If a straightening jig is used for straightening work,
way can it be guaranteed that the original shape the holding clamps or alignment angles must be
will be achieved again. attached directly to the chassis frame. During the
straightening work, the pulling forces must not
The pulling forces only work with their full impact
become too high. The bolted connections are to
if the pulling direction is direct. Using the wrong
be monitored continuously.
pulling direction could lead to additional
deformation, which is difficult to correct afterwards.
Please note the following points: Straightening the body and chassis frame
• Secure the pulling unit with a safety cable.
NOTE: High-strength steels must not be heated.
• Do not remove bonded glass prior to
If the body and chassis frame have to be
straightening.
straightened, they must first be separated from
• Never apply heat during straightening. each other.
• If necessary, open doors or hoods/lids/liftgates The following conditions must be met:
during straightening.
• The repair must be economically justified.
• Check dimensions and gaps continuously during • The quality and stability of a frame after
straightening. production must be restored after carrying out
• High-strength steel panels have a stronger the repair.
tendency to retain their deformed shape. • In principle, the driving and operating safety of
the vehicle is paramount.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
• Cold straightening of deformed areas with sharp
edged folds cannot be carried out.
• Straightening with the application of heat
(welding torch) requires much experience and
accurate knowledge of the behavior of steel
panels when heated.
• The temperature and duration of application of
the heat are to be considered in particular.
• Individual components of the frame, such as
cross members, brackets, etc. can be replaced.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225784en
http://vnx.su
Complete Panel Replacement/Partial Replacement

Repairs always mean intervention in the body shell
structure and thus also intervention in the vehicle's
1
passive security system. The use of complete 2
replacement or sectional replacement as the best
solution must always be weighed up before starting
a repair.
Complete replacement
In a complete replacement, the original connections
2
are largely reused.
E120514
Item Description
1 Join area
2 Original welding
Approved sectional repairs are clearly defined in
the model-specific body literature. These
requirements must be complied with.
E120513
Advantages of sectional repair
A complete replacement is advantageous if the Sectional repair offers many advantages for correct
damaged body part can be detached from its repair of accidental damage.
original connections and a completely new part • Repairs can be made both in the outer panel
can be fitted without creating additional joints (e.g. area (e.g. side frame) and in the inner areas
liftgate). (e.g. structural member, trunk floor).
A complete replacement is necessary if there is no • The repair can be limited to the actual damaged
sectional replacement solution. area.
• Reduction of repair costs, as aggregates and
Sectional replacement other components can usually remain in the
vehicle.
Sectional replacement (sectional repair) means For the sectional repairs approved by the factory
the replacement of a section of the body shell and described in the model-specific body workshop
structure. literature/technician's information, some spare parts
NOTE: Basic and advanced training is offered for (service parts) specially prepared for sectional
the following contents. For an overview of all repairs are offered via the spare parts sales
training courses offered, please refer to the Ford department.
Service Organisation's training course brochure.
Sectional repairs fulfill their purpose above all if Decision-making criteria
the replacement of a complete part is too
time-consuming and thus not economical. Depending on the type and extent of the damage,
the advantages of carrying out sectional
replacement in the area concerned must be
weighed up against complete replacement.
The following are always crucial for the decision:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225786en
http://vnx.su
• How economical the repair is. An experienced bodyshop manager in association
• Retention of the original join. with Body repair manual and parts guidelines can
take decision to improve quick turn around and
In addition, Ford must have given its approval for increase the satisfaction of customers.
a sectional replacement solution in the damaged
area.
Depending on the damaged areas, further facts
are to be taken into account when deciding for or
against sectional repair:
• Severance cuts should be as short as possible.
• The effort for follow-on work on the connections
must not be too great.
• It must be possible to reproduce the optical path
of visible edges on door openings.
• Inner reinforcement panels must not restrict the
straightening repair.
• Inner reinforcement profiles in the pillar areas
must allow for separation.
• The Ford regulations on sectional repairs on
supporting frame sections must be taken into
account.
• The large surface welding seams at the
connections must be restored.
Repair or Replace
This is a critical decision often practised in the

bodyshop. Depending upon nature and severity of
the damage this decision is taken.
Often this decision is influenced by various factors:
• Severity of the damage
• Availability of the parts (Body panels) as
serviceable
• Estimated cost of overall repair
• Time required to complete the repair
• Body shop capability in carrying out the repair
• Manufacturers direction
Ford has made list of serviceable parts exclusively
to improve the quick turn around in the body repair
and thus reduce the overall repair cost burden to
customers.
All panels are available as a replacement and it is
essential to replace them to complete the repair
quickly and economically. However, the damage
is small it is better to perform spot repair and rectify
the damage.
Country specific insurance policies and governance
also plays pivotal role in deciding the repair or
replace the component during repair.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225786en
http://vnx.su
Corrosion Prevention
The corrosion protection provided in production
must be carefully maintained and reproduced Corrosion protection measures during
during body repair work, in order to ensure the repair work
long-term warranty for Ford vehicles.
NOTE: Please take the notes in the model-specific CAUTION: Always be extremely careful
repair descriptions into account. Please also note when handling solvents, sealants and
the manufacturer's instructions when handling the adhesives. Some products contain
different anti-corrosion agents. substances harmful to health or give off
harmful or poisonous vapors. Always
Only Ford original bodywork components and Ford follow the manufacturer's instructions. If
approved repair materials are to be used for body there is any doubt as to whether a
repairs. The Ford logo is stamped onto every Ford particular solvent is suitable, it must NOT
original spare part. be used.
All Ford bodywork components have a cathodic
Panel coatings and corrosion primer. Moreover, most parts are zinc-plated on
protection one or both sides. If possible, these protective
layers must not be damaged.
Body steel panels are provided with a coating for
Before welding
corrosion protection purposes. The coating material
is predominantly zinc in a variety of composition Interior surfaces of new bodywork components
forms. Aluminum is also used to some extent. which will no longer be accessible after installation
Basically, all types of steel sheet can be coated. must be painted beforehand. The welding flanges
are treated with a special welding primer. The joint
A variety of coating processes are used:
areas are not always accessible from inside later.
• Hot dip zinc coating (no longer used in vehicle Therefore, prepare these areas so that no soot is
construction). produced by burning paint during welding.
• Electrolytic zinc plating. NOTE: In order to ensure that the corrosion
• Organic coating. protection produced in production is not destroyed,
• Hot dip aluminum coating. the working area must be kept as small as possible.
NOTE: Welding fumes are harmful to health. Make NOTE: Do not touch cleaned bare metal any more
certain that the workspace is well ventilated and with the bare hands. The dampness of your hands
use welding fume extraction. will corrode the metal.
The following points must be noted when welding: Procedure:
• Zinc starts to melt at about 420°C. • Remove the primer or paint/zinc layer in the
• The zinc vaporizes at a temperature of about welding area using a tress wire brush to prevent
900°C. the formation of soot from the paint.
• The amount of heating determines the damage • Thoroughly clean the welding area with a metal
to the zinc coating, and therefore to the cleaning agent and rub dry.
corrosion protection. • Coat the welding flange with welding primer on
• Resistance spot welding is particularly suitable all sides and allow to dry.
for welding zinc-coated panels, because no NOTE: The welding primer must only be applied
widespread warming occurs. thinly to the spot welding area, to minimize
• With electrolytically zinc-plated panels there is spattering when welding.
no need for any special preparation because
the zinc coating does not need to be removed.
After welding
NOTE: Coated panels have a higher electrical
resistance, but this can be compensated for by During repair work, body panels are often heated
increasing the welding current by 10 - 20% . at very high temperatures, which results in the
destruction of the corrosion protection.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506660en
http://vnx.su
Reworking of the affected areas is therefore vital: Apply clinched flange protection to the clinched
flange using one of the flat nozzles supplied. The
• Grind the welded seams flat and clean
nozzle must be cut to the necessary width
thoroughly with silicone remover. Dry with a
beforehand and the guide stop cut as required.
lint-free cloth.
• If the join area is accessible from the inside, the During application the clinched edge must be
transition area to the paint must be abraded for covered with an overlap of at least 3 mm. The
all types of join so that good adhesion of the beginnings, ends and edges or interruptions in the
primer is achieved later. sealer bead need to be reworked by forming with
a brush or a spatula, to ensure a 100% tight sealing
• If the join area is not accessible from the inside,
of the flange.
the cleaning and sanding work is not done. For
this reason, ensure that there is as little The speed and angle of application are decisive
contamination as possible in the area of the for a good appearance and a bubble-free bead.
repair. This allows the cavity wax applied later Always apply the sealer with as few as possible
to penetrate the join area without hindrance. interruptions to avoid sealer rework. Never use
solvents or thinners as this will considerably slow
NOTE: Only apply a small amount of panel cleaner
down the hardening process of the sealer.
to the cleaning cloth when cleaning the repair area.
Make sure that no cleaner reaches the connecting For an application thickness of 3 mm of the
flange, so that the welding primer is not washed clinched flange sealer it is recommended to allow
away again. to dry over night at room temperature. A minimum
hardening time of 5 hours is required anyhow
Priming after welding
before a 2-component primer can be applied.
Primer is applied to the welded flanges after
cleaning. A check must also be made that the Clinched flange protection applied to the correct
production corrosion protection is present in the width and thickness.
area of the flanges. Any damage must also be
re-primed. 3 mm
10 mm
Sealing work 2 mm
Depending on the type of repair, the clinched
flanges on the hood, doors, tailgate and trunk lid
must be sealed with clinched flange sealer.
Clinched flange protection with flat nozzle

E50972
Underbody protection/stone chip

protection
The underbody protection is used as corrosion

protection and must also be applied such that it
matches the original condition, from a visual
perspective.
E50959 Two main application methods are used in
production:
Clean the clinched flange area of the new
• The underbody protection is applied as a
component with silicone remover and dry with a
sprayable sealing compound.
lint-free cloth.
• In the area around the structural members, the
The sealant must be applied to the dry primed underbody protection is sprayed on and spread
surface (i.e. dip priming as for delivery). across a wide area.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506660en
http://vnx.su
Because of the coarse surface structure of the • Guide the cavity wax probe carefully in the area
stone chip protection material, it is recommended of the repair so that targeted corrosion
to only perform a repair over the whole surface, if protection is achieved.
there is damage over visible areas. Otherwise there • Pay special attention to edges and swage line
is the danger of serious irregularities on the on stepped joints, the wax must cover the inner
surface. edge areas.
The thickness and appearance of the underbody • The cavity wax must flow along the stepped
protection and stone chip protection must be sheets so that the wax is drawn between them
matched to the original. Special spray guns are by capillary action.
used to work the materials for this reason. A test
A hole may be drilled in a suitable place for areas
spray must always be performed beforehand
which are not accessible for the application of
however, to determine the correct appearance and
cavity wax. The diameter depends on the size of
layer thickness.
plugs available. When this is done it is vital to make
sure that no drilling swarf remains in the cavity (rust
will form if any remains). The edge of the hole must
Cavity protection
be treated with cavity wax. Finally close with a plug
and seal with underseal.
After painting work has been completed, a general
check is made of the work that has been done. Only on components with clinched flange edges:
Before final reassembly of the vehicle, the cavity After painting, the inner clinched flange edge must
wax protection in the area of the repair must be be sealed as far as is possible with cavity wax. For
renewed. Cavity wax protection must be performed this, the repaired component should be positioned
carefully so that the quality of the repair conforms upright and corrosion protection wax sprayed into
with Ford standards: the water drainage holes and/or the thread holes
for the hinges in both directions (50 ml corresponds
to about 20 seconds spraying time).
For doors, tilt and turn the component to spread
the corrosion protection wax over the whole edge
of the flange.
Wax application
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506660en
http://vnx.su
E114334
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506660en
http://vnx.su
Corrosion protection for the floor pan (example)
1
2
5
4
3
E96587
Item Description
1 Injection points for cavity wax protection
2 PVC stone chip protection at the wheel arches
3 PVC underbody protection
4 PVC stone chip protection
5 PU primer
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506660en
http://vnx.su
Corrosion Damage/Corrosion Repair

Modern vehicle bodies are protected from corrosion • Poorly installed or damaged covers and stone
by elaborate measures. Multilayer coatings on the chip protection fixtures must always be renewed.
panel surface prevent direct contact between the
• Check seals and seal carriers for wear and
metal and oxygen, and so protect it from corrosion.
correct mounting. Any damaged seals must be
In the long-term however, corrosion on a vehicle renewed.
cannot be completely prevented. • All rubber grommets and blanking plugs must
NOTE: Basic and in-depth training is offered on be present and correctly installed.
the following topics. You will find an overview of • A damp or wet floor inside the vehicle indicates
the complete range of training in the Training that there are leaks in the bodywork. The interior
Brochure issued by the Ford Service Organization. must be dried out and the leaks must be
What is corrosion? completely rectified.
Corrosion is destruction of a subsurface caused The corrosion formation can vary in extent.
by chemical or electrochemical effects which With rust film or edge rust formation, the surface
operate from the outer surface. of the paint has small traces of corrosion present.
If the protective layers become damaged, The traces of corrosion can possibly be removed
electrochemical conversion processes are initiated, in such cases by polishing the paint surfaces. If
which allow the metal to oxidize. This leads to the this is not possible however, the traces of corrosion
formation of corrosion. must be rectified by using a touch-up technique.
The following factors lead to corrosion: If the corrosion is just starting, with up to 1 mm
rusting below (in the form of a dot or a line) the
• Mechanical damage such as stone chips and damage is rectified as follows:
scratches which penetrate through to the steel
panel. • Clean the defective location.
• Damp interiors. • Mechanically remove the rusting which is
starting below the surface.
• Unfavorable weather or environmental
conditions, as may occur in areas with high • If the area is small, apply primer and allow it to
humidity, high salt content in the air or serious dry, then use the paint pencil to touch up the
air pollution due to aggressive gases and dusts. area - if not, respray the damaged area.
• Insufficient corrosion protection after repairs. If rust is already under the paint finish to the steel
• Lack of care by the vehicle owner of the painted panel, then the whole paint finish in the affected
and corrosion proofed surfaces or areas on the area must be sanded away.
vehicle. Furthermore, the existing traces of corrosion in the
In order to maintain long-term corrosion protection, body panel must be carefully and completely
the vehicle must be checked at regular intervals. removed.
In doing so, the follow areas must be inspected Finally a new paint finish must be applied in this
and any damage rectified: area. In the case of rusting through, the affected
body panel is already completely destroyed. Such
• Damage to the paint surface cause by scratches damage requires complete or at least partial
or stone impact must be suitably rectified replacement.
according to the specifications.
NOTE: : In the general section there are several
• Damage to the PVC underbody protection or chapters which present the techniques necessary
the PU stone chip protection must be refinished. for a professional corrosion repair.
• Damage to the PVC underbody protection or
the PU stone chip protection must be refinished. The outcome of this is the following repair
sequence:
• Incomplete or damaged sealing at clinched
flanges must be renewed. • Remove the rusted-through part.
• Check the cavity protection and renew it if • Remove the remaining traces of corrosion.
incomplete. • Offer up the new part.
• Prepare the joint areas.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506661en
http://vnx.su
• Weld the new part into place.
• Produce the corrosion protection.
For a professional repair it is essential to reproduce
the corrosion protection during and after the repair.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506661en
http://vnx.su
Sealer, Underbody Protection Material and Adhesives

Sealants, adhesives, cavity wax and underbody Metal adhesive
protection materials are used during the various
body repairs. In this area Ford offers a range of For joining metal to metal and plastic to metal. The
products which have been tested and matched to adhesive reduces droning noises and improves
each other. corrosion protection.
CAUTION: Always be extremely careful 1-component window glass adhesive kit
when handling solvents, sealants and
adhesives. Some products contain For direct glazing. The vehicle is ready to drive
substances harmful to health or give off after 6 hours (passenger airbag). Prevents contact
harmful or poisonous vapors. Always corrosion.
follow the manufacturer's instructions. If 2-component window glass adhesive kit
there is any doubt as to whether a
particular solvent is suitable, it must NOT For direct glazing. The vehicle is ready to drive
be used. after 1 hour (passenger airbag). The adhesive is
not an electrical conductor and permits
Clinched flange protection interference-free radio reception. Prevents contact
This is a 1-component PU adhesive sealant applied corrosion. Using a 150ml additional cartridge, the
through a flat nozzle. It is fast setting and is very adhesive can also be used for large windows or to
resistant to ageing. After application it is easily produce a double seam of adhesive.
sanded and stretched and it can also be painted
over. Sealer Application in Critical Area
Seam sealant T Anthracite
NOTE: Pin holes and gaps should be avoided while
This is a 1-component sealant material for sealing applying the sealer to avoid water ingress.
joints and seams. It is also suitable for gluing HVH
elements into position in their respective body Roof
areas. It is a solvent-free, odourless adhesive Apply WSKM4G325 A2 heat selaer using sealer
which does not contain silicone or isocyanate. application gun in bead form.
Body sealant T beige • Suggested bead diameter : 3 mm.
This sealant, which contains solvent and has a
long service life, is particularly suitable for visible
seams. It can be painted after it has set.
Underbody protection
Underbody protection is necessary for permanently
elastic corrosion protection of vehicle underbodies.
It is very durable and has good resistance to
abrasion,
Cavity wax
E123992
This touch-proof, transparent corrosion protection
wax is used for the preservation of cavities and
flange joints.
Anti-corrosion wax
Anti-corrosion wax is a coating material which can
be applied in fine spray, forming a very thin and
grease-like protective film, therefore offering very
good corrosion protection.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225788en
http://vnx.su
Sealer Application in other Areas Hood
Apply WSKM4G334 A3 duplex sealer in bead form.
Front and Rear door
Apply WSS M2G300 A2 glass bead epoxy
adhesive in bead form.
E123998
A-Pillar Inner
E123996
E123997
E124625
Frontside Apron Panel

Back Door
E121879
E124012
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225788en
http://vnx.su
Panel Quarter Wheelhouse Inner Rear Floor Panel
Apply WSKM4G334 A3 duplex sealer in bead form. Apply WSKM4G334 A3 duplex sealer in bead form.
E123994 E124630
Rear Skirt Panel Area

E123995
Dash Panel
E124629
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225788en
http://vnx.su
Cutting Technique
NOTE: Without exception, before starting work you NOTE: After all separation work, make certain that
must read the safety and warning instructions in the metal swarf is completely removed from the
the chapter "Safety Instructions". In addition, pay vehicle body.
equipment manufacturer.
Possible cut lines (example)
Depending on the separating tools used, there are

some fundamental points to bear in mind:
• Only start the cutting work once the new part is
to hand.
• Compare the new part with the old part for
shape and size.
• The straightening work must be completed
before any body components to be replaced are
cut out.
• Before separation work is started, all welded
connections which cannot be seen must be
freed of underbody protection, sealant etc.
NOTE: Steplessly variable machines increase the
working life of the cutting tool. Use of a suitable
Spot weld milling tool lubricant can increase this even further.
Resistance spot welds are separated using a spot A spot weld milling tool usually has an adjustable
weld drilling machine or a spot weld milling tool. depth stop and a safety fixing system. These
prevent the machine from drilling too deep and the
cutter from slipping while working.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468071en
http://vnx.su
Rod sander
Another option for separating resistance spot welds
is to use the rod sander.
The cutting depth of the orbital saw can be set.

This allows separating cuts to be made, despite
panels or other components lying in danger behind.
Straight cut lines can be more easily made using
the orbital saw.
If spot welds and MIG welds are difficult to reach,
a rod sander may offer an alternative.
Short stroke saw

The short stroke saw is suitable for separating
vehicle body components and for making a
separating cut for partial repairs.
NOTE: In order not to damage panels, wiring

harnesses, hoses or similar components which lie
behind, remove them beforehand as necessary.
The narrow design of the saw blade permits cutting
in tight curves. Straight cuts require a relatively
great deal of practice.
Orbital saw
Where use of the short stroke saw is difficult
because of the body construction, the orbital saw
can be used.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468071en
http://vnx.su
Panel Beating Technique and Smart Repairs

General
Smaller scale body repairs, where damaged panels
do not need to be replaced, can often be carried
out by realignment work. Whether the repair is
economical however, often depends on the
accessibility of the affected body area.
NOTE: Basic and in-depth training courses are
offered on the topics which follow. An overview of
the complete range of training offered is provided
by the Ford Service Organization Training
brochure.
During damage assessment, the following technical
points must be taken into account:
• Small mild dents (without damage to the paint),
which are in areas that make access from the
inside possible, can be rectified using
undamaged paint panel beating.
• If the inner side of the damaged area (with paint
damage) can be accessed, then conventional
panel beating techniques can be used.
• If the damaged area has no access from inside,
then it can only be rectified using outside panel
beating techniques.
Item Description
Hollow leveling (removing dent without
a dolly) 1 Center of dent
2 Spoon
Hollow leveling can only be used on areas which
are accessible from the rear. During hollow leveling, the dent is removed from
the inside a using suitable panel beating tool and
applying knocking or pressing movements. High
spots around the edge of the dent area are
flattened with blows from the aluminum or wooden
headed hammer.
The usual tools are for instance hammers of
various designs, dollies, levering irons and various
spoon irons. The correct choice of tool is made
depending on the shape of the dent and the access
which is possible.
Dent removal using hammer and dolly

Panel beating can only be performed using a
hammer and dolly if access can be gained from
the rear side.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Aluminum hammer
2 Box file
The purpose of the dolly in this case is to transfer
the force of the impacts from the hammer to the
steel panel which is in between. As this is done,
the deformed body panel is smoothed (dressed)
and the tension fields in the body panel are
removed.
The favored tool for this repair process is the
aluminum hammer and as opposite support the
universal hand dolly. To rectify minor panel
Item Description
damage, the box file should be used as opposite
support. Because of its serrated surface, the box 1 Slide hammer
file prevents normal stretching of the body panel
2 Pulling electrode
which would otherwise occur.
By welding pulling rings or pulling electrodes into
Dent removal from the outside using position using a special welding gun, dents can be
the slide hammer removed from outside using the slide hammer.
The slide hammer technique is mostly used when Dynamic puller with counter bearing
a dent is not accessible from the rear, or a relatively
large amount of disassembly would be needed to The repair possibilities are much greater than with
make it accessible. the slide hammer method. Because of the versatile
puller and the variable counter bearing, a wide
variety of damage can be worked and rectified
using this repair method.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Small dents are removed from the inside of the
body panel by pushing them outwards in a
mechanical process using panel beating levers.
Because of the great variety of shapes of these
levers, it is possible to use this panel beating
technique on almost all areas of the vehicle body.
Heat working of panels

This repair method allows small and mild dents to
be rectified without additional panel beating.
During the repair process, a flame is used to
Item Description selectively warm areas of the panel to relieve the
1 Puller with counter bearing stresses in the metal. This can cause the dented
area to return to its correct shape.
2 Corrugated wire as counter bearing
NOTE: Before this method is used, for economy
Because of the mechanical lever operation, the reasons you should check whether it is in fact
variable counter bearing and the optimum possible to use the undamaged paint pressure
controlled application of power, this external dent techniques to rectify the problem.
removal system allows dents in almost all vehicle
This method can only be used when the dent:
body areas to be pulled out.
• is not too large and sharp edged.
Depending on the application area and the
damage, the fixing options to the panel being • shows no signs of the material having stretched.
worked can be corrugated wire, pulling bits or • is in a surface of the body which curves
U-washers which are spot welded into position. outwards.
• is not in a repair area which is too structurally
solid.
Dent removal using special panel
beating levers
Heat-induced material shrinking
This panel beating technique with pressure is
mainly used to rectify smaller dents as a result of Material shrinking, also called settling in, can be
hail impact, transportation or parking, without the performed in a variety of ways depending on the
paint being damaged. extent of the damage and the access to the repair
area.
These repair processes differ depending on the
type of heating and subsequent working of the
heated surface. They sub-divide into two basic
processes:
• Heating using a carbon electrode.
• Heating using the oxy-acetylene torch.
In the carbon electrode process the working is done
exclusively by warming. In this case the access to
the repair position is only from the outside.
Item Description
1 Deflection by a hook arrangement
2 Pressure tool
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Carbon electrode
2 Spiral shaped heating pattern
If the damage is concentrated in a spot and is in
the form of a more rigid raised area, then the
carbon electrode must be replaced by a copper
electrode. As heat is applied, slightly more pressure
is applied to the raised area.
In the method using heating by the oxy-acetylene
torch, material shrinking is achieved by a
combination of heat and mechanical working of the
damaged area.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Item Description Minor panel repair by washer welding
process
1 Overstretched area
2 Point heating using the oxy-acetylene This method of repairing is used to repair recessed
torch areas where hands cannot reach such as a door
panel, pillar, side sill, and rear wheel arch.
3 Spiral shaped knocking back with dolly
Because the heat generated while welding washers
The repair area must always be accessible from impair the paint layer inside the panel, it is
both sides, so that the heated area can be properly necessary to treat the area with anti-rust process
worked mechanically. after the repair.
The combination of heating and mechanical
working is very effective.
1
As soon as the warm point is established,
hammering is immediately started using the
aluminum hammer together with a suitable dolly
on the inside of the repair surface, working in spiral
movements towards the warm point. This causes
material to build up in the center of the warmed
area.
2 3
Lead loading E121359
Despite good external panel beating techniques, Item Description

it is not always possible to rectify every surface
1 Front Pillar
unevenness. For this reason, application of lead
loading is an important part of panel beating. 2 Front Door
NOTE: You will find additional important advice on 3 Rear Wheel Arch
the topic of lead loading in the joining techniques
section. WARNING: To prevent injury to your
hands, wear gloves whenever hammering
For corrosion protection and adhesion reasons, on work.
body components subject to more demands, such
as doors or hoods, it is preferable to apply lead CAUTION: Always attach a safety cable
loading rather than stopper. when using a hydraulic ram or a frame
In addition, lead loading application is suitable for line of the chains used on such equipment.
creation of surface contours when the options for
panel beating are limited. In repairing by washer welding, there are two ways.
One way is to pull-out with a sliding hammer and
Typical application areas: another way is, a shaft going though washers and
• Body components with limited or no access from using a frame corrector, pull-out the recessed area.
the rear. Depending upon the damaged condition, one of
• Body components with very narrow the two methods is employed.
cross-section.
Pulling out with a sliding hammer
• Body components which are particularly
exposed or which can move. The repair according to the method is rather easy
because the area where washers are welded can
• Weld seams of partial repairs.
be regionally pulled out, but, if the area that
• Rocker panel areas, wheel arch edges, side requires repair is extended widely, this method
panel areas. does not fit for this type of work, in addition, it is
• Doors, hood, luggage compartment lid. impossible to do hammering work while being
• Swage lines and joint areas. pulled out.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
1 2
1
E121360 E121361

1 Sliding Hammer 1 Washers
2 Washers 2. If the deformation is not serious, hammer it out
regionally.
Repair using frame corrector
As the use of the shaft makes it possible to apply
force on many washers all at the same time, it is
possible to repair a wide damaged area with
minimum deformation of the washer welded area.
It is also possible to do the hammering work while
the damaged area being pulled out.
E121405
Item Description
1 Washers
3. If the deformation is extensive on the door or
outer panel, use more than one pulling point to pull
E113141 it out.
NOTE: It is more effective to pull out the pressed
Damaged area pulling out line and plain surface simultaneously.
1. To pull out a panel part with a hollow such as a
side sill or rear wheel arch, weld may washers
because of the high rigidity of the panel.
E121406
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Repair Procedure
1. Confirm range of damage. Before starting repair
work, be sure to completely confirm the deformed
area of the damage. For example, in a case that
the impact is directed to the center of the door
(mole area), the impact dispersion causes plastic
deformations at the areas of the door above and
beneath the mole.
In combination with the deformation of the press
line running under the mole, this deformation
makes these upper and lower projected damages E113146
(elastic deformations) impossible to return to the
original configurations. By repairing the pressed 3. Repair work. Because the rigidity of the door
line and upper and lower deformations, the panel is retained by the pressed line, a large strain
damaged area can be naturally returned to the takes place if the pressed line is deformed. By
original configurations. repairing the pressed line correctly, the strain can
be reduced. Repair the pressed line first and then
reform the plain surface. In a case that the strain
cannot be taken off only by repairing the pressed
line because the damage is too serious, the loss
of the rigidity of the panel is not only due to the
deformation of the pressed line but also to the
elongation caused by the plastic deformation on
the plain surface. If the elongation on the plain
surface is identified, take the strain by shrinking
the panel.
4. Weld washers in a row and let the shaft go
through them. If the shaft cannot go through,
re-weld the washers so that they are in a straight
1 line.
Repairing pressed line:
2 1
E121407
Item Description E113147
1 Plastic Deformation Surface smoothing repair:

2 Elastic Deformation
2. Remove the paint layer on the steel panel.
Scrape off the paint layer around the damaged
area with a sander.
goggles whenever sanding.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
E113148 E113151
5. Hang the chain around the center of the shaft

and pull it out and hold.
Shrinking of steel sheet
NOTE: Be careful not to pull too much.
If the strain cannot be taken off after panel
repairing, the elongation around the damaged area
extend beyond the original surface. Whenever an
excess elongation takes place due to the strain, a
shrinking process should be done around the area
to return to the original surface.
NOTE: There are two kinds of shrinking of a steel
sheet. One is by heating or cooling the area, and
another is by hitting the area with a shrinking
hammer and dolly.
E113149
6. Pull out the projected area on the pressed line

through the washer welding method and reform
the recessed area with a shadow chisel and
hammer.
E121362
Item Description
1 Elongation around the damaged area
Shrinking by heating and cooling
E113150 1. If a spot on the steel sheet is heated, that
heated area swells.
7. Reform around the welded washers by hitting 2. If kept heated, the elongation reaches a certain
lightly with a hammer. point, further expansion becomes difficult
because of the surrounding cold and hard area.
Rather, the surrounding area constrains and
compresses the expansion.
3. The compression force disappears after swelling
the sheet in the up-and down direction where it
is heated.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
4. At the moment, if the area is quickly cooled with
water, it shrinks pulling the surrounding areas
thus making it flat.
E113154
Remove the paint layer on the area to be drawn

E113153 with a sander.
Drawing by Electric Resistance goggles whenever sanding.
This method makes it possible to draw (cause To use the hammer terminal to cause shrinkage
shrinking) the strained area on the panel from on the panel, push the panel roughly with the
outside where it is not accessible or it involves hammer terminal from the center of expansion
additional work if disassembled. outward.
This method of causing shrinkage on the panel fits
the shallow and wide work.
This method uses a washer welder with the
attachments of the hammer terminal and carbon
electrode installed to it.
E113155
When a carbon electrode is used, heat the strained

area moving from outside spirally toward the center
and cool the area with a wet sponge or cloth to
make it shrink.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: Be careful not to hit strongly because it
may expand the sheet once shrunk.
E113156
Shrinking (Drawing)
E113159
1. Remove the paint layers on the front and rear
surfaces from the area where shrinkage is to take 6. When the area of expansion is extensive, repeat
place. the same process over and over because it is
impossible to repair the expansion at one time.
2. Using a hammer terminal or carbon electrode,
Starting from the center of the expansion, shift the
heat the center of the expansion.
process gradually outward until all the expanded
3. Hit the swelled area flat with a wood hammer area is shrunk to the same level.
from the front side with an appropriate dolly
contacted the rear side.
E113157
4. To cause shrinkage on the panel where hit flat

by the hammer, cool it with an air blow.
E121370
Item Description
E121472 1 Expansion Area
5. Remove tiny wrinkles caused by the shrinkage
by hitting them lightly with a hammer and dolly. Shrinking by shrinking hammer and dolly
Using a hammer that has pyramidal projections
over the hitting surface or a dolly, hit the damaged
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
area. If the panel is hit by the hammer, tiny NOTE: It also damages the panel surface with too
expansions take place, but as a whole, the panel deep a scratch to use the file will its edge on the
shrinks and get repaired. panel or to move it in a wavy way.
This method is used to repair rather a small spot
of the damaged area that dose not need to gets
repaired by a torch.
NOTE: Do not use the shrinking hammer and
shrinking dolly at the same time. If a shrinking
hammer or a shrinking dolly is used, the counter
tool must be a non-shrinking one.
E113162
E113161
Inspection and Repair by Filing

Inspection E113163
In order to see the state of evenness on the

Adjustable file:
damaged area on a panel, put scratches across
the repaired area to gauge the evenness of the To adjust an adjustable file to meet the surface
repair. most appropriately, adjust it, when the file is placed
on the panel, so that it has slight clearances
File the repaired area to remove the high spots
between both the front and rear ends and the panel
(scratches removed), and show the low spots
surface respectively as shown.
(scratches remaining the repaired area). This filling
will show where the surface is uneven or waved
that are not easily detected by eye or torch. If
necessary, rework the repaired area with a hammer
and a dolly or washer welding.
Repeat the inspections by filing all over the
damaged areas until these areas are all covered
by filed scratches.
Depending upon the extent of curves, select to use
the most appropriate files.
NOTE: An adjustable file is convenient for this
purpose because it can be used for varieties of E113164
curve filings.
Repair Procedures
Usage of Files
1. Where scratch marks are left at the first filing is
To use a file, do not push the file frontward higher than the normal surface level and where no
because such motion will leave too deep scratches marks are left is lower.
on the panel. Always place the file levelly on the
panel and move it diagonally.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: Be careful not to file too much because it
makes the panel too thin to such an extent that a
hole may be open.
E113166
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. until all the repair surface

E121372 is covered with file scratch marks.
Item Description
1 File
2. Where it is low, hit it out with a hammer and a
dolly. Where it is high, hit it back lightly with a pick
hammer.
E121374
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
4. Make the final inspection after reforming while Panel Repair by Hammer and Dolly
touching the surface lightly with gloved hands.
The reform on curved surfaces with the use of
hammers and dollies can be done by hand without
Anti-rust treatment employing any facility, but as it requires high
expertise, the result of the work depends on the
WARNINGS: workmanship of the technicians. With hammers
Anti-rust agents contain substances that and dollies, it is extremely difficult to finish the
are harmful if you breathe or swallow them, repair work to the same level of its undamaged
or get them on your skin. Wear coveralls, pressed part. So, it may be necessary to replace
gloves, eye protection, and an approved with a new part according to the level of the
respirator while using such agents. damage.
Ventilate when spraying an anti- rust agent The repair of a crushed vehicle requires a variety
since it contains a small amount of organic of handwork that is not difficult individually. If the
solvent. Keep sparks, flames, and damaged areas can be easily accessed by hand,
cigarettes away. the work using hammers and dollies is
recommended because it can be done easily
Make the anti-rust treatment to the inside surface without needing much work time.
of the panel because the paint layer is damaged
due to the heat caused as the result of the washer Repair Procedures
welding or shrinking process. 1. Confirm the range of damage. Before starting
Apply anti-rust agent to the inside of the area the repair work, make sure to confirm the deformed
reformed through the internal or external parts range of the damaged area.
installation holes or through work openings. For example, in a case that the impact is directed
to the center of the door (mole area), the impact
dispersion causes plastic deformations at the areas
of the door above and below the mole. In
combination with the deformation of the press line
running under the mole, this deformation makes
these upper and lower projected damages (elastic
deformations) impossible to return to the original
configurations.
Pull out the recessed area using a dent cup and
then hit out the pressed line form the rear using a
shadow chisel so that the pressed line elastically
comes back to the original line.
E121363
Item Description
1 Anti-Rust Agent
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
3
E121376 E121369
Item Description
1 Body Puller Set
2 Attachment
3 Sliding Hammer
4. Selection of hammers, dollies and spoons.
Select the most appropriate hammers, dollies, and
spoons to the curves on the repaired panel.
If the curves of the damaged part of the panel do
E113266 not fit to any of those of the dollies or spoons
available, select dollies or spoons of which curves
2. Remove foreign materials adhered to the rear
are smaller than those of the panel damaged area.
of the panel. Remove all the foreign materials such
as under-coat, sealer, and clay adhered to the rear NOTE: Make the repaired surface smooth without
surface, heating with a gas burner so that the dolly any scratches where the hammer, dolly, or spoon
or spoon can closely attached to the rear surface. contacts the surface.
3. Rough panel reforming. Using the body puller
with a variety of attachments connected, if
necessary, such rigid parts as rear wheelhouse
and etc. can be pulled out.
WARNING: To prevent injury to your
hands, wear gloves whenever hammering
work.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
a dolly. Place the dolly right beneath the lowered
area and strike the raised areas around. Then the
raised areas will be lowered due to the hammer
impact and, on the other hand, the lowered area
will be raised due to the reaction of the hammer
impact. It is very important to maintain a good
balance between the hammer impact and the force
to keep the dolly in position.
E113268
5. Hand repairing of unevenness using a hammer

Key points in hammering work:
Hold the hammer at around the end of the grip
lightly and swing it using your wrist.
E113271
Hammering on dolly
Hammer on dolly is used to get rid of tiny
unevenness still remaining on the repair surface.
Place the dolly straight under the raised area and
strike the area from above with a hammer. While
the hammer impact is flattening the raised area,
the dolly slightly bounces back due to the hammer
E113269 impact. To make it flat, repeat this work along the
repaired surface on the panel while moving the
When striking with a hammer, the hammer face
hammer and dolly.
must always make contact with the panel surface
evenly. NOTE: If the edge of the face contacts the
surface, a crescent recess will be left on the panel
that is very difficult to take off. Do not use too much
force. Strike it as if bouncing it. If the panel is struck
with too much force, it will be elongated later and
need shrinking work.
E113272
Spoon
For example, start to push inside of the panel with
the spoon, and strike with a hammer from the
outside of the panel.
E113270
Hammering off dolly

Hammering off dolly is used for a comparatively
large unevenness. The recess is stricken out with
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
E113273
Deep deformation
E113276
E113274
Hammering out from the underside with a dolly. Continuously small deformation
Press up the dolly on the rear of the recessed area
and strike the raise area from above with a
hammer. Repeat this work until all the damaged
area becomes one with just tiny unevenness.
E113275
To make it flat, repeat the hammer off dolly and

hammer on dolly alternately.
E105448
While moving the hammer and the dolly at the

same time along the panel surface, repeat the
work.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
1 2
E113277
Plastic deformation
4 3
E113279
E113278
Big curved panel deformation

Strike the large unevenness flat to bring the surface
to the original shape.
Strike with a hammer and dolly to reform a
big-curved recess caused on the panel from the
inside using a hammer and dolly alternately.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225790en
http://vnx.su
Paintless Dent Removal

NOTE: Basic and in-depth training is offered on
the following topics. You will find an overview of
the complete range listed in the Training brochure
published by the Ford Service Organization.
General
Application is restricted to body surfaces which are
accessible from both sides. This repair technique
is seldom feasible on double-skinned body
components or closed body profiles. The same
applies to edge areas, swage lines and seams on
body components, which are very dimensionally
stable.
The following characteristics must be present for
a dent to be removed:
• The diameter must be no more than 50 mm.
• No material stretching in the centre of the dent.
• Repair area must be accessible
Furthermore, sufficient experience in the use of
special tools and knowledge of materials are also
requirements for a successful repair.
Satisfactory repair results are only possible on mild

dents with little depth and small deformation radii.
Therefore this repair method is particularly suitable
for hail, parking and transportation damage.
Dent with material stretching
Item Description
1 Deflection by a hook arrangement
2 Pressure tool
Mild dent
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506662en
http://vnx.su
If strong and direct force during the damage

process causes the material to stretch in the middle
of a dent, then the result is a small and sharp
edged dent. Such damage cannot be rectified
without visible deformation.
Advantages of a planishing technique:
• Economical in time and materials
• The original paint is retained
• Environmentally friendly (no sanding or painting
work)
While carrying out the repair, the following itemized
repair route and process flow must be complied
with:
1. Damage diagnosis
2. Repair preparations
3. Perform repair
4. Paint finishing, corrosion protection and quality
control
In order to ensure corrosion protection, all inner
areas of the repair must be treated afterwards.
Where it is possible, the paint is repaired. In every
case the inner area of the repair must be treated
with cavity wax.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506662en
http://vnx.su
Joining Techniques
Types of joint • Apply the same welding methods as those used
in the factory manufacturing (majority is by spot
Vehicle is assembled by joining various parts and welding).
members. The type of joins are categorizes as • Apply the carbon oxide gas shield arc welding
follow. (plug weld, fillet weld) to areas where spot
welding cannot be used.
Mechanical Joint
NOTE: Gas welding and blaze welding should not
Members are joined by bolts, nuts, rivets, etc. In be applied for bonding of structural members.
order to join members, it is necessary to create a
joining structure. Mass Production Body Welding Diagram (rear side
outer panel and front wheel house/damper
Chemical Joint housing).
Members are glued together. It is usually The symbols in the mass production body welding
unnecessary to drill members for joining. diagram carry following meaning. 1: Spot weld; 2:
MIG weld; 3: 2-plate welding; 4: 3-plate welding;
Metallurgic Joint 5: 4-plate welding; 6 : The number of welding
Surfaces to be joined are melted to join them to
each other. Welding is classified as such. Types
of welding include pressure welding, fusion
welding, and soldering. 1
x x
Pressure welding: This method first heats the

metal parts to high temperatures to soften them, x
x
then applies a pinching (clamping) force. x

x
x
x x
x
x
x x
Resistance welding, a pressure welding method,

x
x x xx
x x
2
x x
x
x x x
x x x x
x
is commonly used in manufacturing and repairing

x
x
x
x
x
x x x x
of automobiles.
Fusion welding: This method heats the materials E122305
to high temperatures until they melt, and bonds
them without applying pressure. Depending on the
Item Description
method of heating, fusion welding can be arc
welding or gas welding. 1 Rear Side Outer Panel
Braze welding: This method bonds two pieces of 2 Front Wheelhouse/Damper Housing
metal without melting them by using a filler material
with a lower melting point than the materials being
joined. Welding Equipment
Welding of Automobile Body Welder

As an automobile body requires various levels of The spot welder consists of the welding gun,
strength and durability depending on the position, transformer, and the timer.
the most suitable welding method is applied
considering the location, purpose, part shape, The type that integrates the transformer in the
thickness, etc. Keeping in mind such structural welding gun and another type having a separate
characteristics, appropriate welding methods have transformer are commonly used.
to be applied to maintain the strength and durability Most of the spot welders used for body repairs
of the original vehicle body when repairing a allow adjustment of the pinching pressure and the
damage. Welding for body repair current application duration although most do not
permit adjustment of the welding current.
Transformer separate type:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Welding Tip, Arm
The tips provide pressure to the welding area,

apply current, and allow the work pieces to cool
while holding them tightly. To resist deformation
and conduct heat efficiently, the tips are made of
copper alloy (chromium copper).
The arms feed current to the tips to suit various
requirements. They are available in many different
shapes and lengths.
The pressurizing handle moves the tips up and
down to hold work pieces tightly.
E113280
Transformer integrated type:
E113282
1
2
3
4
5
Tip adjustment C-tong
0 6
The correct and incorrect position of the tip is

shown.
E113281
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113616
Transformer
Spot welding requires a large current which is
provided by a transformer that changes the primary
voltage of 200 VAC to a much lower secondary
voltage DC while providing welding current of 5000
to 9000 A.
Timer
The timer controls the duration of applied current
and is in the primary circuit of the transformer. It
provides current to the primary circuit for a
E113283
prescribed period of time, when signaled from the
switch that is located in the pressurizing handle. 2. Current application (melting). As a large current
is applied to the work pieces via the tips, joule
heat occurs at the mating surfaces of the work
Welding Principles pieces where the electric resistance is the
largest, and the temperatures in that area
Spot welding consists of such procedures as increases progressively. As the current
holding two metallic plates between electrodes, application is continued, the mating surfaces
applying an electric current to the electrodes to melt and bond together by the pressure.
melt the bonding area by the heat occurring from
the electric resistance, and applying pressure for
bonding.
1. Pinching (tight holding). To allow the current
concentration in the welding area, the work
pieces are held tight between tips (electrodes).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113284 E113286
3. Holding (pressuring and cooling). As the current 2. Make the contact surfaces tight with the use of
application is discontinued, the melting area is a vise grip wrench.
gradually cooled and a nugget (spherical area
of solidification after melting) is formed. Due to
the pressure application, the material structures
of the nugget become fine, which improves the
physical characteristics.
E113287
3. Condition of tip.
• When the diameter of the end of tip becomes
large, the current concentration lowers, causing
E113285
the nugget to become small. When the tip
diameter is too small, the nugget will not
become large.
Notes on Welding • When welding, the shape and the surface
conditions have to be checked regularly.
1. Sanding of work piece. When paint film, rust, or
other foreign matter is between the tip and work • When the end of tip is worn, correct the shape
piece, current will not occur sufficiently, causing (90 to 120°) as illustrated using a tip dresser.
poor welding. Remove the paint film, rust or other
foreign matter on the surface of the work piece with
a belt sander.
sanding.
E113288
4. Arm setting. The installed condition of arms

affects the holding pressure and current. The arms
have to be properly aligned when installing.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113289 E113290
5. Spot welding position.

• While reducing the spot welding pitch increases
the strength, when spots are excessively close
together, welding current occurs through the
already-welded spot (bypass current), causing
lack of current in the area to weld and reducing
the strength. When the pitch is small, the bypass
current increases.
• When the spot is too close to the end, the end
becomes a part of the melted nugget, reducing
the plate thickness and the strength. Spot is
E113292
center of the weld flange.
Reference of welding position
The spot welding pitch (space between spots) and
the end distance (distance from the end of the
panel) affect the strength of the whole vehicle body.
Appropriate welding pitch and distance from the
end of the plate have to be applied depending on
the thickness of the panel.
Thickness mm (in) Pitch mm (in) End Distance mm (in)

0.6 (0.02) 11 (0.43) or more 5 (0.20) or more
0.8 (0.03) 14 (0.55) or more 5 (0.20) or more
1.0 (0.04) 18 (0.71) or more 6 (0.24) or more
1.2 (0.05) 22 (0.87) or more 7 (0.28) or more
1.6 (0.06) 29 (1.14) or more 8 (0.31) or more
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
6. When performing spot welding, make sure that
you conform to the following condition: use the
correct current, conductivity time, welding pressure,
holding time, and shutdown time recommended
for the spot welder. Follow the spot welder
manufacturer’s instructions.
E113291
Welding Parameters (Given as reference only)

GMT (mm) Welding Force Welding Time Welding Cap Diameter Contact
(kN) (ms) Current (kA) (mm) Diameter (mm)
0.63 1.85 140 8.5 16 6
0.75 1.95 160 9.0 16 6
0.80 2.10 160 9.5 16 6
0.85 2.30 180 10.0 16 6
0.90 2.45 200 10.5 16 6
1.00 2.65 220 11.0 16 6
1.13 2.90 220 11.5 16 6
1.25 3.10 240 12.0 16 6
1.38 3.40 260 12.5 16 6
1.50 3.65 280 13.0 16 6
1.75 4.10 320 13.5 16 6
2.00 4.50 360 14.0 20 8
2.25 4.90 440 15.0 20 8
2.50 5.20 520 16.0 20 8
2.75 5.55 560 16.5 20 8
3.00 5.90 640 17.0 20 8
Inspection of Welded Area WARNING: To prevent injury to your

hands, wear gloves whenever checking
Destructive Inspection (Using Test Piece) work.
1. Prepare test pieces made of the same material
and thickness as the welded work piece and weld
together as illustrated.
2. Apply force in the directions shown by the arrows
to separate the spot weld, and check the conditions
of the broken pieces. If a through hole appears in
a panel, the welding shall be judged correct.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Carbon-dioxide Gas shield Arc welding
Welding Equipment
The carbon-dioxide gas-shield arc welding

equipment consists of the torch, wire feeder, shield
gas supply, control unit and the welding power
supply. The wire feeder and the welding power
supply are integrated in some types.
E113293
E113294
Non-destructive Inspection
1. After welding, insert the inspection wedge into
the side of the nugget (welded area) at the
below-illustrated position.
WARNING: To prevent injury to your
hands, wear gloves whenever checking
work.
E113296
Torch
As well as providing a stream of shield gas to the
welding area, the torch allows the current to flow
through the wire to generate arcs.
The nozzle, which guides the shield gas to the
welding area, and the contact tip, which transmits
welding current to the welding wire, are attached
E113295 on the end of the torch. The cable that transmits
welding current to the contact tip, the flexible
2. The welding shall be judged correct if the conduit liner and the shield gas passage are
diameter of the nugget is larger than ø 3 mm (0.12 provided inside of the torch. The torch switch for
in.). starting and finishing of welding is incorporated in
3. After the inspection, correct the deformation grip.
caused by the inspection wedge.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113297
E113298
E113299
Wire and Wire Feeder

The wire feeder is the device that sends the wire, Shield Gas Supply
which serves as a welding rod, to the torch. It The shield gas supply is a device that directs the
consists of the feed motor, reduction gear, feed shield gas from the gas cylinder to the torch. It
roller, and press roller. consists of the regulator, which reduces the high
The spinning of the motor is transmitted to the feed gas pressure in the gas cylinder to the prescribed
roller via the reduction gear, and sends the wire, pressure and allows adjustment of flow rate, and
which is pinched between the press roller and the the solenoid valve that opens and closes the gas
feed roller, to the torch. The wire is provided at a passage. The carbon dioxide gas is charged in the
prescribed speed depending on the welding current cylinder in the state of liquid.
and the voltage. The electric heater is incorporated in the regulator
The wire is a long, single string of steel having a to prevent icing of the regulator due to evaporation
diameter of 0.6 to 0.9 mm (0.02 to 0.04 in.). The of the liquid that draws heat.
material is almost similar to the work piece, which The purity of carbon dioxide gas is specified in JIS.
is usually a mild steel panel. For welding, Class 3, which contains less moisture,
As the carbon dioxide gas exhibits the oxidizing is usually used.
nature at high temperatures, the wire contains a
small volume of deoxidizing compounds. The wire
is coated with thin copper plating to prevent
corrosion and to improve conductivity with the
contact tip.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
control depending on the current and voltage to
maintain the arc length as constant as possible. A
large number of semi-conductors are used in the
electric circuits in the power unit.
Power Unit
The power unit provides the electric energy to
generate arcs. It converts the AC (200 volts) from
the power supply to several ten volts of DC that is
required for welding by means of the transformer
and the rectifier.
Principles
The carbon-dioxide gas-shield arc welding is a
welding method that lets an arc (electric
discharging) occur between the wire (welding rod),
which is automatically fed at a constant sped, and
the work piece, using the heat from the arc. The
wire and the work piece are melted and welded
together. During welding, carbon dioxide gas (CO2)
is supplied from the gas cylinder to keep the
welding area from the air for prevention of oxidation
and nitrifying. In carbon-dioxide gas-shield welding,
the unique, melt-drop-transfer welding called the
E113300 “short arc method” is applied. When welding thin
panels, problems such as distortion and blowing
of material tend to occur. To prevent such
Control Unit problems, it is necessary to restrict the incoming
Receiving signals from the torch switch, the control heat amount. In the short-arc method, by using a
unit regulates wire feed and turns on/off the welding wire of a very small diameter and allowing arc to
power supply and the shield gas supply. occur at a small current and low voltage, the
incoming heat to the work piece is restricted, which
The most important roles are the starting and keeps the depth of fusion small for optimum
stopping of wire feed, and the wire feed speed welding of thin panels.
E113301
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Transfer of melt drop in short-arc welding: As a short circuit occurs, a large current occurs
and separates the shorted part by the pinching
The end of the wire melts due to the heat from the
force, causing the arc to occur again.
arc, touches the work piece, making a short circuit.
E113302
Notes on Welding Arc Voltage
welding Current To ensure correct welding, an appropriate arc

length is required. The arc length depends on the
The welding current affects the depth of fusion and arc voltage.
the melting speed of the wire. It also affects the
stability of arc and occurrence of spatters. As the As voltage increases, the arc length increases,
current increases, the depth of fusion goes deeper causing the beads to become shallow and wide.
while the height (the rising of melted metal on work Conversely, when the voltage decreases, the
surface) and width of beads becomes larger. beads become deep and high. If the voltage is
excessively high, arcing is reduced, making welding
Wire diameter and welding current: difficult. If voltage is excessively low, the wire
Wire Diameter mm Current Range (Amp) touches the work, causing the arc to stop.
(in) When arc voltage is correct, a steady “Gee” sound
0.6 (0.02) 40 ~ 90 can be heard.
0.8 (0.033) 50 ~ 120

0.9 (0.035) 60 ~ 150
Work thickness and current:

Thickness Wire Diameter Current
mm (in) mm (in) Range (Amp)
0.8 (0.033) 0.9 (0.035) 60 ~ 70
1.0 (0.04) 0.9 (0.035) 60 ~ 70
1.2 (0.05) 0.9 (0.035) 70 ~ 75 E113303
1.6 (0.06) 0.9 (0.035) 80 ~ 85
Tip-to-work Clearance
If the clearance is excessive, the wire melts quickly
because the length of the protruding wire is too
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
long, and due to preheating of the sticking wire the Welding Speed
current decreases, reducing the depth of fusion.
As welding speed increases, the depth of fusion
When the clearance is excessively large or small, becomes small and the bead becomes narrow and
the shield effects are reduced, negatively affecting rising. Further increase of welding speed will cause
the work efficiency. The standard clearance is 8 to an undercut that weakens the weld and fusion can
15 mm (0.3 to 0.6 in.). be insufficient. Generally speaking, welding speed
must be increased for thinner panels.
Panel Thickness mm Welding speed (cm/

(in) min)
0.8 (0.03) 105 ~ 115
1.0 (0.04) 100
1.2 (0.05) 90 ~ 100
1.6 (0.06) 80 ~ 85
E113304
Starting of Arc
Torch Angle and Direction of Welding
1. Thoroughly remove paint or other contaminants
The welding techniques are called forward welding from the area on the metal that is being welded.
and reverse welding, describing the direction the
2. Check the length of the projecting wire and its
torch is being moved while welding.
tip. When the protruding wire is too long or the tip
In forward welding, the depth of fusion is small and of the wire is round, the arc will not start smoothly.
the beads become flat. In the reverse welding, the Adjust the wire length and cut the tip with a
depth of fusion becomes large and the beads rise. diagonal cutters.
The torch angle, 10 to 15° is the same for forward WARNING: When cutting wire, keep the
welding or reverse welding. torch facing down and away from your face
to avoid being struck by the clipped end.
E113305
E105480
Shield Gas Volume

To start the arc. As you pull the trigger (torch
A larger quantity of shield gas dose not always switch), shield gas and wire will be fed out. Touch
ensure good shield effects. If excessive, the flow the work with the tip of the wire to start arc. By
of gas will be disturbed, reducing the shield effects. keeping the tip-to-work clearance somewhat small,
The gas supply has to be regulated depending on the arc will start easier.
the nozzle-to-work clearance, welding current, WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns
welding speed and presence of wind at work area. when welding, wear an approved welding
The standard flow rate is 10 to 15 liters per minute. helmet, gloves, and safety shoes.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• Hold the torch firmly at a right angle to the plug
welding hole.
• Move the torch along the hole to weld.
• Check fusion and ensure adequate penetration
of the bottom panel.
• When plug diameter is about 5mm (0.2in.), aim
the torch at the center of the hole and weld
E113306 without moving the torch.
Plug Welding
Procedures
1. Plug hole drilling. Drill a hole for plug welding in
the upper work panel. To retain welding strength,
the proper hole diameter must be chosen as
dictated by metal thickness.
E113309
4. Inspection of welded area. If the back beads

(round marks) appear on the bottom panel,
sufficient fusion has been achieved.
E113307
2. Clamping of work pieces. Using locking jaw

pliers, hold the upper panel tightly on the lower
panel. Any deformation should be corrected by
forming with a ball peen hammer before welding
to ensure a tight fit.
E113310
Butt Welding
Procedures
1. Tack welding.
E113308
3. Welding of plug hole.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• Align ends of the work tightly against each other. • If the butt weld is long, the beads have to be
• To prevent distortion and ensure precision, completed in several segments.
make several tack welds. • Start arc slightly near the end of the previous
• The thinner the panel, the smaller the pitch of bead (1), and immediately move the torch onto
the tack weld. the end of existing beads (2), and weld while
maintaining steady bead width and height (3).
2
E113311
2. Main welding.
• Tilt the torch 10 to 15° and use the forward
welding method to weld along the mating line.
• To prevent an unsteady hand while welding,
place yourself in a comfortable and supported 3
position to help maintain the correct tip-to-work
clearance and torch angle.
• Move the torch at a steady speed while
confirming the conditions of fusion.
E113313
• When welding thin panels, such as an outer
panel, move ahead with the forward welding, 4. Preventing distortion in weld material.
and weld in spaced segments to prevent a blow
hole. • To reduce distortion, allow heat in the work to
be dispersed as much as possible.
o • Usually, weld from the center of the area or from
10 - 15
the center toward the outside of the joint.
Thinner panels will distort more than thicker
panels.
• For thin panels, keep the beads short.
E113312
3. Restarting of beads.
E113314
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
5. Inspection of weld area. automatically fed through the torch. The arc
occurring between the electrode wire and the work
piece heats the work pieces and wire, which melt
Metal Inert Gas (MIG) welding and fuse together.
General Information In ordinary gas-shield arc welding, carbon dioxide
or a mixture of carbon dioxide and argon is used
Due to the high heat conductivity of alloy, the heat as the inert gas. While a true inert gas is inactive,
generated from the electric current and contact carbon dioxide is not completely inactive. For that
resistance dissipates quickly. This makes spot reason, carbon-dioxide gas-shield welding is more
welding unsuitable for repair of aluminum panels. accurately called Metal Active Gas Arc Welding
To spot-weld aluminum alloy, an extremely strong (MAG welding).
current of well over ten thousand amperes is
required. For that reason, “MIG” welding must be Welding Equipment
used to weld an aluminum alloy automobile body.
The welder must provide a maximum current of
Comparison of spot welding for aluminum alloy approximately 200 A and allow changes of welding
and steel plate: techniques. It should allow welding of both
Material Thickness Current aluminum alloy and steel by replacing attachments,
mm (in) (Amp) gas bottles and resetting controls as recommended
by the welder manufacturer.
Aluminium 1.2 (0.05) About 26,000
Alloy Welding panels as thin as 1.6 to 3.0 mm (0.07 to
0,12 in.) is possible if the operator is a skilled
Steel Panel 1.2 (0.05) About 9,300 welder. Some newly introduced equipment allows
welding of panels of less than 1 mm (0.04 in.)
MIG welding (Metal Inert Gas Arc Welding): thickness.
This welding method is of a consumable electrode NOTE: For details on correct welding current and
type in that the welding wire serves as the voltage, refer to equipment manufacturer’s
electrode. The inert gas and the wire are recommendations.
E113433
Electrode Wire (Fuse Material) with a diameter of 0.8 to 1.2 mm (0.03 to 0.05 in.)
depending on the thickness of the work.
Select appropriate electrode wire which results in
the desired qualities of the finished weld (strength, Shield Gas
toughness, corrosion resistance, etc.).
100 % argon gas shall be used.
The electrode wire for Honda’s aluminum alloy
vehicle body should be of “A5356WY” material,
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Reference data of welding parameters:
Thick- Wire Current Voltage Gas
ness Dia flow
1.6 0.8 50 ~ 70 10 ~ 11 15 ~ 18
2.0 0.9 ~ 60 ~ 12 ~ 15 15 ~ 18
1.0 110
2.5 0.9 ~ 80 ~ 13 ~ 16 17 ~ 20
1.2 120
3.0 0.9 ~ 100 ~ 15 ~ 18 17 ~ 20
1.2 140 E113315
5.0 0.9 ~ 120 ~ 17 ~ 20 10 ~ 20 Forward welding:

1.2 170
Use forward welding technique. Keep the torch
more upright (5 to 15°) against the direction of
Notes of MIG Welding travel than when welding steel panels.
The welding parameters have to be set correctly

and adjusted precisely during welding because the
allowable thickness range is rather limited
compared to the welding of steel panels.
Compared to welding of steel panels, about 50%
more shield gas is required.
When inserting the welding wire into the feed
mechanism, remove any burrs from the tip of the
wire with emery paper and push the wire through
the torch by hand. Care should be taken to avoid E113775
damaging the teflon inner liner of the cable.
The tension on the wire drive roller must be The arc sounds from aluminum welding should be
adjusted lower than when welding with steel wire. soft, continuous humming like those from welding
Hold the wire lightly at the contact tip and adjust of steel panels. The welding speed is considerably
the tension to allow slippage of the wire at the drive faster than welding steel panels and since the
roller when the torch switch is turned on. If the drive aluminum wire contains magnesium, a small
roller tension is excessive, the wire can become amount of soot occurs along MIG welding beads.
jammed. If tension is insufficient, the wire speed
will become inconsistent. WARNINGS:
The wire feed speed is typically higher than when To prevent eye injury and burns when
welding steel panels. welding, wear an approved welding helmet,
gloves, and safety shoes.
The tip-to work clearance should be the same as
when welding steel panels. The torch angle, Small pieces of aluminum alloy are
however, must be at a right angle to the work spattered by MIG welding can be projected
surface. over considerable distances. It is therefore
important to provide protection not only
for the welder operators themselves but
also anyone in the surrounding areas.
Spatter tends to stick on the torch nozzle, the end
of the contact tip and can obstruct the proper flow
of shield gas causing welding defects. Remove the
torch nozzle and clean thoroughly then apply a
sticking inhibitor agent.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
The torch nozzle and the contact tip wear more regulator and torch with its hoses. For safety,
rapidly than when welding steel panels. anti-flashback (check) valves should be fitted
between the hose ends and torch. Should a
backfire occur in the torch, such check valves
Oxyacetylene Gas Welding prevent an internal fire from going through the hose
to the regulators and bottles where it could cause
an explosion.
Welding Equipment
A gas welding outfit consists of the oxygen cylinder,

acetylene cylinder, oxygen regulator, acetylene
3
1
E122420
This rapid oxidation produces light and heat, which

Item Description
is called combustion. Although oxygen itself does
1 Torch not burn, it assists burning of other material and
often called the “supporter of combustion”. While
2 Oxygen Hose
there are several ways of producing oxygen,
3 Acetylene Gas Regulator industrial welding oxygen is produced by
fractionating the liquefied air made by compressing
4 Oxygen Regulator air at low temperatures.
5 Oxygen Cylinder The oxygen cylinder is a thick steel reservoir tested
6 Dissolved Acetylene Cylinder to a pressure as high as 19600 kPa (200 kgf/cm2).
A safety device “works at 19600 kPa (200 kgf/cm2)”
7 Acetylene Gas Hose in the valve neck of the cylinder and helps prevent
rupture if the internal pressure becomes excessive.
Oxygen and Oxygen Cylinder The oxygen is compressed to 14700 kPa (150
Oxygen (O2) is a colorless, odorless gas that is kgf/cm2) 95°F (35°C) and charged into the cylinder.
1.1 times heavier than air. Oxygen is chemically An oxygen cylinder is painted black to indicate that
active and combines with most matter except inert the content is oxygen along with stamped O2 mark
gases, gold, platinum, etc. and produces oxides. on the shoulder of the cylinder. (Note: The color
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
codes of the gas cylinder may be different standards in your country.)
depending on the regulation of the country. Check
E114288
Acetylene and Solution Acetylene as calcium carbonate, charcoal, asbestos, etc. is

filled, and stores acetylene dissolved in acetone
Acetylene gas (C2H2) is not a single element. It is
or DMF. The charge pressure is regulated to under
a hydrocarbon, composed of carbon and hydrogen,
1520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2) at 59°F (15°C). The
generally produced by mixing carbide with water.
cylinder is painted brown with a mark (C2H2)
Pure acetylene gas is colorless, has a slight aroma,
inscribed on the shoulder.
and is lighter than air (specific gravity: 0.91). Due
to the high carbon content, acetylene gas burns A decomposing explosion can take place without
with a red flame and produces soot. When oxygen external oxygen because heat occurs when
is supplied, however, the flame become blue and decomposing and the heat causes volumetric
the temperature rises as high as 5432°F (3000°C). expansion. Under certain conditions, the risk of
Devoid of air or oxygen, acetylene is stable under explosion starts from 150 kPa (1.5 kgf/ cm2).
normal temperatures/pressures but easily
decomposes and can explode when slightly heated, Regulator
compressed or subjected to an impact. Generally, The oxygen or acetylene charged in a cylinder is
the risk of explosion becomes likely from about pressurized higher than the pressure required for
150 kPa (1.5 kgf/cm2) and explosion is inevitable welding. As gas is consumed, cylinder pressure
above 200 kPa (2 kgf/cm2)*. If acetylene comes drops but the regulator keeps “at torch” pressure
in contact with copper, silver, etc., the highly at the appropriate level to ensure consistent
explosive compounds such as acetylene-copper welding.
or acetylene-silver will be produced.
The regulator consists of the high pressure gauge,
Acetylene dissolves easily in acetone low pressure gauge, regulator handle, spring,
(CH2COCH3), DMF (HCON [CH3] 2), diaphragm, and valve. The high pressure gauge
N,N-dimethylformamide, etc. As the solution indicates the cylinder pressure while the low
acetylene is not explosive, acetylene is charged pressure gauge indicates the regulated pressure.
into a steel cylinder in which porous material such The spring, diaphragm and valve keep the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
regulated pressure constant. The pressure is handle.
adjusted to the desired level using the regulator
E113436
Torch number or thickness of steel plate weldable (in

millimeters) with that nozzle (German torch).
The torch mixes oxygen and acetylene at an
appropriate ratio to produce the correct flame for
the application. It is also called the blowpipe.
Torches are roughly classified as welding torch,
cutting torch, and further classified as low pressure
torch, medium pressure torch, etc.
Welding Torch
Torches generally used for welding are the low
pressure type which can operate at low acetylene
pressure. In the torch, the stream of oxygen draws
acetylene from the center of the injector nozzle to
produce the mixture.
A torch with a pressure-regulated, needle valve at
the injector nozzle is called a “variable pressure”
torch or French torch. Torches without a regulating
device at the injector nozzle are a “non-adjustable”
torch or German torch.
The flame size is increased or decreased by
changing the nozzle. The size of the nozzle is
identified by acetyleneper- hour (French torch)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113439
Principles
Gas welding mixes acetylene gas with oxygen to

create a high temperature about 5432°F (3000°C)
flame that melts the edges of the area to be welded
then joins them with welding rod. Due to the
difficulty of containing its heat in a small area, gas
welding heats a wide area and reduces the strength
of steel panels and for that reason, gas welding is
not used during mass-production or to repair body
damage. However, since gas welding allows easy
E113437
adjustment of flame and heat application, it is used
to heat a body panel for correcting position, to cut
Cutting Torch off a part of the panel, and for brazing.
The cutting torch has an additional oxygen pipe
and a valve to direct high-pressure oxygen to
nozzle.
E113440
E113438 Type of Flame

The nozzle’s center point is for oxygen supply while When acetylene and oxygen are mixed and
the surrounding port is for preheating the steel prior burning, the flame changes depending on the
to cutting. amount of oxygen supplied. Depending on the
Cross section of nozzle: mixing rate, the flames are classifies into the
following three types.
Neutral Flame
The neutral flame is also called the standard flame.
It is attained when acetylene and oxygen are mixed
1 to 1 (volume rate) and ignited. This flame consists
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
of the core (also called white cone), which is the oxidizing flame is used for oxidizing melted metal,
bright whitish part in the center, and the welding of brass, bronze, etc., but not used for
surrounding transparent blue flame called the outer welding mild steel.
flame (also called secondary flame). The neutral
flame is used for welding of most metals such as
mild steel.
E113458
E113456 Flame Adjustment for Welding

Carbide Flame WARNING: To prevent eye injury and burns
The carbide flame is also called the acetylene-rich when welding, wear an approved welding
flame or the reducing flame, and contains slightly helmet, gloves, and safety shoes.
more acetylene than oxygen. Unlike the neutral 1. Attach a nozzle suitable for the work (standard:
flame, the carbide flame consists of three pats: Nozzle number 100R/h per 1 mm (0.04 in.) of work
core, outer flame, and middle acetylene cone panel thickness) to the torch.
surrounding the core. The length of the acetylene
2. Adjust the oxygen and acetylene pressure.
cone varies depending on the richness of acetylene
in the mixture. When the length of the acetylene • Oxygen pressure: 100 to 500 kPa (1 to 5
cone is two times of the core, it is called the “double kgf/cm2)
acetylene flame”, when three times more, it is • Acetylene pressure: 10 to 30 kPa (0.1 to 0.3
called the “triple acetylene flame”. The mixing rate kgf/cm2)
of oxygen and acetylene is about 1 to 1.4 (volume
rate) in the case of the double acetylene flame. 3. First open the acetylene valve on the torch about
The carbide flame is used for welding aluminum, 1/2 turn, then open the oxygen valve slightly and
nickel, nickel alloy, etc. ignite at nozzle.
4. The acetylene will burn red and as you open the
oxygen valve the flame will gradually turn blue and
become a carbide flame.
5. As you keep increasing oxygen, the acetylene
cone will become small, and becomes a neutral
flame.
6. To make an oxidizing flame, open the oxygen
valve further or reduce acetylene.
E113457
Oxidizing Flame
When there is more oxygen than acetylene, an
oxidizing flame is formed. While the oxidizing flame
appears similar to the neutral flame, the core is
short and purplish compared to the neutral flame,
and the outer flame is short and flashing. The
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
2. Adjust the acetylene valve and the preheating
oxygen valve to make a neutral flame.
3. Preheat the end of the cutting line with the
neutral flame until the work becomes red hot.
E113459
Flame Adjustment for Cutting

E113462
when heating, wear an approved welding 4. As the work becomes red hot, quickly open the
helmet, gloves, and safety shoes. cutting oxygen valve, discharging high-pressure
Steel is cut by first preheating the metal to oxygen to cut along the desired line.
combustion temperature, then the metal burns and • Maintain a constant clearance between the work
starts to melt, and at this point the additional stream and the torch and move the torch while
of high-pressure oxygen is used to cut though the confirming that the work is cut properly.
metal.
• When cutting relatively thick panel such as the
side frame, keep the torch at a right angle. To
cut a thin panel like the outer panel, keep the
torch tilted.
E113460
1. Place the work flat but raised slightly on steel

spacers (scrap metal) to create an open space
under the cutting line. To prevent accidental fires, E113463
it is best to place a sheet of scrap steel below the
work to be cut.
E113464
E113461
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Welding • Maintain the correct gaps (root formation).
• Produce a test weld.
Before welding work is performed on a vehicle
body, all safety measures for the protection of Full seam
people, modules and electrical components must A welded joint with a full seam is suitable for joining
be observed. highly profiled body parts. Pillar and sill areas are
NOTE: Before beginning the work, please refer to typical application areas.
the safety instructions and warnings in the chapter
Safety Instructions. Please also note the warnings
of the respective equipment manufacturer.
In body construction, the main type of welding used
is resistance spot welding. In the course of repair
work, this must be restored accordingly.
However, there are also fields of application for
MIG welds.
MIG welding
Fields of application
• Any joins that are MIG welded in production Item Description
must also be replaced by MIG welds. 1 Full seam
• Puddle welding may be used in certain cases,
Before the welding process, you must carry out the
if there is insufficient access.
following operations:
• If the overall panel thickness is greater than 3
mm, without correspondingly powerful spot • Both parts of the panel must be bare on both
welding equipment, puddle welding should be sides over a width of 5 mm.
used. • Align the parts precisely with clamps.
• At present, MIG brazes must still be replaced • To prevent the panel from warping, tack longer
by MIG welds. See chapter MIG Brazing. joints before welding them.
NOTE: The increased application of heat during Interrupted weld seam - intermittent seam
MIG welding destroys the corrosion protection
layers over a much larger area than during The intermittent seam is used for offset joint
resistance spot welding. For this reason, greater surfaces or for butt joints with a metal insert. This
care must be taken when applying the corrosion form of seam is mainly used on the external panel
protection afterwards. area for sectional repairs.
Welding repairs can only be carried out properly if
the equipment is set up correctly and all
welding-related preparations are complied with
accurately.
• Please note the instructions of the respective
welding equipment manufacturer.
• The hose assembly must be untwisted.
• The core must be free of abraded rod particles.
• The gas and current nozzles must be free of
slag and scale residue.
• Pay attention to the quality of the welding rod
and the throughput of gas.
Item Description
• Ensure that the joint surface is perfect.
• Prepare a bare metal joint surface. 1 Intermittent seam
Please note the following welding parameters:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• Weld gap.
• Spot weld interval.
• Apply alternate tack welding across the entire
length of the seam. This keeps warping to a
minimum.
Puddle weld.
Puddle welding is used as a substitute if no spot
welding equipment that is sufficiently powerful for
the thickness of the panel is available. This welding
method is also used if the welding position cannot
be accessed with a spot welding gun.
NOTE: A test weld should always be carried out
to ensure that the welded joint is not just a surface
connection.
Please note the following welding parameters:
• The panels to be joined must lie perfectly flat to
one another.
• The panel flanges must be bare at the welding
position. Treat other areas with corrosion
protection.
• Prepare the holes depending on the thickness
and number of the panels. The hole size should
E120771
be 6-10 mm, or match the original weld spot.
• Start the welding procedure on the panel at the The repair welds must have the same number of
bottom so that the hole is filled completely. weld spots as the welds used in production with
the correct diameters.
Resistance spot welding. This requires that:
• The panels to be welded overlap.
The basic principle for repair welds is to restore • The weld spot is accessible on both sides for
the original welded joint as far as possible. the electrodes.
NOTE: Before starting the work, please refer to • The shape and alignment of the weld electrodes
the chapter on safety instructions. is correct.
• The resistance welding equipment is powerful
enough to reproduce the spot weld diameter
used in production.
NOTE: The welding equipment settings and the
adjustment of the individual parameters are to be
made in accordance with the device manufacturer's
specifications.
Well-prepared welding flanges are a prerequisite
for a problem-free welded joint. This means:
• The welding flanges must lie perfectly flat to one
another.
• The welding flanges must be clean and free of
oil or grease on both sides.
• Welding primer (zinc-coated and conductive)
must be applied as corrosion prevention.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Only in limited cases can welding errors in Joining techniques
resistance spot weld joints be detected from the
outside . Therefore, a test weld should be carried Butt joints
out before each repair weld. The peel test carried The butt joint is a joining technique frequently used
out after the welding gives information on the in body repairs. The butt joint is typically used for
quality of the welding. The spot weld must not flake repairs in the pillar and rocker panel area.
off.
E113465
Preparation of the joint areas includes:

Item Description
• Sanding the connection areas bare on both
1 Join areas sides.
2 Profile • Removal of the zinc layer in the welding area.
3 Full seam • Carrying out welding tests on an equivalent
sample panel before the actual welding, if
Areas that are suitable for the use of the butt joint: necessary.
• short seam lengths. • Tack welding in the join area: From the edges
• highly profiled structures. to the centre, then check the shape.
• mostly thin panel thicknesses. • Joining new and old parts with a full seam weld.
The edges of the panels to be joined are placed Butt joint with panel strip
against each other and are joined with a full seam
As with the butt joint without a panel strip, the
in whilst maintaining a required welding gap
panels to be joined are pushed together, but are
(welding gap same as panel thickness).
joined with an intermittent seam. A panel strip
NOTE: The butt joint requires a high degree of placed beneath the area to be joined stabilizes the
accuracy and care when trimming and cutting. For welding area.
correct execution of the welding, an exact, even
welding gap must be maintained.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
E113466
Item Description
1 Join area
2 Tack welding
3 Spot welding
4 Panel strip
Preparation of the joint areas includes:
• Preparation of a panel strip approx. 30 mm wide.
• Grinding the joint areas and the panel strip to E113467
bare metal on both sides.
• Removal of the zinc layer in the welding area. Item Description
• Carrying out welding tests on an equivalent 1 Body part
sample panel before the actual welding, if
necessary. 2 Joggled area
• Tacking the panel strip to the old part with 3 New panel
several resistance spot welds.
• Joining the new and old panel with an The amount of reworking required is kept to a
intermittent seam. minimum, by avoiding the use of a full seam. Other
advantages are:
• Lead loading the weld seam.
• Heat-induced warping caused by the welding
Joggled joint procedure is low, as intermittent seam welding
only applies a little heat.
The joggled joint variant is restricted to body areas
with a good surface condition without beads/swage • When cutting the new part, slight measuring
lines or profiles. A sectional replacement with a tolerances are permitted, as these are covered
joggled joint is welded with an intermittent seam. by the joggled area.
This procedure is used, for example, at the Preparation of the joint areas includes:
transition from the side panel to the rocker panel
(3-door vehicles). • Sanding the connection areas bare on both
sides.
• Removal of the zinc layer in the welding area.
• Preparation of a joggled strip.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• Carrying out welding tests on an equivalent In areas in which resistance spot welding is not
sample panel before the actual welding, if possible due to limited space or higher strength
necessary. requirements, MIG welding was previously used.
• Joining the new and old panel with intermittent Increasingly, these MIG welded seams are being
seam welding. replaced by MIG brazes.
• Lead loading the weld seam. NOTE: At the time of printing, MIG brazing has still
not been approved for repair in the workshop.
MIG brazes Please find out the current status.
Metal Inert Gas (MIG) brazing is increasingly used

in production for certain body areas.
1 2 3
E122025
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Item Description • Metallic and non-metallic materials can be joined
together.
1 Outer wheelhouse / rocker panel
• Different thicknesses of materials can be used.
reinforcement (inner)
• The material does not have to be heated, and
2 A-pillar reinforcement / A-pillar inner panel therefore does not warp.
(inner) • Low level of preparation required.
3 Bulkhead reinforcement / A-pillar (outer) NOTE: For detailed instructions on the procedure,
MIG brazed connections are partly used in please refer to the equipment manufacturer's
production for the following areas: Inner fender operating manual.
reinforcement to A-pillar, A-pillar reinforcement to Disadvantage:
A-pillar inner panel and outer wheelhouse to rocker
• During dismantling procedures, swarf/rivet
panel reinforcement.
remains can fall into inaccessible cavities, which
The temperature range used during MIG brazing can lead to rattling and rusting.
is significantly lower. This keeps the damage to
the anti-corrosion zinc layer on zinc-coated panels
to a minimum.
This results in the following advantages of the MIG
brazed seam:
• No corrosion of the brazed seam.
• Low erosion of the zinc coating in the joining
area.
• Minimal destruction of the coating on the reverse
side of the panel.
• Low level of heating and thus little warping.
• Easy finishing of the brazed seam.
• Good for bridging gaps. Item Description
NOTE: MIG welds must not be carried out on or 1 Panels

near existing MIG brazed seams as even the 2 Pop rivet
smallest amount of brazing solder can result in a
reduction in the strength of the weld seam. Pop rivets are used if only one side of the panel is
accessible. In this process, overlapping panels are
Alternative repair methods are specified in the
drilled and connected with a pop rivet.
model-specific body literature.
Pop rivets can be inserted pneumatically,
MIG brazing requires a new generation of welding
hydraulically or manually with rivet guns.
equipment and training in the technique. For this
reason, MIG brazed joints must be replaced by
MIG welds at another place if a repair is performed. Brazed connections
When carrying out these repairs, the requirements
in the corresponding repair instructions must be Brazing is a procedure for connecting metallic
taken into consideration. materials using a further melted metal.
The melting point of the brazing material is lower
than that of the basic material. The basic material
Rivets is covered with the brazing material and not melted.
With riveting, two or more panels are joined As the material is heated to a lesser extent than
together using a joining element (rivet). In body during welding, brazing is particularly suitable for
construction, pop rivets and punched rivets are parts that are sensitive to warping, oxidization and
used. heating. Brazing means it is possible to join
together all common metals.
Advantages of riveted connections:
Brazed connections can be detached again through
heating.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Brazed parts have a limited strength, low thermal WARNING: Brazes are metal alloys (usually
resistance and a certain risk of corrosion due to lead and tin). Poisonous gases and dust
the difference between the basic materials used can be produced during processing. Use
and the brazing material (difference in potential). an extraction unit and, if required, a
protective mask.
NOTE: All connections that are brazed in
production must also be brazed if a repair is NOTE: Since 07/2003, lead compounds have been
performed. ruled out for production. In the workshop too,
lead-free tin solders must be used.
Watertight, permanent connections must be
produced at the transitions between A or C pillars For correct repair, the panel is beaten out almost
and the roof. Continuous welded seams in visible to the original shape and then the rest is smoothed
areas require time-consuming finishing. For this out through lead loading. First, the panel to be lead
reason, such connections are not welded, but loaded must be properly prepared.
brazed. To create a basis for the actual lead loading
Brazed connections are: process, a lead loading paste is first applied to the
panel. The paste is then heated and wiped away
• Very stable and yet elastic.
with a cloth. Now the tin can be applied and
• Watertight. moulded with a brazing block.
• Easy in surface processing.
After the repair site has cooled slowly, it is worked
NOTE: Brazed connections require careful with the body plane until the surface is smooth and
preparation. It is extremely important that the joint has no visible joints.
surfaces are exactly aligned and that a bare metal
joint surface is prepared.
Bonding
This means:
• Thorough cleaning of the surfaces to be brazed. Bonded connections are used more and more in
• Close contact of the panels at the brazing modern body designs. Here, a distinction is made
position. between bonds for stabilization purposes and
bonds for adhesive strength. Bonds for stabilization
• The connection/repair position is heated to the purposes are found on clinched flanges and on
melting temperature of the brazing material cross beams in doors or on the roof.
(approx. 900° C).
• The brazing material is applied to the connection WARNING: Risk of poisoning! Adhesive
area and heated on the panel to the melting can be harmful to health. Ventilate rooms
temperature. well and use breathing protection. Where
possible, work with an extraction unit.
• The liquid brazing material is drawn between
the panels through capillary action. NOTE: Adhesives are chemical products and are
• The materials join together at the edges of the subject to the safety regulations of the
panels (alloy formation). manufacturer.
The repair adhesive is an elastic 1K adhesive on
a polyurethane basis. Bonds that rely on adhesive
Lead loading strength are used instead of conventional metal
connections. Here, the hardening 1K epoxy resin
Lead loading with tin is the best repair method for is used.
smoothing joins on sectional replacements or for
rectifying small uneven areas on the panel surface. Bonded connections have the advantage over
Tin has the following advantages: conventional connection procedures that no heating
is required. This means it is not necessary to
• Excellent bonding on bare metal surfaces. remove heat-sensitive parts, such as the fuel tank,
• Good moulding properties. electronic modules or plastic parts.
• Good properties for the production of shapes In addition, bonded connections have further
and contours. advantages:
• Permanent shape.
• They are air and watertight.
• Heat expansion is the same as steel.
• High corrosion protection
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• Different materials can be connected. Do not use thinner, petroleum ether or other
• Bonding can be combined with resistance spot cleaning agents.
welding. • Leave the connection surfaces to dry.
• NOTE: Use protective gloves when applying
the adhesive.
1 Apply the adhesive to one or both surfaces to
be bonded, according to the manufacturer's
instructions, using a suitable tool.
• Join the parts as precisely as possible
immediately after applying the adhesive so that
only minor corrections are necessary.
• Fix the parts in the final position with clamps.
• Depending on the adhesive, the hardening
process can be accelerated using a hot air
blower.
• Finally, clean the area that has been bonded of
leftover adhesive.
Bonding and welding

On some vehicle models, (such as the Ford Ka),
bonding is combined with resistance spot welding.
This connection technique has the following
advantages:
2 • Tight, anti-corrosion connection seam.
• High strength due to additional resistance weld
E120515
spots.
Item Description Please note the following points during the repair
work:
1 Butt joints
• Only use adhesive suitable for welding
2 Bonded connection (conductive).
NOTE: The quality of the bonded connection is • Carry out resistance spot welding on the
largely dependent on the care taken during connection flanges before the adhesive
preparatory work. hardening process.
• Carry out test welding with the adhesive applied.
Different adhesives are used in body repairs.
Please refer to the repair instructions for the • If MIG welding is carried out during a sectional
specific adhesive to be used. Please also take into repair on a connection flange with adhesive
consideration the instructions of the adhesive material, the adhesive material must be applied
manufacturer. at a distance of approx. 10 mm from the weld
spot.
Body bonding requires the following steps:
• The processing temperature of the parts to be Bonding and riveting
processed must comply with the adhesive
manufacturer's specifications. As with welding, bonding can also be combined
• The connection surfaces must be even and with riveting. This connection technique has
perfectly flat to one another. additional advantages. These are:
• Sand the connection surfaces bare. Use only • Metallic and non-metallic materials can be joined
completely dirt and grease-free tools to do this. together.
• Clean the connection surfaces with the special • Different thicknesses of materials can be used.
cleaner provided by the adhesive manufacturer.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
• The material does not have to be heated, and
therefore does not warp.
• The rivet connection stabilizes the connected
components during the adhesive hardening
phase.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225792en
http://vnx.su
Plastic Repairs
General Thermoplastics
Many different kinds of plastics are used for If heating temperature is raised, the resins become
automotive parts depending upon the purposes of soft and if it is heated further, they are melted.
parts. Their characteristics are also very different When the temperature is down, they return to a
from one to another. It is, therefore, important to solid state.
know those material names and their chemical and
mechanical characteristics. Roughly divided there Name of Plastic Codes
are two kinds of plastics, a thermoplastic resin and Polyethylene PE
a thermosetting resin. The proportion of plastics
used in vehicle construction continues to rise. Up Polypropylene PP
to now damaged plastic components often had to Polyvinyl chloride PVC
be replaced. In the meantime plastic repair is
becoming more and more accepted because of Acrylic nitril butadiene ABS
rising costs. styrene copolymer
NOTE: Plastic adhesives are chemical products Acrylic resin PMMA
and are subject to the safety instructions of the Polyamide (Nylon) PA
manufacturer.
Polycarbonate PC
Because of the various compositions of plastics,
repair work to plastic parts involves a variety of Polyphenylene PPO
repair methods.
Themoplastic synthetic TPR
The following methods are used: rubber
• Thermoplastic straightening.
Thermosets
• Plastic welding.
• Plastic adhesive bonding. Once this type of resins is heated and, as the
result, hardened, they are not softened again even
• Plastic lamination techniques. if they are heated again.
In repair work, the material properties of plastics
are highly significant. There are two main groups: Name of Plastic Codes
• Thermoplastics. Polyurethane PUR
• Thermosets. Unsaturated polyester UP
NOTE: Elastomers make up a third group of Glass fibre enhanced FRP
plastics. These are not mentioned below because plastic
they have no plastics repair applications.
Phenol resin PH
Plastics used by Ford

Identifier Description
PA Polyamide
PC Polycarbonate
PP Polypropylene
PP/EPDM Polypropylene/ethylene propylene diene copolymer
PC/PBT Polycarbonate/polybutylene terephthalate
PBT/PC Polybutylene terephthalate/polycarbonate
PUR Polyurethane
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Identifier Description
GRP Glass reinforced plastic
Properties of Major Plastics Strong in shock absorption. Good in heat resistant

and coldresistant properties, electrical
Polyethylene (PE) characteristics, self-digesting and weather proofing
Good in cold resistant, electrical characteristic, and properties. Low fatigue strength. Stress cracks and
chemical- resistant properties. Impenetrable except solvent cracks may happen.
air. Though inferior in strength, rigidity and thermal Unsaturated Polyester
resistant properties, as density is increased, rigidity
A typical material based on glass-based fiber for
and thermal resistant property is improved.
FRP. Good mold forming property. Cheaper than
Polypropylene (PP) epoxy resin. Good in strength, rigidity, and
The lightest in weight of all the resins. Used for electrical characteristics. Weak in alkali and
large size parts like bumpers. Its strength, rigidity, hydrolytic dissociation easily takes place. Greatly
and surface hardness are greater than those of shrinks when hardened. Insufficient heat-resistant
Polyethylene(PE). It has a high thermal resistant property.
temperature. Good in electric characteristics, Polyurethane
anti-water and chemical-resistant properties. Strong
High elasticity. Good in anti-wear,
in bending. Inferior in adhesiveness and
anti-deterioration, anti-oil, and weatherproofing
weatherproof property.
properties. Weak in alkali and hydrolytic
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) dissociation easily takes place. Its hard foam is
Through addition of plasticizer, it is possible to good for heat insulation and sound-insulation. As
adjust its property from soft to hard. Good in a adhesive, it can be hardened at room
electrical characteristics, chemical- resistant, and temperature and is strong.
weather resistant properties. Inferior in antishock
and anti-bending properties.
Plastic identification
ABS Resin
(Acrylic nitril butadiene styrene copolymer). Good Normally the identifier is marked on the plastic
in mold forming, anti-shock property, and components used in vehicle construction.
metal-plating properties. Easy secondary NOTE: The identification of the type of plastic is
processing. Inferior in weatherproofing, heat necessary for the plastic welding process in order
resistant, and chemical resistant properties. to determine the correct welding rod (welding
Acrylic Resin (PMMA) material) to use.
Clear and transparent. Used for lens for taillight If none is present, it can be determined using two
lens. High transparent rate. Good in strength, different procedures/methods:
weather proofing, and easiness in work process. • Visual Inspection
Inferior in anti-shock, anti-solvent, heat-resistant • Mechanical Check
properties.
Polyamide (Nylon) (PA) Visual Inspection
Used for structural and skeletal member parts Visual inspections mainly serve to identify PUR
because of its high strength and tenacity. Good in and GRP materials. Thermoplastic components
self-lubricant, anti-wear, anti-solvent properties. are often painted and are therefore difficult to
Wide range of temperatures for use. High water identify.
absorption rate. A change of dimensions and or Identification characteristics:
softening due to water absorption may cause
• When PUR cracks or similar damage occurs,
troubles from time to time.
pores of foam can be seen.
Polycarbonate (PC) • GRP can be recognized by the glass fiber
structure on the inside.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
CAUTION: Danger of poisoning! When A burning test allows the plastic to be determined
burned, most plastics release vapors more exactly. This involves burning a small piece
harmful to health. Ventilate the room well of the plastic material and observing the behavior
and use respiratory protection. Where of the flame, the smoke characteristics and the
possible work using an extraction system. dripping behavior.
Characteristics of plastics:
Plastic Flame behavior Smoke characteristic Dripping behavior
ABS No way to distinguish Blackish -
from other copolymers
PA Bluish, transparent No smoke Drips with blistering
flame with yellow edge
PC, PC/PBT, PBT/PC Yellow, very sooty flame Yellow-white plumes of -
with black-brown fire smoke
areas
PP, EPDM Calm flame, similar to a No smoke Melts
candle
PUR Agitated flame Intense sooty plumes Hardly drips
GRP Yellow-red, intense Whitish plumes of -
sooty flame smoke
Another method to determine the plastic group is Information sheets, safety notices and guidelines
the sanding test. In this a place is chosen which for the processing of adhesives containing
will not be visible later, and the finger belt sander isocyanate, polyester resin, adhesives, solvent and
is used to sand the plastic. thinners provide more details on their use.
The plastic group can be determined using the The following instructions must always be followed:
pattern of the dust:
• Polyester resin, adhesive, solvents and thinners
• Thermosets produce a white dust. are inflammable and must not be used near
• Thermoplastics smear and do not produce dust. naked fire or flames.
• Sawing and grinding operations must only be
Mechanical Check carried out in rooms equipped with extraction
The plastic group can be determined by a sound systems.
test: • If no rooms with extraction systems are
available, only use tools with extraction
• Degree of hardness - the higher-pitched the
equipment.
sound, the harder the plastic.
• Protective equipment such as gloves, protective
• Elasticity - the more muffled the sound, the
goggles, aprons and breathing masks are
higher the elasticity of the plastic.
essential.
Safety instructions Plastic welding

In addition to the general safety instructions, the Splits formed in plastic bumpers are typical
relevant regulations and accident prevention possible plastic repairs.
legislation must be observed.
NOTE: Do not carry out plastic welding in the area
NOTE: Without exception, before starting work you of fixed foam backing. The foam backing will
must read the safety and warning instructions in usually be destroyed and the function of the
the chapter "Safety Instructions". In addition, pay component is then no longer guaranteed.
equipment manufacturer. If repair using adhesive methods is not possible
because of unfavorable conditions at the rear of
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
the repair location, plastic welding is a possible • Rework the weld seam. After cooling, sand the
repair process. raised weld seam.
There are two methods of welding: hot air draw • Clean the sanded repair surface using plastic
welding and hot air fanning welding. cleaner. Apply plastic primer thinly to the repair
surface and paint it.
Plastic welding set
Despite good preparation and the correct choice
of welding materials, weld faults may occur. The
correct choice of temperature is important for the
success of the repair.
Possible causes of weld faults:
• Deformation caused by overheating of the repair
area or tensions in the material while welding
the component. Plastic material too thin.
• Poor weld joint because the weld temperature
was too low or the welding speed was too fast.
Welding different materials together.
• Weld seam dropped because the split gap was
Item Description too wide or the welding temperature was too
high.
1 Various welding rods
2 Scraper (heart-shaped) Adhesive bonding of plastics
3 Hot air blower (approx. 1500 W)
Adhesive bonding of plastics has some advantages
4 Clamps over welding methods:
5 Welding nozzles • Within the group of thermoelastic plastics, all
semi-rigid ancillary components (such as
In addition to the components listed, plastic welding bumpers, front grilles, etc.) can be repaired
requires tools already found in the workshop such without identification.
as scrapers, sanders, face cutters etc.
• A two-component polyurethane based adhesive
As with all other welding processes, only certain is used for all thermoplastic parts.
material combinations can be joined together using • Reinforcement strips can be attached behind
plastic welding. splits (split length up to max. 100mm) and
NOTE: Basic and in-depth training is offered on openings to ensure the original strength
the following topics. You will find an overview of properties.
the complete range listed in the Training brochure Tools and equipment also familiar from paint
published by the Ford Service Organization. repairs can be used in making adhesive repairs to
Repair sequence during plastic welding: thermoplastic components.
NOTE: The manufacturer's data must be taken into Angle grinders and belt sanders can be used to
account when choosing welding materials and the grind out scratches and splits. Orbital sanders with
correct temperature setting of the hot air gun. extractors are used for fine sanding.
• To prepare the location for welding, remove The infrared heater is used to provide fast and
paint residues and sand the weld area. secure drying throughout.
• Drill out the ends of the split to stop it spreading
further. Shape the location to be welded into a
V-shaped joint.
• Perform the welding. Hot air draw welding or
hot air fanning welding.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Plastic adhesive set must be replaced in cases of serious damage that
affect the structure.
Minor damage (such as abrasion, splits up to
80mm, holes up to approx. 60mm diameter, etc.)
can be repaired to a technically and visually perfect
standard, provided that the damage does not occur
in heavily used or hard-to-reach areas.
To ensure perfect repair results, observe the
following points:
• The room temperature should be at least 15°C
and the air should be as dry as possible.
• The repair location must be thoroughly dry and
clean.
Item Description
• Before the repair, the GRP part being repaired
1 2-component adhesive must be dried using an infrared heater or in a
2 Cartridge gun drying oven.
• In cases of large splits and fractures, the
3 Venturi tube strength of the outer skin can be re-established
Apart from the components shown, other materials by backing with a reinforcement material.
may be needed to bond plastics, depending on the Tools and equipment from the paint shop can be
repair position. used to carry out repairs to GRP parts. Angle
For large scale repairs, it may be necessary to grinders and belt sanders can be used to grind out
insert reinforcement panel strips and reinforcement scratches and splits. Orbital sanders with extractors
matting as fixing aids. are used for fine sanding.
Repair sequence during plastic adhesive bonding: GRP repair set

NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's guidelines when
using adhesives.
• Prepare the location of the bond. Remove paint
residues and sand the area to be bonded. Drill
out the ends of the split to stop it spreading
further. Prepare the bond location into a
V-shape and clean it with plastic cleaner.
• Apply the adhesive. The two-component
adhesive is applied to the cleaned and primed
repair location using a hand gun. Spread and
smooth the adhesive using a flexible plastic
spatula.
• Rework the bond location. After cooling, sand Item Description
the raised adhesive. Clean the sanded repair 1 Polyester resin
surface using plastic cleaner. Apply plastic
primer thinly to the repair surface. Apply paint. 2 Glass fiber mats
3 Hardener
GRP repairs Scissors, paintbrush and cleaning materials are
other materials which will be needed to perform a
GRP material is hard and brittle in its strength GRP repair.
properties. Because of these material properties,
splits and openings often result in cases of serious NOTE: Follow the manufacturer's instructions when
damage. using the repair materials.
The stability of GRP parts is impaired if the glass The repair process for a GRP repair is as follows:
fiber reinforcement is cracked. The component
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
• Prepare the repair location. Remove paint Steps of Repair Painting
residues and sand the repair area.
• Drill out the ends of the split to stop it spreading The following are the steps taken for paint repair
further. after the undercoat process has been completed.
• The repair location must be sanded by hand. If For filling and reforming, refer to the Body Repair
machine working is attempted, the resin will be Manual Body Basic.
heated so much that the surface structure will Example of repair materials.
be changed. The result is inadequate adhesion.
• Perform the GRP repair. Apply polyester resin • Primer surfacer: Two-liquid mixing type
thinly to the repair location. Lay the glass fiber (Bumper primer surfacer gray).
mat in place and apply polyester resin over it • Top coat paint: Two-liquid polyester urethane
again. (2K type).
• Rework the location of the repair. Sand away NOTE: Follow the paint manufacturer's
any polyester resin which stands proud after it recommendation.
has hardened.
1. Grinding for better adherence (for primer
• Clean the sanded repair surface using plastic surfacer painting). Grind the old paint surface
cleaner. Apply plastic primer thinly to the repair around the area to be repaired with P200 to
surface and after it has dried apply the paint P400 sandpaper to form featheredge.
finish.
Paint Repair Process 1
• The plastic parts to be repaired according to the

following repairing process are mostly large
ones in size and PP, ABS, PC or PA materials.
• It is extremely important to confirm the plastic
material of the part and select the appropriate
repair materials. In repairing, pay particular
attention not to cause deformation or other
E120741
damages to the part due to drying heat and
other conditions.
Item Description
• Basically, the repair process for resin parts can
be divided into two. One is for PP and “ 1 Feather edge
ABS+PA” resin parts and another is for the other
types of plastic materials. 2. Paint PP primer (Raw surface exposed area).
As the PP bumper cannot be painted directly
NOTE: The states of damage and their way of on the raw surface, be sure to paint the PP
repair are described below. Since the repair primer on the raw surface first to secure tight
methods are different according to the repair adherence to the top coat.
materials, always check the paint manufacturer’s
instructions.
E120740
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
WARNING: Avoid contact with skin, wear
a respirator, gloves, eye protection, and
1 appropriate clothing when spraying.
5. Polish with P600 sandpaper with water. Do not
use a sandpaper lower than P600.
6. Clean by air blow and wipe off all fat, oil and
grease.
7. Masking (in case of a partial repair).
8. Painting of intermediate coat and drying.
2 WARNING: Avoid contact with skin, wear
E120742
appropriate clothing when spraying.
Item Description • On PP plastic parts (bumper, side sill, garnish
1 Exposed surface etc.), paint the intermediated paint to match the
color.
2 Bumper primer
• For the paint, use the top coat enamel paint.
3. Clean the surface by air blow and wipe off all
fat, oil and grease. NOTE: Mix it with thinner and softener or hardener
according to the paint manufacturer’s instructions
4. Paint primer surfacer and dry it. Spray the PP on mixing ratio and dry it according to the
primer over the area a little wider than the instructions.
painted area with a spraying gun. The paint
thickness is aimed to be 20 to 30 m at 2 to 3 • Before painting, clean the entire surface to be
double coating sprayings. NOTE: Follow the painted with a tack cloth.
primer surfacer manufacturer’s instructions for • The paint thickness is aimed to be 20 to 30 m
drying time. at 2 to 3 double coating sprayings to hide the
primer surfacer paint color.
E113473
E113474
Plastic repair quick reference chart
REPAIR METHOD
REPAIR A B C D E F G
STEP
1 Identify Thermoset ABS, poly- PP, TPO, All thermo- SMC, UP, ABS, ABS, SMC,
plastic Poly- ethylene, TEO, TPE, plastics FRP, SMC, Fiberglass,
urethane nylon, PE, or Fiberglass Fiberglass, PC blend
polycar- other PC blend
bonate
2 Clean Clean part with soap & water and Super Clean Plastic Cleaner
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
REPAIR METHOD
3 Repair Thermoset Thermo- Uni-Weld Hot Air Two-Part Insta-Weld PlastiFix
Urethane plastic FiberFlex Welding Epoxy Adhesive Rigid Plastic
Weld Fusion Adhesive Repair Kit
Weld
E120588 E120588 E124455 E124456 E124457 E124458 E124459
4 Fill Grind, then apply filler that matches the hardness of the substrate
5 Prime Prime
6 Paint Apply Top Coat
Identify plastic & determine repair the backside of the part. Simply match the symbol
method on the part with the table below and look at the
suggested repair method, listed in order of
The easiest way to identify the type of plastic you’re preference. See the next page for tips when you
working with is to look for the plastic ID symbol on can’t find the plastic ID symbol.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Recycling Symbol Description/ Typical Suggested Repair Tips
Symbol & Type How to Applica- Repair
Identify tions Method
PUR, Usually flex- Flexible Method A w/ Don’t melt
RIM, ible, may be bumper urethane rod base
RRIM yellow or covers (esp. (5003R1) or material!
Ther- gray, on Method C w/ Melt rod into
moset bubbles & domestics, Uni-Weld v-groove like
Poly- smokes filler panels, FiberFlex a hot melt
urethane when rocker panel glue.
melted. covers,
snowmobile
cowls.
SMC, Rigid, poly- Rigid body Method E - Use backing
UP, ester matrix panels, Two-part plate over
FRP reinforced fenders, epoxy repair holes, layer
Thermoset
Fiber- with glass hoods, deck with fiber- in fiberglass
glass fibers, sands lids, header glass rein- cloth for
finely. panels, forcement. extra
spoilers. strength.
XPE, Semi-flex- Gas tanks, Method C Applying filler
XLPE, ible, usually kayaks, with poly- or painting is
PE-Xb, semi-translu- canoes, ethylene rod impossible.
PEX, cent, waxy or trash cans, (5003R4), Browns
Cross- greasy feel, use is (5004). when
linked softens when declining. heated.
Poly- heated but
ethylene does not
melt.
ABS Rigid, often Instrument Method B w/ PlastiFix is
Acryloni- white but panels, ABS rod an optimal
trile may be grilles, trim (5003R3), or repair
Butadiene molded in moldings, Methods D, method.
Styrene any color, consoles, E, F, or G. Weld repairs
sands finely. armrest may be
E120589 supports, backed with
street bike epoxy for
fairings, extra
canoes, strength.
aircraft wing
Thermoplast tips and
ic interiors.
PS poly- Semi-flex- Packaging Method E - Very sens-
styrene ible, usually material, Two-part itive to
(Styro- expanded insulation, epoxy repair. solvents and
foam) into foam. food high heat.
containers,
light switch
E120590 plates.
PA Poly- Semi-rigid or Method B or

amide rigid, sands D w/ nylon
(Nylon) finely. rod (5003R6)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Radiator Preheat
tanks, head plastic with
lamp bezels, heat gun
exterior trim before
parts, welding, mix
mirrors, completely
plastic with base
engine parts. mat’l.
PC + Rigid, sands Door skins Method B or Preheat
ABS finely, (Saturn), D w/ polycar- plastic with
Pulse usually dark instrument bonate rod heat gun
(Polycar- in color. panels, (5003R7) or before
bonate street bike Methods E, welding with
& ABS) fairings. F, or G Method B.
E120591 adhesive
repairs.
PC + Very rigid, Bumper Method B or Preheat
PBT sands finely, covers (84- D w/ polycar- plastic with
Xenoy usually dark 95 Ford bonate rod heat gun
(Polycar- in color. Taurus, (5003R7) , before
bonate Aerostar, Method E or welding with
blend) some M-B G. Method B.
E120591 and
Hyundai).
HDPE Semi-flex- Overflow Method B or Applying filler
Poly- ible, melts & tanks, inner D with high or painting is
ethylene smears fender density poly- impossible.
when panels, ATV ethylene rod
grinding, fenders, RV (5003R12)
usually semi- water
E120592 translucent, storage
waxy or tanks, gas
greasy feel. tanks,
kayaks
canoes,
picnic tables,
lumber.
PE/ Semi-flex- Overflow Method B or Applying filler
LDPE ible, melts & tanks, inner D with poly- or painting is
Poly- smears fender ethylene rod impossible.
ethylene when panels, ATV (5003R4).
grinding, fenders, RV
usually semi- water
E120593 translucent, storage
waxy or tanks, gas
greasy feel. tanks,
kayaks,
canoes,
trash cans.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
PP Semi-flex- Bumper Method C Use 1060FP
Polypro- ible, melts & covers with Uni- Filler Prep
pylene smears (usually Weld Fiber- before
when blended w/ Flex applying two-
grinding, EPDM), (5003R10) or part epoxy
waxy or inner Method B or filler.
E120594 greasy feel, fenders, radi- D w/ PP rod.
usually a bit ator shrouds,
stiffer than gas tanks,
PEs. battery
cases,
pallets.
PPO + Semi-rigid, Fenders Method B or Preheat
PA sands finely, (Saturn & D with nylon plastic with
Noryl usually off- GM), exterior rod (5003R6) heat gun
GTX white in trim. or Methods before
(Nylon color. E, F, or G welding with
blend) adhesive Method B.
repairs.
PVC Rigid, sands Pipe, siding, Method B or
Polyvinyl finely. window D with
chloride Usually white frames, (5003R9)
or gray but decking, PVC welding
can be made gutters, rod
any color. speed
E120595 bumps.
TPE Semi-flex- Bumper Method C Use 1060FP

Thermo- ible, usually covers, filler with Uni- Filler Prep
plastic black or panels, Weld Fiber- before
Elast- gray, melts & underhood Flex applying two-
omer smears parts. (5003R10) part epoxy
when filler.
grinding.
TPO, Semi-flex- Bumper Method C Use 1060FP
TEO, ible, usually covers, air with Uni- Filler Prep
PP/ black or dams, grilles, Weld Fiber- before
EPDM, gray, melts & interior parts, Flex applying two-
Thermoplast TSOP smears instrument (5003R10) or part epoxy
ic Thermo- when panels, Method B or filler.
plastic grinding. snowmobile D w/ PP or
Olefin cowls. TPO rod.
TPU, Flexible, Bumper Method B or
TPUR sands finely. covers, soft D w/
Thermo- filler panels, urethane rod
plastic gravel (5003R1) or
Poly- deflectors, Method C w/
urethane rocker panel Uni-Weld
covers. FiberFlex
(R10)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
PETE, Flexible, Soda bottles, Method B or Can’t make
PET strong various yarn D w/ slivers as strong as
Poly- fibers, head- cut from original part;
ethylene liners, fuse scrap. manufac-
Tereph- boxes, door tured in cris-
thalate panels scrossed
E120596 layers and
can’t be
duplicated.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
If you can’t find the Plastic ID Symbol...
E120598
Clean surface and align damage Step 2.Spray on 1000 Super Clean Plastic Cleaner
and wipe off while wet with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Clean Surface Before Repair Wipe in one direction to avoid spreading
contaminants back over the clean area.
In order to maximize strength and adhesion of the
repair, it is important to thoroughly clean all Align Damage
contaminants from the surface in the damaged
area. If the plastic is distorted, heat with 6500VT high
temp heat gun and reshape the distorted area.
Step 1. Clean both sides with soap and water. Dry When heating plastic, it is important that the plastic
off with a clean cloth or compressed air. be heated all the way through. Hold the heat gun
on the area until the opposite side of the plastic is
uncomfortable to the touch. Once heated, force
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
the plastic back into position with a block of wood but the repair will be more like a brazing process
or other tool, then cool the area with a clean cloth. rather than a true fusion weld.
Thermoset polyurethanes (PUR, RIM) have a V-Groove Damaged Area
“memory” that will often cause them to go back to
their original position if held under a heat lamp or Line up the outer surface of the tear with 6481
in a heated spray booth. Aluminum Body Tape or with clamps. You can also
tack the tear together with 2200 Insta-Weld 1 thin
If the part is cut or torn to the edge, align the outer adhesive.
surface with 6481 aluminum body tape and begin
the repair process on the backside. By aligning the
outer surface, you minimize the amount of filler
required later to restore the proper profile to the
part.
Repair Method A: thermoset urethane
1 2
E120600
V-groove halfway through the backside of the part

with the 6121-T Teardrop Cutter Bit. You cannot
use a hot tool to melt the v-groove into urethane
because it does not melt.
Sand the v-groove with coarse sandpaper (80 grit
3 or coarser) to put some extra “tooth” in the plastic.
E120599
Also remove the paint in the area surrounding the
v-groove and radius into the v-groove for extra
Item Description strength.
1 A
Melt the Rod into the V-Groove
2 B
Set the temperature setting of your airless plastic
3 Thermoset welder to the “clear” or “R1” rod setting. Using the
5003R1 Polyurethane welding rod, the rod should
Repairing Thermoset Urethanes come out of the bottom of the welder’s shoe
completely melted and clear, not discolored or
Automotive urethane, or PUR, is a “thermoset”
bubbling.
material. Similar to what happens when you mix
body filler and cream hardener, it is formed when
two liquid chemicals come together in the mold to
form a solid. The point of telling you this is to say
that you cannot melt urethane bumpers with the 1
welder. Repeat: YOU CANNOT MELT URETHANE
BUMPERS WITH THE WELDER!
A sure-fire way of identifying a urethane bumper
is to lay your hot welder on the backside. If it’s a
urethane, the plastic will liquefy and bubble and
smoke will rise (note: welder must be extremely
hot for this to happen). After this “melted” area
E120601
cools off, it will still be sticky to the touch. This is
an indication that the heat actually broke down the
chemicals in the plastic. Thermoset urethanes can Item Description
be easily repaired with the airless plastic welder, 1 Hold wlder tip off surface
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Holding the welder’s tip off the surface of the Use 6481 Aluminum Body Tape to create a bridge
plastic, melt the rod into the v-groove. Don’t across the torn mounting hole. Melt 5003R1
overheat the base material, simply melt the rod urethane welding rod into the area. Drill out hole
onto the surface. Again, you are NOT trying to melt when finished.
the rod and the bumper together; the bumper
material is NOT meltable!
Repair Method B: fusion welding
Lay down no more than 2 inches of welding rod
into the v-groove at a time. Remove the rod from
the welder tip, and before the melted rod has time
to cool down, go back over it with the hot welder
tip and smooth out the weld. Don’t overheat the
base material.
V-Groove and Weld Opposite Side 1 2

After the weld on the backside cools, repeat the
v-grooving and welding process on the opposite
side.
3
E120604
Item Description
1 Heat
2 Pressure
3 Thermoplastic
Repairing Thermoplastics with Fusion Welding
E120602
Outside of urethane, all other bumpers, and most
other plastics on automobiles, are made from
thermoplastic materials. This means they can be
Grind Weld to a Smooth Contour
melted with the application of heat. Thermoplastic
Using coarse sandpaper, grind weld to a smooth parts are made by melting pellets of plastic and
contour. The urethane welding rod will not feather squirting the melted material into a mold, where it
very well, so it will need to be covered with 2000 cools and resolidifies. This means that
Flex-Filler 2 epoxy filler to refinish completely. thermoplastic parts can be melted.
Grind the weld slightly flush so that filler can cover
The most common thermoplastic automobile
the welded area completely.
bumper material is TPO. TPO is fast becoming the
Repairing Torn Bolt Holes on Urethanes most popular material for all sorts of interior and
underhood plastics as well. TPOs can be welded
Taper the plastic all around the hole down to a using the fusion technique described on this page,
point on both sides using a Roloc disc. but our FiberFlex rod often makes an easier and
stronger repair on TPO (see Repair Method C).
The third most common bumper material, Xenoy,
is best repaired using the following thermoplastic
Fusion technique.
V-Groove Damaged Area

Line up the outer surface of the tear with 6481
Aluminum Body Tape or with clamps. You can also
tack the tear together with 2200 Insta-Weld 1 thin
adhesive.
E120603
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
the edge of the welder tip to mix the materials, then
go back and smooth it out. Keep the heat on it until
you have a good mix between the rod and base.
V-Groove and Weld Opposite Side

After the weld on the backside cools, repeat the
v-grooving and welding process on the opposite
side.
E120605
V-groove halfway through the backside of the part

with either the 6121-T Teardrop Cutter Bit or the
6200VG V-Groovin’’ Tool.
Remove the paint in the area surrounding the
v-groove and radius into the vgroove with coarse
sandpaper.
Melt the Rod Together with the Base Material E120607
Set the temperature setting of your airless plastic Grind Weld to a Smooth Contour
welder to the setting that’s appropriate for the
welding rod you selected in the identification If you need to refinish the plastic, grind weld to a
process. In most cases, the welding rod should smooth contour with coarse sandpaper. Grind the
melt cleanly and not be discolored (the only weld slightly flush so that filler can cover the welded
exception would be nylon, where the rod should area completely.
turn a light brown).
E120667
E120606
Item Description Repair Method C: FiberFlex

1 Melt rod and base material together Repairing with Uni-Weld FiberFlex Universal Rod
Lay the welder tip on the surface of the plastic and Uni-Weld FiberFlex is a unique repair material in
slowly melt the rod into the v-groove. Pull the that it sticks to any plastic substrate. It is not a true
welder toward you so you can see the welding rod welding rod, but rather a thermoplastic or hot-melt
fill the vgroove as you make your pass. adhesive. When you do a repair with the FiberFlex,
you will actually be using the heat of the welder to
Lay down no more than 2 inches of welding rod
apply an adhesive. FiberFlex has a very strong
into the v-groove at a time. Remove the rod from
bond and is reinforced with carbon and glass fibers
the welder tip, and before the melted rod has time
for outstanding strength.
to cool down, go back over it with the hot welder
tip and thoroughly melt the rod together with the FiberFlex is the best way to repair TPOs (aka TEO,
base material. It helps to press into the plastic with PP/EPDM, TSOP), the most common automotive
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
bumper material. The reason is that there are no sticks to the plastic. Cut the melted part of the
two TPOs that are exactly alike. As a result, our ribbon off using the edge of the welder tip and
5003R5 TPO welding rod will not match any TPO spread the FiberFlex into the v-groove. Do not
exactly. The FiberFlex, with its fiber reinforcement, attempt to melt the base material together with the
actually makes a stronger repair than the true FiberFlex. Repairing with Fiber-Flex is similar to a
welding rod. Therefore, you’ll find the FiberFlex to brazing process.
be the easiest and best way to repair TPOs.
The FiberFlex can also be used to repair virtually
any plastic. It will stick to urethanes and Xenoy
also. When you are not sure what type of plastic
you are repairing, try the FiberFlex.
V-Groove Damaged Area

Line up the outer surface of the tear with 6481
Aluminum Body Tape or with clamps. You may
also tack the tear together with 2200 Insta-Weld 1
thin adhesive, however, instant adhesives don’t
stick well to TPO. E120669
You may also apply the 5003R11 FiberFlex Round

Rod with the 6030 Speed Welding Tip for faster
application.
V-Groove and Weld Opposite Side

After the FiberFlex on the backside cools (you may
force cool with water), repeat the v-grooving and
welding process on the opposite side. Build the
Fiber- Flex slightly higher than the surface.
FiberFlex is also a sandable filler.
E120668
Remove plastic in the shape of a broad V-groove

halfway through the backside of the part using a
die grinder with either the 6122 or 6122NF Heavy
Duty Round Burr or the 6134-R Round Cutter Bit.
You’ll want the v-groove to be about 1-1/2 inches
wide when you get done.
It is very important to put some “tooth” in the plastic
by grinding the v-groove with 50 grit or coarser
sandpaper. Use a low speed grinder. Grinding at
E120670
high speed will tend to melt many thermoplastics.
Using 80 grit in a DA sander, remove the paint in Finish Sand
the area around the v-groove and radius smoothly
into the v-groove. This will give you a better After allowing the FiberFlex to cool completely,
featheredge when you get ready to sand the sand with 80 grit paper in a DA sander at low
FiberFlex. speed. Progress to finer grits, ending with 320 grit.
Fill any low spots with more FiberFlex or with a
Melt on the FiberFlex
skim coat of 2000 Flex Filler 2 or 2020 SMC
With the airless welder set to the highest Hardset epoxy filler.
temperature setting, use the 6028RT Round Tip
to melt the 5003R10 FiberFlex welding rod onto
the surface. Best adhesion is achieved by
premelting one side of the end of the rod, then
flipping the rod over so that the melted portion
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
E120671 E120672
Set the Temperature and Airflow

Repair Method D: Hot air welding
The key to properly setting the temperature and
Repairing Thermoplastics with Hot Air Fusion airflow is to match the type of filler rod you are
Welding using. Typically, the lowest balance of airflow and
temperature that you can get to work for the
With practice, you will find welding plastics with hot material you are welding will produce the most
air to be quick, strong, and very cost effective. satisfactory welds.
Using our specialty welding rods, you will be able
to repair virtually any type of thermoplastic part. For the 6050HA, the airflow is usually set
With R-13 welding ribbon, you will be able to repair somewhere in the ballpark of 3 psi.
broken tabs and mounts on polypropylene based For the 6055, the airspeed is usually set in the
plastics like TPO without having to worry about lowest speed range.
strength.
At a distance of approximately ¼” to ½”, direct the
V-Groove Damaged Area airflow at the rod or base material for a couple of
seconds. The rod and the base material should
Line up the outer surface of the tear with 6481 turn glossy as the surface begins melt. If it takes
Aluminum Body Tape or with clamps. You can also longer than several seconds, you may need to
tack the tear together with 2200 Insta- Weld 1 thin either increase the temperature or adjust the
adhesive. airflow. Should the plastic begin to turn glossy and
V-groove the part with either the 6121-T Teardrop begin to bubble after only briefly heating the
Cutter Bit or the 6200VG V-Groovin’ Tool making material, you will need to reduce the heat or adjust
a V-groove almost all the way through the plastic the airflow.
where the plastic is cracked or needs to be welded.
Aim the airflow and the welding rod
This will ensure the weld has optimal penetration
into the plastic and will produce the strongest Hold the welder with the tip between ¼” and ¾”
possible joint. The only exception to this is when away from the material to be welded. Heat the base
making a weld using the R-13 welding ribbon. In material and the rod until both become shiny and
that case, the increased surface area of the welding tacky.
material makes up for the lost penetration in the
seam.
Remove the paint in the area surrounding the
v-groove and radius into the v-groove with coarse
sandpaper.
The given image shows the V-groove made at the
point where the pieces of plastic will be welded
together. Notice the depth of the groove, this will
allow a piece of plastic to have maximum weld
penetration by allowing the welder to make one or
more passes, filling the groove from the bottom to
the top with filler rod. E120673
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Because the base material acts as a heat sink it will retain its basic shape after being pressed into
typically requires more heat than the rod. the joint.
The objective is melt the rod and base material This can easily be seen when using the R-13
simultaneously, so when they are pressed together ribbon. Aside from some distortion of the edges,
they melt together, not just melt to one another. the basic profi le of the material remains intact after
the welding process.
Welding the Joint:
Holding the welding rod at about a 45 degree angle
away from the welder, begin pressing the rod into
the v-groove of the material. Holding this angle on
the rod, work your way down the v-groove steadily,
melting the rod and the base material together.
E120676
When welding very thick materials it may be

necessary to make multiple passes with the
welding rod. If possible, stagger the starting points
of subsequent passes to achieve the strongest
possible weld.
E120674
Once you complete the weld, you should not
Make sure the rod and the base material are immediately pull the welding rod away from the
heated equally to ensure a good weld. If the base surface being welded. This may cause the rod to
material is allowed to overheat, the surface may break away from the base material. A better way
scorch or the substrate will melt. Should the rod of ending the weld is to remove the heat source
be heated and the base material left too cool, you and continue to apply pressure with the welding
will not get adequate penetration of the weld and rod directed at the base material for several
the weld will be very weak. seconds. To remove the rod, release the downward
pressure and twist the rod to break it off.
E120675
E120677
The approximate speed of a hot air weld is roughly
6 to 8 inches per minute depending on the
Using Speed Tips:
thickness of the base material.
When welding plastic, a common misconception When using the speed tip that comes with the 6055
welder or the optional speed tip for the 6050HA
is that the welding rod should fl ow into the base
welder (PN: 6050-NHS1), the principle is the same
material and produce a fi llet type weld. With metal
welding, this may be true, but for plastic welding as with the tube tips or reduction nozzle; heat the
rod and the base material suffi ciently to get the
the strongest welds are those where the fi ller rod
two to stick together. The difference is the speed
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
tip allows the heat to be more easily confi ned to
the joint being welded and allows the rod to be
more rapidly heated. This allows the user to make
faster welds with less heat escaping into the
surrounding areas. Using a speed tip also allows
some shaping of the fi nished weld because the fi
ller rod is melted on all sides and the tip can be
dragged over the surface of the weld to press the
material into shape.
Because you cannot see the area being welded
where the rod and base material are joined, it is
our recommendation the weld be tested after it has E120679
cooled to ensure adequate penetration.

Sand and Apply Padded Dash Filler
Heat levels and air speeds are roughly the same
as with the tube tips and reduction nozzle. You will After allowing the weld area to cool, grind the weld
be able to make additional adjustments based on area smooth with the 6407 Drum Sander
your need for speed and the thickness and type of attachment for the 6275 Electric Die Grinder.
base material. Rough up the surrounding area to improve
adhesion of the filler. Mix 2050-9 Padded Dash
Filler and apply with plastic squeegee. Cover an
Padded dash repair area larger than the weld in order to feather out
the repair to a smooth contour.
Clean and V-Groove Damaged Area
Clean the damaged area with 1000 Super Clean
Plastic Cleaner. Bevel the edges of the area to be
welded with 6275 Electric Die Grinder and open
up a cavity at least 1/4” deep in the foam backing
and vinyl cover. Sand and bevel the vinyl cover
around the cavity to allow for featheredging of filler.
E120680
Finish Sand and Apply Texture Material

Allow the filler to cure at least 15 minutes, then
sand to a smooth contour. Finish sand with 220
grit paper. Retexture the panel with 3800 Flex Tex
flexible texture material according to directions on
E120678 Page 9. Do not try to spot retexture. Retexture and
blend the leading edge or most visible area of the
Fill Cavity with Urethane Welding Rod pad all the way across. If there is a noticeable
Using the 5003R1 Urethane Welding Rod, start difference in texture, retexture the entire pad.
your weld at the bottom of the cavity using your
Airless Plastic Welder. Fill the cavity up with melted
plastic and spread it out so that it overlaps the
edges of the vinyl cover about 1/4”.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Mix and apply selected epoxy adhesive. Build up
slightly higher than the surface to allow for sanding.
Allow at least 20 minutes to cure before sanding.
On SMC, layer pieces of 2043-U Uni-Cloth
fiberglass cloth into the v-groove between coats of
epoxy. Use a saturation roller if necessary to fully
wet the cloth with epoxy.
Contour and smooth the surface with 80 and 180
grit paper.
E120681 Repair Method F: Insta-Weld repair

Repairing Plastics with Insta-Weld Adhesives
Repair Method E: Epoxy repair Our line of Insta-Weld adhesives are specially
formulated to provide maximum adhesion on a
Repairing Plastics with Epoxy Based Adhesives
wide variety of common automotive plastics.
Sand backside of area to be repaired with 50 grit Because Insta-Weld forms rigid bonds, it works
paper or coarser. Heavy grooving of the plastic is best with rigid plastics like ABS, polycarbonate,
desirable to maximize the mechanical strength of and SMC. It may also be used to tack parts
the bond. Afterward, sand lightly with 80 grit for together while performing a welding repair.
finer grooving which will further improve adhesion.
Fixing Cracks Quickly
If the material is TEO, TPO or PP, you must apply
1060FP Filler Prep Adhesion Promoter. Brush onto Prior to assembling parts, lightly spray area to be
the sanded area and allow to flash off. bonded with 2303 Insta-Weld Activator.
Apply 2044-2 Fiberglass Reinforcing Tape over Assemble and align parts. Use clamps or 6481
the damaged area. If part is SMC, cut a backing Aluminum Body Tape to hold parts together while
panel from a scrap piece of SMC. Make sure the bonding.
backing panel extends at least 2” beyond damage Apply a small amount of 2200 Insta-Weld 1 thin
in all directions. adhesive to the joint or crack. Optimum results are
Choose a two-part epoxy adhesive system to obtained with the minimum quantity of adhesive
match the hardness of the substrate. needed to fill the joint. The adhesive is thin enough
to allow it to be wicked down into the crack. Use
Flexible 2000 Flex Filler 2 2250 Insta-Weld 2 thick gap-filling adhesive for
(gray) parts that do not fit together perfectly.
Rigid 2020 SMC Hardset Spray on additional 2303 Activator to complete the
Adhesive Filler (gray) cure. Additional Activator and Insta-Weld 2 may
be applied to fill any small remaining gaps.
Mix epoxy adhesive in equal parts, apply over
Filling Gaps, Holes, and Gouges
fiberglass reinforcing tape on backside of repair.
Allow 15 minutes to cure before handling. On SMC, Use 6481 Aluminum Body Tape as a back-up
apply a bead of 2020 SMC Hardset Filler to the under the hole.
backing panel and press into place. Allow epoxy
Rough sand and v-groove area around the hole
at least 20 minutes to cure before handling.
and blow dust free.
Sand front side of damaged area with 50 grit paper
Spray a light coat of 2303 Activator in and around
or coarser and v-groove away from tear. The
hole.
deeper and wider the v-groove is, the stronger the
repair will be. Remove paint in the surrounding Fill hole with 2300 Weld Compound and saturate
area and radius into the v-groove with 80 grit in a with a few drops of 2200-1 Insta-Weld 1. Smooth
DA. and saturate the Weld Compound with Insta-Weld
using a disposable tool if desired. Wait 5 or 10
Again, if the material is a TPO or PP, apply 1060FP
seconds and apply another light coat of 2303
Filler Prep Adhesion Promoter.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Activator. The repair may be sanded or drilled does not work on olefinic plastics like PE, PP, or
immediately. TEO.
Getting Ready
Repair Method G: PlastiFix repair
Dispense powder into cup.
KIT COMPONENTS
5
1
E120691
Use pipet to dispense liquid into the dropper bottle.
3
4
E124022
E120690
Insert dropper tip into the bottle and place

Item Description applicator needle onto dropper tip.
1 Dropper bottle
2 Needle applicators-2nos
3 Flexmold molding bar
4 Pipet
5 Powder cup
Repairing Plastics with PlastiFix® Rigid Plastic

Repair Kit
The PlastiFix® Rigid Plastic Repair Kit is a E124023
revolutionary plastic repair system that allows you
to repair cracks, fill gaps, rebuild tabs, and fix
stripped threads. The most unique feature of the Application
PlastiFix® Rigid Plastic Repair Kit is the FlexMold® Squeeze one drop of liquid into powder.
flexible molding bar. The FlexMold bar allows you
to replace a broken tab by forming a mold from an
undamaged piece, then casting your new part using
the PlastiFix acrylic adhesive system. This system
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
FlexMold Moulding Bar Use
E120692
E120693
Pick up liquid/powder mix with tip of needle.
E120694
E124024
Squeeze bottle to apply liquid/powder mix to repair

area.
E120695
E124025
E120696
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Reinforcing
E120701
E120697
Apply lubricant to screw threads.
E120698
E120702
Apply plastifix powder/liquid mixture to screw

threads.
E120699
E120703
While adhesive is wet, insert into hole.
E120700
Repairing Threads
Drill or file threads from hole.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
E120704 E120706
Cut 2045W Stainless Steel Wire Mesh to size to

Repairing broken tabs fit in the corner areas. Using the hot welder tip,
bury the mesh directly into the plastic. (This won’t
Repairing Flexible Tabs on TEO Plastics work on urethane parts since they don’t melt. See
Page 5). After you’ve melted the mesh into the
Many TEO bumpers have mounting tabs that have plastic, scuff the melted plastic with coarse
to flex during installation. These can be repaired sandpaper to remove the gloss.
very durably with the mesh and FiberFlex. First,
rough grind the area with a coarse Roloc disc. Melt either the FiberFlex or the matching standard
plastic rod over the mesh. If using the standard
rod, keep the heat on the plastic to make sure the
2 rod melts thoroughly with the base material. Keep
adding more rod to make a bigger fillet and
1
increase strength.
Repairing broken bolt holes

There are many cases where the only damage on
the part is a torn-out bolt hole or a broken-off tab.
The welder is great for repairing such damage.
E120705 Here are a few strategies for fixing the most
common damage found on plastic parts.
Item Description
Repairing Torn Bolt Holes in TPO with FiberFlex
1 Cover with fiberflex or welding rod
Taper both side of plastic to a point with a coarse
2 Melt mesh into corners Roloc disc. Grind and taper around the edges of
the entire bolt hole. Taper back about 1 inch on all
Cut 2045W Stainless Steel Wire Mesh to size to sides. Remove paint and radius into taper with 80
fit in the corner areas on both sides of the tab. grit in a DA.
Using the hot welder tip, bury the mesh directly
into the plastic. After you’ve melted the mesh into
the plastic, scuff the melted plastic with coarse
sandpaper to remove the gloss.
Melt on a thin layer of FiberFlex over the mesh just
to cover. In this repair, the mesh provides the
strength and flexibility while the FiberFlex just gives
a cosmetic covering.
Repairing Torn Tabs

Rough grind the area surrounding the crack with
a coarse Roloc disc. E120707
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Apply 6481 Aluminum Tape across the gap to sanding. Allow at least 20 minutes to cure before
support the melted rod while it’s hot. sanding. Contour and smooth the surface with 80
and 180 grit paper.
Melt 2045W Stainless Steel Reinforcing Mesh into
the plastic across the gap if desired for extra
strength. This step is often not necessary because
FiberFlex is blended with glass fibers for strength.
E120711
E120708
Apply FiberFlex to area using the instructions on

Page 7. After cooling, remove aluminum tape and
repeat on opposite side.
Allow FiberFlex to cool completely. Open the hole
with a die grinder or drill bit, then sand with 80 grit
in a DA at low speed to finish the repair.
E120712
E120709
Applying epoxy filler E120713
Grind area to be filled with coarse sandpaper.

Slightly v-groove away from the damaged area. All
gloss on the surface should be removed to
maximize filler adhesion.
If the material is a polyolefin (PP, PE, TEO, or
TPO), apply 1060FP Filler Prep Adhesion
Promoter.
Choose a two-part epoxy filler to match the
hardness of the substrate. If flexible, use 2000 Flex
Filler 2. If rigid, use 2020 SMC Hardset Filler.
E120714
Mix epoxy adhesive in equal parts and apply. Build
up slightly higher than the surface to allow for
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Retexturing plastic
Using 3800 Flex-Tex
Scuff Sand - After repairing the damage, scuff sand
the area you intend to retexture with 320 grit paper
and blow dust free.
E120715
Repairing living hinges and tabs

Repairing Living Hinges on TEO Plastics
One of the most difficult tabs to repair are those
E120716
which are designed to flex along a “hinge” line. The
5010-1 polypropylene sheet was developed to Decide How to Blend Texture - Check the grain,
perform such repairs on TPO bumpers. texture, and contours of the panel to be repaired.
If you have a good tab left to trace, begin the repair It is not necessary to exactly duplicate the existing
process by tracing the tab onto the 5010-1 PP texture to achieve a quality repair. You may be
sheet using a marker or a razor knife. If you have able to blend the new texture out into the old or
no tab to trace, create a cardboard template for retexture to a natural break line in the panel to
the tab, then trace the template onto the plastic avoid having to retexture the entire panel.
sheet. When making the new tab, be sure to leave Mix Texture Material - Stir 3800 Flex Tex flexible
an extra strip of plastic past the hinge to allow a texture material and pour into a primer gun with a
place to weld in the new tab into the bumper. Cut 1.8 - 2.0mm nozzle. Spray some test patterns on
the tab out of the polypropylene sheet using a a scrap piece of paper and dial in the size and grain
jigsaw or hacksaw. of the texture by adjusting the speed of the pass,
To make the “living” hinge, clamp your tab into a the air pressure, and the fluid flow. A lower air
vise along the hinge line, then bend back and forth pressure will give you a larger grain.
to make the hinge line flexible. If the final shape of Apply Texture Material in Light Coats - When
the tab has an “L” shape, bend this area only one applying Flex Tex, hold the gun about 18 - 24
way to keep it stiff. inches from the surface. Apply in light coats and
Cut a notch in the bumper to receive the new tab. allow flash time between each coat. Do not wet
Trim the tab or bumper as needed for a snug fit. spray the material as it will flow out and destroy
the grain effect. It may require as many as 8 - 10
Hold the tab in place using 6481-2 foil tape. Weld light coats to achieve the necessary buildup.
the tab onto the bumper using R13-W PP strip
welding rod and a hot air welder. Nib Sand and Blend Texture - When the desired
texture buildup is achieved, allow the texture to dry
While still hot, burnish the R13-W strip into the tab completely. Then, using a scuff pad, lightly nib sand
and bumper using an airless plastic welder with the newly textured area. As you nib sand you will
the 6028RT tip. Let cool, then repeat the same detect the repair area begin to blend into the
procedure on the opposite side. Once cool, the tab original texture of the panel and the sprayed look
should be a least as strong as the original. will disappear.
Finish the repair by sanding the welded area
slightly flush, then fill with 5003R10 FiberFlex.
Allow to cool, then finish sand.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Apply Flexible Color Coat - After sanding the
texture, blow dust free and apply a flexible color
coat. To match over 40 OEM shades of gray,
topcoat with 3500 series Bumper and Cladding
Coat Paint.
E120717
Priming Plastics: primer selection & use
New Replacement Bumpers Repaired Bumpers

Types of Bumpers OEM Primed RAW TPO RAW PUR OEM Painted
Bumpers Bumpers Bumpers Bumpers
E120597 E120718 E120719 E120720
Identify Bumper Domestic bumpers Toyota, Nissan, May be PUR if High Gloss. Color
(GM, Ford, Kia and Subaru are Toyota or Lexus matches body
Chrysler) usually usually raw, with light gray color. Base
have OEM primer. unprimed TPO. ID color. All yellow material different
Color is usually symbol is PP, PP/ plastic bumpers color than top coat.
black with high EPDM, TSOP, are PUR. ID
sheen and uniform TPO, TEO, or TPE. symbol is PUR.
appearance. Occa- Usually black with When lightly
sionally gray. dull finish, some- sanded with 400
Sanding the times non-uniform grit sandpaper will
surface lightly with in appearance, produce virtually
400 grit sandpaper may have tacky no dust.
will produce fine mold release agent
dust. The color or on surface. When
appearance of the sanded lightly with
painted side is 400 grit sandpaper,
different or if over- virtually no dust is
spray is visible on produced.
the inside of the
bumper. NOTE:
Sometimes the
inside is primed
also.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Product Selection
E120721 E120722 E120723 E120724
Surface Prepara- (REQUIRED) (OPTIONAL) Clean (OPTIONAL) Clean (OPTIONAL) Clean

tion Clean entire Bumper with 1020 Bumper with 1020 Bumper with 1020
bumper with 1020 Scuff Magic Prep Scuff Magic Prep Scuff Magic Prep
Scuff Magic Prep Soap and a gray Soap and a gray Soap and a gray
Soap and a red scuff pad. Allow to scuff pad. Allow to scuff pad. Allow to
scuff pad. Rinse Dry. (REQUIRED) Dry. Bumper Dry. (REQUIRED)
with clean water. Bumper surface surface and Bumper surface
Allow to Dry. and ambient ambient temper- and ambient
Bumper surface temperature should ature should be temperature should
and ambient be between 65˚F between 65˚F and be between 65˚F
temperature should and 95˚F. Clean 95˚F. Clean entire and 95˚F. Clean
be between 65˚F entire surface to be surface to be entire surface to be
and 95˚F. primed with 1000 primed with 1000 primed with 1000
Super Clean Super Clean Super Clean
Plastic Cleaner. Plastic Cleaner. Plastic Cleaner.
Spray heavy, wet Spray heavy, wet Spray heavy, wet
coat over a 1 to 2 coat over a 1 to 2 coat over a 1 to 2
square foot area, square foot area, square foot area,
wipe dry with a wipe dry with a wipe dry with a
clean cloth, clean cloth, clean cloth,
exposing clean exposing clean exposing clean
surface to plastic surface to plastic surface to plastic
with each wipe. with each wipe. with each wipe.
Repeat until the Repeat until the Repeat until the
entire surface has entire surface has entire surface has
been cleaned. been cleaned. been cleaned.
Sand overall with
320 grit sand
paper. Blow dust
free.
Paint Preparation Stir Prime Time, do Shake or stir Stir Prime Time, do Stir Black Cat, do
not shake. Mix Bumper and Clad- not shake. Mix not shake. If
appropriate shade ding Coat. Pour appropriate shade desired, Black Cat
of Prime Time appropriate of Prime Time may be thinned
using 3030 series amount into gun to using 3030 series with water up to
toners. Shades meet job require- toners. Shades 5% by volume.
closely resemble ments. closely resemble Catalyzed Black
Dupont® Value Dupont® Value Cat has an 8 hour
Shade® system. Shade® system. pot life. Catalyze
Catalyzed Prime Catalyzed Prime appropriate
Time has an 8 hour Time has an 8 hour amount to meet job
pot life. Catalyze pot life. Catalyze requirements.
appropriate appropriate
amount to meet job amount to meet job
requirements. requirements.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Catalyst Mix Ratio Mix 3103 catalyst Not applicable. No Mix 3103 catalyst If using 3103 cata-
with Prime Time catalyst required. with Prime Time lyst, then mix 2%
2% by weight. 2% by weight. by weight to Black
(weight of paint) x (weight of piant) x Cat or 2 grams of
.02= weight of .02= weight of catalyst for every
catalyst For catalyst For 100 grams of Black
example, if you are example, if you are Cat. If no scale is
using 100 grams of using 100 grams of available, then mix
Prime Time, add 2 Prime Time, add 2 2 teaspoons of
grams of 3103 grams of 3103 catalyst per pint of
catalyst. If no scale catalyst. If no scale Black Cat. Mix
is available, then is available, then thoroughly. Do not
mix 2 teaspoons of mix 2 teaspoons of shake.
catalyst per pint of catalyst per pint of
Prime Time. Mix Prime Time. Mix
thoroughly. Do not thoroughly. Do not
shake. shake.
Paint Gun Base coat gun with Base coat gun with Base coat gun with Base coat gun with
a 1.0 mm to 1.4 a 0.8 mm to 1.3 a 1.0 mm to 1.4 a 1.2 mm to 1.4
mm nozzle. mm nozzle. mm nozzle. mm nozzle for
smooth finish.
Primer gun with a
1.8 mm to 2.0 mm
nozzle for high
build.
Application Apply one light Apply one light Apply one light Apply one medium
coat. Immediately coat. Immediately coat. Immediately coat. If second
apply second light apply second light apply second light coat is desired,
coat if needed to coat if needed to coat if needed to allow Black Cat to
hide thin areas. If hide thin areas. If hide thin areas. If flash off before
second full coat is second full coat is second full coat is applying second
desired, allow desired, allow desired, allow full coat. Flash time
Prime Time to flash Bumper and Clad- Prime Time to flash varies depending
off before applying ding Coat to flash off before applying on temperature
second full coat. off before applying second full coat. and humidity.
Flash time varies second full coat. Flash time varies Flash time is
depending on Flash time varies depending on usually between 10
temperature and depending on temperature and and 30 minutes.
humidity. Flash temperature and humidity. Flash Additional coats
time is usually humidity. Flash time is usually may be applied
between 10 and 30 time is usually between 10 and 30 after sanding to
minutes. between 5 and 10 minutes. achieve desired
minutes. surface finish if
needed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Dry Time Allow at least 60 Allow at least 60 Allow at least 60 Allow at least 30
minutes dry time at minutes dry time at minutes dry time at minutes dry time at
room temperature room temperature room temperature room temperature
or 30 minutes at or 15 minutes at or 30 minutes at or 15 minutes at
120°F. Dry time will 130°F. Dry time will 120°F. Dry time will 120°F before dry
vary depending on vary depending on vary depending on sanding. Black Cat
temperature and temperature and temperature and may be wet
humidity. Prime humidity. Bumper humidity. Prime sanded after 6
Time must be and Cladding Coat Time must be hours dry time at
completely dry must be completely dry room temperature
before topcoating. completely dry before topcoating. or after 60 minutes
The crosslinking before topcoating. The crosslinking at 120°F. Dry time
process takes six Any unused paint process takes six will vary depending
hours at room may be returned to hours at room on temperature
temperature or one the can for future temperature or one and humidity.
hour at 120°F. use. hour at 120°F. Black Cat must be
Prime Time may Prime Time may completely dry
be topcoated be topcoated before topcoating.
before crosslinking before crosslinking The crosslinking
is complete. is complete. process takes six
hours at room
temperature or one
hour at 120°F.
Black Cat may be
topcoated before
crosslinking is
complete.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Top Coat No sanding No sanding No sanding Finish Sand with
required before required before required before 400 to 600 grit
applying the applying topcoat. applying the sand paper. Apply
topcoat. If required, Although sanding topcoat. If required, any sealer, Base/
surface may be Bumper and Clad- surface may be Clear or single
lightly scuffed or ding Coat Adhe- lightly scuffed or stage topcoat
sanded to achieve sion Primer is not sanded to achieve system according
desired smooth- recommended, desired smooth- to the manufac-
ness. If sanded, trapped debris may ness. If sanded, turer's instructions.
blow or wipe dust be removed with blow or wipe dust
off surface before very light sanding off surface before
applying topcoat. using 600 grit applying topcoat.
Apply any Base/ paper. Apply any Apply any Base/
Clear or single approved Base/ Clear or single
stage topcoat Clear system stage topcoat
system according according to the system according
to the manufac- manufacturer's to the manufac-
turer's instructions. instructions. turer's instructions.
Topcoating window Bumper and Clad- Topcoating window
does not close. ding Coat Adhe- does not close.
Prime Time may sion Primer may Prime Time may
be topcoated at not be topcoated be topcoated at
any time once fully with 2K primers, any time once fully
dry. single stage paint dry.
or catalyzed base
coats. Topcoating
window does not
close. Bumper and
Cladding Coat
Adhesion Primer
may be topcoated
at any time once
fully dry.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225794en
http://vnx.su
Impact of Insufficient Repair Quality

Body repairs usually require a significant level of Completion of the paint repairs
intervention in the existing body shell structure.
The corrosion protection, seals and NVH The following points should be noted when
components are destroyed and must be replaced. checking the paint repairs:
To prevent the vehicle quality from being reduced • Originality of the paintwork.
due to an insufficient repair quality, all repairs • Transitions to the adjacent paintwork.
carried out in all repair sections must be inspected • Leftover paint and paint traces.
during and after the accident repair.
• Leftover masking materials and dirt.
Simply checking the vehicle at the time of delivery • Underbody protection and cavity protection.
is not sufficient to guarantee the repair quality.
Rather, continuous checking of the work carried Completion of anti-rust treatment
out is recommended.
The following points should be noted when
NOTE: Logs of the acceptance of individual checking the anti rust treatment:
operations are a useful tool for quality assurance.
• Under body: Inspect the state of undercoat
A comprehensive final inspection can be carried
application.
out based on a final acceptance log.
• Panel joint area: Inspect the range of the area
In the process, the entire repair sequence must be applied with body sealer.
split into reasonable sections, with the creation of
• Inspect for water leakage: Inspect the joint areas
check points to which particular attention must be
between any two of the panel, between a panel
paid.
and a fitting part doors and weather strips for
The following are some possible sections: water.
• Completion of the body repairs. Final assembly, ancillary components, functional
• Completion of the paint repairs. tests
• Completion of anti-rust treatment After final assembly, not only a visual inspection
• Final assembly, ancillary components, functional is required, but also the functionality of many
tests. components must be checked:
• Inspection on safety • Check repair area for originality.
• Vehicle delivery. • Check ancillary components for correct
NOTE: The following points offer an indication of installation.
possible test logs. They can be combined and • Check precision fitting of all parts.
supplemented differently, depending on the • Check that the doors and flaps are working
individual operating procedures. correctly.
Completion of the body repairs • Check that all mechanical parts, such as the
window winder are working correctly.
After completion of the body repairs, the following
areas should be checked: • Check for leaks in the repair area.
• Manufacturing inspection for functionality and Inspection on safety

originality in the accident area.
The following points should be noted when
• Check snug fitting of metal panel parts (welding checking the vehicle safety and ensuring road
and screw connections). worthiness:
• Check snug fitting of ancillary components Inspection and adjustment of wheel alignment After
(doors, hoods, glazing). the body has been restored to the original
• Check surface condition of the welded seams. specification, it must be possible to adjust the
• Check seals, blanking plugs, NVH components. wheel alignment to the standards.
• Check corrosion prevention measures • Camber
• Check that the repair work is in the correct • Caster
condition for painting. • Toe-in
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225796en
http://vnx.su
• Front wheel turning angle Present the defect/replaced parts of the vehicle for
• Side slip customer inspection.
Brake Inspect for brake fluid leakage, air mixing in Customers are making increasingly high demands
the fluid, etc. of vehicles, particularly in terms of driving comfort.
Customers find noise, vibrations and harshness
Lights Inspect and adjust, where necessary, the (NVH) as well as squeaking and rattling annoying,
lighting of lights and lamps and their beam lines. particularly after repair work. It is therefore
Fuel Inspect for fuel leakage. important that the condition of the vehicle at the
time of production be restored after an accident
Functional parts
repair.
• Door lock and door glass regulator operations
After body repairs, the entire repair area must be
• Wiper and washer checked for any water leaks. It is crucial that a leak
• Climate control (Heating, Ventilation, and Air test be carried out as part of the final inspection so
conditioning) that water leaks can be detected and eliminated
• Hood, trunk lid or tailgate operations even before delivery of the vehicle to the customer.
Final body shop and mechanical workshop quality
Vehicle delivery
inspector has thoroughly checked the vehicle and
Vehicle delivery again offers the opportunity of signs the quality approval document prior delivering
checking the repair quality. In the process, the the vehicle to customer.
following points are to be checked again: The requirements of the vehicle manufacturer are
• Check the accident area for originality. to be taken into consideration during all
• Visual inspection of the transitions and gaps. inspections. Only in this way can it be guaranteed
that the vehicle quality is not reduced through
• Check for corrosion prevention measures,
insufficient repair quality.
insulation mats and rubber seals.
• Check for traces of leftover paint.
• Check the cleanliness of the vehicle.
• Functional check of the mechanical and
electrical components.
• Road test the vehicle.
• Check for noise, vibration and harshness (NVH).
• Check for wind noise.
Thoroughly cross check the Repair Order for the
list repairs identified while the damaged vehicle
was received.
After repair work on the body and vehicle, not only
the visual restoration of the damaged vehicle, but
also the functional restoration must be guaranteed.
Ensure that all the identified repairs by Service
Advisor are completed as per the requirement and
it is meeting the Ford safety and standard
guidelines.
Additional repairs/component replacements
identified during the operation is noted in the Repair
order and proper approval has been obtained from
customer to carry out those along with existing
repair job.
Pay full attention to check the additional repairs
are completed as per the norms and within the
stipulated time frame agreed with customer.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225796en
http://vnx.su
Water Leaks
Water leaks can occur after body repair work, but
can also occur on new vehicles. The test methods
described below allow the various causes to be
Water test
identified. In all cases, a systematic and logical
During the water test, the vehicle is sprayed with
procedure is required to locate water leaks.
water at the suspected location of the leak. At the
same time, a second person checks the passenger
General compartment for places where water enters the
vehicle.
When searching for faults, it must be taken into • Start in the lower area and spray the whole area,
account that water can enter the vehicle passenger working upwards in stages.
compartment in various ways and under different
• Use a water spray nozzle with a variable water
conditions. Therefore, it is sometimes not sufficient
jet.
to perform a water test on a stationary vehicle.
• In difficult cases, improve the free flowing of the
Before beginning extensive checks, a thorough water by adding a small amount of rinsing agent.
visual inspection must be carried out. The following
• Use a special mirror in areas with poor visibility.
points are to be taken into account in the process:
• If necessary, use a contrast agent and UV lamp.
• Check the clearance and accurate fit of ancillary
components such as the trunk lid and doors.
• Check for correct installation and possible Washer test
damage to sealing elements such as blanking
plugs, seals and rubber door seals. Certain leak problems only appear in a car wash
• Check that the water discharge are not blocked. or can only be simulated there. The concerned
area of the passenger compartment should be
inspected with a torch during the wash procedure.
Testers
NOTE: Further test methods and testers are set Road Test
out in the "Wind noise" chapter.
Water leaks and wind noise can have similar Some leaks only appear when the vehicle is
causes. This means that test methods and testers moving. If no leaks are detected during the
can be used for both types of problem. The above-mentioned tests, road tests should be
alternative tests are as follows: carried out on wet roads.
• Stethoscope. • At various speeds.

• Smoke pipe. • On various road surfaces (asphalt to cobbles).
• Ultrasonic detector. • With loaded or unloaded vehicle.
• Powder test. • Driving through puddles (splash water).
Test method Test with UV lamp
Water leaks in the vehicle passenger compartment As already indicated in the water test section, a
cannot usually be located at the first go, as the leak test can be executed with a UV lamp and a
water frequently distributes itself across larger special contrast agent. The advantages of using
areas. For this reason, the passenger compartment contrast agent are:
must be dried before the leak tests. Any ancillary • No need to dry out wet areas beforehand.
components that block the view must be removed.
• The water entry and its subsequent path can
be seen more clearly.
• No need to remove most ancillary components
from the vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: The equipment manufacturer's instructions Special Mirror Test
must be followed when using a UV lamp and
contrast agent. The special mirror can be used to see into
hard-to-reach areas.
DEE0003957
DEE0003958
Procedure for using a UV lamp.
• Wet the test area with clear water from the Benefits
outside. A switchable light is built into the mirror area.
• Prepare test liquid and apply it from the outside
The angle of inclination of the mirror can be set
using a suitable water sprayer.
manually using the handle.
• Illuminate the relevant area from the inside using
the UV lamp. The test liquid will make the leak The connector between the handle and the mirror
visible. is flexible.
Chalk/powder test Stethoscope test
In this test, the contact area of the seal is checked. This procedure is very similar to the smoke test.
Instead of the smoke pipe, move a stethoscope
To do this, the door seal is coated with powder or past the areas of the body that are at risk. Leaks
brushed with chalk. A thin layer of grease is applied can now be detected acoustically.
to the contact area of the seal. The door must then
be slowly closed and reopened.
The width and continuity of the imprint can now be Ultrasonic detection
checked on the door seal.
With this test, a leak can be found electronically.
The procedure is as follows:
Smoke test • Place the ultrasonic transmitter in the vehicle.
• Completely close the vehicle.
This test can be used to detect leaks visually. The
process is as follows: • Search the exterior of the vehicle using the
detector.
• Set the ventilation blower in the passenger
• The detector provides a simple indication of a
compartment to the highest setting.
leak.
• Close all doors so that a slight overpressure can
build up in the passenger compartment.
• Move the smoke pipe along the outside of the
body to the areas to be checked.
• Leaks can be detected through the irregular
movement of the smoke.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
Sequence
Stag Testing Result Action

e
1st Ask customer for a detailed list of Yes Dry out the vehicle and repair the damage.
possible reasons for the water entry. Perform a water test as a check (see test
Does this information allow the cause method).
of the leak to be identified?
No Step 2.
2nd Perform an initial visual inspection on Yes Dry out vehicle. Repair damage. Perform a
the vehicle. Look for signs of water water test as a check (see test method).
entry. Can the cause of the leak be
identified immediately?
No Step 3.
3rd Is it possible that water is getting into Yes Check the seal for damage. Check the
the vehicle through a seal (door seal, creation of the seal using the chalk test (see
trunk lid seal)? test methods). Step 4.
No Step 5.
4th Is the contact area for the seal Yes Step 5.
adequate?
No Perform work as described under Areas with
possible water leaks - Door seals. Dry out
vehicle. Repair damage. Perform a water test
as a check (see test method).
5th Before starting any further work, use Yes Dry out vehicle. Repair the damage using the
the VIN to look for model-specific information found. Perform a water test as a
information in eTIS. Perform Oasis check (see test method).
query and check TSIs. Does this
information allow the cause of the leak
to be identified?
No Step 6.
6th Establish the extent of the damage. To Yes Dry out vehicle. Repair leak. Perform a water
do this, expose wet areas. Remove test as a check (see test method).
parts. Investigate the suspected area
for signs of water. Does an investiga-
tion of the suspected area allow the
cause of the leak to be identified?
No Step 7.
7th Check exterior areas (seals, seal Yes Dry out vehicle. Repair leak. Perform a water
welds). Check interior areas: Signs of test as a check (see test method).
water, plugs, seal welds. Can the cause
of the leak be identified?
No Step 8.
8th Perform water test or ultrasound test. Yes Dry out vehicle. Repair leak. Perform a water
Can the cause of the leak be found? test as a check (see test method).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
Stag Testing Result Action
e
No The water entry may only occur under
dynamic driving conditions. This requires
intensive tests to be repeated with the
corresponding climatic influences (rain).
Possible complaints and corrective

actions Door seals
NOTE: Water leaks and changed vehicle acoustics If water appears at the bottom of the door, it is
can have similar causes. For this reason, possible that the door seal behind the door trim is
information from the Wind noise or Noise, damaged. If the door is intact, water can enter
vibrations, roughness chapters may be useful in through the window weatherstrip and flow out
identifying the fault. through gaps on the underside of the door. If the
An outline of the possible complaints due to water door seal adhesion is faulty or the door seal is
leaks is provided below. The causes of water leaks damaged, water can get into the interior.
and the possible remedies are presented using
selected examples. They are intended to provide
troubleshooting tips and suggestions for the user
but do not represent an exhaustive faults list.
Glued windows
A broken pasted seam can cause water to enter

around the window. A broken pasted seam can be
located using a water test or by carefully blowing
compressed air onto the inside of the window seal.
Item Description
1 Seal/adhesion
2 Clips
3 Door speaker
Fastening bolts could be loose or clips incorrectly
positioned on door modules.
Corrective action
Depending on the door seals used, different sealing
methods can be used.
Corrective action
NOTE: The drainage holes on the underside of the
Broken pasted seams -Arrow- can be sealed from
door may not be blocked - if they are, clean them.
inside using PU adhesive.
Defective films and foam seals must be replaced.
If this seal does not resolve the problem or the
Once the adhesive surfaces have been cleaned,
broken pasted seam is too extensive, it is
plastic films must be stuck with double-sided
necessary to remove the window and glue it back
adhesive tape or replaced.
into place.
Leaky foam seals are sealed with Butyl tape or
replaced.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
Plastic door modules are fitted with a weatherstrip, Butyl tape or replace the part.
which cannot be replaced. Seal the leaky point with
Door weatherstrip
Item Description Corrective action
1 Front door weatherstrip joining location Replace damaged or aged seals. Prevent kinks.
2 Rear door weatherstrip joining location The contact pressure can be changed by adjusting
the catch bolt or correcting the panel flange.
Leaks can be caused by badly fitted seals. In
Realign uneven welding flange thicknesses.
particular, areas with radii -Arrow- must be
Properly repair any paint damage that occurs.
thoroughly checked.
Door seals can develop leaks due to:
• Damaged or expanded seals.
Rubber grommets / plugs
• Ageing. Rubber grommets or plugs are fitted at numerous
• Insufficient contact pressure. points on the body. They are frequently used as
• Inadequate contact area for seal on body part. seals for cables, hoses or actuating links. Rubber
• Uneven welding flange thickness. plugs are frequently used for gaps caused during
production.
• Kinks.
The contact pressure of a seal can be determined
using a strip of paper. If a strip of paper trapped in
the closed door can be pulled out easily, the
contact pressure is too low.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: A large quantity of water flows through the
water tank. If there are leaks in this area, it is
essential to ensure that the water drainage
mechanisms function correctly. Drainage openings
may not be blocked or stuck. Leaves and other dirt
must be removed before troubleshooting.
Corrective action
Before the actual repair, make sure that the water
drains are not blocked or stuck.
Remove the heater housing / ventilation and fit a
new Butyl sealing strip. Damaged sealing surfaces
must first be adjusted. A trapped carpet must be
Item Description
removed.
1 Hinge seal
2 Cable duct Seal welds
Leaks can be caused by badly fitted or damaged
rubber grommets and plugs.
Damaged cable insulation can also cause leaks.
Where components are bolted on, water can enter
if there are inadequate seals at the connection
point.
Corrective action
Correctly fit rubber grommets / plugs. During fitting,
ensure that the sealing lips are not trapped and
are applied properly. The contact area of the rubber
grommets / plugs can also be sealed with PU
sealing compound. Replaced damaged rubber
PU seal welds are applied to welded or riveted
grommets and repair damaged cable insulation.
connections -Arrows- to seal the interior of the
vehicle. Incorrectly applied or damaged seal welds
can allow moisture to penetrate into the interior of
Heater housing/ventilation
the vehicle. It is also possible that seal welds that
visually appear to be intact in terms of their shape
Loose Butyl sealing strips, damaged sealing
and size actually have poor adhesion.
surfaces or a trapped carpet can cause leaks
around the heater housing / ventilation -Arrow-. Corrective action
Badly positioned or badly fitted hoses can also be
responsible for water entry. Water drains must not Incomplete seal welds must be supplemented with
be blocked. PU sealing compound. Damaged seal welds must
be removed and re-applied properly. Make sure
that any residual moisture is effectively removed
before a new seal is applied.
Attached parts
The add-on parts include:

• Exterior mirros, handles, controls.
• Mouldings, roof mouldings, lettering.
• Roof aerial, roof rack or connections for roof
rack systems.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
• Bumper mountings.
• Injection nozzles, door contact switches, bump
stop rubber.
• Control unit seals.
• Tail lamps.
• All kind of screwed connections (pedal block,
door and tailgate hinges)
Add-on body parts must be fitted with seals,
grommets or sealing compound to prevent water
entry. However, even when a sealing system is
fitted, the screw thread may still cause leaks.
Corrective action
Seals must be tested and, if necessary, replaced.
Check contact surface and adjust if necessary.
Points sealed with sealing compound must be
thoroughly cleaned and the seal replaced. Check
grommets and replace if necessary. At all screwed
connections, seal the thread with an appropriate
sealing material.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225798en
http://vnx.su
Wind Noise
Wind noise and noises in general are dealt with There are various causes of wind noise. They can
under the label Noise, Vibration, Harshness, or be due to the design of the vehicle, or they can
NVH in short. occur after a repair. They are mostly caused by
NOTE: Basic and advanced training is offered for poorly mounted components, which must be
the following contents. For an overview of all located and installed in the correct position.
training courses offered, please refer to the Ford
Service Organization's training course brochure. Diagnosis
Due to the continuous reduction in drive noises,
wind noise has come to the fore in the vehicle and In order to carry out targeted diagnosis, it is
is perceived to a greater extent by the customer. important to know the basics of noise formation
and sound transmission.
Potential areas of wind noise
E120758

1 Wiper arms 7 Door seals
2 Windscreen seal 8 Headlamps
3 Antenna Normal air flow noises are caused by air blowing
against even, flat vehicle surfaces, such as the
4 Tailgate roof, doors and side windows. When the vehicle is
5 Door handles moving fast, air films (turbulence) form, which
cause variations in air pressure. These variations
6 Rear view mirrors in air pressure spread in the form of sound waves
and are transferred to the vehicle interior via the
side windows and seals.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
If air flows over an edge on a vehicle, the air flow Sequence
cannot follow the shape of the surface, but
separates at the edge. Eddies are formed, which A basic prerequisite for a problem description with
collapse again after a certain time or distance. The subsequent diagnosis is the performance of a test
associated variations in air pressure create a drive with the customer..
corresponding sound wave. Only once the customer's problem description is
Streaming noise occurs if there are leaks in the clear should the service technician begin with the
sealing system to the vehicle passenger diagnosis of the problem.
compartment. The noise is caused when stationary The service technician should carry out specific
air mixes with moving air. As a result, the noise road tests to achieve further containment of the
increases as the streaming speed increases. problem.
Cavity noises are noises that occur when the air Sequence (schematic):
column is caused to oscillate.
1. Customer concern
• What is the customer concern and what details
Workshop diagnosis can he supply about the wind noise?
Before carrying out repair work, a visual inspection • Under which conditions does the wind noise
of the vehicle must be carried out. The gaps in the appear?
doors, the sunroof and at all other body parts must 2a. Diagnosis and corrective measures Sequence
be checked in particular. A: The diagnosis is possible based on the
When the doors are adjusted to fit exactly, information supplied by the customer.
development of wind noise can often be eliminated • Carry out corrective measures to remedy the
at high speeds (lifting of doors off the seals). wind noise.
The following points are also to be checked: • Road test the vehicle to check that the concern
is resolved. The vehicle must be driven in
• Check that windows are completely closed. exactly same way as when the wind noise was
• Check air ducts and vents for correct installation. produced earlier.
• Check protruding trims or plastic parts. • The corrective measure performed based on
• Check that all blanking plugs are present. the information supplied by the customer was
not successful. Further fault finding must now
be carried out in the workshop (see Sequence
Road tests B).
2b. Diagnosis and corrective measures Sequence
Wind noise can usually only be located through
B: The diagnosis is not possible based on the
road tests.
information supplied by the customer.
NOTE: There should always be two people present
• Test for faults, referring to any TSB (Technical
during test drives to find noises. A driver who
Service Bulletin) which may be relevant.
reconstructs the situation causing the noise, and
a person to carry out the checks. • Visually check external seals, check gaps.
• Visually check the vehicle for traces of accident
The following points should be taken into account
repair and retrospectively attached ancillary
for such test drives:
components.
• Check that the tire pressure is correct. • Perform a diagnosis based on the road test.
• Remove non-standard ancillary components • Carry out corrective measures based on the
from the vehicle. diagnosis.
• Choose a dry, flat road with as little traffic as • Perform another road test. The vehicle must be
possible. driven in exactly same way as when the wind
• Carry out the road test in all speed ranges. Use noise was produced earlier.
a high gear so that the engine noise is low. • If this road test does not show that the work has
If it is difficult to detect the noise sources, the been successful, additional techniques such as
search can be made easier by masking potential powder testing, stethoscope testing or ultrasonic
areas. detection must be employed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
The vehicle acoustics do not always make it Sequence for performing a wind noise
possible to draw up a clear diagnosis. It is therefore diagnosis
all the more necessary to use all methods of
detecting and suppressing NVH problems. 1. Customer concern
3. Comparison of vehicles constructed in the same • What is the customer concern and what
way. details can he supply about the wind noise?
If no clear diagnosis is possible based on a 2. Under which conditions does the wind noise
customer concern, a comparison test drive should appear?
be carried out on a vehicle constructed in the same 1. Sequence A: A diagnosis is possible based
way. on the details supplied by the customer.
• Carry out corrective measures to remedy
the wind noise.
Test Equipment • Road test the vehicle to check that the
concern is resolved. The vehicle must be
Diagnosis of wind noise requires good hearing, driven in the exactly same way as when
basic knowledge of acoustics and experience. the wind noise was produced earlier.
Tools can provide assistance for the diagnosis and • If the corrective measures based on the
reduce the fault finding duration. information supplied by the customer were
not successful, further testing must be
Stethoscope
carried out in the workshop (see sequence
Here, the tightness of the vehicle passenger B).
compartment is checked. The ventilated blower is 2. Sequence B: A diagnosis based on details
set to the highest setting and the doors and supplied by the customer is not possible
windows are closed. There is now a corresponding • Test for faults in the workshop, referring to
overpressure in the passenger compartment. any TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) which
The stethoscope is now used to listen to the door may be relevant.
and window seals. The sound of the streaming air • Visually check external seals, check gaps.
can be heard at the leaks. • Visual check: Have any components been
fitted to the vehicle after manufacture or
Smoke Pipe has the vehicle been repaired after an
The preparatory work is the same as for the accident?
stethoscope test. By scanning past the seal areas • Perform a diagnosis based on the road test.
with the smoke pipe, a leak can be visually • Carry out corrective measures based on
detected based on the changed smoke path. the diagnosis.
• Perform another road test. The vehicle
Ultrasonic detector must be driven in the exactly same way as
The ultrasonic detector is a further method of when the wind noise was produced earlier.
findings leaks in the vehicle passenger • If this road test does not show that the work
compartment. Here, an ultrasonic noise generator has been successful, additional techniques
is placed in the passenger compartment. The such as powder testing, stethoscope testing
closed vehicle is then inspected from outside with or ultrasonic detection must be employed.
the corresponding detector. The detector will show
any leaks present.
Workshop diagnosis
Powder
Before repair work is carried out, a visual check of
Door seals that do not make close contact can be the vehicle must be performed, paying special
detected by coating the contact surface of the door attention to the fit of the doors. When the doors
seal with white powder. to do this, the door is are adjusted to fit exactly, development of wind
carefully closed and re-opened. In this way the noise can often be eliminated at high speeds (lifting
door seals which do not touch will be visible. of doors off the seals).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
Stethoscope testing Road tests
– The stethoscope is a simple and appropriate – The causes and origins of wind noises can often
tool for finding bodywork air leaks. If the blower be located by a road test. Attention should be
is turned on at the highest speed and all the paid to the following points:
doors, windows and other openings are closed, – Choose a dry, flat and straight road with as
the air pressure inside the vehicle can be made little traffic as possible.
higher than that outside. The outside of the
– Make sure that the tyres are at the correct
vehicle is then checked for streams of escaping
pressure, to avoid tyre noise.
air.
Driving technique
Powder test
– Perform the road test at all speed ranges, using
– By coating the contact surface of the door seal
the highest gears (fourth or fifth).
with white powder, door seals that do not make
close contact can be found. To do this, the door – The road test should be performed by two
is carefully closed and re-opened. In this way, persons, and different seating positions should
the sealing surfaces which do not touch will be be tested.
visible. – Prepare the vehicle as necessary (use adhesive
tape to blank off areas).
– Pay special attention to door openings and door
Ultrasonic detector seals during the road test.
– It is also possible to detect leaks using an

ultrasonic detector and a tone generator. To do Gaps and Flushness
this, the ultrasonic tone generator is put inside
the vehicle and the outside of the vehicle is Acceptance criteria
tested using the detector tuned to the generator.
The detector will quite easily show any leaks
present.
12
4
5 8
11
10
1
7
6
9
E124957
O/F : Over Flush N/A : Not Applicable

U/F : Under Flush
NOTE: All Dimensions are in "mm" only.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
Point Parameters Gap Flushness Parallism Symmetry
No
Gap Flush Gap Flush
1 Hood to bumper 6.0±2.0 Bumper U/F 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0
2.0±2.0
2 Hood to head- 4.0±1.5 Hood U/F 1.5±1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
lamp
3 Hood to fender 4.0±1.0 Hood U/F 1.0±1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
4 Fender to head- 2.0±1.5 Fender U/F 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
lamp top corner 0.5±1.0
5 Fender to head- 2.0±1.5 0.0±1.0 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
lamp
6 Headlamp to 3.0±1.0 Bumper U/F 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
bumper bottom 1.0±1.0
7 Fender to 0.0±0.5 Bumper U/F 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0
bumper 1.0±1.0
8 Bumper to 1.2±1.0 Lower Grille U/F 1.0 1.0 N/A N/A
bumper lower 2.0±1.0
grill at top
grill at bottom
grill at side
11 Foglamp bezel 1.0±1.0 Fog lamp bezel 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
to foglamp gap U/F 3.0±1.0
12 Foglamp bezel 2.0±1.5 N/A 1.0 N/A 1.0 N/A
to bumper gap
7
5
1
6
2
4
3
E124958
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
Point Parameters Gap Flushness Parallism Symmetry
No
Gap Flush Gap Flush
1 Tail lamp to 4.0±2.4-2.0 1.0±1.0 - - 2.0 1.0
backlite
2 Quarter panel to 4.0±1.5 1.0+0.0-0.5 - - 1.5 N/A
tail gate
3 Tail gate to 6.0±1.0 N/A - - N/A N/A
bumper
4 Quarter panel to 0.0±0.5 Bumper U/F - - N/A 1.0
bumper 1.0±1.0
5 Quarter panel to 4.0±1.5 1.0+0.0-0.5 - - N/A N/A
tail lamp top
6 Tail gate to tail 4.0±1.8 1.0+0.0-0.5 - - 1.8 N/A
lamp
7 Roof to tail gate 7.0±2.0-0.0 1.0+0.0-0.1 - - N/A N/A
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225800en
http://vnx.su
Noise, Vibration and Harshness

Noises means noises caused by the vehicle that the shock absorbers, chassis components or
are audible both inside and outside the vehicle. loose articles inside the vehicle.
Vibrations are oscillations that are palpable and A noise usually consists of a superimposition of
noticeable in the vehicle passenger compartment. different tones which spread as oscillations.
Harshness means noises caused by the vehicle Each of these oscillations has a specific oscillating
that are audible, palpable and noticeable inside time and can be measured in frequencies. The
the vehicle. frequency describes the number of oscillations per
These terms are grouped together under the label second. The frequency unit is specified in Hertz
Noise, Vibration, Harshness, or NVH in short. (Hz).
The task of vehicle development and production The human ear can perceive frequencies between
is to ensure that noises caused by the vehicle do 20 and 20000 Hz.
not disturb the driver and passengers. Moreover, Noises can already be contained where they occur
the external noises emitted by the vehicle must not or, if this is not possible, can be confined with
exceed the thresholds set by law. suitable measures. The basic procedures are the
The following section gives an overview of how damping of oscillating parts, the insulation of
noise, vibration and harshness can occur in the components or the absorption of the noises through
vehicle and what remedial action is possible. appropriate materials.
NOTE: Basic and advanced training courses are Damping

offered for the following contents. For an overview If a damper is installed next to an oscillating mass,
of all courses offered, please refer to the Ford the characteristic of the damper will reduce the
Service Organization's training course brochure. movement of this mass accordingly (e.g. bumper
Noise types and causes
on chassis).
Noises in and around the vehicle are assigned Damping affects the resonance of an object or
specific descriptions: system.
• Humming and droning are perceived as low Isolation

tones. In oscillation technology, the term isolation means
• Buzzing and whirring are middle tones. decoupling (separation) of components and
• Howling, whistling, squeaking are assigned to systems.
the high tones. An engine is mounted in sprung elements, so that
Low to middle tones are considered to be as little oscillation as possible is passed to the
unpleasant. They are palpable and noticeable as vehicle.
oscillations and vibrations throughout the body. In automotive technology, the isolation technique
Loud howling and whistling is painful to the ears. used is nearly always rubber mounting. The
Where the different notes come from in a vehicle: elasticity of the rubber acts like a spring.
• Low notes are mostly produced by the engine. Absorption
• Low tones can also be produced by the
Sound waves are reflected from hard surfaces
roadbed, particularly on rough surfaces. This is
Through the use of absorption material, sound
a form of droning which can be felt by the
waves hit soft surfaces and are absorbed by them.
vehicle occupants as vibration or roughness.
The composition and thickness of the material used
• High tones however, which are experienced as plays an important role here.
howling or whistling noises, are often air
currents (wind noise) or come from ancillary A soft surface, depending on its composition,
components such as the generator, power absorbs the sound waves and reduces their
steering pump or drivebelt. energy.
• There are also clattering noises which can occur
when driving over an uneven road. These
jerking noises are produced by, for example,
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
NVH elements sound transfers to the passenger compartment in
different body cavities.
NVH elements are installed to prevent airborne
E120760
The NVH elements consist of a carrier plate with

Item Description
a compressed isolation material at the edges. In
1 C-pillar area the drying system of the painting equipment used
in production, the body is heated to approx. 170°
2 B-pillar area
C. At this temperature, the isolation material
3 A-pillar area expands, completely sealing the gap between the
carrier plate and the bodywork.
On the Focus 2004.75 (07/2004-) these elements
are located in the cavities of the A, B and C pillars. NOTE:
On the estate version, they are also located in the
D pillars.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
• NVH elements must not be damaged during The diagnosis and correction of noise, vibration
work on the vehicle body. and harshness concerns requires:
• NVH elements deformed through impact must • a road or system test to determine the exact
always be replaced. nature of the concern.
• PU adhesive must always be applied to the • analysis of probable causes.
edges of new and reused NVH elements during
• checking of the cause and elimination of the
repair work.
faults found.
• a road test or system test to make sure the
concern has been corrected or brought back to
within an acceptable range.
It is often very difficult to locate noises that are
audible in the passenger compartment based on
the problem description provided by the customer
and the road tests performed. The direction of the
noise can be detected subjectively, but the source
of the noise cannot be found.
NOTE: For a selection of simple test tools, see the
wind noises section.
Item Description Stethoscope
1 NVH element Using the stethoscope, you can listen to the entire
vehicle passenger compartment to locate noise
2 PU adhesive sources more easily. This test procedure can be
carried out either while the vehicle is moving, or
For the exact installation position of an NVH
with the engine running and the vehicle stationary,
element, please refer to the vehicle-specific repair
depending on the concern. The noise source can
instructions.
be assumed to be where the stethoscope identifies
If an NVH element is to be reused, the bonding on the highest noise radiation.
the body panel must be detached. To do this, the
NOTE: For safety reasons, only the passenger
body panel must be heated in the area around the
should carry out the stethoscope testing while the
NVH element. The bonding can be detached at
vehicle is moving.
approx. 170° C. The damaged panel part can now
be carefully dismantled. Application examples:
Before installing the new panel part, PU adhesive • For very frequent noises in the passenger
must be applied to the contact areas between the compartment.
panel and the NVH element. • For engine noises that penetrate through the
dashboard into the passenger compartment.
Test techniques, measuring devices
• Wind noise.
The shortest route to an accurate diagnosis results • Noise outside the vehicle that is routed inside,
from: such as roadway, tire or water spray noises.
• general information on the problem vehicle and NOTE: With the stethoscope it is possible to locate
a comparison test with a vehicle of the same medium and high frequency noise paths (caused
construction, without NVH problems. by leaks) while the vehicle is moving. The
• vehicle history, including repair history and stethoscope is not suitable for diagnosis of low
usage patterns. frequency droning problems.
• condition history, especially any relationship to
repairs or sudden change. Ultrasonic measuring device
• knowledge of probable causes. The ultrasonic detector is a good and reliable test
• application of diagnosis procedures in which the method for acoustic problems. It is used in a similar
vehicle is split into corresponding areas. way to the stethoscope. In principle, it is suitable
for all high frequency interior noises and for leaks
in the body seals.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
The device consists of an ultrasonic transmitter NOTE: Before using the NVH tester in the service,
and a receiver. During use, the transmitter sends the service technician should take part in an NVH
an ultrasonic signal which is received at the training course to ensure effective use of this
problem zones by the receiver. device during the road test. A description of the
function and application of the NVH tester is
Electronic NVH tester enclosed with the device.
The measuring device described below is used for Layout and operation:
diagnosis of the solid-borne sound and solid-borne
sound transmission paths. The device is particularly • The test device has six different channels for
suitable for medium and high frequency noise noise diagnosis.
analyses. In order to obtain a positive diagnosis of • Each channel is marked in color on the terminal,
droning problems (low frequency noises) and their cable and test device.
sources, you must have sufficient experience of • The solid-borne sound recorded is transmitted
how to use this measuring device. to the test device or the headphones by the
NOTE: In the NVH area, diagnosis of droning magnetic accelerometers (transmitters).
problems is one of the most difficult tasks and sets • There is an amplifier on the test device with
high requirements of the service technicians. which the signal strength and the corresponding
channel can be set.
The device works according to the following
operating principle: Accelerometers (transmitters) • Only the noises from a transmitter are
are fitted on various vehicle components or body transferred to the headphones.
areas. The signals recorded here can be listened • All connected cables can be visually illustrated
to one after the other on headphones or speakers individually or simultaneously on the display.
via the different channels. Simultaneous illustration • The test device saves the recorded data.
of several or all measuring channels (for • The recorded data can be imported to a PC and
comparison) is only possible visually on the display evaluated.
of the measuring device.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
Intake system
2
4
E122664
Item Description – The effects of temperature, such as warming of

the air filter housing can cause changes in the
1 Air cleaner housing cover rigidity of surfaces.
2 Air cleaner element – In order to prevent solid body sound caused by
surface oscillations of the intake system from
3 Air cleaner housing being transmitted to the vehicle body, the
4 Air cleaner intake pipe following points must be observed during
service:
5 Air cleaner outlet pipe
– The whole intake system must be isolated
– The volume and length of intake systems are from the bodywork and mounted in rubber
matched exactly. No changes may be carried bushes without tension.
out during service or repair work. When – The air channels of the intake system must
attaching components (hoses and tubes), pay not contact the bodywork components.
attention that all connections are air-tight.
– Insert foam insulation at points of contact
– The surfaces of all components affected by the with bodywork or other components.
strong pressure variations in the intake system
are especially subject to strong oscillations.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
Exhaust system
Exhaust System General Construction
2 3 4
DEE0003955
Item Description – The exhaust manifold and catalytic converter (if

it is mounted directly at the engine) must have
1 Catalytic converter a solid connection to the engine (no splits in
2 Decoupling element brackets).
– Simple problem testing:
3 Front silencer
– Remove all mountings from which the
4 Rear silencer exhaust system is suspended.
– Exhaust systems must be installed without – Support the exhaust system with rope at two
strain. positions at the most.
– NOTE: The rubber mountings in which an – Check the noise level in the passenger
exhaust system is suspended also transmit compartment during a road test.
oscillations and under some circumstances can – If this solves the problem, the exhaust
also cause a noise problem. For this reason it mountings are the source of the noise.
is important that the exhaust system is installed – Put back the exhaust supports one at a time,
free of strain. and road test the vehicle after fitting each
The rubber mountings must not be one.
over-stretched. – By proceeding in steps in this way, the
mounting that is causing the noise in the
passenger compartment can be found.
Bodywork
Function
– Different types of demand are made on the

bodywork of a vehicle, particularly when it is
being driven. Predominant here are vibrations
caused mainly by other vehicle components,
such as the engine and mountings. The
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
bodywork is therefore one of the most important and the A-pillar in order to ensure good air
vehicle components where NVF is concerned. borne sound insulation.
– The vehicle components described so far were, – NOTE: Foam pieces and foam filling are
according to their function, individual used in production to seal air borne sound
self-contained noise sources. The bodywork transmission routes. If wind, tyre, engine or
however, connects and houses all the vehicle road noise is a problem, the position of the
components. pieces of foam should be checked.
– The bodywork is subject to vibration from both Installation of foam plugs in affected areas.
air borne sound and solid body sound.
– Filling hollow sections with foam.
– The bodywork must absorb all oscillations and
impulses from all components and if possible
transmit none of these to the vehicle interior.
– The largest proportion of NVH behaviour of a
bodyshell is in the steel panels of the roof, sides
and floor. They are strongly stimulated by the
bodyshell structure and work like a loudspeaker
transmitting noise.
Further demands on the bodywork
– Good crash behaviour

– Large interior space
– Corrosion resistance
– Low weight
– Good aerodynamic shape
A compromise must be made on some of these
points. One example is between high body rigidity
for good NVH performance and good energy
absorption in an accident by the use of crumple
zones.
Example:
– Watertight does not mean sound tight, therefore
the following points must be taken into account:
– Correct installation of the windows.
– Correct installation of the seals.
– Further points
– Openings into the engine compartment
– Door and window sealing
– Heater and ventilation openings
– Sliding roof drainage hoses
– The side- and crossmembers in the body
structure are often linking channels allowing
sound transmission. Possible corrective
measures are:
– Installation of dividing walls at critical points
such as the joint between the sidemember
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225802en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-1 Harshness 501-25B-1
.
SECTION 501-25B Body Repairs - Noise, Vibration and
Harshness
CONTENTS PAGE

Noise, Vibration and Harshness......................................................................................... 501-25B-2
Introduction......................................................................................................................... 501-25B-2
What is understood by NVH in vehicle technology............................................................. 501-25B-2
Types of noise in NVH technology...................................................................................... 501-25B-2
Noise transmission through air........................................................................................... 501-25B-2
Sound transmission through a body................................................................................... 501-25B-3
Combination of transmission through air and bodies......................................................... 501-25B-3
Vibration technology........................................................................................................... 501-25B-3
Noise and oscillation behaviour in a vehicle....................................................................... 501-25B-6
Noise and oscillation behaviour of intake and exhaust systems........................................ 501-25B-7
http://vnx.su
501-25B-2 Harshness 501-25B-2
Noise, Vibration and Harshness

Introduction
Where the different notes come from in a
This chapter gives an overview of how noise,
vehicle:
vibration and harshness (NVH) can be produced
in a vehicle, and which corrective measures are – Low notes are mostly produced by the engine.
possible.
– Low notes are also caused by the road surface,
especially if the surface is rough. This is a form
What is understood by NVH in vehicle of droning which can be felt by the vehicle
technology occupants as vibration or roughness.
– High notes however, which are experienced as
N = Noise - Sound, can be heard howling or whistling noises are often air currents
V = Vibration - Oscillation, can be felt (wind noise) or come from attached components
such as the generator, power steering pump or
H = Harshness - Roughness, can be heard and drivebelt.
felt
– There are also clattering noises which can occur
when driving over an uneven road. These
Types of noise in NVH technology jerking noises are produced by, for example,
the shock absorbers, chassis components or
– Noises in a vehicle are classified by their notes: loose articles inside the vehicle.
– Low notes - growling, droning
– Mid-pitch notes - buzzing, whirring
– High notes - howling, whistling, squeaking
– Loud howling and whistling is painful to the ears.
Noise transmission through air

Spreading of sound waves in the air
DEE0003942
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-3 Harshness 501-25B-3
Item Description The speed of transmission (speed of sound) in
liquids or solids depends on the material, but is
1 Sound source e.g. Engine generally faster than that in air (about 5 times
2 Sound wave faster).
3 Amplitude
Combination of transmission through
– The sound is spread by longitudinal waves in air and bodies
the form of pressure changes in the air.
NOTE: Sound transmission through both air and
Sound transmission through a body bodies is of prime importance in vehicle technology.
Sound is passed through liquids or solids e.g.

through the car bodywork.
Noise transmission in a vehicle
E121669
Item Description
Vibration technology
1 Sound through air
2 Sound vibrations – Frequencies below 20 Hz (low frequencies) and
those above 20,000 Hz (20 kHz; high
– Example frequencies) are not heard by the human ear.
– The source of the noise is the engine Engine – The engine is made to oscillate vertically in its
noises are: flexible mountings by unevenness in the road.
– radiated directly through the air – Engine mountings which are not tuned will
– transmitted as vibrations from the engine to transmit oscillations to the bodywork and hence
the bodywork and radiated into the to the occupants.
passenger compartment as air borne sound, – The following basic rules apply:
for instance by the bulkhead,. – In vehicle technology, not only audible
frequencies but also inaudible (low)
frequencies must be considered.
– Low frequency oscillations can usually be
seen (large amplitudes).
– High frequency vibrations can be heard, but
will also be felt as vibrations in the floor,
steering wheel or seat.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-4 Harshness 501-25B-4
Resonance Oscillation
– Every body has a natural frequency of vibration.

– If a system able to vibrate (a vehicle) is excited
at its natural frequency of vibration, it will start
to resonate. 1 2
– Uneven engine running appears for instance
when the resonant frequency is reached (critical
engine speed).
– Once the engine speed increases above this
speed, the engine will very soon run smoothly
again.
Damping
– If a damper is installed parallel to a spring, the

damping characteristic acts to reduce the
movement of a body.
– This is also the way in which a shock absorber
on a vehicle works.
– Damping affects the resonance of an object or
system.
– The mass being moved is damped by a correctly
operating shock absorber, so that shaking of
DEE0003949
the bodywork stops immediately.
– The shock absorber in a vehicle is an oscillation
damper, which allows the bodywork to oscillate Item Description
in a damped manner. 1 Undamped oscillation
2 Damped oscillation
Isolation
In oscillation technology, the term isolation means

decoupling (separation) of components and
systems.
– Example:
– An engine is mounted in sprung elements,
so that as little oscillation as possible is
passed to the vehicle.
– In automotive technology, the isolation
technique used is nearly always rubber
mounting. The elasticity of the rubber acts
like a spring.
– The effectiveness of this type of decoupling
depends on the construction of the
component.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-5 Harshness 501-25B-5
Directional loading of a rubber mounting in order to achieve optimum isolation
2
DEE0003950
Item Description
1 Engine Absorption
2 Engine mounting – Sound waves are reflected from hard surfaces
– If they meet soft surfaces, they are absorbed.
Here both the material and the material
thickness play important roles.
1 2
DEE0003952
Item Description – Example:

– All sound deadening components such as
1 Reflection of sound waves
door trim, carpets, headlining, parcel shelves
2 Absorption of sound waves and the seats are removed from a vehicle.
– The result of this is that the sound is directly
reflected (the sound level rises), and a
concert hall effect is produced.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-6 Harshness 501-25B-6
Noise and oscillation behaviour in a The occupants of a vehicle experience different
vehicle levels of sound or noise depending on where they
are sitting.
Sound/noise wave (standing wave) in a vehicle
1 2
E121670
Item Description
1 Driver sits in a "wave calm"
2 Rear passenger sits in a "wave swell"
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-7 Harshness 501-25B-7
Noise and oscillation behaviour of intake and exhaust systems
The vehicle intake system as an air borne sound and solid body sound source
E121671
The vehicle exhaust system as an air borne sound and solid body sound source
E121672
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25B-8 Harshness 501-25B-8
– Ways in which sound is transmitted
– The top illustration shows the ways in which
sound can be transmitted from intake and
exhaust systems.
– Apart from air borne sound, solid body sound
is predominant in both systems. In order to
keep this proportion as small as possible, it
is necessary for these type of oscillating
components to be connected to the body
using stiff connection points.
– The exhaust system especially is an
oscillating component and requires optimal
isolation through its connection to the floor
and also good routing and positioning of the
fixing points in order to reduce the solid body
sound transmission.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225806en
http://vnx.su
501-25C-1 Body Repairs - Plastic Repairs 501-25C-1
.
SECTION 501-25C Body Repairs - Plastic Repairs
CONTENTS PAGE

Plastic Repairs.................................................................................................................... 501-25C-2
General............................................................................................................................... 501-25C-2
Plastic identification............................................................................................................ 501-25C-2
Thermoelastic straightening............................................................................................... 501-25C-3
Plastic welding.................................................................................................................... 501-25C-3
Plastic reciprocal welding................................................................................................... 501-25C-6
Plastic bonding................................................................................................................... 501-25C-7
GRP repairs........................................................................................................................ 501-25C-9
Safety measures................................................................................................................. 501-25C-10
http://vnx.su
Plastic Repairs
General
Thermoplastics (plastomers)
Because of their various constructions, repair work
to plastic parts involves various repair methods: – Heat causes thermoplastics to change from solid
– Thermoplastic straightening state to thermoelastic state and then to
– Plastic welding technology (PC, PP/EPDM etc.) thermoplastic state.
– Plastic bonding technology (all plastic parts) – When thermoplastics are cooled, they return to
solid state.
– Plastic laminating technology (GRP parts with
polyester resin only)
In repair work, the material characteristics of Duroplastics (duromers)
plastics are highly significant. Two main groups
can be distinguished: – Duroplastics are much harder and more brittle
than thermoplastics.
– Thermoplastics (plastomers)
– Their strength remains largely unchanged
– Duroplastics (duromers)
when they are heated.
– Duroplastics are destroyed when the critical
temperature point is exceeded.
– Cooling down will not restore the original
state.
Plastics used by Ford

Abbreviation Description
ABS Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (polymer)
PA Polyamide
PC Polycarbonate
PP Polypropylene
PP/EPDM Polypropylene/ethylene propylene rubber
PC/PBT Polycarbonate/polybutylene terephthalate
PBT/PC Polybutylene terephthalate/polycarbonate
PUR Polyurethane
GF Glass fiber reinforced
Plastic identification
Visual Inspection
If a plastic has no identifying marks, the type can
be established using two different Visual inspections mainly serve to identify PUR
procedures/methods: and GRP materials. Thermoplastic components
– Visual Inspection (e.g. bumpers) are often painted and are therefore
– Mechanical Check difficult to identify.
The identification of a type of plastic is required for Identification characteristics:
the plastic welding process in order to determine
the correct allocation of the respective welding rod.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
– PUR: if cracks form or similar damage occurs, Flat elastic deformations
visible pores of foam.
– GRP: identifiable glass fiber structure on the – NOTE: The necessary application of heat varies
inside. according to the type of plastic. The application
of heat must not go beyond the elastic area.
Deformation to plastic cannot be reversed.
Mechanical Check Never use a naked flame!
Flat indentations or dents should be heated
– Degree of hardness; the higher-pitched the tone, evenly to approx. 200°C using a hot air blower,
the harder the plastic. if possible apply heat to both sides in turn.
– Elasticity; the more muffled the tone, the higher Provided there is no overstretching, the
the elasticity of the plastic. deformation reverts to its original form.
NOTE: Mechanical checks can identify the plastics – To an extent, the "straightening" can be
group, but not the plastic type. supported using mechanical tools such as the
handle of a hammer, a plastic wedge, etc.
According to damage statistics, plastic bumper
bars are most often subject to repairs.
NOTE: The PUR foam must not be removed for Stretch cracks and kinks
repair purposes if the foam polyurethane on the
inside is bonded to the outer shell of the bumper If there are stretch cracks or even kinks in the
bar. If there is serious damage such as cracking damage area, then the possibilities of thermoelastic
or fracturing (splitting) to the outer shell, do not straightening are limited. Bonding repairs are most
perform any repairs to the foam area. The rule is suited to this kind of damage.
this case is: renew the part. – To prevent tension in the material, cut off the
The outer shell of plastic bumper bars is mainly cracked or kinked areas (using a hacksaw).
comprised of thermoplastic materials. Depending – Heat the depression to approx. 200°C (evenly,
on the degree of damage and accessibility, the both outside and inside) and adjust to the
following repair procedures can be applied: original form using a narrow spatula or hammer
– Thermoelastic straightening handle.
– Bonding
– Welding Plastic welding
NOTE: Do not carry out plastic welding in the area
Thermoelastic straightening of fixed foam backing.
Bumper bars often have deformations which occur Plastic welding is the most suitable repair method
in the elastic area. These normally take the form for cracks to plastic bumper bars, where the rear
of dents, indentations and bends. Many of these side of the damaged area is unsuited to repairs by
deformations (e.g. to bumper bars) correct bonding. Examples: Ribbed section, box section,
themselves of their own accord immediately or narrow rounded sections in reinforced areas.
after a certain period of time. This self-correction
depends on the extent of the damage and the
temperature. Most flat deformations in the elastic Required tools and materials
area revert to their original form when heated with
– In addition to the tools available in the workshop
a hot air blower.
(such as scrapers, grinders, etc.) the following
tools are required for plastic welding:
– Hot air blower (approx. 1500 W)
– Welding nozzles
– Various welding rods
– Face cutter Ø 5.5 mm for processing the
welding groove.
– Scraper (heart-shaped).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Plastic welding gun V-groove weld seam
mm
2
1
1
4-5
4 3 2
0,5 - 1,5
DEE0004049 DEE0004050

1 Plastic welding gun 1 Part to be repaired
2 Rapid welding nozzle 2 Weld additive (shaped)
3 Wedge nozzle (fixed nozzle) Preparing the V-groove weld seam:
4 Face cutter – Form the welding groove using the scraper (face
cutter).
– Keep the angle of the joint at 60° - 70°.
Preparing the repair location (crack) – NOTE: Boring out the end of the cracked (3mm
drill bit) prevents further cracking. Where the
Prepare cracking for the welding process in edge alignment is uneven, fix the start of the
V-formation. crack using clamp pliers before starting welding.
Finally, bore out the end of crack.
Preparing the hot air blower and welding

rod
Convert the hot air blower into a plastic welding

gun (extension nozzle and rapid welding nozzle).
– Set the weld temperature (200°C -700°C)
according to the prescribed values.
Weld temperature
Two factors determine the weld temperature:

– Plastic material
– Thickness of the welding rod
Values for the most important materials and conventional welding rod thickness (5.7 mm x 3.7
mm)
Thermoplastic Weld temperature in °C Potentiometer control setting for plastic
(guide value) welding gun
Wedge nozzle Rapid welding nozzle
5.7mm
ABS 350 4,5 5,3
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Thermoplastic Weld temperature in °C Potentiometer control setting for plastic
(guide value) welding gun
Wedge nozzle Rapid welding nozzle
5.7mm
PP 300 3,8 4,5
PP/EPDM 300 3,8 4,5
PBT/PC 300 3,8 4,5
PA 400 5,1 5,6
PC 350 4,5 5,3
PC/PBTP 350 4,5 5,3
– Only weld PBT/PC plastic using a PP welding

rod. Carrying out the welding
– Glass fiber reinforced plastics cannot be welded.
– Blue-dyed plastic parts on the Ford Ka cannot The following requirements must be met for plastic
be painted and are therefore not suited to plastic welding:
repairs. – Correct temperature setting
Rear side of the plastic welding gun – Even welding speed
– Even operating pressure
Push the beveled welding rod through the heated
3 pre-heating chamber of the rapid welding nozzle
until the tip of the welding rod emerges from the
underside.
2
Aligning the rapid welding nozzle
1
4
DEE0004051
Item Description
1 Air intake opening
2 Temperature control unit
3 Rocker switch DEE0004052
4 Air volume switch
The underside of the rapid welding nozzle must
– The temperatures given are air temperatures run parallel to the repair surface in a lengthways
for the plastic welding gun. The temperature of direction. Parallel alignment in a lengthways
the material is much lower. direction is achieved with the welding equipment
– Observe the manufacturer's instructions when at the appropriate inclination.
setting the temperature.
– Preheat the welding equipment to the
preselected welding temperature for 3-4
minutes.
– Bevel the welding rod at the front to ensure
gradual filling at the start of the crack groove.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Position of the plastic welding gun Welding errors
Deformation:
– Repair area was overheated.
– Material tension present when welding parts.
– Plastic material too thin.
90
Poor welded joint:
– Weld temperature too low.
– Weld speed too fast.
– Welding together differing materials.
DEE0004053
Weld seam sinks:
– Move the plastic welding gun in such a way that – Crack groove too wide
the welding rod is exactly vertical to the welding – Weld temperature too high.
groove.
– The welding procedure can be started when the
welding rod and the plastic to be welded are in Re-working the weld seam
a plastic state.
– After cooling down, the raised part of the weld
Weld seam seam can be sanded down using an angle
sander and abrasive paper of P80 grit.
1 2 – Surface grinding is then carried out using the
orbital sander and abrasive paper of P120 -
P220 grit.
– Clean the ground repair surface using plastic
cleaner.
– Apply plastic primer thinly to the repair surface.
Plastic reciprocal welding

3
DEE0004054
Reciprocal welding is the preferred method for
crack damage in hard-to-reach areas.
Item Description
– The welding rod is moved freely in reciprocal
1 Bead of weld welding.
2 Heightening of weld seam – The preparation of the crack groove is the same.
3 Base of weld seam
– NOTE: The optimal connection is achieved Carrying out the welding
when a small and even bead of weld has formed
along the edge of the weld seam. It is essential – The plastic welding gun is only fitted with the
to weld through the crack seam. Check the weld extension nozzle.
seam from the rear side and re-weld if – The welding rod and the crack groove are
necessary. brought into plastic state by means of vertical
reciprocating movements.
The operating pressure when welding is only
exerted across the welding rod. – The welding rod is pressed into the crack groove
vertically in a plastic state.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Reciprocal welding Required tools and equipment
Tools and equipment from the paint shop can be

1 used to carry out bonding repairs to thermoplastic
parts. Angle grinders and belt sanders can be used
to grind out scratches and crack damage. Orbital
sanders with extractors are used for fine sanding.
An infrared heater ensures fast and effective
2 drying.
Plastic repair set
– Plastic cleaner
4 3
DEE0004055 – Plastic primer
– Adhesive repair set
Item Description – Three double cartridges
1 Welding rod – Three emulsion tubes
2 Plastic welding gun – Metal reinforcement strips
– Reinforcing fiber
3 Welding groove
4 Direction of welding Tools and auxiliary equipment
The following requirements must be met for

reciprocal welding:
– Equal heating of welding rod and welding 1
groove. 2
– Even welding speed.
– Vertical positioning and even pressure on the 6
welding rod.
All other repair steps are described in the chapter
Plastic Welding - Re-working the Weld Seam. 5 4 3
DEE0004056
Plastic bonding Item Description

1 Angle grinder with speed control
General 2 Orbital sander
Bonding technology has some advantages over 3 Plastic stopper
welding technology:
4 Scraper
– Within the group of thermoelastics, all semi-rigid
ancillary components (such as bumper bars, 5 Paint spatula
front grilles, etc.) can be repaired without 6 Clamp pliers
identification.
– A two-component adhesive with a polyurethane
basis must be used for all thermoplastic parts. Preparing the repair location (scratch)
– Reinforcement strips can be attached to crack
grooves (cracks up to max. 100mm) and Before the repair, clean plastic parts on both sides
fractures to ensure the original tensile using a high-pressure cleaner, and then dry.
properties. – Clean the repair surface using plastic cleaner.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Grinding out the scratch Scratch bonding
Even slight depressions such as cracks require

preparation. The surface of the repair area also
1 has to be processed to provide sufficient priming
for the adhesive. This also prevents the repair area
from subsequently sinking.
65 65 – After cleaning and priming, over-fill the ground
out scratch cavity with adhesive.
2 – Dip the end of the emulsion tube in adhesive
during the material application to prevent the
DEE0004058
ingress of air.
– Spread and smooth the adhesive using a flexible
Item Description plastic stopper.
– Set using an infrared heater or in a drying oven.
1 Preparation of the scratch
2 Preparation of the crack
Crack bonding with reinforcement
– Grind out the scratches thoroughly flat using an
orbital sander. Abrasive paper, P80 - P120 grit The repair location is reinforced to increase
– Fine sanding with orbital sander: Abrasive torsional strength in the case of cracking and
paper, P120 grit fracture damage over a large area. To this end,
– NOTE: Wear protective gloves for cleaning. suitable reinforcement materials (metal strips,
reinforcement fibers) are affixed to the rear side.
Thoroughly clean the repair location using
plastic cleaner and paper towels. – Cover the crack on the front side with a PE
– Spray plastic primer evenly onto the repair sheet and with adhesive tape.
location. – From the rear side, fill the ground out crack
groove with plastic adhesive.
– A wide strip of reinforcing fiber is fixed over the
Preparing the repair location (crack) crack groove in the bead of adhesive.
– The ends of the crack are reinforced by affixing
– Grind out the crack on the front side so that it a metal strip that is fastened to the plastic part
is flat using an angle grinder or belt sander. using pliers.
Grinding surface 40-60mm wide
– Then level out the reinforcement material over
– Regrind with an orbital sander. Abrasive paper: the whole surface.
P120 grit.
– Dry using an infrared heater or in a drying oven.
– Bore out the end of the crack (Ø 3 mm) to
prevent further cracking. – The PE sheet prevents the adhesive from
overflowing at the front side of the crack.
– Rub down the rear side along the crack.
– Pull off the PE sheet after drying the adhesive.
– Clean the repair location on both sides using
plastic cleaner and paper towels. – Spread adhesive over the repair location on the
front side.
– Spray plastic primer evenly onto the repair
location. – Set using an infrared heater or in a drying oven.
– Cool the adhesive to room temperature to
prevent the adhesive being pulled off when
Preparation for bonding sanding, and to prevent the abrasive paper
becoming worn.
– The two-component adhesive is applied to the
cleaned and primed repair location using a hand
gun. Sanding
– Operating the gun lever pushes the resin and
hardener components from the double cartridge – NOTE: In the case of dry sanding, use an
into the attached emulsion tube. extraction unit and wear a dust mask.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
Sand down protruding adhesive using an orbital – The room temperature should be at least 15°C
sander. Abrasive paper: P120 - P220 grit. and the air should be as dry as possible.
– Re-work sags and curved areas manually. – NOTE: Fingerprints leave behind a film that
– Use an abrasive pad to roughen painted prevents a proper joint.
surfaces. The repair location must be thoroughly dry and
– Thoroughly clean the plastic part using plastic clean.
cleaner and paper towels. – Before the repair, the GRP part being repaired
– NOTE: Thoroughly dry out the plastic primer must be dried using an infrared heater or in a
(matt surface). drying oven.
Spray plastic primer for the subsequent 2K filler – In cases of large cracks and fractures, the
application thinly onto the repair areas and strength of the outer skin can be re-established
sanded-through areas. by backing with a reinforcement material.
Two-component filler application Required tools and auxiliary equipment
To prevent porosity at the edges and to smooth – Hacksaw (body saw) for separating cracks.
out uneven areas, it is advisable to apply 2K filler – Axial grinder, angle grinder or belt sander for
(MS, HS) with an elasticising additive. grinding out repair locations.
– After drying, cool the 2K filler to room – Orbital sander for grinding out and grinding
temperature and sand down using an orbital down the repair surface.
sander and fine abrasive paper. – Hand sanding block for grinding small surfaces.
– Re-work sags and curved areas manually (wet)
using fine abrasive paper.
– Check the contour of the repair location and
Grinding the repair location
re-work if the contours are uneven.
– Grind out the edge of the hole, in a V form and
– Perform painting in accordance with the flat, using an angle grinder - abrasive paper P80
manufacturer's instructions. - P120 grit.
– Remove layers of filler and paint.
GRP repairs – If cracks have formed, these are ground out at
the base of the crack by 3mm. This eliminates
any tension.
General
– Careful, flat grinding is important for the
GRP material is hard and brittle in its tensile subsequent adhesion of the repair material.
properties. Because of these material properties, – NOTE: The surface must be re-ground by hand.
cracks and fractures often result in cases of serious Grinding with the angle grinder creates heat that
damage. The stability and safety of GRP parts is causes a change in the surface structure of the
impaired if the glass fiber reinforcement is cracked. resin. This results in reduced adhesive
This must be replaced in cases of serious damage properties.
that affect the structure of the part. Minor damage
(such as abrasion, cracks up to 80mm, holes up
to approx. 60mm diameter, etc.) can be repaired
to a technically and visually perfect standard,
provided that the damage does not occur in heavily
used or hard-to-reach areas. To ensure excellent
repairs, observe the following points:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
GRP repair material Apply stopper
GRP repair components – The depression on the front side is filled with
polyester fiber stopper to achieve a smooth, flat
surface.
5 – Repeat the procedure if necessary.
1
2
Apply stopper
4 3 1 2
DEE0004059
Item Description
3
1 Polyester resin
2 Hardener DEE0004060
3 Glass fiber mats

Item Description
4 Scissors
1 GRP part being repaired
5 Brush
2 Polyester fiber stopper
3 Glass fiber insert
Apply polyester resin
– The polyester resin is mixed with hardener and Final application of stopper
applied thinly to the clean repair location with a
brush. – Re-create the surface contours by applying
stopper or polyester filler.
Insert the glass fiber mat

Grinding with the orbital sander
– Cut the glass fiber mat to size and insert it into
the applied polyester resin. – Sand down protruding polyester material using
– Applied more polyester resin over the glass fiber an orbital sander. Abrasive paper, P120 - P220
mat, and add a second or third mat if necessary. grit.
– NOTE: Completely soak the glass fiber mat in – The repair surface can be painted after grinding.
polyester resin. No air may be trapped in the
repair area. Safety measures
Apply polyester resin using a brush.
– Allow the polyester resin to dry at room – Polyester resin, adhesive, solvents and thinners
temperature. are inflammable and must be kept away from
naked fire or flames.
– Back larger cracks and fractures with
reinforcement material to restore the strength – Sawing and grinding operations must only be
of the outer skin. carried out in rooms equipped with extraction
systems.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
– If no rooms with extraction systems are
available, only use tools with extraction systems.
– Protective equipment such as gloves, protective
goggles, aprons and breathing masks are
essential.
For additional information, refer to
Section 501-25A [Body Repairs - General
Information] / 501-25B [Body Repairs - Noise,
Vibration and Harshness] / 501-25C [Body Repairs
- Plastic Repairs] / 501-25D [Body Repairs -
Paintless Dent Removal]. It is also important to
observe all applicable regulations, accident
prevention legislation, information sheets, safety
notices and guidelines for the processing of
adhesives containing isocyanate, polyester resin,
adhesives, solvent and thinners.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33917en
http://vnx.su
501-25D-1 Body Repairs - Paintless Dent Removal 501-25D-1
.
SECTION 501-25D Body Repairs - Paintless Dent
Removal
CONTENTS PAGE

Paintless Dent Removal..................................................................................................... 501-25D-2
General............................................................................................................................... 501-25D-2
Economic considerations.................................................................................................... 501-25D-2
Extent of the damage......................................................................................................... 501-25D-2
Pre-requirement for the repair............................................................................................ 501-25D-3
Repair procedure................................................................................................................ 501-25D-3
Repair tools/aids................................................................................................................. 501-25D-3
Repair Procedure............................................................................................................... 501-25D-3
Unstable pressure area...................................................................................................... 501-25D-4
Stable pressure area.......................................................................................................... 501-25D-4
Accessibility of individual bodywork components............................................................... 501-25D-5
Renewal of the corrosion protection................................................................................... 501-25D-6
Quality control..................................................................................................................... 501-25D-6
http://vnx.su
Paintless Dent Removal

General
Economic considerations
Small minor dents can be repaired without damage
to paintwork. The dent is worked from the inside – Whether it is economically worthwhile to carry
using special levering tools (pressure tools). The out paintless dent removal depends on:
pre-conditions are that the diagnosis is certain, the – The area and depth of the dent.
correct repair method is identified and that the
technician has enough experience in the use of – Access to the repair area.
the special tools and knowledge of the working – Rigidity of the repair area.
materials. – Suitability of the material
– This option is limited to those bodywork surfaces – The number of dents over a particular body
which are accessible from both sides. This panel area.
repair technique is seldom possible on double – Whether there is already any paint damage
skinned bodywork components or closed present
bodywork profiles. The same applies to edge
areas, beads and folds in bodywork components
which are very rigid. Extent of the damage
– Satisfactory results are only possible for minor
The repair method is suitable for dents up to
dents that are shallow and with a small
approx. 50 mm diameter.
deformation radius. This method is therefore
particularly suitable for damage arising from
hail, parking and transport.
Damage assessment according to the size of the dent
mm
10
20
50
DEE0004066
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33926en
http://vnx.su
Item Description over each other. The point where the lines
cross is the pressure point for the pressure
1 Centre of the dent tool.
2 Edge of the dent
Light reflection when pressing
Pre-requirement for the repair 1
The material at the centre of the dent must not

have stretched.
Repair procedure 2
– Diagnose the damaged area.

– Mark the dent.
DEE0004067
– Prepare the area to be repaired.
– Put the adjustable lamp in position.
Item Description
– Reshape the dent.
1 No pressure on the dent
– Renew the corrosion protection.
– Carry out quality control. 2 Pressure applied to the dent
5. Position the pressure tool
Repair tools/aids • Position the tip of the pressure tool on the
edge of the dent.
– Special dent removal levering tools • By moving back and forth with light pressure
– Adjustable lamp applied on the dent with the tip of the tool,
the reflected light shows the position of the
pressure tool.
Repair Procedure 6. Working principle while applying pressure
1. Decide on the repair method. • The operation concentrates on forming a half
circle, working chronologically.
2. Mark the dent
• To restore the surface, all that is needed is
NOTE: Do not use a pen containing solvent to work on one half of the dent.
(paint damage). • The unworked half of the dent restores on
• The dent is marked in the repair area to help its own, through tension produced by the
recognition. pressure.
3. Prepare the repair area
• It must be certain that the inside of the dent
is accessible. Repair openings must not be
made.
• Clean the bodywork in the damaged area.
Good visual checking is vital to success.
• Polish the repair surface if it is matt. The
repair procedure can only be checked exactly
if there is enough reflection of light.
4. Place the adjustable lamp in position.
• The adjustable lamp should be positioned
and adjusted so that the dent can be clearly
seen in the reflection on the paintwork (oval
shape).
• When pressure on the dent is increased the
oval shape changes into lines which cross
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33926en
http://vnx.su
Diagram Unstable pressure area
1 If large, relatively weak body areas are worked on,

1 2
2 the path of the pressure tool while pressure is
3
applied is correspondingly larger. The restoration
4 5 process takes longer.
Large area dent

6 7
DEE0004068
1
Item Description
1 Sequence of pressure 2
2 Starting position
NOTE: Never begin in the centre of the dent. If a DEE0004070
dent is worked from the centre first, the edge will
be lifted up and will remain visible as a high area Item Description
(material stretching). This lifted edge can only then
be restored by lengthy reworking. 1 Reforming path
2 Pressure tool
High edge
1 Stable pressure area

– NOTE: Work areas near internal reinforcing with
only light pressure, so that high areas are not
formed (material stretching).
Stable pressure bodywork areas with inner
2
braces have a much more stable surface than
weak pressure areas. Only short pressure
movements are required here because the steel
DEE0004069
of the bodywork is less sprung.
– Particular care must be taken with the pressure
Item Description procedure if tools with a small contact face are
used.
1 High edges
– Optical check:
2 Pressure tool – It is only possible completely to remove all
– Exception: remaining unevenness by making continual
visual checks of the surface using the
– Sharp edged dents with minimal material
adjustable lamp. In addition, towards the end
stretching are first worked on at the centre.
of the pressure procedure, the dent must be
– After pressing out the dent, slightly raised checked several times from different
areas can be seen. This is caused by the directions. To do this, change position by
excess steel in the centre of the dent, caused about 90°.
by material stretching.
– Use a plastic drift to even out the slightly
raised area.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33926en
http://vnx.su
Pressing out a dent near a brace – Check accessibility before starting repair work
if the dent is near the sliding roof.
– Repairs near inner braces are worked using the
1 2 special tools found in the tool kit.
– Separate the adhesive bead of the brace
using a metal spatula, so that the pressure
tool can be put in position.
Special lever for dents near inner braces.
4 3
DEE0004071
Item Description 1
1 Roof surface
2 Pressure tool
3 Adhesive bead
2
4 Roof brace DEE0004073
Item Description
Accessibility of individual bodywork
components 1 Contact point
2 Direction of movement
Roof area
Support (pivot) of the pressure tool using an Door area
S-shaped hook
– Dents in the upper half of the door can usually
be worked on without removing the inner trim.
– When the window is open, access is obtained
2 through the window cavity. A protective
assembly is inserted into the window cavity to
prevent damage to the window.
1 – The plastic wedge ensures access.
DEE0004072
Item Description
1 Pivoted using an S-hook
2 Pressure tool
– In order to make it possible to exert force in the
roof area, a pivot in the form of an S-hook must
be used.
– Only loosen the headlining locally, depending
on the number of dents and their location.
– Dents near interior components can be reached
by removing the component (interior lamp).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33926en
http://vnx.su
Equipment Renewal of the corrosion protection.
– All repair inner areas must be reworked, where
accessible the paintwork must be refinished.
2
– Clean the inner area with silicone remover.
1
– Prime and paint the inner repair area.
– Finally, spray in cavity protection where the
repair is not accessible.
Quality control
DEE0004074
– In order to achieve a repair quality that meets
production standards, the following points must
Item Description be observed:
1 Protective assembly – Check the repair area for unevenness. Do
this optically by looking at the surface from
2 Plastic wedge different angles.
– The pressure is applied in this case without use – Paint the repaired surface area, clean it and
of an additional support by simply turning the polish it if necessary.
bent pressure tool. – Check that the attached components and
Pressing out a dent through the window channel.
inner trim are seated correctly and are not
damaged.
DEE0004075
Hood
– The hood is moved into working position using

telescopic struts and held in position using the
"rubber cords".
– In the region of the braces the adhesive bead
must be partially opened using a metal spatula
to give access to the dent.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G33926en
http://vnx.su
501-26-1 and Tolerance Checks 501-26-1
.
SECTION 501-26 Body Repairs - Vehicle Specific
Information and Tolerance Checks
CONTENTS PAGE

Body and Frame................................................................................................................. 501-26-2
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Underbody Tolerance Check.............................................................................................. 501-26-10
Frame Tolerance Check..................................................................................................... 501-26-12
Body Tolerance Check........................................................................................................ 501-26-16
http://vnx.su
Body and Frame

Introduction made and assembled in such a way that individual
body panels can be replaced without problem.
The bodywork of this model is a completely new
Body components which are prone to deformation
development and comprises the following model
(e.g. front side member, A-pillar inner panel etc.)
variants:
are made of several individual parts which are
• 5-door version joined together. The majority of the welded joints
which may need to be repaired can be re-created
Construction features using resistance spot welding.
The front and rear side members, windshield Other changes relate to the increase in wheel base,
frames, doors and D-pillar inner reinforcement are overall length and vehicle height, deformation areas
made of thick walled body panels. Because of the on the front and rear side members and the front
shape of the individual components and the built-in and rear crash elements.
reinforcements, the bodywork is very resistant to
torsion. For the first time, body panels reformed Front crash element
from tailored blanks are integrated into the crash
and strength relevant areas. Because of this, the The front crash element consists of a steel
deformation performance of the chassis and the crossmember with two deformation elements
occupant protection are distinctly improved. welded onto it. The energy of an impact is
absorbed by the crossmember and is dissipated
Overall, the bodywork of this model proves to be through the deformation elements. It is attached
very easy to repair. The overall body structure is to the bodywork by threaded connections.
Crash element
x4
E119866
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Item Description of most load. Attachment to the crossmember and
to the upper side members is achieved by threaded
1 Retaining bolts connections. The hood lock panel supports a
2 Pre-determined folding points variety of other components (e.g. the radiator,
radiator fan and hood lock). Minor damage can be
3 Threaded bore for the towing eye repaired using the applicable plastic repair process.
Hood lock panel

NOTE: If there are penetrating cracks, partial
breaking away of material or part of it is missing,
The hood lock panel is made of plastic and is a new hood lock panel must be installed.
reinforced with high-resistance foam in the areas
Front module
E119865
(deformation area). A deformation area has no

Item Description
inner reinforcement. Sectional replacement is
1 Hood lock panel possible if the damage does not extend past the
deformation area (intentional yield points). If there
2 Crash element
is deformation inside the engine compartment, the
In the case of repairs, the front module, consisting front section can be replaced individually.
of the crash element and the hood lock panel, can
be detached as a unit together with the
components which are bolted to it.
Front side member

In contrast to the previous model, the side member
is made of several parts, and the inner sides are
made of tailored blanks. If the frontal damage
extends past the crash element, the impact energy
is absorbed by the side members and dissipated
in the area of the intentional yield points
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Front side member Rear crossmember
The rear crossmember is secured to the side
2 members by threaded connections. Because the
1
crossmember is curved, impact energy is more
easily converted into deformation energy. For light
impacts this prevents deformation of the side
members and therefore of the vehicle body also.
Rear side member

If a heavier rear impact occurs, in addition to the
crossmember, the ends of the side members are
1
deformed. The remaining energy is dissipated in
E119867
a controlled manner in the area of the intentional
yield points. Sectional replacement is possible if
Item Description
the damage does not extend past the deformation
1 Pre-determined folding points areas.
2 Laser butt weld
Rear side member
1 3 4
E54679
Item Description NVH measures

1 Left-hand side member In order to prevent air conduction of noise to the
2 Laser butt weld vehicle interior, three NVH elements are installed
on each side of the vehicle, clipped to the vehicle
3 Pre-determined folding points bodywork. When carrying out repair work, either
4 Right-hand side member the original NVH elements must be put back in
position or new ones installed. On vehicles with a
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
sliding roof, the opening must be left in the A-pillar sure that the insulation material installed in
NVH element for the water drain hose. production is not damaged by cutting or sanding
tools when cutting out bodywork parts.
NOTE: Gases harmful to health will be released if
the insulation material is heated too much. Make
NVH measures
1
3
2
4
E121583
Item Description Tailored blanks

1 C-pillar inner NVH element By employing a combination of materials with
2 C-pillar outer NVH element different thicknesses and properties, tailored blanks
make it possible to produce an exact match to the
3 A-pillar NVH element required strength and rigidity in different areas
4 Opening for sliding roof water drain hose within one bodywork component. The number of
steel panels can be decreased by installing tailored
blanks and so the weight of the bodywork can be
reduced.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Tailored blanks with laser welds
5 4 3
E121615
Item Description High-strength steel parts

1 Front side member Reinforced high-strength steel parts are used on
2 Roof frame all Fiesta models.
3 Rear right-hand side member NOTE: The working methods given in Part I of the
Body Repair Manual (501-25A) must be observed
4 Rear left-hand side member in all repair work.
5 Rocker panel reinforcement
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Overview of parts, front end
2
1
1
1 1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2 1
3
1
3
2
1
2
2
2 1
2
2
1
1 2
2
E121616
Item Description
1 Galvanised steel panels
2 High strength and galvanised steel panels
3 High-strength low alloy steel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Overview of parts, floor pan
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
E54680
Item Description
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
Overview of parts, side view
2
2
3
2 1
1 1 1
3
1 1
1
3 1
3
2
2
1
2 1
2
1 1
1
2 2 1
3
1
2
3 1
2
3
2
1
2
2 1 2
2 2
E121673
Item Description
3 High-strength steel parts
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225808en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Underbody Tolerance Check

made using a symmetrically adjusted
1. Body frame dimensions
measuring gauge.
• A tolerance of ± 3 mm applies to all • The measurement points were measured
measurements given. All detailed illustrations with assemblies removed and with the
correspond to the left-hand side of the exception of oval bodywork holes, refer to
vehicle. the centre of the hole.
• All measurements have been taken from • The measurement points for oval bodywork
production data and are the length of the holes relate to the foremost position of the
straight line between the measurement curve (as seen from the driver's seat).
points. All measurements can therefore be
mm
3 5
6
4
1 7
2
9
8
11
10 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1298
1298
1298
1170
954
980
980
934
440
630
998
954
227 276
907 713
1537 902
1581
1669
1956
2200
2402
E0032550
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225810en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
2. Body frame dimensions made using a symmetrically adjusted
measuring gauge.
• A tolerance of ± 3 mm applies to all
measurements given. All detailed illustrations • The measurement points were measured
correspond to the left-hand side of the with assemblies removed and with the
vehicle. exception of oval bodywork holes, refer to
the centre of the hole.
• All measurements have been taken from
production data and are the length of the • The measurement points for oval bodywork
straight line between the measurement holes relate to the foremost position of the
points. All measurements can therefore be curve (as seen from the driver's seat).
mm
3
5
4
1 6
2
9
8 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
E0032551
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225810en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Frame Tolerance Check

• 1 -3 = 1,378 mm; 2 -3 = 1,416 mm; 4 -5 =
1. Body dimensions, vehicle front
1,462 mm; 4 -6 = 1,524 mm; 7 -8 = 1,157
• All dimensions with tolerance ± 3 mm. All mm; 8 -9 = 473 mm; 10 -11 = 1,433 mm.
dimensions were determined from the centre • Measuring point 11 is measured in the curve
of the hole or panel edge using a and corresponds to the greatest distance to
symmetrically adjusted measuring gauge. the opposite measuring point.
4 5
2 3
7 8 9
6
10
11
11
10 7 9
3
4
8
2
5
1
6
E0032552
of the hole or panel edge using a

2. Body dimensions, side view (5-door version)
symmetrically adjusted measuring gauge.
• All dimensions with tolerance ± 3 mm. All • 12 - 13 = 1,290 mm; 14 - 15 = 840 mm; 14 -
dimensions were determined from the centre 17 = 824 mm; 16 - 17 = 876 mm; 18 - 19 =
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225813en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
1,105 mm; 20 - 21 = 720 mm; 22 - 23 = 964 • Measuring points 12, 19 and 22 are
mm. measured in the curve and correspond to the
largest distance to the opposite measuring
point.
12 15
16
13
14
17
20
21
18
19
23
22 13 22 19
16
15
14
21
20
23
12 17 18
E0032553

3. Body dimensions, rear view (5-door version)
• All dimensions with tolerance ± 3 mm. All • 24 -25 = 1,139 mm; 26 -27 = 1,086 mm; 28
dimensions were determined from the centre -29 = 818 mm.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225813en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
24 28
25
26 27
28
29
25
26 27
24
29
E0032554

4. Body dimensions, interior (5-door version)
• All dimensions with tolerance ± 3 mm. All • 30 -31 = 1,349 mm; 32 -33 = 1,343 mm; 34
dimensions were determined from the centre -35 = 1,332 mm.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225813en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
32 33
30 31 34
35
30 31
32 33
34 35
E0032555
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225813en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
Body Tolerance Check

• The gap dimension given must be the same
1. Body gap dimensions
along the whole length of the gap.
E121939
• The gap dimension given must be the same

2. Body gap dimensions
along the whole length of the gap.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225814en
http://vnx.su
GENERAL PROCEDURES
7.0 2.0
3.0 0.8
6.0 1.5
4.0 2.0
4.0 1.0 15.0 2.0

2.0 1.5
1.0 1.0
6.0 1.5
12.5 2.0 3.5 1.0
0 0.5
0
E121940
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225814en
http://vnx.su
501-27-1 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs 501-27-1
.
SECTION 501-27 Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
CONTENTS PAGE

Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement............................................................... (44 277 4) 501-27-2
Front Side Member Extension............................................................................................ 501-27-3
Front Side Member and Fender Apron Panel LH............................................................... 501-27-5
Front Side Member Section................................................................................................ 501-27-7
http://vnx.su
Fender Apron Panel Reinforcement(44 277 4)

2. Front cut line.
Materials
Name Specification
Apron panel reinforce- 1
ment 2
Removal
1. General Notes.
• The hood, windshield, doors and fenders are
already removed before repair work starts.
E0032565
• Necessary removal work: water trap cover
and wheelhouse cover.
2. Apron panel reinforcement 2. Apron panel reinforcement
1. Preliminary separating cut. 1. Resistance spot weld

2. Mill out the spot welds. 2. Puddle welding
3. Mill out the spot welds (two panel 3. Continuous MIG weld seam.
thicknesses).
4. Grind out the weld seam 3
5. Grind out the spot welds. 1
2
4 2 3
5 1 2 3 1
E0032566
4 2
E0032564
Installation
NOTE: Partial replacement of the apron panel is
possible, depending on the damage. The
instructions concerning welding equipment given
in Section 501-25A must be observed before
resistance spot welding body panels with a total
thickness of 3 mm and greater.
1. Cut lines for partial replacement
1. Rear cut line.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204056en
http://vnx.su
Front Side Member Extension

General Equipment 2. Mill out the spot welds (two panel
thicknesses).
Measurement or alignment angle system
Materials
Name Specification
Side member front
extension
Bulkhead reinforcement 1 1
2
Removal 1
2
1. General Notes. E0032594
• The front side member with apron panel and

apron panel reinforcement are already 4. Bulkhead reinforcement
removed before the repair work starts. 1. Mill out the spot welds.
• Necessary removal work: Facia crash 2. Mill out the spot welds (two panel
padding and seats. thicknesses).
• Fold back the carpets and move the wiring
back away from the working area.
2. Side member
1
• Mill out the spot welds.
2 1
E0032595
Installation
E0032593 1. Side member
• Drill holes for puddle welding (10 mm
3. Bulkhead reinforcement diameter).
1. Mill out the spot welds.
E0032596
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204058en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: : before welding, secure the side member • Puddle welding
using the measurement or alignment angle system.
2. Side member
• Puddle welding
E0032600
E0032597
3. Bulkhead reinforcement
• Drill holes for puddle welding (10 mm
diameter).
E0032598
• Puddle welding
E0032599
5. Side member
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204058en
http://vnx.su
Front Side Member and Fender Apron Panel LH

General Equipment • Mill out the spot welds (two panel
thicknesses).
Materials
Name Specification
Side member with apron
panel
Apron panel reinforce-
ment
Removal
E0032568
1. General Notes.
• Fenders, hood, doors and apron panel 4. Side member with apron panel
reinforcement are already removed before 1. Mill out the spot welds.
repair work starts.
2. Grind out the spot welds.
2. Side member with apron panel
1. Separating cut.
2. Mill out the spot welds (two panel 1
thicknesses).
1
2
E0032569
3
Installation
3 NOTE: The instructions concerning welding

E0032567 equipment given in Section 501-25A must be
observed before resistance spot welding body
panels with a total thickness of 3 mm and greater.
1. Drill holes for puddle welding.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204059en
http://vnx.su
2. Mill out spot welds (diameter: 10 mm) • Puddle welding
E0032570 E0032573
2. Side member with apron panel 5. Bulkhead reinforcement

1. Mill out spot welds (diameter: 10 mm). • Puddle welding
E0032574
1
E0032571

• Puddle welding
E0032572
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204059en
http://vnx.su
Front Side Member Section

General Equipment • Separating cut.
Materials
Name Specification
Outer side member
Inner side member
Crossmember retaining
flange
E0032576
Removal
1. General Notes. 3. Outer side member
1. Right-hand side cut line. 1. Separating cut.
2. Left-hand side cut line. 2. Mill out the spot welds.
• The fine cut lines are not the same on the
right-hand and left-hand sides.
• Hood lock panel, front crash element, hood,
and fender are already removed before repair
work starts.
1
2
2
1
E0032577
1 2
Installation
1. Inner side member
E0032575
• Continuous MIG weld seam.
NOTE: Separate the side member completely on

the inside along the fine cut line.
2. Inner side member
E0032578
2. Outer side member

1. Resistance spot weld
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204141en
http://vnx.su
2. Continuous MIG weld seam.
1
E0032579
NOTE: : Before welding, secure the retaining flange

for the cross member using the measurement or
alignment angle system and the installed hood
closing panel.
3. Inner crossmember retaining flange
• Intermittent MIG weld seam.
E0032580
4. Outer crossmember retaining flange

• Intermittent MIG weld seam.
E0032581
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204141en
http://vnx.su
501-28-1 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs 501-28-1
.
SECTION 501-28 Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-28-2

Roof Panel.......................................................................................................................... 501-28-3
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants, sealants and adhesives
Part number Specification
PU glass adhesive (150 ml) 1 102 109 WSK-M11 P57-A1
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G251655en
http://vnx.su
Roof Panel
• Apply PU glass adhesive.
Materials
Name Specification
Roof
Removal
1. General Notes.
• Necessary removal work: windshield, tailgate,
headliner and interior trim.
2. NOTE: Heat the bonded areas on the roof
panel before removal.
Roof
E0032562
2. Roof
1. Offer up the roof and drill holes for puddle
welding. Then puddle weld.
E0032561
Installation
NOTE: The instructions concerning welding
equipment given in Section 501-25A must be
1. Roof
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204073en
http://vnx.su
2 2
E0032563
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204073en
http://vnx.su
501-29-1 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs 501-29-1
.
SECTION 501-29 Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-29-2

A-Pillar Outer Panel Section and Reinforcement............................................................... 501-29-3
B-Pillar and Reinforcement — 5-Door................................................................................ 501-29-7
Rocker Panel...................................................................................................................... 501-29-11
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement.................................................................................... 501-29-12
Front Door Skin Panel........................................................................................................ 501-29-14
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Metal adhesive kit, 2-component 1 203 241 WSK-M4 G200 A/B
Clinched flange sealant 1 136 479 WSK-M4 G245-B
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G251656en
http://vnx.su
A-Pillar Outer Panel Section and Reinforcement

General Equipment 4. Warm the area (about 170° C) and release
the NVH elements.
Beam compasses
Materials
Name Specification 1
A-pillar outer panel 2
A-pillar reinforcement
A-pillar inner panel
Bulkhead reinforcement
2
Removal 2
2
1. General Notes.
• The apron panel reinforcement and inner 4
reinforcement of the A-pillar are already
removed before the repair starts.
• Necessary removal work: door, hood,
windshield, facia crash padding, A-pillar trim 1
and rocker panel trim. 2
NOTE: If the inner and outer A-pillar reinforcements
are being completely replaced, drill out the spot
welds on the A-pillar outer panel by two panel 3
thicknesses. 2
E0032582
2. A-pillar outer panel
1. Separating cut. 3. A-pillar inner reinforcement
3. Grind out the spot welds. 1. Mill out the spot welds.
2. Warm the area (about 170° C) and release
the NVH elements.
1 1
E0032583
4. A-pillar inner reinforcement with rocker panel

reinforcement
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204074en
http://vnx.su
3. Mill out the spot welds (two panel • Grind out the weld seams.
thicknesses).
4. Separating cut.
5. Remove the NVH element.
1 1
5
3
1
4
E0032585
1 2
E0032584
Installation
5. A-pillar inner reinforcement with rocker panel equipment given in Section 501-25A must be
reinforcement observed before resistance spot welding body
1. Inner A-pillar with rocker panel reinforcement
• Drill a hole for puddle welding (diameter: 10
mm).
E0032586
2. Inner A-pillar with rocker panel reinforcement

2. Puddle welding
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204074en
http://vnx.su
3. Continuous MIG weld seam. • Intermittent MIG weld seam.
4. Apply PU glass adhesive to the NVH element
and install it.
1
2
1
1
4
1
1
3
E0032588
1
E0032587
4. A-pillar inner reinforcement
• Drill holes for puddle welding (diameter: 10
3. Inner A-pillar with rocker panel reinforcement mm).
E0032589
5. A-pillar inner reinforcement

1. Apply PU glass adhesive to the NVH
element.
2. Puddle welding
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204074en
http://vnx.su
3. Resistance spot weld 4. Continuous MIG weld seam.
3 4
3
3 2
2
4
2
2
1
1
3
2 4
2
2
4
E0032590 E0032592

1. Separating cut.
2. Drill holes for puddle welding (diameter: 10
mm).
E0032591

element.
3. Puddle welding
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204074en
http://vnx.su
B-Pillar and Reinforcement — 5-Door

General Equipment 3. Grind out the spot welds.
Materials
1
Name Specification
20 mm
B-pillar outer panel
B-Pillar reinforcement
B-pillar inner panel
Removal 2
2
1. General Notes.
• The front door, rear door and rear door
hinges are already removed before the repair 2
starts.
• Necessary removal work: seat and rocker
panel trim.
• Fold back the carpets and move the wiring 1 1
harness back away from the working area.
• It is not possible to perform a partial
replacement in the upper area of the B-pillar
reinforcement because of the reinforcements
which are inside. 3
E0032601
• When the outer and inner reinforcements are
being completely replaced, the spot welds in
the region of the door seal must be drilled out 3. B-Pillar reinforcement
as far as the inner panel. 1. Separating cut.
• Make the front cut line on the rocker panel far
enough forward to allow access to the B-pillar
inner panel (see weld flange).
2. B-pillar outer panel
1. Separating cut.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204077en
http://vnx.su
2. Mill out the spot welds. 2. Mill out the spot welds.
1
1
70 mm
125 mm
2 2
E0032602 E0032603
4. B-pillar inner panel Installation

1. Separating cut.
1. B-pillar inner panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204077en
http://vnx.su
2. Resistance spot weld 2. Resistance spot weld
1
1
2
2
2 2
E0032604 E0032605
2. B-Pillar reinforcement 3. B-pillar outer panel

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204077en
http://vnx.su
• Drill holes for puddle welding (8 mm 3. Puddle welding
diameter).
2 2
1 2
1
2
E0032607
E0032606
4. B-pillar outer panel

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204077en
http://vnx.su
Rocker Panel
General Equipment • Drill holes for puddle welding.
Measuring stick
Materials
Name Specification
Rocker panel
Removal
1. General Notes
• The fenders, doors and door hinges are E0032609
already removed before repair work starts.
• Required disassembly operations: Rocker 2. Rocker panel
panel trim, front and rear seats.
• Fold back the carpets and move the wiring 1. Continuous MIG weld seam.
harness out of the working area. 2. Apply 2-component metal adhesive just
before installing the new part and then clinch
2. NOTE: Make the cut location on the C-pillar the wheel arch flange.
a maximum of 200 mm above the edge of the 3. Resistance spot weld.
rocker panel, to prevent damage to the
4. Puddle welding.
underlying NVH element.
Rocker panel
1. Cut points. 1 3
2. Grind out the wheel arch joint. 1
3 1
4
3 3 2
1 4
1
4 1 3
200 mm
E0032610
4 4 2
3
E0032608
Installation
NOTE: Before resistance spot welding of body
panels with a total panel thickness of 3 mm and
greater, the welding equipment instructions
contained in chapter 501-25A must be followed.
1. Rocker panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204075en
http://vnx.su
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement

General Equipment • Mill out the spot welds.
Materials
Name Specification
Rocker panel inner rein-
forcement
Removal
1. General Instructions
E0032651
• The A-pillar outer panel, A-pillar
reinforcement, B-pillar with reinforcement, 4. Rocker panel inner reinforcement
side panel, wheel house with reinforcement
and inner side panel are already removed • Grind out the spot welds.
before the repair starts.
• Sectional replacement is possible, depending
on the damage.
2. Rocker panel inner reinforcement
1. Front separation area (only for sectional
replacement).
2. Rear separation area (only for sectional
replacement).
E0032652
Installation
2 1
E0032650 1. Rocker panel inner reinforcement
• Drill holes for puddle welding.
E0032653
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204076en
http://vnx.su
• Resistance spot welding.
E0032654

• Puddle weld.
E0032655
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204076en
http://vnx.su
Front Door Skin Panel

Removal
• Front door window glass,
1. Replacement parts.
• Door skin panel.
Door Window Glass (501-11 Glass,
2. General Notes. Frames and Mechanisms, Removal and
1. Items to be removed before repair: Installation).
• Door. • Front door latch.
• Front door trim panel, 3. NOTE: Before opening the door skin panel
flange, remove the clinched flange protection
using a plaited wire brush.
Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim
and Ornamentation, Removal and Door skin panel.
Installation). 1. Open the clinched flange's.
• Exterior mirror, 2. Detach the adhesive bond.
For additional information, refer to: Exterior
Mirror (501-09 Rear View Mirrors,
1
2
1 1
E128202
Installation • Apply two-component metal adhesive in the

clinch flange areas.
1. Door skin panel preparation.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1296098en
http://vnx.su
E128203
3. Door skin panel.

2. Door frame panel preparation.
• Clinch the flange's and apply clinched flange
1. Apply two-component metal adhesive.
protection.
2. Apply anti-flutter material.
2
E128204
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1296098en
http://vnx.su
E128201
E128205
NOTE: Fix tape to avoid rust and corrosion.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1296098en
http://vnx.su
501-30-1 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs 501-30-1
.
SECTION 501-30 Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-30-2

Quarter Panel RH............................................................................................................... 501-30-3
Inner Quarter Panel and Wheelhouse................................................................................ 501-30-5
Water Drain Panel Reinforcement...................................................................................... 501-30-8
Back Panel.......................................................................................................................... 501-30-10
Rear Floor Panel................................................................................................................. 501-30-11
Rear Floor Panel Section................................................................................................... 501-30-13
Rear Outer Wheelhouse Half............................................................................................. 501-30-14
Rear Side Member Section................................................................................................ 501-30-16
Quarter/Side Panel Rear Section RH................................................................................. 501-30-17
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Metal adhesive kit, 2-component 1 203 241 WSK-M4 G200 A/B
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G251657en
http://vnx.su
Quarter Panel RH
3. Quarter panel
Materials
Name Specification
Quarter panel
Removal
1. General Notes
• The door and tailgate are already removed
before repair work starts.
• Required disassembly operations: Bumper,
rear lamp, weatherstrip, inner trims and side
window.
• Depending on the extent of the damage, the
forced air extraction gusset should also be
replaced.
2. Quarter panel
1. Cut points.
4. Grind down one panel thickness at the wheel
arch edge.
5. Heat the area (approx. 170° C) and release
the NVH elements.
E0032616
Installation
1 NOTE: Before resistance spot welding of body
2 panels with a total panel thickness of 3 mm and
1 greater, the welding equipment instructions
contained in chapter 501-25A must be followed.
1. Quarter panel
2
5 1
4
3
E0032617
E0032615
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204078en
http://vnx.su
2. Quarter panel • Puddle welding.
1. Apply 2-component metal adhesive to the
clinched flange and clinch the wheel arch
flange.
element.
4. Resistance spot weld.
5. Puddle welding.
3
4
3
5 4
5 E0032616
2 3
1
E0032618
3. Quarter panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204078en
http://vnx.su
Inner Quarter Panel and Wheelhouse

General Equipment 2. Mill out the spot welds.
Materials
Name Specification 180 mm
Inner quarter panel with
wheelhouse
Wheelhouse reinforce-
ment
NVH element
Removal
1. General notes 1
• Quarter panel, back panel, lamp mounting 2
panel and water drain panel are already
removed before the start of repairs.
• Necessary removal work: side panel trim.
• Reposition the carpeting and the wiring away
from the working area.
NOTE: When separating the side panel, do not
exceed the maximum displacement of the cut line 2
in relation to the roof edge. E0032645
2. Inner quarter panel reinforcement

1. Separating cut. 3. Inner side panel with reinforcement
1. Separating cut.
2. Cut location (two panel thicknesses).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204079en
http://vnx.su
3. Mill out the spot welds. 1. Drill holes for puddle welding.
1 2 310 mm
E0032648
2. Inner quarter panel

3
2. Resistance spot welding.
3. Puddle weld.
1
3
3
E0032646 1
1
4. Inner quarter panel reinforcement 2

1. Separating cut.
2 3
3 1
2
2
E0032647
2
E0032649
Installation
3. Inner quarter panel reinforcement
1. Inner quarter panel 1. Apply PU glass adhesive to the NVH
element.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204079en
http://vnx.su
4. Puddle weld.
3
3
4
E0032628
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204079en
http://vnx.su
Water Drain Panel Reinforcement

Materials
Name Specification
Water drain panel rein-
forcement
1
Removal
1. General Notes.
• Side panel and lamp mounting panel and
back panel with reinforcement are already
removed before the start of repairs.
• The cut may vary depending on damage.
2. Water drain panel reinforcement
2
E0032631
E0032630 Installation
3. Water drain panel reinforcement NOTE: The instructions concerning welding

1. Separating cut. observed before resistance spot welding body
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204080en
http://vnx.su
E0032631

• Resistance spot weld
E0032630
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204080en
http://vnx.su
Back Panel
Materials
Name Specification
Back panel
Removal
• Necessary removal work: rear panel trim.
2. NOTE: Do not damage the weld flanges
remaining on the bodywork. E0032621
Back panel
1. Preliminary separating cut. 2. Back panel
2. Grind out the spot welds. • Puddle weld.
1
2 2
3 3 E0032622
E0032619
3. Back panel
3. Back panel
E0032623
E0032620
Installation
1. Back panel
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204082en
http://vnx.su
Rear Floor Panel

General Equipment 4. Luggage compartment floor panel
Measurement or alignment angle system • Grind out the spot welds.
Materials
Name Specification
Luggage compartment
floor panel
Spare wheel retainer
Removal
1. General Instructions E0032640
• The tailgate and rear panel with gussets are
already removed before the start of repairs.
• Necessary removal work: rear seat, luggage
Installation
compartment carpet, side panel trim left and NOTE: The new part overlaps in the connection
right. area at the front by 10 mm. To install it, because
2. Luggage compartment floor panel of space limitations, cut the left-hand part panel
and re-install separately. The instructions
1. Preliminary separating cut.
concerning welding equipment given in Section
501-25A must be observed before resistance spot
welding body panels with a total thickness of 3 mm
and greater.
1. Luggage compartment floor panel
2. Exact separating cut.
E0032656
1
1 1
3. Luggage compartment floor panel 2
1. Exact separating cut.
E0032641
1
3 3 1. Continuous MIG weld seam.
2
2 2
E0032639
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204083en
http://vnx.su
2. Intermittent MIG weld seam.
1 2 1
E0032642

1. Puddle weld.
1 1
1
2 2
2
E0032643

E0032644
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204083en
http://vnx.su
Rear Floor Panel Section

Materials Installation
Name Specification 1. Right-hand rear floor panel
Rear floor panel • Drill holes for puddle welding.
Removal
1. General Notes
• Tailgate, back panel, rear crossmember,
quarter panel and lamp mounting panel
reinforcement are already removed before
the start of repairs.
• Required removal operations: Interior trim.
• Fold back the carpets out of the working
area. E0032637
2. Left-hand rear floor panel

1. Preliminary cut location. 2. Rear floor panel
2. Mill out the spot welds. 1. Continuous MIG weld.
3. Mill out the spot welds from below 2. Resistance spot weld.
3. Puddle weld.
1
3 3
4
1
2
2
1 1
E0032635
E0032638
3. Right-hand rear floor panel

1. Preliminary cut location.
3. Mill out the spot welds from below
3
1
1
E0032636
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204084en
http://vnx.su
Rear Outer Wheelhouse Half

3. Wheelhouse outer half
Materials
1. Separating cut.
Name Specification
Wheelhouse outer half
Wheelhouse reinforce-
ment
NVH element
Removal 1 1
• side panel, back panel, lamp mounting panel
and lamp mounting panel reinforcement are
already removed before the start of repairs.
NOTE: Make the separating cut on the wheel
house reinforcement offset from the wheel house
outer halves.
2. Wheelhouse reinforcement
1. Separating cut.
2. Mill out the spot welds. 1
3. Warm the area (to about 170° C) and release 2
the NVH elements.
2
E0032625
1
Installation
2 observed before resistance spot welding body
2
2
E0032624
E0032626
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204139en
http://vnx.su
2. Wheelhouse outer half 4. Puddle weld.
3. Puddle weld.
2
3
1 1
3
2
1
3 4
E0032628
E0032627

1. Glue the NVH element in place with PU glass
adhesive.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204139en
http://vnx.su
Rear Side Member Section

General Equipment Installation
1. NOTE: The instructions concerning welding
Materials equipment given in Section 501-25A must be
observed before resistance spot welding
Name Specification body panels with a total thickness of 3 mm
Rear side member and greater.
Side member
Removal • Continuous MIG weld seam.
1. General Notes.
• The luggage compartment floor (part for
partial replacement), back panel, forced air
extraction gusset and side panel are already
removed before the repair work starts.
• The separating cut may vary on the
right-hand side, depending on the damage.
2. Left-hand side member
• Separating cut.
E0032632
E0032632
3. Right-hand side member

• Possible separating cuts.
E0032633
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G204086en
http://vnx.su
Quarter/Side Panel Rear Section RH

3. Quarter panel and quarter panel
1. Replacement parts
reinforcement extension
• Quarter panel sectional part
1. Cut point.
• Luggage compartment water drain panel
• Quarter panel reinforcement extension
Removal 1
NOTE: Sectional repair of the rear right quarter

panel can be performed with the back panel both
installed and removed. In the operational procedure
described here, the back panel has already been
removed.
1. General notes 2
• Required removal operations: wheelhouse
trim panel, rear lamp, rear bumper, quarter E50984
panel trim.
• Move the carpeting and the wiring away from 4. Quarter panel and luggage compartment
the working area. water drain panel
2. Overview of repair • Mill out the spot welds.
1. Quarter panel sectional repair.
2. Luggage compartment water drain panel.
3. Quarter panel reinforcement extension.
2 1
3
E50985
Installation
E50983
1. Quarter panel reinforcement extension
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G410694en
http://vnx.su
1. Drill holes for puddle welding. 3. Puddle weld.
2. Puddle weld.
3
1
2 1
3
E50986
2. Quarter panel
3
E50988
4. Quarter panel and luggage compartment

water drain panel
E50987 • Puddle weld.
3. Quarter panel and luggage compartment

water drain panel
1. Continuous MIG weld (butt weld).
E50989
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G410694en
http://vnx.su
501-36-1 Paint - General Information 501-36-1
. PAGE 1 OF 3
SECTION 501-36 Paint - General Information
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 501-36-4

Description and Usage of Paint Literature.......................................................................... 501-36-5
Symbols.............................................................................................................................. 501-36-6
General............................................................................................................................... 501-36-6
Hazardous materials designations..................................................................................... 501-36-6
Instructions on measures to be taken for personal protection............................................ 501-36-8
Icons................................................................................................................................... 501-36-8
Health and Safety Precautions........................................................................................... 501-36-11
General instructions for the paint shop and handling paint materials................................. 501-36-11
Fire Danger and Fire Control.............................................................................................. 501-36-11
Personal protection............................................................................................................. 501-36-12
Environmental Regulations................................................................................................. 501-36-14
Waste disposal in the repair paint shop.............................................................................. 501-36-14
The new VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) solvent regulation ...................................... 501-36-14
Factory Paint Application.................................................................................................... 501-36-15
Painting General................................................................................................................. 501-36-15
Painting Purpose................................................................................................................ 501-36-15
General fundamentals of paint technology......................................................................... 501-36-16
Contents of Paint................................................................................................................ 501-36-16
Dry-up of Paint.................................................................................................................... 501-36-18
Paints for Automobiles........................................................................................................ 501-36-20
Painting Methods................................................................................................................ 501-36-23
The structure of an original paint finish .............................................................................. 501-36-25
Painting Processes on Production Line.............................................................................. 501-36-26
Painting process and corrosion protection......................................................................... 501-36-28
Colored fillers applied in production................................................................................... 501-36-29
Paintwork Defects and Damage......................................................................................... 501-36-30
Claims on Pre-paint condition............................................................................................. 501-36-30
Diagnosis and Damage Assessment.................................................................................. 501-36-32
Paint damage guide............................................................................................................ 501-36-32
Paint damage caused by environmental factors................................................................ 501-36-32
Mechanical damage........................................................................................................... 501-36-36
Damage due to corrosion................................................................................................... 501-36-36
Damage caused by faults in treatment............................................................................... 501-36-36
Tools and Equipment for Paint Repairs.............................................................................. 501-36-46
Compressor........................................................................................................................ 501-36-46
Spray Gun - Component..................................................................................................... 501-36-51
Spray Gun – Airflow Control............................................................................................... 501-36-53
Spray Gun - Fluid Control................................................................................................... 501-36-54
Spray Gun - Atomization.................................................................................................... 501-36-55
Filler and spray guns.......................................................................................................... 501-36-56
Hand and machine sanding tools....................................................................................... 501-36-60
http://vnx.su
. PAGE 2 OF 3
Polishing and finishing tools............................................................................................... 501-36-62
Infrared drying technology.................................................................................................. 501-36-63
Air dryers............................................................................................................................ 501-36-64
Paint mixing system............................................................................................................ 501-36-64
Painting cabin..................................................................................................................... 501-36-64
Other Equipments and tools............................................................................................... 501-36-64
Refinishing Materials.......................................................................................................... 501-36-66
Stopper materials............................................................................................................... 501-36-66
Primers............................................................................................................................... 501-36-68
HS primer filler and HS tinted filler..................................................................................... 501-36-68
Paint................................................................................................................................... 501-36-69
Additional Materials............................................................................................................ 501-36-71
Adhesive sealants.............................................................................................................. 501-36-71
Underbody protection......................................................................................................... 501-36-71
Paint additives ................................................................................................................... 501-36-72
Additive materials............................................................................................................... 501-36-74
Paint Repairs...................................................................................................................... 501-36-75
General information............................................................................................................ 501-36-75
Primer Surfacer Painting.................................................................................................... 501-36-75
Preparation for Top Coat Painting...................................................................................... 501-36-79
Top Coat Painting............................................................................................................... 501-36-85
Minor Paint Repair Working Exercise ................................................................................ 501-36-94
Top coat application............................................................................................................ 501-36-96
Repair stages for repair painting........................................................................................ 501-36-97
Polish.................................................................................................................................. 501-36-98
Aids..................................................................................................................................... 501-36-99
Painting Plastic Parts.......................................................................................................... 501-36-100
General............................................................................................................................... 501-36-100
Plastic groups..................................................................................................................... 501-36-100
Painting new components.................................................................................................. 501-36-101
Unknown primer................................................................................................................. 501-36-101
Paint faults on plastic substrates........................................................................................ 501-36-102
Paint Repair Process.......................................................................................................... 501-36-102
Spot Repairs....................................................................................................................... 501-36-106
General............................................................................................................................... 501-36-106
Before Starting Paint Repair............................................................................................... 501-36-107
Repair Painting................................................................................................................... 501-36-109
Repair process................................................................................................................... 501-36-118
Dirt inclusions..................................................................................................................... 501-36-120
Corrosion Prevention.......................................................................................................... 501-36-121
General............................................................................................................................... 501-36-121
Operations after painting.................................................................................................... 501-36-121
Definition of the degree of rust........................................................................................... 501-36-121
Color Identification and Chromatics.................................................................................... 501-36-123
Basic color theory............................................................................................................... 501-36-123
Metallic and pearl pigments................................................................................................ 501-36-127
Colorimetry......................................................................................................................... 501-36-128
Characteristics of Primary Colors....................................................................................... 501-36-129
Color Matching Equipment................................................................................................. 501-36-131
Color Mixing Work.............................................................................................................. 501-36-133
Color codes and their determination .................................................................................. 501-36-136
Matching tinted filler to the color code ............................................................................... 501-36-138
Color Influencing Factors.................................................................................................... 501-36-138
Tips and Tricks.................................................................................................................... 501-36-141
Comparing paint structures................................................................................................ 501-36-141
Etching substrate................................................................................................................ 501-36-141
http://vnx.su
. PAGE 3 OF 3
Masking Process................................................................................................................ 501-36-141
Methods of Masking........................................................................................................... 501-36-144
Color shade problems........................................................................................................ 501-36-152
Isopropanol and water........................................................................................................ 501-36-152
Temperature reduction spray.............................................................................................. 501-36-152
Paint plane.......................................................................................................................... 501-36-152
Shading.............................................................................................................................. 501-36-152
Sanding marks.................................................................................................................... 501-36-152
Improving touch-up work.................................................................................................... 501-36-153
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Underbody protection 5 030 492 -
Anti-corrosion wax 1 219 834 WSK-M7C89-A
Profiled butyl seal 1 128 983 S-M3G4620-A
Weld primer 1 205 996 -
Clinched flange protection 1 136 479 WSK-M4G245-B
Cavity wax 5 030 081 -
Seam sealing compound 1 205 817 WSS-M4G364-A
Body sealing compound 1 143 255 -
Because the supply of paint materials to the dealer workshops has been handed over to paint suppliers, the specifications for
these materials are not given in the table.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230304en
http://vnx.su
Description and Usage of Paint Literature

Vehicle paints are subject to severe demands practical part of the training, a further component
caused by external influences. Moisture, air-borne is the Student Information document, which offers
deposits in the form of various chemicals and UV supplementary information in the form of a
light constantly affect a paint surface. Furthermore, brochure.
mechanical damage occurs through grit, stones During all work it must always be ensured that
and sand. Bird droppings, insect residues, pollen personal safety and the operational capability of
and tree sap also attack the paint surface. the vehicle are not threatened by the choice of
The present literature not only informs the specialist methods, tools and components.
about current repair painting techniques, but also The information given in the diagrams in the
provides tips and instructions on modern and chapter "Paint Damage" is provided by the repair
economical repair processes. paint manufacturer.
High quality bodywork paints require the use of the
most modern technologies and regular updating
of the technician's knowledge of painting
techniques, because of the constantly new
developments in paint technology.
Information about different materials is listed under
Specification.
Furthermore, information on the fundamental
principles of repair painting and paint materials is
provided in several chapters. The safety
instructions indicate the possible health hazards
and other sources of danger. There are also notes
about tools and materials as well as on basic
painting methods.
In the model specific repair instructions, only the
most important repair steps or special features are
referred to. Detailed information on the generally
applicable painting procedures is given in this paint
manual.
Direct supply of repair paints by Ford has been
discontinued. There is however an agreement with
many paint manufacturers, which ensures fast and
problem-free supply to the dealer undertakings.
Paint suppliers:
• DuPont
• PPG
• Sikkens
• Standox
When using painting materials, it should be taken
into account that the manufacturers have exactly
matched their products between each other. In
order to avoid quality defects, difficulties in working
and losses in corrosion protection, these may not
be substituted with other products.
NOTE: The Ford Service Organization organizes
basic and more in-depth training on much of the
content of this paint manual. As well as the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230306en
http://vnx.su
Symbols
General NOTE: This caption is used when attention needs
to be drawn to special or extra information.
Various symbols, signs, instructions and
illustrations are used in this literature. Warnings When reading this handbook, you will come across
and cautions have different meanings and require the points WARNING, CAUTION AND NOTE.
different ways of proceeding. Diagrammatic These instructions are always given immediately
representations are provided with instructional before the corresponding job steps.
signs for improved clarity. These are briefly
explained below: Hazardous materials designations
WARNING: This caption is used when
failure to follow instructions exactly or Many accidents occur because of ignorance. In
failure to follow them at all may result in a the area of personal health protection, it is
hazard to persons or in persons being particularly important to clearly emphasize sources
injured. of danger and their effects on human organs.
CAUTION: This caption is used when Only with knowledge of hazardous material
incorrectly following the test procedures designations can it be certain that the necessary
or instructions or failure to follow them at precautions are taken when handling substances
all could lead to damage to the vehicle or which are harmful to health.
components. NOTE: Pay attention to the manufacturer's data
on the containers and given in the Safety Data
Sheet.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468089en
http://vnx.su
Hazardous material symbols

1 Very poisonous, T+ (extremely toxic), 6 Explosive
small quantities can be fatal. 7 Highly flammable, F+ (extremely
2 Poisonous, T (toxic), causes serious flammable), already flammable at
damage to health temperatures below 0° C.
3 Corrosive, C (corrosive), destroys living 8 Flammable, F (flammable), forms a
tissue. flammable mixture with air.
4 Harmful to health, Xn (noxious). 9 Oxidizing, O (oxidizing), reacts with
combustible substances.
5 Irritant, Xi (irritant), can cause
inflammation. As well as the danger symbols, there is more
comprehensive manufacturer's information to be
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468089en
http://vnx.su
found on the containers and in the Safety Data agreed a standard symbolic language. Language
Sheets, and you must pay attention to this independent representations in the form of icons
information. provide handling instructions which are
supplemented with quantity or time information.
Instructions on measures to be taken Pretreatment
for personal protection.
As well as the information about sources of danger,
there are mandatory instructions which draw your
attention to the personal protection measures to
be taken.
Mandatory symbol
Item Description
1 Clean
2 Sand
Mix
Item Description
1 Breathing protection must be worn
2 Eye protection must be worn
3 Ear protection must be worn
4 Protective gloves must be worn
5 Protective footwear must be worn
Icons
Item Description
So that the necessary information for optimal
handling is clear, unambiguous and can be quickly 1 2 component mixture
understood, the leading paint manufacturers have 2 3 component mixture
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468089en
http://vnx.su
Item Description Dry
3 Use a measuring rod

4 Addition of hardener
5 Addition of additives
Process
Item Description
1 Ventilate
2 Drying time
3 Drying time with infra-red dryer
Further processing
Item Description
1 Flow-beaker spray gun
2 Suction-beaker spray gun
3 Spray passes
4 Filler
5 Coat
6 Underbody protection spray gun
Item Description
1 Hand abrade (wet)
2 Hand abrade (dry)
3 Eccentric sander (wet)
4 Eccentric sander (dry)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468089en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
5 Oscillating sander (wet)
6 Oscillating sander (dry)
Store
Item Description
1 Protect from moisture
2 Store in a frost-free environment
3 Store in a cool place
4 Close the container
Other
Item Description
1 Stir by hand
2 Stir using a mixing machine
3 Polish
4 Roll
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468089en
http://vnx.su
Health and Safety Precautions

General instructions for the paint shop solvent can be ignited while increasing toward the
and handling paint materials ignition point. The ignition point is defined as the
lowest temperature at which the solvent ignites
Hazardous areas in repair paint shops: while its temperature is being increased. The
ignition point is far higher than the flash point.
• Danger from fires, explosions and hot surfaces.
• Dangers to health and safety from the effects
of harmful substances because of their
absorption through the skin and/or inhalation.
• Dangers caused by electricity, compressed air,
power tools and noise.
WARNING: During painting work there is
an increased danger of fire or explosion.
Prevent any sparks being created. Fire,
naked lights and smoking are forbidden.
Measures:
• Wear protective footwear made from anti-static
material.
• Only use tools made of wood, brass or copper
to clean stands and extraction ducts. Do not use
tools made of steel.
Only fill or decant paint materials in a specially
marked area.
As well as these general instructions on the
dangers in repair paint shops, all national and
international regulations must be observed:
• Health and Safety at Work Act
• Ordinance on Hazardous Substances
• Technical Rules for Hazardous Substances
• Regulations for the Prevention of Industrial Fire Prevention in the Factory
Accidents
• EU Directive on Hazardous Substances, Ventilation
98/24/EU As the vapor of organic solvent is heavier than the
• EU Directive on Noise, 2003/10/EU air, it always flows to a lower place. When the
• EU Directive on Volatile Organic Compounds vapor of the solvent and air are mixed at a given
(VOC), 1999/13/EU, 2001/81/EU, 2004/42/EU ratio, and an ignition source is located near the
• Safety instructions of equipment and tool mixed gas, it may explode below the flashing point
manufacturers temperature. Therefore install the discharging outlet
as low as possible.
NOTE: The explosive limit is the concentration of
Fire Danger and Fire Control
solvent below which it dose not explode.
Paint and thinner used for vehicle repair have low • Gasoline: 1.4 (7.6%)
flash and ignition points which can result in fire. If • Thinner: 1.0 (7.0%)
the paint or thinner reaches the critical temperature,
it will produce combustible vapor and will be Check the Equipment and Tools
ignited. The flash point is the standard of
Always lubricate the sliding portion of any
flammability of the paint/ thinner. The flash point
equipment (where metal friction generates heat.)
is defined as the lowest temperature at which the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230308en
http://vnx.su
Always check that the exhaust fan dose not contact
the wall of the painting booth and check for wear
of the fan belt. Use safe tools (spark-free tools)
when possible and use other equipment and tools
carefully and correctly. Pay attention not to drop
them or subject them to shocks.
Electrostatic Prevention Measures

Solvents have poor electrical conductivity. If paint
or thinner is stirred in a container, static electricity
is produced and when the electrostatic level
reaches a critical value, it may cause a spark and
ignite the solvent. Always connect a ground cable.
To maintain a certain humidity in the painting booth,
spray water on the floor. Wear anti-static coated
cotton overalls avoiding synthetic fiber clothes.
Handling Organic Solvents

The organic solvent categories include:
inflammable, explosive, toxic, and radioactive. In
order to prevent fire, pay attention to the following
items:
• Never use flame in the painting booth. If there
is no choice but to use flame, suspend the
painting work.
• When the paint or thinner is not being used,
always cap its container. If it is spilt on the floor, Item Description
wipe it up with a cloth. 1 Protective hood with fresh air supply
• Do not put the paint and thinner in the sun or in
2 Protective clothing
a hot place.
• Always spray water in the painting booth to 3 Protective gloves
maintain enough humidity in order to reduce the 4 Protective footwear
danger of ignition.
• If the spray dust from the oil paint, the sanding
waste of polyester putty or used cloth are Breathing protection
massed together, there is a danger of
autoignition. Keep them in a container filled with During painting work and in the preparations for
water until they are disposed of. painting, gases, vapors, mists or dusts can appear
in dangerous concentrations in the areas where
Personal protection fellow employees breath.
For short periods of work or minimal concentrations
Besides the body and limbs, several organs vital of hazardous substances, breathing protection
to life are in very particular danger. Because devices with a combination filter are suitable as
damage is mostly irreparable, special attention and breathing protection equipment.
comprehensive protection are necessary.
WARNING: Solvents cause damage to the
health through inhalation. Splashes in the
eyes or on the skin can cause bodily harm.
When working with solvents, always use
suitable means of protection.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230308en
http://vnx.su
The protective clothing must be changed at the
proper intervals. Items of clothing which are
contaminated with coating materials can easily
catch fire.
When selecting protective clothing, it must be taken
into account that cloth containing a high proportion
of easily melted plastic thread considerably
increases the degree of burns injury (melted plastic
on the skin!). This must also be taken into account
in the choice of underwear.
For areas of skin which are not covered by
protective clothing, suitable skin protection, skin
Item Description cleaning and skin care agents must be used.
1 Activated charcoal filter

2 Coarse filter Eye protection
For higher concentrations of harmful substances, Working with portable hand sanding machines on
breathing protection devices which are independent which the tools move unguarded, at speed and
of the local atmosphere are suitable. with power is fundamentally dangerous.
In these types of isolation systems, a compressed Goggles must be worn not only when sanding, but
air hose carries natural air from the compressor also when working with paints and their additives.
line into the protective mask. During supply, the These contain substances which are harmful to
air undergoes pressure reduction, water removal, the eyes. Damage ranging from irritation of the
fine filtration and usually warming to natural breath cornea to incurable illnesses are possible.
temperature. The protective goggles must be inert toward
WARNING: Vapour or spray mist splashes of solvent, and fully enclose the areas at
containing isocyanate as a paint base or the side of the eyes on both sides. The best
hardener can cause toxic respiratory protection during spray painting is offered by full
disease (conditions similar to asthma) mask respirators or helmet respirators with a
leading to permanent damage, even when built-in visor.
inhaled in the lowest concentrations.
Filter masks with wadding, sponge or colloid filters Ear protection
and also paper masks are all unsuitable for working
with coating materials because they do not stop Noise disturbance in repair paint shops caused by
solvent vapors. various sources is particularly high. Sanding and
The instructions for use provided by the compressed air machines, paint cabin extractor
manufacturer must be observed when working with fans (compressors) and extractor ducts in the work
breathing protection equipment. rooms are the causes of the high levels of noise.
WARNING: Avoid damage to your hearing!
Wear ear protection.
Skin protection
Suitable ear protection is offered by ear plugs or
Spray painters who are subject to considerable ear defenders.
exposure to coating materials must wear suitable
protective work clothing (flame-proof and
anti-static).
NOTE: Also, when working with water based
materials, comprehensive skin protection must be
worn, because these materials are very easily
absorbed through the skin.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1230308en
http://vnx.su
Environmental Regulations
Waste disposal in the repair paint shop
The new VOC (Volatile Organic
More than ever before, since the introduction of Compounds) solvent regulation
EU directives, rigorous attention is paid to the
avoidance of waste materials and to recycling in Keeping the air clean protects the environment and
repair paint shops. In this respect, repair paint the population from the heath-damaging effects of
shops must take into account and comply with the air pollutants.
following requirements:
In certain atmospheric conditions, volatile organic
• Separate waste according to its recycling and compounds contribute to summer smog.
disposal methods.
NOTE: For comprehensive information, please
• Produce evidence for the correct transport and refer to the European VOC Directive, 1999/13/EU.
disposal of waste. Furthermore, the effective national regulations must
NOTE: The organization of disposal in the plant be complied with.
must comply with the requirements of the Waste The European VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds)
Avoidance and Management Act: The avoidance Directive has controlled the limits for such
and recycling of waste must always take priority. compounds since August 2001. It applies to
However, despite all measures which may be production coating companies and those which
taken, waste cannot be completely avoided. undertake repair painting of private and commercial
vehicles.
NOTE: Waste which is not allowed in household
rubbish, and which can no longer be utilized, must Not least because of the VOC legislation, modern,
be disposed of as special waste. low solvent and solvent-free lacquers and paints
are finding greatly increased distribution across
Paint residues containing solvent, application
industry and the trade. Up to the year 2007,
residues, sanding dust, waste containing peroxides,
emissions from painting work will drop by at least
solvents, soiled cleaning cloths and paint slurry all
40%.
count as special waste. Each of these must be
collected in a separate, sealed and suitably labeled At the same time, the paint manufacturers
metal container and properly disposed of using a guarantee for example that they will produce a
specialist company. ready-to-spray product consisting of base paint +
hardener + thinners, with a permitted VOC level.
Careful separation allows some waste to be
usefully re-used. A company in business today can conform with the
stipulated requirements by introducing water-based
• Empty metal containers can be sent for scrap
paints and using the other necessary products from
instead of being disposed of as waste.
the relevant paint manufacturers.
• Contaminated cleaning thinners can be
separated by distillation. For more detailed information, please refer to the
EU VOC Directive.
• Packing material and masking paper can be
added to the recycled paper collection.
Residues which cannot be used must be correctly
disposed of.
All remaining waste must be treated as commercial
waste and disposed of according to the local
regulations.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G468091en
http://vnx.su
Factory Paint Application

Painting General
Painting Purpose
Item Description
1 Painting
Protection of painted object
Item Description An automobile is mostly made from steel. When it

is exposed to air, the steel tends to produce rusts
1 Drying on it. Once rust start to grow, covering the steel
object, it becomes difficult to keep the
Painting is a process to make a thin layer of paint characteristics of steel like its strength and even
(liquid or powder) over an object and then the layer its original shape. By painting over it, thus
is hardened by drying it. preventing rust from growing on it, it becomes
possible to retain its original characteristics much
longer than without being painted.
Improvement of external appearance

Its commercial value would be much higher, if it is
painted beautifully when compared to another
unpainted car even though both of them have the
same configuration and the same functions and
performances. As is exemplified by a fire engine
and a police car, color shows to the public what
the car is intended for instantly.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
General fundamentals of paint
technology
Paint is a pigment-containing liquid which
undergoes chemical and/or physical processes
after it has been applied to a surface, so changing
into a solid film covering.
Repair paint consists of binder, pigments, filler and
solvent.
NOTE: Organic solvent is being replaced by
solvent based on water.
Constituents of paint
• Binder
– Mostly semi-fluid resins which bind together
the other components of the paint when it
dries.
– Makes the paint durable.
– Ensures good surface coverage.
• Pigments
– Fine, colored powders, which give color to
the paint.
– Cover the components below (covering
power).
• Additives
– Additives give the paint special properties. Contents of Paint
– e.g. flow improver, softener, drying
accelerator, thickener. Pigments
• Solvent Pigment is powder of extremely tiny particles
– Thins the paint and allows it to flow more insoluble to water, oil, and any solvents. Pigment
freely. alone cannot be attached to any object. Therefore,
– Evaporates during drying. by mixing it with resin and other components
changing it to paint, it becomes possible to adhere
to objects. Body Pigment reinforces and gives
fleshiness to paint layer. Mainly used for
undercoating. Anti-rust Pigment Mainly used for
undercoating to prevent rust from growing. Color
Pigment Mainly used for undercoating to prevent
rust from growing. Ordinary pigment gives colors
to the paint such as red, blue, yellow, etc. Metallic
pigment contains powdered aluminum particles
gives metallic brightness to paint layers. Titanized
mica pigment Titanium oxide is coated on pieces
of mica, giving pearl brightness to paint layers.
Resins
Resin is a main content, together with pigment,
that forms a paint layer normally a sticky
transparent liquid. After being painted on an object
and dry-hardened, it becomes a paint layer. The
quality of the resin affects the finish (luster,
brightness), the easiness of work (drying, polishing)
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
and the quality of the paint layer (hardness,
anti-solution, weatherproofing). Natural Resin
Mainly taken out of plants, it is usually used for
varnish and lacquer. Synthetic Resin is produced
through chemical reaction from chemical materials.
Most of the kinds of resin now being used are
synthetic resin. Synthetic resin is divided into
thermoplastic and thermosetting resins.
Thermoplastic resin: It has a characteristic to soften
if heated and to harden if cooled. This characteristic
is repeatable. Some of the typical ones are
Nitro-cellulose, Cellulose acetate, polypropylene,
and nylon. Thermosetting resin: If heated, it
hardens and becomes insoluble, never returning Item Description
back to the original state. Some of the typical ones
are amino, polyurethane, or epoxy resins. 1 Viscosity Measurement
Solvents and Thinner

Solvent is usually mixed with paint, which melts
resin to make pigment and resin mix easily. Thinner
is a mixture of several solvents. It is added to paint
to optimize its viscosity. Solvent and thinner
evaporates as the paint dries and does not
remaining in the paint layer. Various kinds of resins
are used in paint. Therefore, to dissolve them all,
different kinds of solvent must be used. If some of
them does not dissolve, it will affect the resulting
effects. In consideration of this, special thinners
are available in which different kinds of solvents
are mixed together. In addition, depending upon Hardener
outdoor temperature, such as summer or winter The paint of a two-liquid mixing type needs to be
use, different kinds of thinner with different mixed with hardener to achieve its optimum paint
evaporation times, are available. characteristics. Acrylic urethane paint is mainly
Paint viscosity used for car paint repair together with isocyanine
chemicals as hardener.
A term to indicate the degree of viscosity of paints.
The paint made soft through dilution of thinner is
called “Its viscosity is low”. If the paint is too sticky,
it is called “Its viscosity is high”. Because
adjustment of the viscosity of paint depends on the
addition of solvent, the proper selection of solvent
is important and must be made carefully.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Dry-up of Paint
Types of Dry-up
The process of the paint applied being changed
from the state of liquid to that of solid is called
“Dry-up”. In the course of the process, the contents
of the paint change as follows while the resin in it
hardens forming a paint layer.
• Solvent: does not remain in the paint layer as
it evaporates in the air.
• Pigment: remains in the paint layer as powder
In the case that it is little amount of hardener. particles as before the process.
• Resin: that has been liquid in the paint turns
out to be a hard solid.
Water Evaporation Dry-up Type

Wet film after spraying
In the case that it is too many amount of hardener.
Water in the paint is evaporated by air blow.
In the case that different hardener is mixed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Paint layer is formed after water in the paint are Solvent and thinner evaporated.
evaporated in to air.
Dried film Without cross linkage among resin

After dry-up, the combination of resin molecules molecules (2 dimensions).
does not take place.
Reaction Type
Solvent Evaporation Type
Generally, as far as the reaction type paint is
Paint layer is formed after solvent and thinner in concerned, the finer the meshed layer surface is,
the paint are evaporated into the air. The the better the antiweather and anti-solution
combination of resin molecules does not take characteristics are. The important feature of the
place. If the paint layer is wiped with thinner after reaction type paint is that, unless something that
dry-up, the layer is dissolved. As its is inferior to causes chemical reaction is added, it never
reaction type dry-up paint in anti-solution and hardens. After the solvent and thinner in the paint
weather-proofing it is rarely used nowadays. have been evaporated, the resin molecules react
to heat and chemicals and dry-harden to form a
Wet film after spraying.
paint layer. Due to the chemical reaction, chemical
resin compounds of a small molecular weight
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
combine with each other to form compounds of a Paints for Automobiles
larger molecular weight. After dry up, it becomes
a strong paint layer insoluble to any solvents. Performance of Paints
Wet film after spraying. In painting a car, just one layer of paint of one kind
is not enough to meet all the requirements of the
paint on the car. So, in order to secure what is
required of the paint, it is necessary to paint
different kinds of paints on the car layer upon layer.
Example of paint composition in a new car:
As soon as the thinner is evaporated, the resin

molecules start to react and produce a meshed
layer.
Item Description
1 Under coat (ED)
2 Steel panel
3 Top coat
4 Intermediate coat
Example of paint composition after paint repair:
When the dry-up has been completed, the reaction

of the resin molecules is finished forming a paint
layer. In fact, the meshed paint layer is 3
dimensional as shown.
Item Description
1 Steel panel
2 Putty
3 Under coat/Intermediate coat
4 Top coat
Anti-rust treatment: Treatment to be employed
to prevent rust from growing.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Workability: Does not take too much time for
preparation, easy to paint, quick dry-up, easy to
polish.
Degreasing/Washing Agent
Remove oil, grease, or fat adhered to metal
surfaces, previously painted surfaces, or degrease
undercoats. Remove smeared dirt on previously
painted surfaces or on undercoats.
Quickly dry up. It is a solvent that has solubility of
a low level and can remove oil and grease on the
surfaces without corroding painted layers.
Filling: Process to fill a dent, deep scratch or cavity There are a few different kinds, one of which
in undercoat. prevents defects due to static electricity and
another is used only for plastic surfaces to prevent
the occurrence of static electricity.
Primer
Primer has the following effects:
• Prevent rust from growing.
• Adheres well to raw materials such as steel
sheet.
• Adheres well to the paint coated on it.
It is normally painted sparsely and does not need
to be polished. Due to recent common use of
primer surfacer, it is rarely used for paint repair
Prevention of suck-up (sealing): If often happens
now.
that the top paint painted on the intermediate or
undercoat is sucked into the lower paint layer Epoxy Primer: Main content is epoxy resin and is
causing its thickness to be thinner than normal or normally a two-liquid mixing type. Superb in
getting rid of its luster. In order to prevent the anti-rust effect and adherence, but drying time
suck-up, it is necessary to coat a paint that has a becomes so low below normal temperature 68°F
sealing effect just below the top coat. (20°C), it is necessary to force-drying using a
temperature of about 140°F (60°C). On
line-produced cars, epoxy resin based water paint
is painted in electric painting (ED painting) and
dried up using a high temperature above 302°F
(150°C).
Urethane Primer: Main content is urethane resin
and is normally a two-liquid mixing type. Superb
in anti-rust effect and adherence, but drying time
becomes so low below normal temperature 68°F
(20°C), it is necessary to force-drying using a
temperature of about 140°F (60°C).
Wash-Primer: Main contents are a body material,
in which butyrated resin is mixed with zinc
Luster: Fresh color, shining quality, appearance chromate (anti-rust pigment), and additives of
of smoothness, and its capacity for keeping these which the main content is phosphoric acid. There
qualities for a long periods of time. are two kinds of this type. One is a single liquid
Adhesiveness: The quality of the paint adhering type and another is a two-liquid mixing type. The
tightly to it’s adjoining layer. This quality dose not two-liquid mixing type is superior to the single liquid
allow the paint to peel off easily. type in anti-rust capacity and adherence.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Lacquer Primer: Used as an undercoat for lacquer
nitrate paint. The application of this primer
improves the quick dry up time, anti-rust effect,
and adherence of the layer, however, inferior to
other primers in anti-rust effect.
WARNING: Avoid contact with skin. Wear
an approved respirator, gloves, eye
protection and appropriate clothing when
painting the primer including phosphorus
acid.
Putty
A material used to fill and flatten recesses such as
Primer Surfacer
dents or holes in the undercoat. Unlike other
materials, main content is a high molecular Primer surfacer plays a role between a primer and
substance so that its shrinkage rate is minimal. a surfacer. However, recent primer surfacer is
It is applied using a spatula. After it has been dried required to be more of a surfacer.
up, the surface is polished. • Anti-rust effect (required of primer)
There are a few different kinds of putties such as • Smoothness effect (required of surfacer)
sheet panel putty, poly putty, lacquer putty, etc. • Anti-suck up effect (required of surfacer)
depending upon the depth to be filled. • Adherence effect (require of both primer and
Sheet Panel Putty (Body Filler): Its main content surfacer)
is unsaturated polyester resin and is normally a Lacquer Primer Surfacer: Its main contents are
two-liquid mixing type using organic peroxide as nitro cellulose and alkyd resin. Because of its
hardener. Usually used to fill deep dents of a 20 characteristics of quick drying and superb polishing
to 30 mm (0.8 to 1.2 in.) deep. It has cavity holes effect, and workability. As it is inferior to two-liquid
and is inferior when polishing. mixing type in the quality of the paint layer.
Polyester Putty: Its main content is oil denatured Urethane Primer Surfacer: A primer surfacer of
unsaturated polyester resin and is normally a a two-liquid mixing type that needs to get mixed
two-liquid mixing type using organic peroxide as with hardener before being used. Because it is not
the hardener. Usually used to fill dents of 1 to 3 soluble to thinner after hardened, it has a high
mm (0.04 to 0.12 in.) deep. It is inferior in sealing effect. As it is slow in drying up, it is
adherence to steel panel. It is not favorable to apply preferable to use forced drying.
it directly on a steel panel.
Heat Hardening Amino Alkyd Primer Surfacer:
Lacquer Putty: Its main contents are cellulose It is a heat hardening type of paint and is used for
nitrate and alkyd resin. Used to fill dents and panel paint repair. It needs to be baked at 230 to
scratches of less than 0.2 mm (0.08 in.) deep. 284°F (110 to 140°C) for 20 to 40 minutes and,
NOTE: At present, a new putty called “Intermediate after that, dried up. The same level of paint effects
putty” is now being developed that is good in thick as that of a new car is obtained through the use of
application, fast drying time, high adherence to this primer surfacer.
other materials, easy polishing that is owned only Surfacer: Rather than acting by itself, it improves
by ester putty, and molding. the adherence of the primer and the top coat to
Limit of putty thickness at a time: According to each other, their durability, and anti-water
types, the thickness of putty application is different. penetration effects. Further, in order to make the
top coat more shiny and beautiful, this is used to
get rid of sandpaper scratches on the putty surface
and to fill small scars and cuts on the undercoat.
Because of the wide spread of the use of primer
surfacer, it is now being replaced by primer
surfacer.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: Use urethane primer surfacer for repair length of dry up time, they are divided into three
work in order to maintain the same paint quality as types.
in mass production vehicles. Acrylic urethane lacquer: Because isocyanine is
Sealer used as a hardener in the same way for the
two-liquid mixing type acrylic urethane, it provides
Depending upon the purpose of using a sealer, the same level of adherence and weatherproofing
several kinds of sealers are separately selected to effects as urethane paints. Its workability especially
use. in quick drying up time is better than those of other
• To prevent blotting of paint. urethane paints because of the higher molecular
weight of its main content and low hardener content
• To prevent shrinkage of paint.
ratio. The use of this paint requires vigilance later
• To prevent suck-up of paint. when a re-painting work or a two tone color
• To improve adherence between paint layers. overlapping painting work is done. Because there
• Because defects caused by blotting, shrinking, are two contents existing together in the painted
and suck up can be prevented by the use of layer, one that is soluble to solvent and another
urethane primary surfacer, sealer is rarely used not soluble to it. If the repainting or two tone color
for these purposes. The type of sealers that is work proceeds relying only on the surface
coated to hide minor color defects, such as of hardness, it may happen that a stain may remain
red and yellow, on top coat is called color sealer when a tape is adhered to the surface. It is used
or color base. at a painting shop not equipped with a painting
booth or dryer, but in fact, it is now being replaced
NOTE: The sealer used for improving adherence with acrylic urethane paints.
effect may cause adhering defects if it is used
where polishing is hard to do. It is, therefore, Standard Acrylic urethane: A two-liquid mixing
necessary to make sure of its capacity of type with a main content of acrylic resin that has
adherence beforehand. Also the use of it should good weatherproofing and isocyanine as its
be limited to minimum. hardener. Because of the three dimensional
structure formed by the reaction between the two
Top coat paint liquids, the paint layer formed after dried up is
The paint painted as the upper most layer on a car extremely strong, but its drawback is that it takes
panel is called “top coat” and processed at the end 68°F (20°C) x 12 hours for drying up. Therefore it
of final painting processes to maintain the external can be said that its workability is inferior to lacquer
appearance. The top coat, with lots of resin family paints. If forced-drying is used, it can be
content, gives color to the panel surfaces and dried up in about 140°F (60°C) in 1 hour. The same
retains luster of the paint. The weatherproof level of paint quality is obtained. Because the luster
characteristic is well considered so as not to after drying up is superb and, in addition, no
change color or lose luster. polishing is required, it is widely used for painting
a wide area of painting including a whole car.
Constant Dry-up Type (Lacquer Family): This
type of top coat is dried up after its solvent Quick drying acrylic urethane: The characteristic
evaporates without any chemical reaction taking of acrylic urethane are retained improving, its
place. Depending upon differences of resins workability. This paint is painted with isocyanine
contained, they are categorized into NC lacquer, as its hardener added to the body content of acrylic
NC acrylic lacquer, and CAB acrylic lacquer. They resin. Because of its quick drying and good layer
have been used as panel repair paint for long qualities, it is now most widely used.
years, but they have been now replaced with a top
coat of a two-liquid mixing type. Painting Methods
Two-liquid Mixing Type (Urethane Family): The
main content of this paint is urethane resin that is
a product of a chemical reaction between poly-al Spraying Painting
and isocyanine and called as such because it
contains urethane compounds in it. It is also termed Using a spraying force, paint is sprayed over an
a two-liquid mixing urethane because the paint is object to form a paint layer. Air spraying painting,
mixed with hardener before being applied. airless spraying painting and electro statistic
Depending upon the types of resins used and the painting belong to this category.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Air Spraying Method are broken up and made tiny while they repel each
other and are attracted to the plus (+) terminal and
Making use of the principle of an atomizer and by
attached to the object to be painted. Because the
the force of compressed air, paint is sprayed over
paint is electrically attracted to the object, the loss
an object to be painted to form a paint layer. In
of paint is minimal. Because the paint particles are
spite of some paint to be wasted, it is widely used
broken up due to electrical repulsion, the surface
for minor painting jobs, as it is easy to do paint jobs
of the paint layer is superb and, therefore, this
without any particular facility. As even a
method is used for intermediate and top coating
complicated surface of the panels can be painted
on mass-production line through the use of
beautifully, it is the most ideal way for panel paint
automatic electro statistic painting machines.
repair.
Airless Spraying Method

High pressure is added to the paint to let it spray
out from a small nozzle over an object and make
the paint layer on the object. Because less air is
mixed with the paint, the wasted splash of paint is
minimized and at the same time, the paint of a high
viscosity can be sprayed. As compared to the air
spraying, the sprayed surface is not as smooth so
that this method is mostly used for under body
coating.
Permeating Painting
The object to be painted is dipped in the paint in a

tank. There are two types of this painting method.
One is the dipping painting and another is the
electro deposition painting.
Dipping Painting Method

As, by dipping an object to be painted into the tank,
the whole surface is painted at one time, this
Electrostatic Painting
method is ideal for a massproduction process.
By connecting the grounded object to be painted Though the loss of paint is minimal, due to the
to the plus terminal (+) and the paint spraying movement of lifting the product from the tank, the
device to the minus terminal (–), and turning on difference of paint layer thickness is significant
electricity of –60 kV to –120 kV, make an electro depending upon places of the object. Depending
statistic field between the two terminals. The paint upon the sectional shape of the object, it may
particles coming out of the paint spraying device happen that part of it is not painted as desired.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
moves toward and attaches to the object by to
electrophoresis.
Electro Deposition
With the object to be painted in the paint tank,
electricity is turned on to the object to be painted 2. Once the paint is attached to the object; it loses
and paint. By so doing to electrically paint the its electric charge, thus forming a paint layer. The
object, an even paint layer is formed on it. Another water in the attached paint is dehydrated, thus
advantage of this method is, because the paint forming a hard paint layer without any water
layer thickness is electrically controlled, even a content in it.
surface with a complicated section can be evenly
painted without any paint flow mark. There are two
kinds of electro deposition paintings. One is the
cation electro deposition painting and another is
the anion electro deposition painting. Cation electro
deposition painting: The painted object to the minus
terminal and the paint to the plus terminal
connected. Anion electro deposition painting: The
painted object to the plus terminal and the paint to
the minus terminal.
The structure of an original paint finish

During construction of the original paint, a total
surface thickness of between 120 and 130 µm is
achieved. The thicknesses of the layers may vary
however, because they are greater for horizontal
surfaces than vertical ones.
Pointing Process
On actual car production line, the cation electric
deposition method (body-minus terminal) is
employed because, if the anion electro deposition
method is used, phosphoric zinc paint layer
attached during the process of chemical treatment
line is attracted to the minus terminal on the paint,
thus making this layer thinner and, as the result,
its anti-corrosive effect is decreased.
1. When a direct-current electro-loaded object is
dipped in the electro-loaded paint fluid, the paint
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Paint layers 1. Chemical treatment process: Employing the
full dipping method, a whole body is submerged
in the alkali tank to get rid of oil, fat, grease, and
other impurities followed by another full dipping
in the tank to form a crystallized phosphoric zinc
layer.
2. Undercoat process: In order to improve the

quality of durable anti-rust characteristics, a
whole body is, again, dipped in the paint tank
for electro disposition painting so that a good
paint layer is formed everywhere on the inside
of the body. Epoxy resin paint is used as the
electro deposition paint.
Item Description
1 Steel panel
2 Phosphate layer 2.9 g/m², corresponding
to 2 µm.
3 Cathodic dip paint 30-35 µm
4 Filler 30-35 µm
5 Base paint 15-20 µm
6 Clear varnish 55 µm
3. Sealing process: Using a press-feeding sealer
gun, apply sealer along the body component
Painting Processes on Production Line welding joints, parts mating joints, and hemmed
area such as at the doors. Sealing those areas
The major requirements demanded in body painting
secures water-tightness, anti-rustiness, and
on a new car are good external appearance,
anti-dustiness within the panels of the body.
durability, and anti-corrosiveness, all of which
contribute greatly to the quality and commercial
value of the car. In the painting work line are the
chemical treatment and undercoat processes for
the purpose of improving anti-rust characteristics
and durability and the intermediate and top coat
painting process to produce finishing external
appearance. In addition to all these, there are
several other processes to maintain the high level
of quality.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
4. Undercoat painting process: Apply PVC 7. Intermediate painting process: Secure

(polyvinyl chloride) over the under body areas necessary thickness of paint in order to maintain
including the wheelhouses. This process not luster and brightness of the painted surface as
only protects the under body from chipping a whole including the top coat. A Mini-bell
caused by flying stones, but also improves automatic painting machine is used to secure
anti-noise, anti-vibration, and heat insulation even painting.
effects.
8. Intermediate polishing process: Polish the

5. Hard chipping painting process: Apply surface of the intermediate paint layer to
chipping primer on the side sills to protect them improve the smoothness and good adherence
from the paint damages caused by flying stones. to the top coat.
6. Soft chipping painting process (for 9. Top coat process: Making use of the automatic
seaside-area cars only): Apply soft chipping painting robots, apply enamel paint on the inside
primer along the edge of the engine hood, roof, and outside of the body. For metallic color or
and doors. To prevent damages on painting pearl color cars, clear painting is carried out
layer due chipping. after the enamel painting. For the top coat
painting, the highest quality acrylic paint or
water-soluble paint is used to improve not only
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
anti-rustiness but also to heighten its 12. Completed car anti-rust process: Anti-rust
commercial valve. treatment is carried out on both the outside and
inside panel surface. Using a special
wax-applying gun, wax is applied even on the
farthest corners of the tailgate, door panels, and
the body to maintain durable antirust quality.
10. Painting final inspection process: In

accordance with the judgment criteria, inspect
the results of the painting process. The state of
paint layers, the thickness of the paint layers,
the paint hardness, the level of adherence
between the layers are inspected visually as Painting process and corrosion
well as through measurement by use of protection.
measuring devices.
In production, painting consists of individual steps
which are optimally matched to each other.
Bodywork consists almost entirely of steel panels
which have been pre-coated with zinc. The zinc
layer is between 5-10 µm thick and acts as the first
corrosion protection layer of the steel panel.
Production sequence:
• Clean and de-grease
– In the first step, the bare bodywork is initially
dipped in a cleaning bath and cleaned with
a degreasing solution.
11. Inside anti-rust process: Apply special • Phosphatising
zinc-based anti-rust paint or wax on the major – The cleaned bodywork is dipped in a bath
areas that require anti-rust treatment using a containing various phosphate salt solutions.
spray gun to further heighten the anti-rust This creates a crystalline metal-phosphate
quality. layer which offers the optimal prepared
surface and also corrosion protection.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
• CDP base
– The cataphoretic dip paint (CDP) base acts
as a further corrosion protection layer.
– In this process the bodywork is completely
immersed in a bath consisting of a paint and
electrolyte solution.
– By application of an electric voltage, an
electric field is created.
– Positively charged paint particles settle on
the negatively charged bodywork and form
a protective layer up to 20 µm thick.
– Next the bodywork is placed in a dryer, where
the CDP base is hardened at 180°C.
• Sealing, stone-chip protection
– Edges, seams and but joints are sealer with
a sealing compound.
– Vulnerable areas are coated with stone-chip
protection.
• Filler
– Filler protects the body panels from stone
impacts. Furthermore, any unevenness of
the metal surface is flattened out, in order to
create the most homogenous and fault-free
undersurface possible.
– Once the filler is dry, it serves as the base
on which paint is applied.
• Top coat
– The top coat is applied as a single layer or
two layers of paint.
– When working with two layer paint, in the first
job step the initial colored base paint is
applied. In the second job step, a clear
lacquer is applied, giving the base paint shine
and hardness.
Colored fillers applied in production

Filler which gives color is used in production. Its
use makes the base paint and clear varnish
unnecessary on certain vehicle interior surfaces
(engine, doors).
Not every exterior paint has its own matching filler.
It is more that the tones of the filler are color
compatible, i.e. they have similar intensity to the
top coat.
During repair painting the filler color tones must be
used according to the manufacturer's instructions.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225851en
http://vnx.su
Paintwork Defects and Damage

Claims on Pre-paint condition Avoid mixing the paint with a different brand of
paint, curing agent and improper thinner.
Gelling (Increased Viscosity) Action:

Discard
Paint loses fluidity causing gelled paint or increased
viscosity of the paint. If the paint is a lacquer type and increase in
viscosity is small, it can be used by stirring up the
Paint partially or entirely reacts and hardens, paint well and diluting it with the recommended
leading to gelled paint. lacquer thinner.
Sedimentation (Caking)
Pigment of the paint is settled in the bottom of the

can.
Hard deposit: Hard caking
Soft deposit: Soft caking
Causes
Prolonged storage in high temperature place
Paint can (container) not sealed with the lid
securely, allowing the solution to evaporate and
water to enter the can.
Paint mixed with a different brand of paint or curing
agent before storage
Diluted with improper thinner Causes:
Specific gravity of the pigment too large
Paint pigment proportion too large
Paint viscosity too low
Countermeasure:
Seal the paint can (container) with the lid securely,
and store it in a cool 68°F (20°C or below) dark
place.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Countermeasure: Countermeasure:
Store the paint in a cool 68°F (20°C or below) dark Seal the can with the lid securely and store it in a
place. If it is stored for a prolonged period, invert cool 68°F (20°C or below) dark place.
the can periodically.
Action:
Do not store the thinner-diluted paint for a
prolonged period. Stir it up thoroughly before reuse. If the paint skin is thick, discard the paint. If it is
thin, remove the paint skin, stir it up thoroughly and
Action: filtrate it before reuse.
Discard the hard deposit (hard caking). If the
deposit is soft (soft caking), stir it up thoroughly to
make the density equal in the can before reuse.
Separated Varnish (Clear-up)
Paint containing pigment separates into two parts

during storage producing the clear part in the upper
Skinning
part of the can, and the pigment in the lower part
of the can.
Paint surface gets skin on top of it.
It tends to appear on the air-dry type paint. Paint
surface gets hardened by the oxygen in the air,
creating the paint skin.
Causes:
Prolonged storage in high temperature place.
Paint viscosity too low.
Causes:
Paint mixed with a different brand of paint.
Can not sealed with the lid securely.
Paint volume in the can decreased, causing
increased space ratio in the can (air-dry type)
Countermeasure:
Avoid prolonged storage in high temperature place.
If the paint is stored for a prolonged period, invert
the can periodically.
Do not return the paint diluted with the thinner to
the original can.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Action: • pH paper.
Stir up the paint thoroughly before reuse. • Measurement of the thickness using FE / NFE
coating thickness meters for ferrous (FE) and
non-ferrous metals and non-magnetic steel
Diagnosis and Damage Assessment (NFE) - magnetic process on steel panels, eddy
current process on non-metals.
Paint concerns, regardless of their causes, are part
of the everyday work in the paint shop. Correct A test method where the traces of testing can be
damage assessment and determination of the easily removed again is the finger nail test. With
cause are preconditions for a professional suitable experience the existing hardness of the
resolution of a paint concern. paint can be determined.
Paint concerns can still occur through a variety of Test methods where the paint is partially destroyed
causes, despite improved paint materials and new are:
spray methods. • Pencil hardness test.
NOTE: A first appraisal of the paint damage should • Adhesion test using adhesive tape.
be done before cleaning. External factors such as • Lattice cut test process to check the strength of
rust, droppings, incorrect or insufficient paint care adhesion.
can then be more easily detected. Under certain circumstances these test methods
Diagnosis is best done in daylight but not in direct are not enough for a certain diagnosis. In this case,
sunlight. Exact evaluation can also be done under paint diagnosis under laboratory conditions must
artificial light from special luminescent lamps. be performed.
Paint damage guide Measuring and testing equipment for

painted surfaces
The most important paint damage concerns which
make a paint repair necessary are: Coating thickness measuring devices
• Damage from biological paint contamination Magnifying glass
such as bird or insect droppings, tree resin and
aphids. pH paper (together with water)
• Chemical paint damage caused by industrial Suitable photographic equipment with macro lens
contaminants such as smoke, fuel, acids, oils. Shine measuring equipment
• Mechanical damage caused by stone impact
during operation, scratches in the car wash and
parking. Paint damage caused by environmental
• Damage caused by faults in treatment. factors
Application defects such as paint runs or orange
peel. • Bee droppings
• Dirt inclusions in the paint layer, e.g. caused by • Bird droppings
dust in top coat or textile lint. • Insects
• Damage due to corrosion. • Tree resin and sap
Before repair of such paint concerns, exact • Aphid secretions
diagnosis must be performed to determine the • Tar spots
cause exactly. On the spot diagnoses using simple • Cement, plaster and slaked lime
aids and processes are often enough. • Rust film/deposits from industrial fallout
Diagnosis without disturbing the paint is done by: • Battery acid
• Optical inspection without visual aids, under • Brake fluid
suitable light conditions from a suitable angle
In all the cases of paint damage described
and correct distance.
below, if the damage is irreversible a new paint
• Optical inspection with the help of a magnifying finish must be applied.
glass.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Paint damage cause by bee droppings
Bee droppings can be recognized on a paint

surface through its yellow or brown color and
sausage or drop-like shape with a diameter of 3-4
mm.
Cause/damage pattern:
• In combination with heat and high air humidity,
bee droppings leave discolorations and cause
paint decomposition.
• The paint can be destroyed down to the filler.
Repair of damage:
• If the damage is light, perform a polishing repair.
Paint damage caused by insects
At insect impact locations on the hood, roof and

bumper, small etched or etched through paint
marks with partially visible spots of filler.
• The top coat layer is destroyed in a short time
by surface swelling and etching.
Repair of damage:
• Colliding insects stick to the paint surface. In
• If the damage is light, perform a polishing repair.
combination with moisture and heat, because
of the resulting acids the insect bodies sink into
the paint top coat.
Paint damage caused by bird droppings
• The corrosion is G, C, U or O shaped and is
Bird dropping damage appears most often as matt, only a few millimeters thick.
etched topcoat areas of various sizes. If left on the
vehicle for a long time, crack formation and etching
down to the filler will occur.
• Bird droppings are particularly harmful in
combination with heat and moisture. The urea
(white part) has a very high salt content and is
very aggressive.
• The intensity of the damage varies depending
on the type, quantity, contact time and extent.
• Cracks, etching, marks up to dissolution of the
top coat are the results.
Repair of damage:
• Wash the vehicle, treat the affected area with
insect remover. Clean the paint surface several
times.
• Protect with hard wax.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Paint damage caused by tree resin or sap
Small yellow-brown marks or drops on the

horizontal parts of the vehicle. The drops melt in
sunlight. Resin damage only occurs in the warm
summer months.
• Because of their chemical composition, tree
resins combine with or adhere very well to paint
top coats and cause them to swell. The higher
the temperature, the more intensive is the
chemical bonding between the resin and the
paint topcoat surface. Repair of damage:
• Remove the excrement as soon as possible.
• Small single matt locations without etching can
be repaired using a polishing repair.
Paint damage caused by tar spots
Yellow or dark marks.

• Firmly stuck spots of tar which lead to
discoloration of the surface. In some cases
penetration through the clear lacquer into the
Repair of damage: top coat.
• Soak several times using a cloth saturated with
a petrol & paraffin mixture.
NOTE: After successful cleaning the top coat must
be preserved.
• Swellings can be removed by warming.
Paint damage from aphid secretions
Small, round, matt marks about 1 mm diameter

and etching with small islands down to the filler.
Fresh aphid excrement looks like small drops of
honey. Repair of damage:
Cause/damage pattern: • Clean the paint surface with tar remover and
• Aphids produce a mixture of starch, leaf acid polish.
and sugar from sap in leaves. Under the effects
of warming and moisture this can turn into
alcohol. Paint damage caused by cement, plaster
• The round shape of the damage and the island and slaked lime
of intact paint are typical.
Damage appears as whitish matt marks on the top
coat.
• Corrosive alkaline compounds interacting with
moisture.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: Never try to remove the particles of
industrial fallout by polishing or rubbing!
• Use cleaning dough.
Damage caused by battery acid.
Splashes of battery acid caused by carelessly

topping up the battery.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulphuric
acid. When working near the battery, or
where there is battery acid on the vehicle
Repair of damage: body, protect the skin and eyes from
• Wash immediately if the contamination is fresh. contact with the acid. If battery acid
contacts the skin or enters the eyes, flush
• If the contamination has dried on, dissolve and the affected area immediately with water
neutralise it with vinegar, then thoroughly wash (flush for at least 15 minutes) and call a
off with water and rinse. doctor without delay. If acid is swallowed,
• Rectify mild damage using a polishing repair. call a doctor immediately. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Rust film/deposits from industrial fallout
NOTE: High temperatures accelerate the attack
Small round marks, about 1 mm in size, in all on the top coat. At 50°C the top coat layer breaks
shades from black, grey, blue to reddish, on the down after about 15 minutes!
horizontal surfaces of the vehicle. Cause/damage pattern:
Cause/damage pattern: • Etching of the paint layer to decomposition of
• Deposits from oil fired systems and industrial the paint finish.
plant, especially at high humidities and inversion
weather conditions, cause damage to the paint
top coat.
• As the activity time increases so called rust
halos form. They spread as long as the deposits
corrode.
• Industrial fallout containing iron will no longer
be removable after a few days!
Repair of damage:
• Flush the acid splashes with plenty of water and
neutralize with car washing liquid.
• If the contact time of the acid was short, perform
a polishing repair.
Paint damage caused by brake fluid.

Repair of damage:
Careless handling of brake fluid. The glycols
• Remove the dust using an industrial fallout contained in the fluid cause swellings.
remover and thoroughly wash.
• Polish the paint surface.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Cause/damage pattern: Repair of damage:
• The temperature and contact time are critical. • Sand or blast out.
Splashes lead to loss of shine and lightening of • Use anti-corrosion primer.
color.
• Apply top coat.
Damage due to corrosion
Blistering/rusting below
Air or water filled blister-shaped raised areas in the

paint film.
• Overpainting corroded steel panel.
• Condensation in the spray air.
Repair of damage: • Sanding water not dried out or salt crystal
residues.
• Flush immediately with plenty of water.
• Road chippings and road winter grit containing
• The swellings can often be made to recede
salt.
completely by treatment with the radiant heater
or in the paint drying oven at max. 60°C for
about 1 hour.
Mechanical damage
Stone impact damage or mechanical

damage
Mechanical damage caused by impact of stones

or other hard objects and extending down to the
metal panel lead very quickly to corrosion and
rusting under the paint on the adjoining surface. Repair of damage:
Cause/damage pattern: • Sand the affected area of damage or the body
• Paint damage caused from the outside, down component and re-create the paint finish.
to filler, primer or metal panel. • More severe and larger areas of rusting below
must be repaired using the corresponding repair
painting, Repair Level III or IV.
Damage caused by faults in treatment

• Craters
• Paint boils
• Adhesion defects
• Adhesion defects - clear lacquer
• Sanding scores
• Formation of stripes
• Peeling/blistering on plastic parts
• Blistering on polyester material
• Peroxide marks in metallic paints
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
• Crack formation Repair of damage:
• Shrinking back/zone edge marks • Sand paint surface, clean with silicone remover
• Blistering and apply one thin spray pass. Let it begin to
dry well, then apply several thin and dry sprayed
• Etching
passes.
• Paint wrinkles/puckering
• Cloud formation
• Spots/metallics Paint boils
• Metamerism/color deviations
Small, hard, closed or burst blisters in the paint top
• Washing out coat. They appear locally in groups or spread
• Loss of gloss individually across the whole surface. Sanding
• Covering ability/areas of thin paint opens up a larger cavity, under which the primer
• Flow problems/orange peel can often be seen.
• Dirt embedded in metallic base paint Cause/damage pattern:
• Dirt embedded in top coat • Paint applied in layers which were too thick.
• Water marks • Specified flash-off and drying times between
• Paint runs coats were not adhered to.
• Swirl marks • Specified working viscosity and spray pressure
were not adhered to.
• Use of unsuitable hardener and thinner
Craters materials. (Solvent combinations in paint system
not optimally matched).
Crater-like single or extensively occurring • Poor booth conditions.
depressions with raised edges, in top coat or the
intermediate layers.
• Substrate not adequately cleaned with silicone
remover.
• Spray air contaminated by oil residues and
water accumulations.
• Filter ceiling not adequate for requirements.
• Use of polishes, cleaning agents or sprays (e.g.
interior sprays) containing silicone.
• Oil, wax, grease, silicone containing residues.
• Working clothes contaminated by materials
containing silicone. Repair of damage:
• Single boil blisters can be removed using
polishing.
• After thorough drying, sand the top coat at the
affected areas, clean with silicone remover and
re-paint. Fill any fine pores still present with
2-component acrylic filler.
• On larger areas of damaged topcoat, sand
completely away and apply new paint finish.
Adhesion defects
Whole coating detached from substrate or

individual layers one from another. Sometimes
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
adhesion defects can only be noticed after an
external influence such as stone impact.
• Substrate not adequately prepared (rust, grease,
moisture, sanding, cleaning).
• Unsuitable material used.
• Drying times, flash-off times too short.
• Base paint not sprayed wet-in-wet, instead the
intermediate drying times were too long.
• Failure to intermediate sand.
• Condensation formed because of temperature
fluctuations. Repair of damage:
• Unprofessional preparation (especially on • Refinish sanding and recreate the paint finish.
plastics).
• Overheated CDP/intermediate filler.
Sanding scores
Single or wide area clusters of scoring or sanding

marks, often with raised edges. Noticeable on
metallic paints as light-dark stripes.
• Stopper sanded too coarsely.
• Filler sanded too coarsely.
• Filler not thoroughly dried bfore sanding.
• Old paint sanded too coarsely.
• Soft elastic substrates, e.g. TPA base, treated
with thinners which was too aggressive and
Repair of damage: therefore etched.
• Sand out the damage and recreate the paint • Top coat applied too thinly.
finish. Create the paint finish strictly in
accordance with the general technical
information.
Adhesion defects in clear lacquer.
Clear lacquer detched from base paint.

• Base paint layer too thick.
• Intermediate and final flash-off times of base
paint too long.
• Incorrect mixture ratio clear lacquer/hardner. Repair of damage:
• If the damage pattern is minimal, after the top
coat has dried fine sand the paint surface and
refurbish by polishing.
• If the damage is great or on metallic paints, sand
the paint surface or substrates and if necessary
remove them, then cover the bare metal and
re-paint.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Formation of stripes
Differing, stripe shaped color/effect formations in

dark/light areas of a metallic paint finish.
• Spray gun (nozzle) not perfect.
• Incorrect spray pressure.
• Thinners not suitable.
• Incorrect spray viscosity.
• Flash-off time too short.
• Unsuitable working temperature.
Repair of damage:
• Sand away faulty paint coats and re-apply paint
finish.
• In extreme cases use a new part.
Blistering on polyester material
Color shade differences or marks in paintwork

subsequently applied to previously unpainted
plastic material.
Repair of damage: • Plastic material is not suitable for painting.
• Apply base paint evenly. • Incorrect bonding agent.
• Repair spray gun. • Paint used not solvent resistant.
• After clear lacquer has thoroughly dried, sand Repair of damage:
surface and paint again. • Repaint using suitable materials.
• Install unpainted new part (after consulting
customer).
Peeling/blistering on plastic parts
Paint adhesion insufficient between top coat and

filler and/or primer layer. It often happens that the
Peroxide marks in metallic paints
whole of the paint finish detaches from the plastic.
After longer period of drying, abnormal marks
Cause/damage pattern: where the color shade varies.
• Plastic item not cleaned sufficiently, not or Cause/damage pattern:
inadequately tempered.
• Too much hardener added to polyester stopper
• Unsuitable cleaning agent used. (over 3% can cause this damage pattern).
• Unsuitable materials used. • Polyester stopper not well enough mixed.
• Moisture.
• Paint finish underbaked or overbaked.
• Poor or lack of intermediate sanding.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Shrinking back/zone edge marks
Lifting or dropping in of edge zones (edges which

accentuate themselves in the top coat), flow
problems and loss of shine in top coat.
• Old paintwork not rubbed down to a seamless
transition.
• Stopper and filler on a viscoplastic base primer.
• Filler sanded and overpainted when not
thoroughly hard.
• Previous materials overworked too early,
Repair of damage: substrate not sufficiently hardened.
• Sand, fill with polyester or epoxide filler and • Primer applied in layers which were too thick,
re-paint. and not dried for long enough.
• Sanding paper too coarse.
Crack formation • Top coat thinned too much.
Cracks of different lengths and depths running in

all directions.
• Layers too thick.
• Painted several times.
• Temperature fluctuations.
• Mechanical effects e.g. distortions.
• Substrate not thoroughly hardened.
• Old paint not completely dried out.
• No or insufficient hardener added.
• 2-component materials used on nitro or TPA. Repair of damage:
• After hardening off the top coat, fine sand the
surface and polish up, apply filler if necessary
and paint once more.
Blistering
Small, spot-like, air-filled or water-filled blister

shaped high-spots in the paint construction. Their
dimensions can range from pin-head to pin-point
size in a closed paint film. Arrangement and
accumulation very variable. In the advanced
stages, circular flaking of the paint from the
Repair of damage: substrate. These are neither boils nor corrosion.
• Sand away layers until sound substrate is Cause/damage pattern:
reached and create new paint finish (prime, fill, • Moisture absorption by substrate.
apply topcoat).
• Insufficient drying of the substrate after wet
sanding (especially on polyester material).
• Humidity too high before painting; condensation
formation because of temperature fluctuations.
• Pores/sink holes in substrate not sanded out.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
• Polyester material not covered. Paint wrinkles/puckering
• Sweat from hands.
Lifting/puckering of the paint surface.
• Salts and minerals in sanding water.
• Spray air contaminated. Cause/damage pattern:
• First paint not hardened through or can be
etched.
• Areas of clear lacquer which were sanded
through to base paint have not been not isolated
with filler, or with unsuitable filler.
• Unsuitable substrate (e.g. spray can painting
with TPA or nitro).
• Use of unsuitable primer, paint and thinner
materials.
• Paint systems not matched to each other.
• In wet-in-wet process, specified flash-off times
not adhered to.
Repair of damage: • Synthetic resin top coat (alkyd resin) worked
• Sand away damage, matt sand remainder of over too soon.
surface, clean with silicone remover, fill and
re-paint.
Etching
The base paint is etched by the clear lacquer. This

causes the aluminum pigments to change their
alignments. The color of the etched base paint
seems more grey than that of normal base paint.
Result is that the surface structure of the clear
lacquer becomes increasingly more matt.
Repair of damage:
• Base painted too wet.
• After thorough drying, completely remove the
• No intermediate flash-off time.
top coat together with the attacked substrate at
• Layers too thick. the affected areas and re-create a new paint
finish.
• Before applying top coat, rub down the complete
surface.
Cloud formation
Differing, blotchy color/effect formations in

dark/light areas of a metallic paint finish.
• Spray gun, spray nozzle, spray pressure not
perfect.
Repair of damage: • Varying spray viscosity, spraying method,
• Sand and re-paint. flash-off times, spray booth temperature.
• Thinners not suitable.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
• Use of paints with pigmentation which was not
compatible with the standard, e.g. a green can
be formulated from yellow and blue, or directly
from green.
• Use of an unsuitable mixed or ready made paint
to re-tone.
Repair of damage:
• Droplet method before clear lacquer application.
• After clear lacquer has thoroughly dried, sand
surface and re-paint.
Spots
Repair of damage:
Points rising up from the paint film.
• Repaint using the correct paint.
• Metallic base paint sprayed too dry, so that the
metal particles could not incorporate into the Washing out
paint. The clear lacquer could not cover these
vertical standing particles because the spray air On paint which has been newly applied but not yet
was too hot or the booth temperature was too dried, the interaction of surface tension and very
high. different specific gravities of the different pigments
can lead to swirl-like turbulence which results in
separation of the pigments.
• Layer too thick, paint not stirred enough.
Repair of damage:
• After the paint surface has dried, lightly sand it
with grade P800 sanding paper, clean with
silicone remover and re-apply clear lacquer.
Repair of damage:
Metamerism/color deviations • Sand and re-paint.
Noticeable when identical color shades undergo a

change of hue as the light source changes Loss of gloss
(daylight/artificial light). Different pigment
composition between original and repair paint. Milky, dreary tarnishing of the paint with more or
less even loss of gloss.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Cause/damage pattern: Repair of damage:
• Cold with low air humidity. • Sand surface and recreate the paint finish.
• Heat with high air humidity.
• Substrate can be etched.
Flow problems/orange peel
• Hardener fault or wrong hardener used.
• Paint thinned too much. Surface structure bumpy, grained. The surface is
• Proportion of pigment too high because of poor similar to the peel of an orange.
stirring. Cause/damage pattern:
• Not optimum drying. • Paint viscosity too high.
• Use of fast evaporating, highly volatile thinners.
• Booth temperature too high.
• Spray gun distance too great, too little material
applied.
• Nozzle too large.
• Incorrect spray pressure.
Repair of damage:
• After drying, remove the matt effect by polishing.
If unsuccessful, rub down complete area and
paint again.
Covering ability/areas of thin paint

Repair of damage:
Different color shades in the surface. The minimum • Small surfaces: fine sand and polish.
layer thickness is not achieved here. The effects
range from local minor shade variations through • Sand out the surface and recreate the paint
mottled spray zones to completely missing top coat. finish.
• No correct, uniform substrate (effect paint). Dirt embedded in metallic base paint.
• On three-layer systems, wrong filler.
Inclusions of contamination in metallic base paint,
• Insufficient top coat application.
of different sizes and shapes (grains or lint).
• Dust was not properly removed from the surface
to be painted.
• Paint material not sieved.
• Function of the painting facilities not optimum.
• Filter contaminated.
• Wearing unsuitable clothing.
Repair of damage:
• Sand and repaint.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Dirt embedded in top coat
Inclusions of contamination in top coat or under

paint layers, of different sizes and shapes (grains
or lint). Optical adverse effect.
• Dust was not properly removed from the surface
to be painted.
• Paint material not sieved.
• Function of the painting facilities not optimum.
• Filter contaminated.
• Wearing unsuitable clothing. Repair of damage:
• Rub down only slight marks with sanding paper
grade P1000 - P1200 and then polish.
• For heavy marking, sand the surface matt, clean
with silicone remover and repaint.
Paint runs
Wave-like paint run tracks in top coat or in an

intermediate layer on vertical surfaces. Mostly in
the area of swage lines, seams or openings (there
they are paint runs, otherwise curtains).
Repair of damage: Cause/damage pattern:
• Single inclusions: after thorough hardening, • Uneven paint application.
sand out using 1200 - 1500 grade paper and • The specified viscosity was not complied with.
repolish using a suitable silicone-free sanding • Use of unsuitable thinner materials.
or painting paste.
• Air, material or room temperature too low.
• Large area contamination: sand and repaint.
• Layers too thick.
• Spray gun (nozzle) not perfect.
Water marks
Ring shaped marks appearing on the paint surface.

• Evaporation of water droplets on freshly painted
and not yet fully hardened paint finishes (mostly
only found on horizontal surfaces).
• Layer too thick.
• Drying time too short.
• Hardening faults or hardener no longer useable.
• Use of unsuitable thinners.
Repair of damage:
• After thorough drying, sand unevenness flat, if
necessary leave to dry afterwards.
• Small areas of damage can be equalised using
the paint plane, then sand, polish or repaint.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Swirl marks
Three dimensional appearance in the paint surface

in the form of smears or blotches. This effect is
intensified in direct sunlight.
• Polishing using polishing machine on paint
which has not yet hardened throughout.
• Polishing intervals too long or none at all.
• Pressure too high while polishing.
• Incorrect polishing material or polishing tool.
Repair of damage:
• Allow the paint to harden completely and then
polish.
• If the damage is irreversible, rub down and apply
new clear lacquer.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225818en
http://vnx.su
Tools and Equipment for Paint Repairs

Compressor compressor enables you to use spray guns and
other air pressure tools. By the structural and
The compressor is one of the most important functional differences, the compressors are
machines in the paint workshop. A compressor is classified as following, and the most appropriate
a machine that squeezes air and raises its models and types are required to be selected to
pressure, and the high pressure air from the meet the purpose and application required.
Number of Pressure Steps

Step Number One Step Pressure Two Step Pressure
Application When air consumption is comparatively small When over 980 kPa (10 kgf/cm2)
of air pressure is constantly
required, or when the drop in air
pressure is expected to become
very large under heavy compres-
sion load by the use of many
machines at the same time, or
when long piping is required for
its installation.
Control Methods
Mode Automatic Pressure Invertor Mode Automatic Unloader Mode
Operation Intermittent Operation Continuous Operation
Feature The motor shuts off when the air pressure By the function of unloader
exceeds its specified amount. It starts its valves, no-load operation starts
operation automatically when the pressure when the air pressure exceeds a
goes down. This is suitable for on-again, off- prescribed level, and air pressure
again operation of air tools by the same one operation starts when the pres-
operator under the normal air pressure sure goes down. This is suitable
ranging from 785 to 980 kPa (7 to 10 kgf/cm2). for continuous and simultaneous
use of several units of air tools
under the normal air pressure
ranging from 490 to 686 kPa (5
to 7 kgf/cm2).
Reciprocating Compressor Screw Compressor
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Where to Place the Compressor? 2. Drain the water in the tank, and inspect the drain
valve for oil drainage. Especially in case of the
1. Put the compressor on the flat floor, and ensure polyurethane resin coating of the two-liquid type,
that there is adequate ventilation, avoiding be sure to keep supplying clean air constantly
moisture and dust. because the hardening agent will not always react
2. Keep the room temperature lower than 104°F properly with water to give you the expected
(40°C) even in summer and avoid direct performance of the surface coating.
sunlight. 3. Do overall cleaning of the compressor
3. Provide ample space for maintenance and
Monthly Check-up:
inspection, and keep a distance of over 300 mm
(11.8 in.) from the wall. 1. Cleaning of air filter.
4. When you install the compressor in the 2. Check safety valve.
workshop, be sure to use the explosion-proof
Check the tension and damage of V-belt.
type to prevent fire and explosion hazards.
Air Piping
When you install air piping in the workshop, or use

tools by air hose, the following points are to be
noted.
Pressure drop: The smaller the inside diameter
of the air pipe and air hose size will drop the
pressure, and impair the separation of air and
water. Use the largest possible inside diameter.
Water removal: The compressed air from the
compressor contains water and produces water
drops. If the as-is status of the air is used for the
sprayer, it may produce a surface coating defect
Check and Inspection of the Compressor and the risk of machine troubles. Install the ability
to for remove water from the compressed air. Give
Daily Check-up: a small amount of tilt to the piping in horizontal
1. Oil level Check. direction, to assure that the water and oil will not
remain in the pipe.
Example of piping in a Paintshop
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Necessary Attachment Air Filter
Air Dryer The air filter is designed to separate water drops

and dust in the compressed air, applying the
The freeze-dry type air dryer with a built-in freezer swirling motion of the built-in deflector. The air filter
forcefully freezes the hot air from the compressor. is mounted between the air dryer and air
As it is different from the natural air cooling method transformer. It is designed to remove even the very
by making the air piping longer, the generation of fine spray from the cooled and compressed air.
dew in the air pipes and air hoses can be prevented
because the water contained in the air can be
removed under the lower temperature than the
normal room temperature.
Air Regulator
The air regulator reduces the air pressure from the
compressor to the desired pressure level when
employing the spray guns and air pressure tools.
The built-in filter has a function of removing the
water and dust in the compressed air. The air is
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
positioned at the final end of the air pipe. Air 1. The forced exhausting system will help protect
coming out of the air regulator is directly employed the workers from the inhalation of the sprayed mist
for spray. Check to the air regulator including the and hazardous organic solvent gases.
drainage daily. 2. The intake air filters will send the clean air to
protect the surface coating from the dirt and dust.
3. The exhaust air filters will collect the sprayed
mist and protect the work site from the pollution
and also protect the surrounding environment from
the pollution.
Kinds of spray booth
Natural Intake / Forced Exhaust Type: This is a
type which forces only the exhaust system, thereby
keeping the state of the internal booth under a
reduced pressure. This state creates a drawback
of taking in dust and dirt more likely from doors
and crevices.
Forced Intake / Forced Exhaust Type (Push Pull
Spray Booth Type): This is a type which forces both of the
intake and exhaust systems, thereby preventing
Spray coating produces a lot of spray mist and the invasion of dust from outside, simply by keeping
solvent gases. This is not only bad for health and the pressure in the booth a little bit higher. This
safety, but this will also cause various kinds of system can meet the requirement for organic
defects in the work of the painting as well as solvent occupation which is stipulated in the
produce environmental pollution. Therefore, it is Occupational Health and Safety Laws. Therefore,
necessary to facilitate the spray booth. when you use the spray booth, it is necessary to
Function of spray booth: install the stipulated Push Pull Type.

1 Exhaust fan 5 Intake tertiary filter
2 Exhaust secondary filter 6 Intake fan
3 Exhaust primary filter 7 Exhaust pit
4 Intake secondary filter
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Drying Facilities Far -infrared drying
This system works by the radiant heating of
The heat drying method has such advantages as
far-infrared radiation from the tube and panel
saving more time, better surface coating
heated by gas and electricity.
performance, etc. than the normal temperature
drying method.
There are three kinds of heat transfer, by thermal
conduction, convection and radiations. For drying
the surface coating, mainly convection and
radiation of hot air and infrared rays are employed.
In case of partial repair job, a transportable unit of
the drying facility is generally used. Hot-are blower
type drying is employed for the overall coating.
Near-infrared drying
This uses infrared bulbs as its heat reservoir, and
it is easy to handle and enables you to change the
irradiation angle as you like. The structure is very
simple and it is easy to assemble. Because of
these reasons, this facility is widely used.
Hot air blow type drying facilities

The hot-air blower type drying oven is designed to
dry the surface coating by heated air, and this
system uses heavy oil, kerosene, gases, steam,
electricity, etc. as its heat reservoir.
Generally, for the sake of safety, the forced drying
temperature should be kept at 176°F (80°C) or
lower degrees. Baking dry means the reaction and
cure of baking and coating by the high temperature
of 212 to 302°F (100 to 150°C). When the forced
drying is given to the spray and touch up repair
painting, it is recommended to react under the
relatively lower temperature at 176°F (80°C) so as
not to give any damages to the battery and
electronic circuits of the vehicles under repairs.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Hot air
2 Ehaust duct
Direct heating oven by hot air

The air heated by burner is sent to the oven
through the fan and circulated. Thermal efficiency
is high. The facility is compact and the cost is
reasonable. Time for increasing temperature is
short. The influence of the combustion gas
elements may cause some defects on the coating
surface.
Spray Gun - Component
Spray guns commonly used for refinishing work
are typically made from aluminium alloy, with
stainless steel or aluminum components, necessary
to resist corrosion with waterborne materials.
Indirect heating oven by hot air type

The burner heats the heat exchanger and air is
sent to the oven. There is no danger of explosion
because there is no contact with flammable
material inside. Smoke from the incomplete burning
does not flow into the oven. The efficiency of this
system is not as good as the direct heating oven.
It requires longer heating time. This system is bulky
and expensive.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Spray Gun Parts
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su

1 Nozzle set (air cap visible only) 8 Air piston, not visible
2 Self tensioning needle packing, not visible 9 Air micrometer
3 Trigger 10 Fluid adjustment
4 Self tensioning air piston packing, not 11 Material sieve, not visible
visible 12 Non-drip device
5 Stepless regulation for round- and flat
spray
Spray Gun – Airflow Control
6 Colour Code System
7 Air connection G ¼ outside A clean, dry air supply is necessary for successful
application.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Air pressure can be adjusted by the air pressure control valve.
Spray Gun - Fluid Control Trigger now squeezed, allowing fluid needle to
retract from tip and let material through fluid tip.
The fluid control screw effectively restricts the
amount of needle travel, which in turn reduces or
increases the flow of fluid for atomization.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Spray Gun - Atomization The air supply breaks down the liquid material into
millions of minute particles.
Atomization only takes place outside the air cap,
this is where both the fluid material and the air
supply become one.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Filler and spray guns The spray gun is the most important implement in
the paint shop. Application of paint using the spray
NOTE: Regular maintenance, cleaning after use gun can produce a layer with absolutely constant
and careful handling of all individual parts of the thickness and a smooth paint surface.
spray gun are essential for a high-quality paint
finish.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Principle of operation
Because of the construction design and with the

aid of compressed air, a spray-ready paint mixture
is dragged out of the container to the nozzle by the
Types of spray gun
venturi effect, and is applied to the surface being
worked.
When the trigger of the spray gun is pressed to the
first pressure point, only the compressed air
passage opens. If the trigger is pressed further,
the nozzle needle displaces and the air stream
drags paint with it at high speed. This produces a
spray mist consisting of micro-droplets of paint.
Item Description
1 Suction-beaker spray gun
2 Flow-beaker spray gun
In the flow-beaker spray gun, the paint container
is mounted above the spray gun. On the
suction-beaker spray gun, it is below.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Furthermore, spray guns are categorized by their HVLP spray guns
air pressure requirement into high and low pressure
guns.
High pressure guns have the disadvantage that
they exhibit high consumption of energy and
materials. The spray pressure they require is
between 1 - 6 bar.
Because of the high air pressure and the large
amount of air needed, the result is a powerful paint
mist formation (paint transfer rate approx. 35%).
Current practice is mainly to work with reduced
mist spray systems (RP and HVLP systems).
Reduced pressure (RP) guns are optimized high
pressure guns which have an input pressure at the
gun of approx. 2.5 bar and an atomization pressure
at the air cap of 1 - 2 bar. In practice this spray
technology is preferred for spraying clear lacquer
because of the finer atomization.
Low pressure guns have the advantage that they
exhibit minimal paint mist formation and because
of this the paint transfer rate rises to approx. 65%.
The spray pressure required in this case is between
1 - 5 bar. Nozzle sizes from 1 - 2.2 mm can be
used.
Item Description
1 Quantity control
2 Working pressure control
3 Spray pattern control
The high volume low pressure (HVLP) spray gun
is a high performance spray gun which forms a
soft, fine and homogenous spray pattern. The
atomization pressure at the air cap is 0.7 bar when
the input pressure at the gun is 2.0 bar.
The low atomization pressure of 0.7 bar together
with greatly reduced spray mist provide high
material ejection. The low nozzle internal pressure
minimizes rebound of the paint droplets from the
object and thus the proportion of overspray.
This spray technology has a very high application
efficiency. By matching the size of the nozzle, the
HVLP spray gun can be used for all repair painting
materials.
HVLP spray guns are often used in practice for the
application of water based paints.
Mini spray guns are often used for small, localized
touching-up work. Use of HVLP spray technology
and nozzle sizes of 0.3 - 1.2 mm permits very fine
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
work, so that the area of the repair can be kept as Paint preparation system (PPS)
small as possible.
In order to ensure that a spray gun operates
efficiently for a long time, careful cleaning is
absolutely vital after use.
NOTE: During cleaning you must distinguish
between water based and solvent based materials.
Cleaning by hand:
• Empty the paint beaker immediately after use.
• Flush the gun with cleaner.
• Clean it inside and outside with a brush.
• Dismantle the gun to clean it thoroughly.
• Clean the air cap using a suitable brush.
• Use nozzle cleaning needles to clean bores and
nozzles.
A spray gun washing machine is recommended if
the painting work is highly intensive.
New types of paint processing systems are
replacing the conventional mixing beaker, filter and
spray gun flow beaker. This reduces the amount
of solvent required for cleaning and the amount of
routine waste which remains.
Item Description
1 Beaker
2 Color bag
With this system, which is suitable for both suction
and flow beaker spray guns, only one beaker is
required for mixing and painting.
A bag is inserted in the beaker, in which paint can
be mixed, processed and stored after use or
completely disposed of.
The small quantity of paint remaining in the gun is
removed using a minimum quantity of solvent from
the pipette bottle.
The amount of cleaner used is reduced because
only the spray gun needs to be cleaned.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Hand and machine sanding tools Sanding is used to prepare a surface for application
of a paint layer, enabling it to adhere well. Sanding
materials have a great influence on the quality of
a repair paint finish. The correct sanding medium
must therefore be chosen for every material.
During sanding, material is mechanically removed
from a surface.
In the paint shop, Carborundum or silicon carbide
abrasive on a substrate of paper or cloth are the
most common sanding materials used.
Carborundum is a very hard mineral consisting
mostly of aluminum oxide. During use
Carborundum becomes blunt and wears away.
Silicon carbide has a very high degree of hardness,
but is more brittle than Carborundum. When silicon
carbide is used, the mineral grains break. New long
and pointed profiles are formed.
Use of the correct sanding paper depends on the
application, the substrates and the tools used. The
following table can be used as a guideline, but the
recommendations of the supplier of the auxiliary
materials and additive materials must be followed.
Application Working area Grade Sanding system

Body work, corrosion Equalizing paint system to P150 Orbital sander, dry
damage transition
Hand sanding, dry
Stopper Rough sand P80 - P150 Orbital sander, dry
Fine sand P240 - P320 Orbital sander, dry
Hand sanding, dry
Spray stopper Rough sand P120 - P180 Orbital sander, dry
Fine sand P240 - P320 Orbital sander, dry
Hand sanding, dry
Filler sanding work Filler fine sand P400 - P500 Orbital sander, dry
P800 - P1200 Hand sand, wet
Top coat Old paint P400 - P500 Orbital sand, dry
P800 - P1200 Hand sand, wet
Touch-up paint surfaces P1000 - P2000 Hand sand, wet
Paint damage Sanding out faults P2000 - P3000 Hand sand, wet
Soft Pads are recommended for manual refinishing structured fleece. Because of this, it is very flexible,
of contours, curves and difficult to reach areas. On does not kink and does not slip in the hand. This
a Soft Pad the abrasive is found on a coarse enables a fine and even finish to be achieved.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
• Tools with a rigid backing pad do not adjust to
fit the surface. They are used for flat surfaces.
• Tools with a flexible backing pad are used for
fine sanding of a surface because they adjust
to the shape of the surface.
• Build up an even working pressure over the
sanding surface.
• Keep the sanding paper tight on the tool (use
self-gripping systems).
• Align the extraction holes in the sanding paper
with the holes in the tool.
• Guide the tool flat over the surface to be worked.
Do not tilt it.
Hand sanding can be carried out dry but also wet.
Wet and dry paper with particle size P 80 to P 1200
is used for this in the paint field.
Ways of sanding
Sanding tools are driven either by electricity or

compressed air.
Item Description
1 Sanding machine
2 Polishing machine
3 Orbital sander
The disadvantage of electrically driven machines
is that their own weight is high compared with
pneumatic systems. They also become warm
during work. They do not however need any special
operating equipment for their energy supply.
Sanding machines are categorized by their type of
sanding movement.
Notes on working with sanding tools:

Rotational sanders
On these machines the sanding paper turns.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
• Advantage: On the orbital sander, stroke settings of approx. 3
– Ideal for heavy sanding work. mm for fine sanding work and approx. 5 - 7 mm for
coarse sanding work have been established.
– Fast and aggressive sanding possible.
• Disadvantage:
– Large amount of heat developed. Polishing and finishing tools
– Difficulty sanding flat surfaces.
• Application:
– Removal of old paint layers.
– Preparation of panel for stopper.
– Removal of rust.
Oscillating sander
On these machines the sanding paper oscillates.

The backing pad is rectangular.
• Advantage:
– Large sanding surface. Polishers
– Ideal for large and flat surfaces.
• Disadvantage:
– Hardly useable on rounded surfaces.
– Flexible backing pad not possible.
– Vibrations because of the poor support of the
backing pad.
• Application:
– Sanding of polyester stopper.
– Sanding processes on flat surfaces.
Orbital sander
Towel Buff
On these machines the sanding paper turns and
oscillates.
• Advantage:
– Easy to handle and good sanding power.
– Minimal heat development.
• Disadvantage:
– Not suitable for sanding stopper on flat
surfaces.
– Smooth guidance important, otherwise
sanding marks will occur.
• Application:
– Sanding of paint layers. Wool Buff
– Well suited for final preparation of a primer.
NOTE: Comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations when setting the orbital sander.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Sponge Buff The infrared rays penetrate the air and the paint
The term polishing in the context of paint repairs layer without warming them. Because the infrared
means the elimination of paint flaws and high shine rays are reflected from the steel panel, the paint
polishing of neighboring parts. coat is warmed from the inside outwards.
During polishing the fine sanded surface is returned Advantages of infrared drying:
to a high shine using a special abrasive polish. • The drying process occurs from the inside to
Before the actual polishing, all flaws in the paint the outside.
surface must be removed and the following working • The drying time is shorter than for warm air
procedures must be adhered to: systems.
• Thoroughly clean the vehicle. • Because the infrared dryer consists of several
cassettes which can be switched on
• Remove spray mist from all surfaces. independently, the drying area can be optimally
• Sand out and polish particle inclusions. controlled.
• Sand down paint runs and polish them out. Independent of the manufacturer's instructions,
• Examine the exactness of the color match in pay attention to the following:
daylight.
• Flash-off time of the paint before switching on
• Remove masking edges. the infrared dryer.
• Remove sanding water, sanding dust and polish • Distance between the infrared dryer and the
residues. surface.
After the polishing process the results must be • Duration of the irradiation.
tested using a special test spray.
The most common use of the infrared dryer is to
dry stopper and primers. The wait time between
Infrared drying technology the job steps is shortened without having to use
the painting/drying cabin.
The drying process in a painting/drying cabin The painting/drying cabin can then be used
occurs through heat conductance (convection). exclusively for application and drying of topcoat.
When an infrared dryer is used, the drying process
is through heat radiation. There are two types of infrared dryer:
• Infrared dryer with short wavelength radiation.
• Infrared dryer with medium wavelength
radiation.
As an indication, the following drying times are
listed for some materials (at 80 cm distance):
NOTE: Observe the material manufacturer's and
supplier's specifications.
• Polyester stopper 2 minutes.
• Spray stopper 2 to 7 minutes.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
• Water based primer-filler 7 to 9 minutes. It is primarily used to keep the air free of dust. At
• Primer 3 to 8 minutes. the same time, explosive solvent-air mixture
concentrations are prevented
• Top coat 7 to 10 minutes.
NOTE: Vacuum will lead to contamination of the
newly applied paint. The outside air flows through
Air dryers door gaps, wall joints and other openings and as
it does so, brings dust deposits with it.
The air dryer is suitable in places where drying
needs to be done, but without great outlay The air supply quantity depends on the size of the
(painting/drying cabin or infrared dryer). painting space and the quantity of extracted air.
Enough air must be supplied to cause positive
pressure in the painting space. An air extraction :
air supply ratio of about 1 : 1.05 is sufficient.
The filters should have a dust-removal grade of
not less than 99.8% and must always be kept
clean.
It is especially important that the air supply does
not cause strong air currents in the painting cabin.
If not, the following problems could occur:
• Paint contamination cause by paint mist, which
persists in air eddies and gradually falls on the
fresh paintwork.
NOTE: Air from the compressor is often too cold • Flow problems in the paint because of the high
for effective drying. speed of the air, causing the paint to thicken
very quickly on the surface.
Air dryers use the venturi effect to blow the warm
ambient air over the paint surface in a gentle air • Loss of gloss and wrinkle formation because
flow. the surface dries too fast.
• Painter disturbance while working.
Paint mixing system In modern paint cabins the air supply is provided
from the complete surface of the ceiling. The air
Because of the many different color variants, it is speed should be 0.3 m/sec (measured in the
now seldom possible to store all color shades as unrestricted cross-section of the spray cabin). At
ready-made mixtures. the same time, the air in the cabin should change
about 350 times per hour.
For this reason, vehicle manufacturers make the
mixture proportions of their paints available as color Air extraction is best achieved through extraction
codes. The required color shade can be obtained channels in the floor of the painting cabin.
from the paint mixing system using this color code. NOTE: Refer to the manufacturer's specifications
All the color components are combined according for the operating instructions, safety instructions
to their proportions by weight using a precise and notes on the maintenance of a paint cabin.
computer scales to produce a finished color shade. Smooth walls in the paint cabin should prevent
dust deposits. Regular cleaning is necessary
Painting cabin however.
Special easily washed adhesive-bonding paint can
The air requirement in a painting cabin is large. be applied to the walls to protect the cabin from
The outside air which is drawn in must be passed paint mist.
through filtering and warming equipment. This
particularly applies during colder times of the year
and especially for combined types of building where Other Equipments and tools
the painting cabin is also used as a drying cabin.
Surform
This is designed to use for shaving off the putty
surface and making a rough cut of the piled putty.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
File, Sanding Block Waste

This is designed to use manually for surfacing the Waste materials which are used for repair and
primer surfacer coating. touch up painting workshop should be the one used
but well washed clothes. New clothes will not be
so effective for keeping on and wiping off water,
because new products reserve oil substance which
were used in the manufacturing procedures. Paper
waste has better water and oil absorption than the
cotton, and efficiency for removing water is more
than double of the cotton clothes.
Blade/Spatula
This is used for putting putty on a part deformed,
scratched, and any other holes. A wood blade will
be suitable for the flat space of the steel plate, and
for a curved area, blade of resin or rubber will be
more elastic material, and fits much better.
Tack Cloth
Tack cloth is a cloth dampened with tacky varnish
and used for wiping the dirt, dust, and sand waste
off the coat surface before coating.
Putty Mixing Board

Use for kneading the putty. The material of the
board will be metal, wood, plastic or use some
pieces of paper board and make a disposable
board.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225824en
http://vnx.su
Refinishing Materials
In order to provide best in class paint finish in • Body Shop- CAR-O-LINER
manufacturing and to provide best paint finish in – Collision repair machine
after market repair, Ford India has host of speciality
– Body Alignment cum smart repair machine
paint finish vendors, who provide and supply best
in class paint and allied products. – Mechanical measuring system
– Electronic measuring system
In order to equip Ford India Dealership Bodyshops
with best in class refinish products and to provide – MIG wleding machine
them best in class training and technical – SPOT welding machine
information, Ford has launched BSQC (Body Shop • Preparation Shop - 3M
Quality Care) Program. Dedicated team is deployed – Range of masking products
to ensure all Ford India authorised bodyshops are
aligned with BSQC process and enjoys benefits – Range of preparatory products
from it. – Range of glues and adhesives
BSQC process brings high level decipline in Body – Range of abrasive products
& paint shop repairs in the following: • Paint Shop - Dupont
• Repair approach – Range sanding products
• Transparent estimation – Range of body fillers and putty products
• Smooth cooperation with FPI (Ford preferred – Range of solvents and chemicals
insurance) agencies for claims proposal – Range of base coats
• BSQC certified/approved equipments being – Range of top coats
deployed for repair – Range of metallic/perl coats
• BSQC certified/audited processes being –
followed for quick turn around and defect free
flow of repair After Market Suppliers
• BSQC certified/approved refinish materials are These suppliers are hand picked by Ford India
used to ensure and enhance the repair quality service team after thorough discussion and
and to avoid repeat repair analysis on the products, service offerings and on
• Final inspection is carried out as per stringent job training courses offered.
BSQC certification criterias • Dupont speciality refinish coating products
• Vehicle delivery process as per BSQC (Centari, Standox)
certification norms • Akzo-nobel speciality refinish coating producta
(Sikkens)
BSQC Certified Service/Solution Providers
The manufacturer's instructions must always
In order to provide best in class service/solution,
be followed when dealing with all materials!
a preferred vendor is hand picked in each of the
The information given in the following text is data
body/paint repair protfolio.
which is independent of the manufacturer, and it
should only be used as an indication.
Stopper materials
• 1-component nitro-combination stopper
• 2-component polyester stopper
• 2-component plastic stopper
Use suitable primer to protect from corrosion areas
which have been sanded bare before applying
stopper.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225835en
http://vnx.su
1-component nitro-combination stopper Application 2-component polyester
coarse stopper
Nitro-combination stopper has mostly been
superseded by 2-component polyester stopper. Sanding tool Eccentric, sanding disk
by hand
Fast drying fine stopper for the smoothing of
irregularities. Grade P80 - P150
The working properties of 1-component
nitro-combination stopper can be improved by the Application 2-component polyester
addition of nitro thinners. fine stopper
Drying time increases with thickness of the layer. Use Equalization of uneven-
ness
Application 1-component nitro- Hardener quantity approx. 3 - 5%
combination stopper
Working time approx. 4 - 6 minutes
Layer thickness Max. 80 µm
Drying 20°C approx. 12 minutes
Drying time up to 2 hours at 20°C
Short wavelength infrared
Sand P240 - P400 approx. 4 minutes
Medium wavelength
2-component polyester general stopper infrared approx. 5 - 10
minutes
CAUTIONS: Sanding tool Eccentric, sanding disk
Do not exceed the quantity of hardener by hand
specified by the manufacturer, excess Grade P80 - P240
peroxide can cause staining of the paint
top coat.
Application 2-component polyester
Mix the stopper base and the hardener well glass fiber stopper
to avoid a marble-like effect.
Use Equalization of uneven-
Check that the manufacturer permits use on the ness; blending in of
substrate to which it will be applied. vehicle extensions; repair
2-component polyester stopper is available in of GRP components
coarse and fine grades. The coarse stopper can Hardener quantity approx. 3 - 5%
be used for very uneven areas and surfaces and
fine stopper or spray stopper should be applied Working time approx. 4 - 6 minutes
afterwards. Drying 20°C approx. 12 minutes
Application 2-component polyester Short wavelength infrared
coarse stopper approx. 4 minutes
Use Rough equalization of Medium wavelength
unevenness infrared approx. 5 - 10
minutes
Hardener quantity approx. 3 - 5%
Sanding tool Eccentric, sanding disk
Working time approx. 4 - 6 minutes by hand
Drying 20°C approx. 12 minutes Grade P80 - P150
approx. 4 minutes 2-component polyester fine stopper should always
be applied after 2-component polyester glass fiber
Medium wavelength stopper.
infrared approx. 5 - 10
minutes
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225835en
http://vnx.su
Application 2-component polyester Plastic stoppers are flexible and universally
spray stopper applicable on all types of plastic (except for pure
PE and PP, these are plastics which cannot be
Use Equalization of uneven- painted). The manufacturer's instructions must be
ness very exactly followed in order that no adhesion
Hardener quantity approx. 3 - 5% problems occur. A special plastic etch primer is
specified for some materials.
Layer thickness 200 µm or 4 - 8 spray Primers
passes
Drying 20°C approx. 3 hours Application 1-component primer
Short wavelength infrared Use Isolation of bare sanded
approx. 10 minutes areas.
Medium wavelength Spray gun HVLP 1.3 mm
minutes Spray pressure 2.0 bar
Sanding tool Eccentric, sanding disk Drying 20°C approx. 15 - 20

by hand minutes
Grade P80 - P150; fine sand - 60°C approx. 10 min

P280 Coat application Wet on wet, no interme-
diate sanding
Application 2-component plastic
stopper for flexible Application 2-component primer
thermoplastic
Use Corrosion protection and
Use Equalization of scratches bonding agent (steel
or unevenness sheet, zinc coated steel
sheet, aluminum)
Hardener quantity approx. 3 - 5%
Spray gun HVLP 1.3 mm
Spray pressure 2.0 bar
Drying 20°C approx. 15 - 30
minutes Drying 20°C approx. 15 - 20
minutes
60°C approx. 15 min
(Short wavelength
infrared approx. 8 Coat application Wet on wet, no interme-
minutes)* diate sanding
(Medium wavelength
infrared approx. 8-10
HS primer filler and HS tinted filler
minutes)*
Sanding tool Eccentric, sanding disk Note:
by hand • Primer filler is available as 1-component and
Grade P80 - P150; fine sand - 2-component water based and solvent based
P280 forms.
• 1-component products are only suitable for
*Infrared drying may adversely affect adhesion, isolation of sanded through bare areas and new
therefore check the manufacturer's painting.
instructions. • Water based products are also used for the
Plastic stopper has a very great tendency to shrink skinning of thermoplastics and substrates which
back, so that the edge of the stopper repair are sensitive to solvents.
becomes visible.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225835en
http://vnx.su
• Tinted fillers can be individually matched to the Application Water based paint
top coat color and therefore find uses in effect
paints and paints with poor covering power. 60°C approx. 25 min
• Use dry sand or wet sand filler according to Short wavelength infrared
application in order to avoid unnecessary approx. 8 minutes
sanding work.
Medium wavelength
• On critical substrates the use of epoxy resin infrared approx. 10 - 15
base filler is recommended in order to avoid minutes
adhesion problems.
Coat application Wet on wet
Application HS primer filler and HS
Ventilation time approx. 5 minutes
tinted filler
Use Equalization of uneven- The base paint must be dried matt before the clear
ness, edge zones, lacquer is applied.
sanding scores
Application 2-component HS clear
Spray gun HVLP 1.6 - 1.9 mm lacquer
Spray pressure 2.0 bar Use Gloss providing
Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm to 150 µm protective coat for base
possible coat substrate
Drying 20°C approx. 2.5 hours Spray viscosity At 20°C 18 - 20 s
(60°C approx. 25 min)* Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm
(Short wavelength Spray pressure 2.0 bar
infrared approx. 8 Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm
minutes)*
Drying 20°C approx. 10 hours
(Medium wavelength
infrared approx. 10-15 60°C approx. 30 min
minutes)* Short wavelength infrared
Coat application Wet on wet, no interme- approx. 8 minutes
diate sanding Medium wavelength
*In order to avoid boiling out, drying should be minutes
performed slowly.
Application 2K HS Uni top coat
Paint Use Color and gloss providing
paint layer
The base and the clear lacquer must be matched
to one another. Spray viscosity At 20°C 20 - 22 s
Application Water based paint Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm
Use Two layer metallic effect Spray pressure 2.0 bar - 3.0 bar
paint and Uni-paint Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm
finishes
Drying 20°C approx. 8 hours
Spray viscosity At 20°C 18 - 20 s
Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm
Spray pressure 2.0 bar approx. 8 minutes
Layer thickness 15 - 20 µm
Drying 20°C approx. 2.5 hours
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225835en
http://vnx.su
Application 2K HS Uni top coat
Medium wavelength
infrared approx. 10 -15
minutes
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225835en
http://vnx.su
Additional Materials
Suitable for spraying and brushing to obtain a
WARNING: Always use tested and
composition true to the original.
approved product specified by Ford India
through various communications. This MS polymer adhesive sealant is free of isocyanate,
safeguards from any eventual hazards solvent and silicones and can be spot-welded.
arising from chemical reactions and wrong
usage of materials.
Underbody protection
NOTE: Check the material expiry information prior
using it in application. Expired products may be Underbody protection products are immune to
toxic and create chemical hazards. abrasion, permanently elastic, adhere well and are
NOTE: Do not mix various suppliers refinish suitable for a true to original texture.
materials. Each manufacturer provides materials
for various applications, however mixing of different
manufacturer products may lead to poor quality, Underbody protection based on solvent
not getting the desired results and also evoke
potential chemical hazard. Application:
• Underbody protection for visible areas.
The manufacturer's instructions must always
be followed when dealing with any materials! Properties:
The information given in the following text is data • Can be over-painted, also with 2-component
which is independent of the manufacturer, and it paint.
should only used as an indication. • Can be colored with a proportion of up to 40%
paint.
Adhesive sealants Note:
• Contamination can be removed using cleaner
Adhesive sealants are permanently elastic, and thinner.
long-lived, can be painted and accept filler.
Application: Sealing of visible and normal seams.
Water based underbody protection
Can be over-painted with 2-component paint,
primer and fillers after having dried throughout. Can be over-painted with water based paint.
Contamination can be removed using cleaner and Can be colored with water based paint.
thinner.
Contamination can be removed using water.
1-component PUR adhesive sealant Application Water based underbody

protection
Note: Use Underbody protection
• Hardens using oxygen from the air. For that for visible areas
reason, it must only be stripped after it has
completely dried through. Spray viscosity ready to use
Spray gun Suction beaker HVLP
gun 3 - 4 mm
2-component MS polymer adhesive sealant
Spray pressure 4 - 6 bar
2-component MS polymer adhesive sealant is free Layer thickness 500 - 1000 µm
of isocyanate, solvent and silicones and can be
spot-welded. Drying approx. 6 hours at 20°C
approx. 45 - 60 minutes
at 60°C
MS polymer adhesive sealant
Can be over painted with water-based paints.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225836en
http://vnx.su
Application Water based underbody Application Fixer additive
protection
Layer thickness max. 30 µm
Coat application Wet on wet
approx. 8 minutes
Ventilation time approx. 15 - 30 minutes
Medium wavelength
Maintain maximum layer thickness without fail.
minutes
Must always next be overpainted with clear lacquer.
Application Water based underbody
protection Application Drying accelerator
Use Isolation primer for Use Accelerates drying with

peroxide marks, bloomed only minimal reduction in
old paintwork and thermo- working life
plastics. Working life approx. 5 hours at 20°C
Spray viscosity Thin as necessary with Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm
distilled water
Spray pressure 2.0 bar
Spray gun HVLP gun 1.9 mm
Spray pressure 2.0 - 3.0 bar
Drying approx. 6 hours at 20°C
approx. 25 minutes at
Drying approx. 2 hours at 20°C 60°C
approx. 30 minutes at Short wavelength infrared
60°C approx. 8 minutes
Short wavelength infrared Medium wavelength
approx. 8 minutes infrared approx. 10 - 15
Medium wavelength minutes
minutes Cannot be used in all paints, read the
manufacturer's instructions.
Particularly suitable for partial painting.
Paint additives
Application Elastifier additive in
Application Sanding test color primer material
Use To test sanding results Use Elastifies the complete
paint structure on
Spray gun HVLP 1.7 - 1.9 mm plastics.
Spray pressure 2.0 bar Addition Up to 25%
Layer thickness Spray drifted Spray gun HVLP 1.7 - 1.9 mm
Application Fixer additive Spray pressure 2.0 - 3.0 bar
Use Converts solid top coat Layer thickness 50 µm

into two layer solid; multi- Drying approx. 4 hours at 20°C
color painting
Spray viscosity 18 - 20 secs at 20°C 60°C
Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm Short wavelength infrared
Spray pressure 2.0 - 3.0 bar approx. 8 minutes
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225836en
http://vnx.su
Application Elastifier additive in Application Matting additive in solid
primer material paint
Medium wavelength Short wavelength infrared
infrared approx. 10 - 15 approx. 8 minutes
minutes
Medium wavelength
Application Elastifier additive in top minutes
coat
Use Elastifies the complete CAUTION: Do not dry using infrared.
paint structure on
plastics. Application Matting additive in clear
Addition Up to 25% lacquer
Spray gun HVLP 1.7 - 1.9 mm Use Elastifies the complete

paint structure on
Spray pressure 2.0 - 3.0 bar plastics.
Layer thickness 50 - 60 µm Semi-gloss addition Up to 25% in the paint
Drying approx. 16 hours at 20°C without hardener and
thinner
60°C Silk gloss addition Up to 35% in the paint
without hardener and
Short wavelength infrared thinner
approx. 8 minutes
Silk matt addition Up to 45% in the paint
Medium wavelength without hardener and
infrared approx. 10 - 15 thinner
minutes
Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm
Application Matting additive in solid Spray pressure 2.0 - 3.0 bar
paint Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm
Use Elastifies the complete Drying approx. 8 hours at 20°C
paint structure on
plastics. approx. 30 minutes at
60°C
Semi-gloss addition Up to 25% in the paint
without hardener and Note:
thinner
• When mixing, first put in the matting additive,
Silk gloss addition Up to 35% in the paint then the hardener and thinners.
without hardener and • Stir immediately after adding the matting
thinner additive.
Silk matt addition Up to 45% in the paint • Do not store after addition of the matting
without hardener and additive, storage will change the degree of
thinner gloss.
Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm • Also suitable for use on plastics without addition
of elastifier additive.
Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm Application Matting paste
Drying approx. 8 hours at 20°C Use Matts, elasticizes and

gives structure to solid
approx. 30 minutes at paint and clear lacquer
60°C during painting of
bumpers or hard plastic.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225836en
http://vnx.su
Application Matting paste Masking film.
Addition 1:1 or 2:1 depending on For masking of large areas on vehicles.
manufacturer in solid
paint without hardener or Properties:
thinners. • Accepts 2-component and water-based paints.
Spray gun HVLP 1.2 - 1.3 mm • Withstands heat.
• Withstands water spray and condensation.
• Withstands solvent.
Layer thickness 50 - 70 µm • Easily cut.
Drying approx. 6 - 10 hours at • Environmentally friendly and can be recycled.
20°C
approx. 30 minutes at Polishing materials.
60°C
Short wavelength infrared Polishing means microfine sanding. For this
approx. 8 minutes reason, polishes must only contain abrasives, and
no silicones.
Medium wavelength
infrared approx. 10 - 15 During polishing repair, a good shine is achieved
minutes through the step-by-step use of polishes, starting
with a highly abrasive polish and ending with a
Note: polish having very slight abrasive action.
• The paint must not be filtered. Polishes are available in graduations from coarse
to fine.
Application Anti-silicone additive
Use Prevents silicone craters
Abrasives
Addition 2% to maximum 5%
Please refer to the "Tools" chapter for information
Note: on abrasives.
• Only add away from the paint cabin and
immediately remove contaminated cloths.
• If anti-silicone additive is used in the first coat,
then it must be used in the following coats, and
in at least the same proportions.
Additive materials
Variety of adhesive tapes
For profile, fine and large area masking work.

Properties:
• Withstands heat.
• Withstands water-based paint.
• Accepts paint.
• Easily removed without leaving adhesive
residues.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225836en
http://vnx.su
Paint Repairs
General information
There is a great difference between painting in
production and repair painting.
In production, only the bodyshell is painted, it has
no trim, upholstery or assemblies. Because of this,
other paints, tools and processing techniques can
be used.
In contrast to that used in production, paint used
in the workshop must dry at low temperatures.
Plastics and the vehicle electronics must not be
subjected to temperatures greater than 70°C.
The painting process in the case of repair work
consists of two phases:
• Pre-treatment of the surface for corrosion
protection and the smoothing of irregularities.
• Top coat application.
The precondition for a professional paint finish on
a vehicle is the permanently maintained cleanliness
of work spaces, tools and equipment,
Original materials must be worked according to the
manufacturer's instructions, so that no problems
arise in the processing nor during drying.
The room temperature must be 20 - 25°C and the 2. Grinding for better paint adherence (for primer
humidity must be low. Temperatures which are too surfacer painting).
low or too high can lead to porosity, poor flow and
boiling. High humidity leads to paint damage such • Grind off sandpaper scratches around the
as tarnishing of the paint film (matt film), adhesion putty-applied surface with a double action
problems and craters. sander using P320 sandpaper.
• Where it is impossible to use a sander because
of space, use a hand file and then remove
Primer Surfacer Painting sandpaper scratches with a P600 sandpaper.
• Grind the puttied area and its surrounding range
of about 100 mm (4.0 in) width from the brim of
Painting Procedures
puttied area for better paint adherence.
1. Check the painting surface.
• Before applying the primer surfacer, be sure to
inspect the painting surface first. If the surface
has a deep damage on it, it remains even after
the primer surfacer is applied and, as the result,
it becomes necessary to repair the damage after
the primer surfacer process.
• When it is necessary to grind the deep damage,
use a double action sander together with a P240
to P400 sandpaper. Where, however, a sander
cannot be used because of space, use a hand
file and then remove the damage with P400 to
P600 sandpaper.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Putty
2 BRIM (edge)
3. Blow off all dust, dirt, and all foreign materials
from the repaired surface.
4. Place masking sheet covering the primer
surfacer painting area with a slight margin.
surfacer painting should be about 1.5 mm (0.06

Item Description
in).
1 Reverse masking • Spray the primer surfacer sparely around the
5. Remove fat and oil and clean the primer surfacer bordering area between the puttied surface and
painting area. the old painted surface to such an extent that
6. Preparation of primer surfacer (reference only).
Primer Surfacer Base:100+Hardener:10
7. Primer surfacer spraying. The nozzle diameter
of the spraying gun to be used for the primer
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
the sprayed surface looks half gloss. Take
enough flash time.
• Spray the whole puttied area again in addition
to the primer sprayed area to the half gloss
extent.
• Take the flash time, and widen the painting area
a little and spray once again for finishing.
Item Description
1 Prime putty
10. Polish the last repaired areas with water or
without to bring it to the finish.
NOTE: Be careful not to polish too much to expose
the steel sheet.
Dry sanding:
To polish by hand, use P400 to P600 sandpaper
together with a rubber pad. Continue this work
while removing abrasive powders to prevent
clogging.
To polish with a double action sander, use a P240
to P400 sandpaper.
Wet sanding: (Generally not recommended

Use a sponge soaked with water.
To polish with water, use waterproof P400 to P600
8. Drying primer surfacer. Take setting sufficient sandpaper.
time and force-dry it.
NOTE: As for the drying time, follow the
9. Inspect the primer surfacer painted surface and,
if necessary, repair partial defects with putty.
Carefully inspect for paper scratches, cavities, etc.
If any cavity or scratches are remain, fill them with
putty.
• Polish the puttied surface with P400 to P600
sandpaper and, after that, clean with air blow
and remove fat and oil from the surface.
• Apply putty with a spatula where necessary.
• Dry up the spots repaired later with putty. Item Description
1 Sponge
2 Waterproof sand paper
11. Air blow and cleaning. After the painted surface
is polished with water, air blow, the surface to
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
displace the water, after that, using an infrared light 5. Do the final spraying so that the whole surface
to dry it completely. becomes even.
12. Inspection and repair after polishing. Inspect 6. Polish the primer surfacer painted surface.
the state of the finished primer surfacer painted
surface. If the surface is good without any defects,
move to the top coat painting process. If any defect Sanding for Better Adherence to Top Coat
is found on the surface including unpainted spots, Painting
exposed putty or steel panel, repeat the primer
surface painting and polishing processes. This sanding work is done to increase adherence
of the old paint layer to the top coat that is to be
newly painted.
Primer Surface Painting on a New Part In a case that a block part or whole car is
painted in the same color:
1. Polish with a double action sander attached with
a P320 sandpaper. Where a sander cannot be • Polish the area that is to be painted with top
used because of space, hand-polish it using a coat with a double action sander attached with
sandpaper brush. a P320 to P400 sandpaper.
• Where the sander cannot be used because of
space, handpolish with a P400 to P600
sandpaper. Be careful not to leave any spot
unpolished.
• Polish only in a direction so as not to leave
paper scratches.
Item Description
1 Double action sander
2 New part
3 Sandpaper brush
2. Air blow, degrease and clean the surface. In a case that only part of a panel is painted in
gradation:
3. Spray the primer surfacer (mist coat) over the
whole panel to form a thin layer and inspect it for • Grind for better adherence the area to be
any defect such as unpainted spots. painted in gradation and its surrounding border
area.
• For a light solid colored surface, polish with an
intermediate compound or with P1,000
waterproof sandpaper.
• For a metallic, pearl, or deep solid colored
surface, polish with a fine compound or with
P1,500 waterproof sandpaper.
4. After spraying, take enough flash time.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
• Degrease and clean the surface, check the lift
or peel off of the masking paper. Using
compressed air,blow off all dust and dirt from
the gaps and recessed area of the panel.
• Just before top coat painting, wipe the whole
painted area with a tack cloth. In doing this work,
be careful not to press the cloth too much on
the surface so that the varnish content of the
cloth does not stick to the body surface.
NOTE: Do not touch the degreased surface with
a ungloved hand.
Item Description
1 Decide on enamel colour
2 Enamel gradated
3 Clear coat sprayed
4 Clear coat gradated
Preparation for Top Coat Painting

1. Clean and move. Clean the spray booth first.
Sprinkle water over the floor and move the vehicle Item Description
info the spray booth.
1 Tack cloth
3. The technician will wear all safety gear and, in
order to avoid dusts and dirt from adhering to the
painted surface, will always wear a well washed
work overall.
4. Paint mixing
2. Clean the surface with air blow and degrease it.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
• Using a measuring instrument, mix the paint, How to Use a Spray Gun
hardener, and thinner to the correct ratio,
according to the paint manufacturer’s Check on Spraying Pressure
instructions. Avoid too much or too little of the Set the most appropriate spraying pressure
hardener because it causes troubles after top according to the type of paint and the range of
coat painting. The use of a digital measuring spraying.
instrument, which is so widely used, helps
correct measurement problems. Generally, the spraying pressure is adjusted by the
• It is important to select the thinner depending pressure gauge of a transformer. But, the pressure
upon the temperature in which it is to be used. at hand varies according to the diameter and length
of the hose. In order to measure the correct
Use of thinner by temperature (Example): spraying pressure, install a hand gauge to the
Types of Thinner Outdoor temperature spray gun.
°F (°C)
Ultra quick drying type Less than 50 (10)
(very cold season)
Quick drying type (cold 50 to 59 (10 to 15)
season)
Normal type (warm About 68 (20)
season)
Slow drying type (hot 77 to 95 (25 to 35)
season)
Ultra slow drying type Over 95 (35)
(very hot season)
• Mix the hardener and thinner to the paint, filter

it with a strainer, and put it in a spray gun.
Spraying Distance
The longer the spraying distance is, the wider the
spraying pattern, the thinner paint layer, and the
less the paint loss become. Or if the distance is
too short, unnecessary paint flows take place.
Generally speaking, the spraying distance is about
200 mm (7.87 in.) for lacquer paints and 250 mm
(9.84 in.) for acrylic urethane paints.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Pattern for partial painting:
Adjust the spraying pattern by turning the adjusting
screw so that the spraying distance is 150 to 200
mm(5.91 to 7.87 in.), and the pattern width is 120
to 130 mm (4.72 to 5.12 in.) with no uneven painted
surface and no paint flows.
Adjustment of a Spraying Pattern

Adjust the spraying pattern with the spraying
pattern adjusting screw and paint outlet adjusting
screw.
If the border of the spraying pattern becomes
rough,increase the outlet by adjusting the outlet
screw or decrease the amount of air by adjusting Pattern for whole painting:
the air screw.
Adjust the spraying pattern by turning the adjusting
If flow marks appear on the painted surface, screw so that the spraying distance is 150 to 200
decrease the outlet. Also check the paint viscosity mm (5.91 to 7.87 in.), and the pattern width is 220
and the evaporation speed of the thinner. to 230 mm (8.66 to 9.06 in.).
Movements of Spray Gun

Spraying Angle
The generally gun moving speed is about 2 to 3
second per m. In order to form an even paint layer
(identical thickness over the whole pattern), it is
necessary to keep the same speed of moving the
spray gun.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Correct movement of spraying gun: Gun Moving Speed
The generally gun moving speed is about 2 to 3
second per m. In order to form an even paint layer
(identical thickness over the whole pattern), it is
necessary to keep the same speed of moving the
spray gun.
Double Spraying Width

Within an effective spraying width of a spraying
stroke, the thickness of paint is the same, but
beyond the border, it becomes thinner. Therefore,
in order to compensate for the difference and make
the painted area have the same paint thickness,
double painting is necessary.
Incorrect movement of spraying gun:
Single Coating and Double Coating

1. Facing the surface to be sprayed, hold and aim
the gun toward 50 to 70% of the surface width
beyond the left end of the panel. Move the gun
from the left to the right beyond the right end.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
the paint layer thickness becomes gradually thinner
as it moves away.
2. After moving the gun toward the right, shift the

gun position down and move the gun to spray the
same way from the right to the left while the spray
pattern overlapping (50 to 70%) with the effective Overlapped Spraying
spraying width of the previous stroke. Repeat When a wide surface is sprayed, use the gradation
spraying until reaching the bottom. This way of method as described above so that the overlapped
spraying is called the single coating. area becomes too thick in layer thickness.
3. Spraying the same area repeatedly until it

becomes finished without going to the next area is
called the double coating.
Care of Spray Gun

Gradation
If a spraying gun is left as it is even for a short
Move the gun as if to draw a crescent as the period of time after it has been used, it cannot be
direction of the gun is away from the repaired area used again because the paint inside is hardened
by snapping the writ. By moving the gun this way, and clogs the mechanism inside.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Washing Procedures NOTE: When washing, be careful not to damage
the air hole of the air cap because it affects the
1. Cover the air cap with a cloth and pull the trigger.
spraying pattern greatly. Never use a steel wire or
Then, the air that is blown out of the paint nozzle
wire brush for cleaning. When the air hole is
tip enters the paint passage thus cleaning the
clogged, clean it using a wood toothpick or
inside of the gun.
something like that.
2. Discard the paint remaining in the cup and put
NOTE: When it is hard to get rid of the stuck paint,
some thinner in for washing and blow the gun out.
wash it after it has been submerged in lacquer
thinner.
3. Clean the inside and outside of the spray gun

with an attached hairbrush and clean it.
How to judge if incorrect pattern of spraying comes
from air cap or spraying nozzle:
First, mark the pattern on a surface as shown in
the figure below, turn the air cap 180° and mark
the pattern once again. If the deformity of the
pattern is the same, the cause of it is in the paint
nozzle. If the deformity is in the reverse direction,
the air cap is clogged with paint or dust or
damaged. Remove the paint residue or dust
completely from the air cap. If the damage is too
much, replace the part with a new air cap.
4. Clean the inside of the paint cup.
5. Remove the air cap and clean the inside and

outside with an attached hairbrush soaked in
thinner.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
Top Coat Painting
1 Snapping defect
Basic Process 2. Color fixing.
Use of 2K paint and gradation agent . A gradation • Spray to the half gloss in a double coating way.
agent is a mixture of clear paint and thinner. Its
• Continue spraying until the undercoat is no
viscosity is low and it evaporates almost completely
longer visible.
leaving nothing. For metallic painting, it is used for
the purpose of arranging aluminum flakes in the • Do not attempt to spray thickly at one time but
same direction. several thin coats with abundant flash times in
between.
• For metallic colors, spray carefully so as not to
create irregularity of color, taking care of pattern
appropriate clothing when spraying.
overlapping.
1. Mist coat and spot coat.
• Use the single coating for mist coat. Spray as
sparely as possible to detect where defective
painted areas are.
• When there are snapping holes on the painted
surface, fill the holes with dry coat.
• In order to hide the undercoat irregularity, spray
the top coat paint over the repaired area (primer
surfacer painted surface) one more time as final
before the color fixing.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
3. How to get rid of enamel base irregularity
(metallic and pearl colors).
• Maintaining the same outlet as for the color
fixing process and moving the gun slightly away
from the painted surface, move the gun slower
to leave the surface a little wet.
• By keeping the surface a little wet with paint, it
is possible to let aluminum flakes arrange
regularly.
• Overlap the spraying strokes repeatedly until
the painted surface becomes even in color.
Item Description
1 Incorrect
2 Correct
3 Old paint layer
4 New paint layer
Steps of Gradated Painting

1. Spray so that the luster is even, while observing
the state of the old paint surface.
4. Finishing painting. 2. Dilute the finishing paint following the paint
• Finish the painted surface smoothly and let it
match the adjoining panel in the surface quality. 3. Spray the paint on the rough area due to the
• For metallic and pearl colors, spray clear coat paint mist between the old and new painted surface
repeatedly several times for better luster and so that the new and old surface are matched with
smoothness. each other.
4. Slightly decrease the paint outlet and spray to
the half luster. Do not try to spray thickly the first
time, but spray it a few times, taking an abundant
flash time. A gradation agent can also be used to
match the color and luster between the new and
old painted areas.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Gradation Painting of Metallic and Pearl Paints

1. Spray gradation agent around the color fixed Top Coat Partial Painting
area.
Spot Gradation of Solid Color
2. With the state of the gradation agent sprayed in
a half gloss, spray the color fixing paint between Using a technique of gradation, match the color
the color fixing area and the old paint surface in and luster with those of the surrounding paint
the same way to get rid of irregularity. surface.
3. Repeat the above steps until the difference in 1. Mist coat and color fixing.
color between the old and new paint is not visible.
Item Description
1 Mist coat/spray to obtain opacity area.
2. Finishing painting.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su

1 Finish coat area. 1 Get rid of irregularity area.
3. Gradation. 2 Gradation area.
3. Mist coat of clear coat.
Item Description
1 Gradation area. Item Description
1 Area of clear/mist coat.
Spot Gradation of a Metallic Color
1. Mist coat and color fixing for enamel base (The 4. Finishing coat of clear coat.
same steps for solid color).
2. Get rid of irregularity in enamel base (Gradation).
Item Description
1 Area of clear coat finish spraying.
5. Gradation of clear coat painting.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su

1 Clear coat gradation area. 1 Area to be clour fixed and gradated.
6. Drying 3. Mist coat of clear coat.
Block Part Gradation of Solid Color

Basically paint the enamel base surface partially
and paint the clear base as a whole block part.
This gradation repair is also effective to prevent
fading of deep solid colors
1. Mist coat.
Item Description
1 Area to be clear coat sprayed.
4. Finishing of Clear coat. For the same area as
for clear mist coating.
5. Drying.
Item Description Block Part Gradation of Metallic Color
1 Area to be mist coated. 1. Mist coat of enamel base For the same area as
for solid color
2. Color fixing and gradation. 2. Color fixing of enamel base
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
5. Finishing of clear coat. For the same area clear
mist coating
6. Drying.
Top Coat Block Painting
Divide the panel line in painting so that the painting

work does not extend to the adjoining panel like
the front fender or the door panel. Paint the panel
as a whole without doing any partial repair.
However, as for the roof panel and the panel space
between the rear pillars, it is possible to repair the
Item Description color locally.
1 Area to be enamel mist coated. Solid Color
2 Area to be colour fixed. 1. Mist coat.
3. Getting rid of enamel base irregularity and
gradation.
Item Description
1 Area to be mist coated.
Item Description
2. Partial spot spraying of repaired areas.
1 Area in which irregularity is gotten rid of
and gradated.
4. Mist coat of clear coat.
Item Description
1 Area to be spot sprayed.
Item Description 3. Color fixing.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
3. Color fixing of enamel base.
Item Description
1 Area to be colour fixed. Item Description
4. Finishing. The same area as for color fixed. 1 Area to be spot sprayed.
5. Drying. 4. Getting rid of irregularity of enamel base. The
same area as for color fixing.
Metallic Color
5. Mist coat of clear coat. The same area as for
1. Mist coat of enamel base. color fixing.
6. Finishing of clear coat. The same area as for
color fixing.
7. Drying.
Drying of Top Coat Painting
1. Allow enough setting time. After painting, leave

the surface as is for about 10 to 20 minute, in order
to let the solvent evaporate and prevent defects
from occurring during the forced drying time.
NOTE: As the setting time changes according to
Item Description temperature or paint layer thickness, check the
paint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Forced drying of top coat paint
2. Spot spray of repaired areas.
• Force dry the surface for approximately 30
minutes at a temperature of 140°F (60°C).
• If polished without being well dried, partial lack
of luster or white marks occurs. If dried
excessively, the paint layer becomes too hard
to be easily polished losing its workability.
NOTE: Always refer to the paint manufacture’s
instructions.
Item Description
1 Area to be colour fixed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Item Description • If the waterproof sandpaper, using a sanding

block with a P1500 to P2000 sandpaper.
1 Hot air
2 Exhaust duct
Item Description
1 Waterproof sandpaper
Top Coat Polishing 2 Sanding block

2. Finishing of painted surface. Using a waterproof
Polishing Procedures
P1200 to P2000 sandpaper hone the surface
1. Take out small cavities or paint grains. together with soap and water or water in a fixed
direction. After the surface becomes flat and
• Remove small cavities and paint grains with a
smooth. Wipe off the remaining particles.
honing stone or waterproof sandpaper.
• First flatten the honing surface and round the
edges.
• Hone the surface with a rough stone and finish
with a fine P2000 to P3000 stone.
• If the paint flow or grains is high, scrape it out
with a knife first before honing it.
Item Description
1 Sponge
2 Waterproof sandpaper
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
3. Final polishing.
• With fine compound, polish the surface with a
polisher set with a towel buff or intermediate
sponge buff to take off honing or sandpaper
marks. And finally, polish it out with finer
compound.
• In polishing, remove honing powders frequently
to avoid damaging the paint surface.
NOTE: Turn on the polisher power switch after it
has been in touch with the polished surface.
Item Description
1 New top coat
2 Old top coat
3 Colour gradated
6. Hand-polish the press lined or mold lined parts
of the surface because these parts of the panel
tend to be overly polished. Polish the surface with
a cloth with finer compound, moving it fore and aft.
4. Move the polisher along the panel surface in a

fore and aft direction.
5. Where the paint is repaired in gradation, move

the polisher from the new painted area to the old
painted area.
7. Glossing.
• Using slender buff with ultra fine compound,
polish the painted surface.
• Press the polisher very lightly on the surface to
be polished.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Color Clear Painting Clean the area of the damage
Color clear paint is a mixture of clear coat used for
top coat for metallic painting and transparent
pigment and dyes. The use of this paint provides
vivid, deep and transparent colors.
Its paint layer is made up from top half-transparent
color clear layer and lower color based layer.
NOTE: As color clear paint is half-transparent, its
color looks different according to the thickness of
the layer. It is, therefore, necessary to prepare
several color test pieces that have a different paint
layer thickness for comparing the color the same
way as for the three-coat pearl
Clean the damaged surface thoroughly, to allow
NOTE: If the paint used as color base is inferior in the extent of the damage to be seen. Use silicone
hiding the undercoat color, paint the color that is remover to produce a grease-free surface.
good in hiding the lower coat first before painting
color base. NOTE: The treated surface must be rubbed with
a clean dry cloth before the solvent evaporates,
Color clear paint: otherwise there will be no cleaning effect.
Effective de-greasing is important not only before
the application of paint, but also before all sanding
stages, for two reasons:
• During sanding of grease contaminated
surfaces, globules may form with the sanding
dust. Sanding marks will occur and the sanding
medium quickly becomes unuseable.
• Oil and grease are embedded by the action of
the abrasive particles, and are then very difficult
to remove.
Establish the area of damage and the repair
stages. In doing so, establish how much
disassembly work must be undertaken. Perform a
Minor Paint Repair Working Exercise color test at this stage.
Pre-treatment of the surface Mask off the area of the repair ready for
preparatory work.
Perfect preparation of the subsurface is the
precondition for a brilliant paintwork result. Faults Sand out the damage location
in the preliminary stages delay completion and
cause unnecessary extra work. The working steps
described here demonstrate how important it is to
follow these instructions step by step.
NOTE: Thorough cleaning of the vehicle and
especially of the area being repaired is particularly
important because of the danger of contamination
of the paint.
When sanding, produce smooth transitions from

the painted area to the bare metal.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Use an eccentric sander and P80 or P120 abrasive Stopper application
sheets. Finish off sanding with P150 or P180. The
remaining adhering sanding dust must be
completely removed.
Cleaning, de-greasing
Pre-sand the hardened stopper using an eccentric

sander and P80 dry, then final-sand using P120 -
P140 dry. Clean the sanded surface using silicone
remover.
Use silicone remover to thoroughly clean the Apply 2-component stopper to the filled surface.
surface in order to remove grease residues, sweat The stopper compound must only be applied thinly.
from the hands and other contamination. NOTE: Use of a testing powder is recommended
NOTE: Use a solvent test to establish whether the so that the sanding process can be more easily
old paint can be etched. Apply 2-component checked.
thinners to the damaged area using a clean cloth Apply filler
and rub lightly for about 1 minute. If the subsurface
can be etched away, special pre-treatment is
necessary. See "Tips and Tricks"
Apply primer filler
Filler can now be applied to the dried repair area.

Choose the correctly toned filler according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Alternatively, filler with the correct tone can
Before applying stopper, apply primer to the be mixed with the aid of colour matching cards.
sanded and bare surface.
Allow the primer to dry and then lightly sand by
hand using P220 - P400 dry.
NOTE: Most stopper can be applied directly to bare
metal. But application of a primer filler provides
better corrosion protection.
NOTE: Avoid sanding through to the bare metal.
Points which are sanded through must be retreated
with primer filler.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Sand the filler. mixture proportions, layer thickness, viscosity,
drying time etc.
First of all the work area is carefully masked ready
for paint application. The correct adhesive materials
and techniques must be used so that no hard
transitions and edges are created during painting.
NOTE: The chapter "Tips and Tricks" gives
in-depth information on masking work.
Thoroughly check the surface once more and
rub-off with a dust-bonding cloth.
NOTE: Once more check the paint material and
that the spray gun is correctly adjusted before
The working area is expanded by applying new applying the paint.
masking. This makes it possible to even out the
transition from the damage area to the vehicle Paint application
paintwork.
NOTE: The primer filler must be carefully sanded.
Faults in the primer filler layer will be visible in the
top coat.
The sanding process consists of two stages.
Coarse sanding levels out the surface of the filler
primer. Fine sanding ensures the necessary
surface structure which allows the top coat to
adhere well and cover sanding marks.
Sand the filler using the eccentric sander and P400
- P500 used dry. Clean the sanded filler finished
surface using silicone remover. The base paint is applied in two or three steps.
The painted area is matted using a fine matting First of all only the repair area is painted with the
sponge, and then thoroughly cleaned. first paint application.
Surface ready for paint Flash off
The surface which has been repaired and then Allow the paint application to flash off until the
prepared according to the manufacturer's surface has a matt appearance. So that the
instructions is now ready for basic paint application. transition to the original paint is optimally created,
the next paint application is applied to a wider area.
Top coat application After the base paint has dried for the specified time,
the clear lacquer is applied. Next the transitions to
It is important for a good paint result that the the original paintwork are treated with fade-out
recommended process data is adhered to, i.e.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
remover. This removes the spray mist and forms The following faults are included:
an ideal paint surface. • Loss of gloss.
• Sanding scores.
Repair stages for repair painting • Heavy paint runs.
• Large dust and dirt inclusions.
The required time and material data is divided into
four painting levels for calculations concerning The scope of the work is as follows:
repair painting. Proceed according to these • Sand the surface.
divisions for every calculation. • Sand out paint damage and faults.
Level 1 - Painting of new components • Treatment of small areas which have been
sanded through.
On new components, all inner surfaces, seams • Masking work (when painting an installed
and edges which will no longer be seen after component).
assembly must be primed and pre-painted.
• Apply top coat according to the painting process
NOTE: The cathodic dip primer must not be sanded (one or several coat process).
away. Cleaning with silicone remover or light • Dry the top coat and perform finishing work.
sanding of the primer is all that is required.
Job steps: Level III - Repair painting with stopper applied to up
to 50% of the surface.
• Wash off, prime and pre-paint inner surfaces,
seams and edges which cannot be reached at If in addition to painting, work with stopper
all or only partly after the component is installed. application must be performed, then the repair
• Sand new component with P280 - P320 or a levels III or IV must be used.
fine sanding pad. In repair level III, apart from painting the complete
• Clean subsurface with silicone remover. bodywork surface, partial stopper work is carried
• Carry out masking work (when painting an out on up to 50% of the surface to be painted. The
installed component). necessary primer and filler work are also included.
• Apply one spray run of filler, dry. The following damage must be rectified in this level:
• Sand the filler. P1200 wet or P500 dry. • Slight panel unevenness.
• Clean filler application with silicone remover. • Damage due to corrosion.
Then the prepared surface can be painted with • Dented body surfaces.
solid or 2-component paint. • Weld locations.
If the new part has mild transport damage, this • Deep scores or scratches.
must be rectified beforehand. The scope of the work is as follows:
To do so, add the following steps: • Fine sand pre-treated bodywork surfaces (e.g.
• Grind out the scratch. lead-loaded areas).
• Finely sand the surrounding surfaces. • Sand out existing damage.
• Use a steel cleaning agent to thoroughly clean • Perform all necessary masking operations on
and then rub dry. the vehicle.
• Apply corrosion protection primer to the bare • Apply primer.
areas. • Partial stopper application on up to 50% of the
surface to be painted (two to a maximum of
Level II - Top surface painting (color tone matching) three stopper applications).
Complete bodywork surfaces which are to be • Fill the repair area.
painted without the need to apply stopper belong • Apply stone chip protection (when present in
to this group. In addition, surfaces with faults in the production).
top coat surface which cannot be removed by • Apply top coat according to the painting process
polishing. (one or several coat process).
• Dry the top coat and perform finishing work.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Level IV - Repair painting with stopper applied to A small eccentric sander can be used for more
more than 50% of the surface. extensive working areas. When doing so, first of
all put the eccentric sander in place and then switch
In repair level IV, apart from painting the complete
it on, so that the danger of sanding through on
bodywork surface, partial stopper work is carried
edge is reduced.
out on more than 50% of the surface to be painted.
The necessary primer and filler work are also Finally polish the sanded area to a high gloss with
included. suitable polish. To this end the various
manufacturers recommend materials and process
The following damage must be rectified in this level:
techniques which are specially suited to their
• Damage due to hail. products.
• More extensive stone chip damage.
NOTE: The polishing is to be done in the same
• Extensively dented body panels. way as that used to remove swirl marks.
• Sectional repairs with large weld seams.
• Surfaces with severe corrosion damage. Polish
The scope of the work is different to level III

because of the partial application of stopper to
more than 50% of the area to be painted. In
addition, more extensive sanding work is usually
required.
Polish
In order to achieve faultless quality, it is sometimes
necessary afterwards to polish a newly painted
surface.
Even after the most careful painting, it sometimes NOTE: Before using the nap sponge for the first
happens that dirt inclusions and paint runs occur time and after any long pauses in working, dampen
in work with top coat or clear lacquer. Before the nap sponge with polish.
polishing, such paint faults must be removed with
Job steps:
the sanding cylinder ("Finiball") and hand sanding
or eccentric sander in a wet sanding process. • Clean and degrease the area to be polished
using silicone remover.
Sanding cylinder • Apply the polish to the polishing disc and spread
it.
• Place the polishing machine down flat on the
area to be polished and before switching it on,
gently distribute the polish over the underlying
surface.
• Polish out the location for 10 - 15 seconds with
the edge, working with a criss-cross motion.
• Subsequently polish the location for about 10
seconds with the machine laid down flat.
• Wash off and clean the polished location using
the professional polishing cloth and then clean
the polished surface.
The special sanding compound -1- (sanding bloom) • It is absolutely vital to carry out a visual check
for the sanding cylinder is self-adhering and after finishing the polishing procedure. If any
available in grades from P1000 to P2500. swirl marks are not completely removed by the
• P1000 - P1500 for pre-sanding of runs and large first polishing procedure, then process must be
imperfections in the paint. repeated.
• P1500 - P3000 for subsequent sanding of runs
and sanding out of dust inclusions.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Aids
Cleaning putty
Cleaning putty allows deposits on the paint surface
to be removed easily and gently. The following
paint faults can be removed using cleaning putty:
• Metal deposits and iron dust.
• Paint or color mist.
• Tree resin and tar.
• Insect residues.
The surface to be worked must be thoroughly
cleaned before the cleaning putty can be applied.
Then the surface is sprayed with soapy water. Now
the cleaning putty can be slid over the surface until
all unevenness is removed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225837en
http://vnx.su
Painting Plastic Parts

General Elastomers
Although these days plastics can be produced in Elastomers are characterized by high elasticity
all colors and with a matt or gloss surface, painting over a wide temperature range. They have
is often necessary. properties like rubber or a sponge and after
compression or distension they return to their
NOTE: Manufacturer's limitations concerning the original state.
feasibility of painting certain components must
always be observed. Types of plastic
Reasons in favor of applying paint to plastic are: The plastics used in the automotive area:
• Individual coloring, matching the body paint. • ABS - Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (polymer)
• More gloss and color brilliance through painting. • PA - Polyamide
• Removal of production imperfections. • PC - Polycarbonate
• Protection from atmospheric exposure. • PE - Polyethylene
Nowadays painting plastic presents no problems • PP - Polypropylene
because the materials are known and matched to • PP/EPDM - Polypropylene/ethylene propylene
the paint. In order that the painter can use the diene copolymer
correct painting materials, the type of plastic must • PC/PBT - Polycarbonate/Polybutylene
first be correctly determined. terephthalate
To allow this, plastics are marked on the rear in • PBT/PC - Polybutylene
accordance with the recommendations of the terephthalate/Polycarbonate
Association of Vehicle Manufacturers. • PUR - Polyurethane
Once the type of plastic is determined it is an easy • GRP - Glass reinforced plastic
matter to assign special paint recommendations,
matched to that particular plastic. Unmarked NOTE: PE and PP are plastics which cannot be
plastics require knowledge of materials so that a painted, or can only be painted using special
correct choice of paint materials can be made and techniques.
the component can be reliably painted. As well as the pure plastics, so-called 'blends' are
also used. This means combinations of different
plastics. If we were dealing with metals they would
Plastic groups be called alloys.
Thermoplastics Plastic identification
When warmed these undergo a reversible Normally the identifier is marked on the plastic
transformation into a plastic deformable state and components used in vehicle construction.
once cooled they maintain their shape. They
consist of string-like (linear) or only slightly One method to determine the plastic group is the
branched molecular chains. sanding test. In this a place is chosen which will
not be visible later, and the finger belt sander is
Thermosets used to sand the plastic.
Thermosets are hard and have the form of a The plastic group can be determined using the
close-meshed network in all directions. They do pattern left by the sanding and the dust:
not undergo plastic deformation, are especially • Thermosets produce a white dust.
resistant to chemicals, are difficult to swell and are
• Thermoplastics smear and do not produce dust.
insoluble. At normal temperatures they are hard to
brittle. At first the material does not undergo any The plastic group can be determined by a sound
change when heated, but when it reaches a critical test:
point, the thermoset is totally destroyed.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
• Degree of hardness - the higher-pitched the • Afterwards clean with antistatic cleaner or
sound, the harder the plastic. antistatic cloths.
• Elasticity - the more muffled the sound, the • Apply the bonding agent.
higher the elasticity of the plastic. • Apply elastic filler. After it has dried, sand and
clean.
Cleaning plastic
• Apply one coat Uni-paint with elasticizer
Plastic components are manufactured using additive. For two layer painting the elasticizer
complicated moulds and presses or other highly additive is in the clear lacquer.
engineered tools, mostly using an injection
moulding process or reactive injection moulding NOTE: Follow the paint manufacturer's guidelines
process. during all work.
In order to be able to remove the component from Work process for thermosets:
a particular tool, a separating agent is used, which • As a rule, thermosets can be handled in the
in some cases adheres very strongly to the plastic. same way as normal body components.
This separating agent on the plastic components Work process for PUR soft foam:
must be completely removed before any surface • The work process is the same as for
coating is applied. thermoplastic.
Warm storage (tempering) before actual cleaning • Instead of using bonding agent, a filler wash is
brings the following advantages: applied to close the pores of the PUR soft foam.
• The separating agent sweats out of the plastic. The primer which has been applied to a primed
• Tensions in the plastic are released. new component can vary greatly. If no
manufacturer's data is available, the composition
• Air inclusions can be recognized and removed. and suitability for further working must be tested.
Intensively clean the item several times using a Painted components with an already ascertained
pad and fresh cleaning agent. and intact paint coat present no problems for
NOTE: A single wipe, even with cleaning agent, is possible repainting. After sanding and careful
not usually sufficient in most cases. Clean textured cleaning with plastic cleaner or thinners, painting
components with the aid of a soft brush. can be done directly.
After cleaning, it is absolutely vital that cleaning
agent absorbed by the plastic should be expelled Unknown primer
by tempering again. If the ventilation is good and
the room temperature is about 20°C the solvent When dealing with unknown substrates it is
can be evaporated away by overnight storage. important to carry out an adhesion test on the
existing paint before any repainting is attempted.
Painting new components First of all a mechanical test must be carried out,
for instance using a lattice cut and tear-off band.
If the adhesion of the old paint is not acceptable,
It is absolutely vital that the substrate of an
it must be mechanically removed and new paint
unpainted new component is free of separating
finish applied.
agent. Paint can only be applied directly to very
few plastics. The plastic must first be identified If the adhesion is acceptable, then an etch test is
exactly and then worked with a repair system which performed using 2-component thinners. If no
is matched to the type of plastic. In most cases a etching can be detected in this test, application of
plastic etch primer must be applied as adhesion the the paint finish can be started directly.
base to all plastics which can be painted. Otherwise the old paint must be removed and a
new paint finish created.
NOTE: Plastics have a tendency to become
electrostatically charged. This can easily cause With the help of universal or special plastic primers
contamination during painting. Special antistatic and with only a few materials complementary to
cleaning cloths prevent electrostatic charging. those previously present anyway, the painter can
now apply a long-lasting paint finish to all popular
Work process for thermoplastics:
vehicle attachments made of plastic.
• Thoroughly clean the surface.
• Temper the plastic.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
Paint faults on plastic substrates Paint damage caused by blisters, craters,
sink holes
NOTE: Paint faults are fully described in the
chapter Paint Defects and Damage. Cause/damage pattern:
The most common paint faults which can occur • Painting on PUR plastic which was not painted
when painting plastic components and the methods in production.
of repair are briefly described. • Surface of the plastic material too porous.
• Flash-off time not adhered to.
• Drying temperature too high.
Discoloration
• Moisture in plastic material.
Cause/damage pattern: • Layers too thick.
• Plastic material is not suitable for painting. Repair of damage:
• Incorrect bonding agent. • Clean the damaged area, sand, re-isolate and
• Paint used not solvent resistant. paint.
Repair of damage: • Remove the paint layers and re-paint.
• Repaint using suitable materials.
• Install a new unpainted component. Crack formation
Softening • Overexpansion of painted PUR plastic
components.
• Use of unsuitable paint materials.
• Substrate not carefully cleaned.
• Paint materials not suited to each other or
• Air humidity too high or working temperature
incorrect mixture ratio.
too low.
• Drying time incorrect (too short). Repair of damage:
• Materials for substrate not correctly matched to • It is not possible to repair overexpanded PUR
each other or not mixed correctly. plastic components.
• On other plastics, sand away damaged layers,
Repair of damage:
isolate and repaint.
• Dry out, sand, re-isolate and paint.
• Sand away faulty paint coats and re-apply paint
finish. Paint Repair Process
The resin parts to be repaired according to the
Paint damage caused by detachment, poor following repairing process are mostly large ones
adhesion in size and PP, ABS, PC or PA materials.
It is extremely important to confirm the plastic
Cause/damage pattern: material of the part and select the appropriate
• Insufficient paint adhesion between top coat repair materials. In repairing, pay particular
and filler. The whole of the paint finish detaches attention not to cause deformation or other
from the plastic. damages to the part due to drying heat and other
• Plastic not cleaned sufficiently, not or conditions.
inadequately tempered. Basically, the repair process for resin parts can be
• Unsuitable cleaning agent or materials used. divided into two. One is for PP and “ ABS+PA” resin
• Poor or lack of intermediate sanding. parts and another is for the other types of plastic
materials.
• Paint finish underbaked or overbaked.
NOTE: The states of damage and their way of
Repair of damage:
repair are described below. Since the repair
• Sand away faulty paint coats and re-apply paint methods are different according to the repair
finish.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
materials, always check the paint manufacturer’s the raw surface first to secure tight adherence to
instructions. the top coat.
Item Description
Steps of Repair Painting 1 Exposed surface
The following are the steps taken for paint repair 2 Bumper primer
after the undercoat process has been completed.
For filling and reforming, refer to the Body Repair fat, oil and grease.
Manual Body Basic.
4. Paint primer surfacer and dry it.
Example of repair materials.
• Primer surfacer: Two-liquid mixing type (Bumper a respirator, gloves, eye protection, and
primer surfacer gray) appropriate clothing when spraying.
• Top coat paint: Two-liquid polyester urethane Spray the PP primer over the area a little wider
(2K type). than the painted area with a spraying gun. The
NOTE: Follow the paint manufacturer’s instructions. paint thickness is aimed to be 20 to 30 m at 2 to 3
double coating sprayings.
1. Grinding for better adherence (for primer
surfacer painting). Grind the old paint surface NOTE: Follow the primer surfacer manufacturer’s
around the area to be repaired with P200 to P400 instructions for drying time.
sandpaper to form featheredge.
5. Polish with P600 sandpaper with water. Do not

Item Description use a sandpaper lower than P600.
6. Clean by air blow and wipe off all fat, oil and
1 Feather edge
grease.
2. Paint PP primer (Raw surface exposed area). 7. Masking (in case of a partial repair).
As the PP bumper cannot be painted directly on
the raw surface, be sure to paint the PP primer on 8. Painting of intermediate coat and drying.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
• On PP plastic parts (bumper, side sill, garnish • Follow the paint manufacturer’s instructions
etc.), paint the intermediated paint to match the about the mixing of softener, hardener and
color. thinner.
• For the paint, use the top coat enamel paint. • Immediately before painting, clean the entire
surface with a tack cloth.
NOTE: Mix it with thinner and softener or hardener
according to the paint manufacturer’s instructions • Without trying to paint at one time, take flash
on mixing ratio and dry it according to the time and spray several times, hide the
instructions. intermediate and primer surfacer paint color.
• Before painting, clean the entire surface to be • After spraying the top coat enamel paint, leave
painted with a tack cloth. it for 5 to 10 minutes and spray clear coat on it.
• The paint thickness is aimed to be 20 to 30 m
at 2 to 3 double coating sprayings to hide the
primer surfacer paint color.
After painting the clear coat, take about 5 to 10

minutes setting time, while taking care of the
deformation of the part, force dry it.
9. Sanding for better adherence (for top coating). 13. Final polishing.
• After drying the painted surface, polish the • Confirm that the top coat layer has been
surface with P600, P800, or P1000 sandpaper completely dried.
with or without water. • Polish with a waterproof P2000 sand paper with
• Take care not to expose the intermediate or soap water.
primary surfacer layer. • Wipe off water and clean the surface by air blow.
• To paint in gradation, form a featheredge around • Put some fine or ultra fine compound on the
the area to be top coated with P1500 painting surface and wool buff. Press the wool
sandpaper. buff lightly against the surface and take off
sandpaper hair scratches.
• Make sure viewing from a low angle that there
are no sandpaper hair scratches.
• Polish the surface very lightly with an electric
polisher with a sponge buff with ultra fine
compound.
• Finish the paint surface by polishing with wax.
oil, fat, and grease with grease remover.
11. Masking (for top coating).
12. Top coating
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Sandpaper
Item Description
1 Wool buff
Item Description
1 Wax
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225845en
http://vnx.su
Spot Repairs
General application may cause tear-off edges to appear in
clear lacquer. Only certain application areas are
In general, partial surface painting at a point is recommended.
called a spot repair. Using this technique, minor NOTE: The final decision on whether to spot repair
paint damage can be resolved economically and or paint the component must be made by an expert.
to time.
Application areas:
• 2-layer paint.
Advantage of this method • Depending on the damage zone, paint damage
up to a diameter of 3.5 cm or a length of 10 cm.
Because this application remains confined to the
area of the damage, it is often unnecessary to • Scratches.
remove components or color match against • Clear lacquer application up to an area of DIN
neighboring components. The material used is very A4 max.
much reduced because only a part of the repair • Smaller areas which are optically broken up by
area is coated. other components such as trim strip, tail lights,
swage lines and edges.
• Boundary zones and edge areas of larger
Practical application areas components.
Only occasionally can satisfactory results be The best application areas have proven to be
achieved in the centre of larger surfaces and/or on optical break lines such as corners, narrow
difficult colors. In addition, unprofessional surfaces, fenders and wheel arches.
Because of their locations, the violet colored areas the rest of the areas are not suitable for spot
are the most suitable for spot repair painting. The repairs.
turquoise areas are only marginally suitable and
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Before Starting Paint Repair
Work Processes and Work Descriptions
Generally, paint repair on a vehicle body is carried

out in the following steps.
1. Inspection of body repairing processes
2. Confirm the range of repair. Inspect the grade
of the damage and decide on whether to repair or
replace the part with a new one.
3. Evaluate the state of the old paint layer. Check
the type of the old paint layer and the state of Partial Repair
deterioration.
Spot gradation painting:
4. Decide on the painting specification and
A repair method to be used for a narrow range of
estimation. Decide on the type of paints to be used
the damage. In order for the differences in color
and work processes.
and surface appearances between the repainted
5. Preliminary processes before painting. Vehicle area and the surrounding panel to be
washing, removal of attached parts, separation of inconspicuous, gradation is utilized.
the old paint layers, and polishing.
6. Treatment of metal surface. Wash primer
painting, putty application and polishing.
7. Inspection of after treatment.
8. Masking for undercoat painting.
9. Undercoat painting. Primer surfacer painting,
putty application and polishing.
10. Masking for top coating.
11. Top coating. Color matching and top coat
painting.
12. Inspection of after top coating. Block gradation painting:
13. Drying and final polishing. Final polishing Repair with gradation only the damaged part of a
installment of attached parts, and cleaning. panel part with an enamel base paint and paint the
14. Inspection of paint after repair completion. whole panel part with clear coat. Solid color,
instead, may be used depending upon the situation.
Range of Damage and Types of Repair
Decide on the range to be repaired.
Minor Repair
A repair method to be applied for a minor damage
involving only the top coat paint layer such as slight
scratches, dents, paint grain or flow. Repair is
conducted only with a pen-like paintbrush and
polisher without using a spray gun.
Block painting:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Body panels are divided into individual blocks such
as a door, engine hood, etc. and termed as a block.
Painting is conducted as a unit of a whole block.
The whole panel block is painted without resorting
to a gradation painting. But, for a roof panel and a
panel between the rear pillars, depending upon the
situation, gradation painting is used.
Whole Painting
Paint the whole vehicle panels with the original
color or a new color. In a case that numerous
damaged spots spread over the vehicle body, the
whole painting is much better than the partial color
repairing.
Solvent Method
Wipe the surface with a cloth wetted with lacquer
thinner.
Judgement of Paint Layer and Selection of

Repair
Thermal method
In paint repair, it is vitally important to know well
Polish with P800 to P1,000 sandpaper, and heat
the type of the old paint layers and the state of
it with an infrared lamp to over 176°F (80°C).
deterioration. To correctly evaluate the old paint
layer and decide on the type of paints to be used,
follow any of the methods described bellow.
Visual method:
Check the surface of the paint and its state of
polishing visually with your eyes.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Selection of Repair Paints
Relationships between paint layer evaluation methods and states of paint layers:
Kinds of Paint layer Visual Check Method Solvent Method Thermal Method
Melamine baking type Granulated Insoluble No Change
Acrylic baking type Finely granulated Insoluble No Change
Baking primer type - Insoluble No Change
NC Lacquer type Polished Soluble No Change
NC denatured acrylic Polished Soluble A little softened
lacquer type
CAB straight acrylic Polished Soluble Softened
lacquer type
Acrylic urethane type Mirrored Insoluble No Change
Quick drying acrylic Mirrored hard to be soluble No Change
urethane type
Selection of Repair Paints panel in this order. Remove wax and other fat on
the paint with neutral washing agent. Never bring
Note that all paints cannot be used as paint for
dust and dirt into the painting room.
repair.
2. Remove attached parts. Refer to the Shop
In a case that the old paint layer is a baking type
Manual. Where necessary, remove attached parts,
or an acrylic urethane type that is not dissolved by
get rid of dust and dirt with air blowing and wipe
lacquer thinner or if the old paint layer is totally
off water on the paint surface. When a heater is
removed including the undercoat, rifting hardly
used for drying, be sure to remove heat-sensitive
happens, but if the old paint layer is of a lacquer
resin parts from the heated area.
type that is dissolved by lacquer thinner, rifting
often happens during paint repair. For this reason,
the types of paint that can be used for paint repair
are limited.
Repair Painting
Removal of Attached Parts
1. Wash vehicle. Start the vehicle washing from

the roof to the engine hood, trunk lid, and the side
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
Separation of Old Paint layer 1 Sand paper
Removal 3. Heap up the paint remover on the surface with
Use a paint remover to remove the old paint layer a brush.
if the damage is too deep or its deterioration is
extensive. If the area that needs repair is wide,
also used the paint remover.
appropriate clothing when applying the
paint remover.
NOTE: Be sure to read the manufacturer’s
instructions.
1. Place the masking tape about 10 to 20 mm (0.4
to 0.8 in.) inside from the edge of the area to be
separated. Place masking tape over the whole
surface where the old paint should remain as it is. Item Description
1 Paint remover
4. When the paint layer becomes soft and comes
off easily, remove it with a scraper or spatula. If it
cannot be taken off all at a time, repeat the work
until it is removed completely.
Item Description
1 Masking tape
2. Polish the surface to be removed with P60 to
P80 sandpaper to facilitate penetration of the paint
remover.
Item Description
1 Scrapper
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
5. Get rid of the remaining paint remover and other
residues. Rinse thoroughly with water.
6. If some of the paint and the masking tape marks
are still left on the surface even after being
removed by the paint remover, polish them off with
P40 to P80 sandpaper again and clean and take
off all fat with the degreaser.
Removal with a disc sander :
sanding.
If the area that needs repair is small, it is better to
remove the old paint layer with a disc sander.
NOTE: Do not press the sander too hard. Use the
disc sander with the front of it touching the surface
as shown below.
Item Description
1 Sander
Attach P40 to P60 sandpaper to the disk to polish Setting of Reference Surface
the damaged or deteriorated area.
Featheredge
NOTE: Remove the sideliner attaching tape and
stickers using a razor blade or scraper and if their Set a reference surface on the old paint layer.
glue vestiges remain, use a degreaser to remove NOTE: How well the reference surface is set
them completely. affects the final result of the repair greatly.
Using a double action sander attached with a P40
to P80 and P240 sandpapers, make featheredge
match well with the state of the damage on the
paint layer surrounding the damaged area.
sanding.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Item Description
1 Double action sander Treatment of Metal Surface
If the damage is not deep: Treatment Procedures
Flatten and make smooth the edge of the damaged 1. Wash primer painting. If the metal surface
area with a double action sander with P240 paper. remains exposed to the air after being polished,
rust will grow quickly. In order to prevent rust from
growing and, at the same time, to improve
adherence to the paint, apply wash primer to the
surface.
appropriate clothing when applying.
NOTE: Before using the wash primer, be sure to
read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions
carefully.
a. Mix the main agent with its additives and dilute
it with the thinner exclusively for it.
If the damage is extensive: b. Apply it at one or two layers with a spraying or
brush. The layer thickness should be 3 to 5 m to
Attach a P40 paper to a double action sander and such an extent that its color is then yellow green.
grind off the paint layer roughly. Then, attach a
P80 paper and polish the surface until the paper c. The drying time should be around about 60
scratch is eliminated. Further, carefully polish off minutes at 68°F (20°C). If force-dried, the quality
the paint around the damaged area in a width of of the paint is improved.
30 mm (1.2 in.) to form a featheredge.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
and some are with other features. In this case
study, intermediate putty is to be used as an
example that has characteristics of both panel
repair and polyester-putties.
4. Preparation of intermediate putty.
NOTE: Carefully read and follow the
a. Stir the putty until it becomes even.
b. Take out the necessary amount of putty and
place it on the mixing board. Add 25% of hardener
to it and mix it.
Item Description c. Knead it with a spatula until the color becomes
even taking care not to entrap air in it.
1 Wash primer
2. Clean the puttied surface with air blow and
remove grease from the metal surface.
5. Apply intermediate putty with a spatula in the

recess of the damaged area.
WARNING: Wear an approved gloves, when
Item Description applying the putty.
1 Grease remover NOTE: When the old paint layer is of a lacquer
type, be careful not to put the putty on the old paint
2 Wipe off with dry cloth surface. If it is put on the old paint surface. The
3. Select the putty. There are different kinds of putty mark may remain on the surface when the
putty. Some putty is good for lightweight panel top coat is painted.
repair because of its polishing quality. Some are
called polyester putty and have good in the
qualities of quick drying and polishing qualities,
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: If a large amount of putty is applied at a
time, air may be entrapped in the putty.
Basic technique in putty application:

In applying putty, do not try to heap up all at a time
but do it in several layers. Apply putty on the uneven panel:
6. At the first application of the putty, stand the Apply putty into a partially deep dented area of the
spatula nearly on end to apply the putty very thinly damage.
so that the putty penetrates into hair scratches
caused by sand-paper polishing.
Apply over the whole area of the damage.
7. Heap up the putty thickly with a spatula holding

it a little sideways.
Take a slightly larger amount of putty on the

spatula, heap up it over the whole area of the
damage holding the spatula in an inclined way.
8. Make the putty surface flat. If the spatula’s
unevenness remains on the putty, take it out using
the spatula in a flat way. Complete this process of
making the putty surface flat before the putty starts
to dry.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
damaged area (B). Apply putty on (A) and ©)
surfaces of the damaged area.
Holding the spatula in a flattened way, flatten the

surface taking out all irregular spots.
Apply the putty on the (A) and ©) surfaces of the
damaged area has dried, peel off the tape and then
paste the masking tape along the lines of (A) and
©) surfaces of the damaged area.
Apply putty on the (B) surface of the damaged
area.
Apply putty on a curved surface:

Apply putty using a spatula normally used for the
damaged area (A).
Apply putty on the damaged area ©) using a rubber
spatula.
Apply putty along the line on the reverse curved 9. Dry-up of intermediate putty. The dry-up time
surface of the damaged area (B). depends greatly upon the ambient temperature.
The thickness of the putty also affects the drying
time because the thermal reaction takes place
while the putty is drying. Where the putty is thick,
more heat is produced causing a shorter drying
time than where it is not as thick.
NOTE: Check to see the manufacturer’s
instructions on the drying time.
NOTE: Before starting forced drying, take sufficient
setting time. Carry out the forced drying at 122 to
140°F (50 to 60°C). Making the temperature too
high may cause degradation of the hardener.
NOTE: Avoid too quick or too slow heating or
Apply putty on the press line area: cooling, because it is likely to cause distortion to
the steel sheet, which causes cracking or peeling
For applying putty on the straight-line area like the of the putty.
press line, make use of a masking tape. Place the
masking tape along the top and lower lines of the
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Rough Polishing
Item Description
Item Description
1 Drying time shorter
1 Orbital sander
2 Infrared lamp
2 Putty
3 Putty
3 Rough polishing
10. Intermediate putty polishing.
WARNING: Wear an approved respirator,
gloves, eye protection, when putty
polishing.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Fine Polishing a primer surfacer, use polyester putty or lacquer
putty instead.
Item Description
1 File Item Description
11. Verify the surface after applying intermediate 1 Surface former

putty. After the surface is formed, check it by 2 Panel putty
feeling with your fingertips so no cavities or hair-line
scratches are found; move to the primary surfacer 3 Hollow cavities
process. If a dent could not be filled with putty the 4 Resin and pigment
first time or the part of the surface is polished too
far below the reference surface, apply putty again 12. Blow air on the puttied surface and remove fat
to correct it. Use polyester putty in this case. with solvent.
Sheet panel putty (wax type): WARNING: To prevent eye injury, wear
When a panel putty is used that is a sticky wax blowing.
type and hard to dry, grind off the surface because
it is inferior in polishing. NOTE: Blow out polishing residues from cavity
holes.
If it has been hardened too much, it is difficult to
grind off the surface, so, grind off the surface about 13. Preparation for polyester putty application.
2 to 10 minutes after it starts to dry in a half NOTE: Before applying the putty, be sure to read
hardened state. In grinding off, move the surface the manufacturer’s instructions.
former from the center toward the edge in a radial
NOTE: Mix the putty with its necessary amount of
direction because the adherence along the edge
hardener and knead it until its color becomes
is not strong enough.
identical.
NOTE: After a puttied (body filler) surface is
14. Apply polyester putty. Apply the polyester putty
polished, a number of hollow cavities remain on
sparely on the scratches, cavity holes or dents.
its surface. As it is difficult to fill tiny air cavities with
15. Dry up polyester putty.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
NOTE: For the drying time, refer to the described here demonstrate how important it is to
manufacturer’s instructions. follow these instructions step by step.
16. Polyester putty polishing and finishing. To
polish by hand, use P180 to P240 sandpaper. To Repair process
use a double action sander, use P120 to P180
sandpaper. Perfect preparation of the subsurface is the
17. Featheredge (Undercoat roughing for better precondition for a brilliant paintwork result. Faults
adherence). in the preliminary stages delay completion and
WARNING: Wear an approved respirator, described here demonstrate how important it is to
gloves, eye protection when putty follow these instructions step by step.
polishing.
• Using a double action sander with a P240 Illustration of damage
sandpaper.
• Depending upon the situation, make the
polished old paint layer sloping without steps.
• For the old paint layer on which primer surfacer
is to be applied, polish it with sandpaper for
better adherence to the new paint.
A typical case for spot repair is a small stone chip

on the fender.
Cleaning
First of all the component is thoroughly cleaned

using silicone remover and refurbished using
abrading and polishing paste. This re-creates the
original degree of shine and ensures exact color
Item Description matching on the touch-up surface.
1 Feather edge
2 Old paint layer
Perfect preparation of the subsurface is the
precondition for a brilliant paintwork result. Faults
in the preliminary stages delay completion and
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Sand out Rubbing down
Sand out the damaged location using P180 - P320. The repair location is now rubbed down with P400
Only small sanding blocks and small sanding - P500 and the bordering surface with P2000 -
machines must be used, so that the area of the P4000. Remove sanding residues and clean the
repair remains as small as possible. repair area with silicone remover.
Sanding is completed by rubbing down the Paint
surrounding surface with a fine sanding pad or
P1000 paper. Remove sanding residues and clean
the repair area with silicone remover. The
peripheral zone must then be masked for
application of the filler.
NOTE: The size of the repair area must be kept
as small as possible (maximum size DIN A4).
Filling
Before painting, clean the area for the final time

using a dust-bonding cloth. Then apply the basic
paint in thin layers using a spray gun until enough
coverage is achieved.
After drying, apply clear lacquer in 1 or 2 coats
(depending on product). In doing so, spray so that
only the newly applied basic paint is completely
covered. Finally a touch-up thinners is sprayed
over the edge of the clear lacquer to dissolve the
The filler layer is applied in stages. First of all, filler
clear lacquer spray mist.
is only applied to the location which has been
sanded away. After a wait time for flashing off, the
second coat is applied so that it spreads over onto
the existing paintwork.
The filler must be dried according to the instructions
of the material supplier.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Dry can be removed using P2000 - P4000 paper and
a larger eccentric sander.
Now dry the clear lacquer according to the

manufacturer's instructions using an infrared gun.
Polish
Polish the component using a polisher and polish

and check the polished area for any swirl marks
which may be present. Polish away any swirl marks
which are present.
Dirt inclusions
Sand out
Minor damage can be removed with a small

sanding machine or preferably with an eccentric
sander with P1500 - P2000. Very fine spray mist
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225846en
http://vnx.su
Corrosion Prevention
General such as sodium chloride used as road salt
accelerate the corrosion process.
Although corrosion protection measures and • Mechanical damage such as stone chips and
painting processes in production have reached a scratches which penetrate through to the steel
very high technical standard and will be panel.
continuously developed further, in the long term • Lack of care by the vehicle owner of the painted
corrosion on a vehicle cannot be totally avoided. and corrosion proofed surfaces or areas on the
Further demands are therefore made of the paint vehicle.
specialist besides his knowledge of normal
repainting of vehicles which have been repaired • Unfavorable weather or environmental
after an accident, in addition specialist knowledge conditions, as may occur in areas with high
is required for assessing and rectifying damage humidity, high salt content in the air or serious
due to corrosion. air pollution due to aggressive gases and dusts.
During repair painting, take care over the In the case of mechanical damage, formation of
maintenance and re-creation of the corrosion rust can often be seen, beginning to spread into
protection applied in production, in view of the the painted surface from a point (stone chip) or
long-term warranty on Ford vehicles. Only those from a line (scratch). If these faults are not
repair materials which are approved by Ford may professionally rectified in good time, the result is
be used for body repair work and repair painting. rusting through from the outside to the inside.
Rusting penetration from the inside to the outside
For detailed information on corrosion protection occurs when for instance the cavity protection was
measures during body repairs, please refer to inadequate.
chapter 501-25.
Furthermore, information on corrosion protection Operations after painting
measures is repeated in individual chapters of the
paint manual. NOTE: The manufacturer's instructions must be
In particular, pay attention that the layer followed when working with the various corrosion
thicknesses specified in production are maintained. protection materials.
The complete system of solid one-layer on • After painting, treat all cavities in the repair area
galvanized steel panels must equal at least 90 µm with cavity protection wax. In doing so, pay
and the total system of two-layer on galvanized particular attention to the weld seams. In
steel panels must equal at least 105 µm. dead-end applications with a panel insert, the
It is important that sealing operations, as far as cavity protection wax must be applied so that it
they are necessary, should be undertaken after also reaches the area of the panel insert.
the application of the paint to specification, in order • Seals which were applied in production and not
to ensure the best corrosion protection. All over painted must be reapplied. Seals protect
components which form hollow cavities such as vulnerable parts of the bodywork, keep moisture
pillars, rails, side components etc. must be away, reduce wind and road noise and dampen
provided with a coating of cavity protection wax. vibrations.
Causes of corrosion • Apply transparent wax.
Corrosion of steel is an electrochemical process

during which the steel combines with oxygen. The Definition of the degree of rust
following factors lead to corrosion:
In workshop practice, in order to be able to carry
• Acidic compounds contained in the air, such as out a consistent and objective evaluation of the
carbonic acid and sulphur dioxide, combined scope of the damage, a degree of rust on the scale
with oxygen from the air and/or water. Salts of 1 to 5 is determined by the DIN 53 210 standard.
The main criterion here is the extent to which rust
exists under the paint structure. It is determined in
millimeters (mm).
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506675en
http://vnx.su
Underlying rust grade: R1 < 1 mm
Corrosion starting with up to 1 mm of rust
underlying (in the form of a spot or a line).
The damage can be rectified by cleaning the
defective location and mechanically removing the
underlying rust. For a small extent, apply a primer
using a brush and allow it to dry. Touch-up the
location with a paint pen or provide a new paint
coating.
Underlying rust grade R2 < 1 - 2 mm

Advanced corrosion with up to 2 mm underlying
rust.
Rectifying the damage:
• Clean the defective location.
• Remove the underlying rust mechanically down
to the paintwork carrier.
• Apply 1-component filler and then 2-component
"Vario" filler.
• Provide the damage location with new paint coat
on visible outer surfaces. Only locally touch-up
areas which are not optically conspicuous.

More advanced corrosion with up to 4 mm
underlying rust. The damage must be rectified in
the same way as for R2. A permanent cure of this
type of damage pattern is still just possible

Notably advanced corrosion with up to 5 mm
underlying rust. The damage must be rectified in
the same way as for R2. If it is found that for whole
areas this is only possible with a great deal of work,
or is not possible at all, then a new component
must be used.
Underlying rust grade R5 > 5 mm

Extreme corrosion, with more than 5mm underlying
rust (panels, flanges or load-bearing components
partially rusted or rusted through).
Such damage can no longer be repaired because
in many cases the constructional strength of the
component can no longer be produced. The risk
in making a repair is too great. Install a new
component and paint it.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G506675en
http://vnx.su
Color Identification and Chromatics

Basic color theory
In order to achieve optically perfect painting results
it is vital to understand the physical principles of
the origin of color impression.
Out of all light rays coming from the sun, what wavelengths are reflected, human can see its blue
human eyes can see are only visible rays within a color.
wavelength range of 380 nm to 780 nm. The rays Colors can be generally divided into two groups,
of which wavelength is shorter than 380 nm are chromatic colors and non-chromatic colors.
called ultraviolet rays. The deterioration of a paint Chromatic colors: [Red] / [Blue] / [Yellow] : colors
layer and the change or fade of a color is caused that have, in other words, hue or tint.
by these ultraviolet rays. On the contrary, the rays Non-chromatic colors [White ] / [Gray] / [Black] :
that have wavelengths longer than 780 nm are colors that have no hue or tint.
termed infrared rays. The rays that have much
longer wavelengths are called a far-infrared ray. This perception arises through the combined effect
Both of these infrared and farinfrared rays are of the following components:
called heat rays, which are used for the heat • Light (sunlight or artificial light irradiates the
sources of dryers and room heaters. object).
Visible rays in the sunlight look white. However, • Surface of the object (reflection from the object
as is easily understood if the sunlight is passed of certain constituent parts of the light).
through a prism, the sunlight is a combination of • Eye (perception of the reflections from the
different wavelengths that have different colors object).
ranging from red to violet.
Color
Color itself is a sensory perception.

Only when a visible light ray comes to an object
and its reflected light ray reaches the human eye,
its color is recognized by the human eye. If only
light rays of long wavelengths are reflected, their
red color is visible and, if only light rays of short
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
recognize wavelengths between 0.36 µm (violet)
and 0.78 µm (red).
If all the perceptible wavelengths of the spectrum
impinge on the human eye at the same time, the
impression of white light is produced.
Three Factors of Colors

A chromatic color is comprised of three factors that
are Hue, Value, and Chroma, while non-chromatic
colors have only value.
Hue: The feature that characterizes each color like
red, blue, yellow, and green.
Because the sensory impression of color is
produced by all three of these components, it is Value: The degree of brightness.
dependent on the type, quality and function of the Chroma: The degree of freshness, apart from the
individual components. Practical examples make degrees of hue and value.
this clear:
• If a particular article is subjected to artificial light,
then it gives a different impression of color to Additive and subtractive color mixing
that which it gives in sunlight.
• An object with uniform color but different surface
textures appears to have different colors
(grained or ungrained dashboard).
• A person with perception disorder (color
blindness) cannot recognize certain colors or
distinguish between them e.g. red-green
weakness).
In turn the type of color is determined by the light
absorption ability of an object. Light shines with all
color components (spectral colors) onto an object,
certain components of the light are absorbed (taken
in) and other components are reflected (sent on).
The components which are reflected produce the Additive color mixing is the combination of light
specific color impression. from different sources to give white. Different
intensities of the additive primary colors red, green
and blue allow millions of different colors to be
represented (RGB colors).
Additive color mixing is always therefore used when
light should enter the eye directly (without reflection
off an object). Such as in the case of computer
monitors or overhead beamers.
The colors as we see them are the result of a

combination of reflected colors from the spectrum.
Physically speaking, these are electromagnetic
waves with different wavelengths (and
frequencies). The healthy human eye can
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Subtractive color mixing means mixing the primary together as this will produce a dull (i.e. grey) shade.
colors cyan, magenta and yellow to form a desired If green is added to red, the red becomes greyer,
color (CMY colors). not greener.
Subtractive color mixing is used when light should Color shades which are side by side are partner
enter the eye of an observer after reflection from colors and produce a mixed color shade. For
an object. Such as happens with painting or in instance, mixing red and blue produces a pure
printing. violet.
In addition, black and/or white may be necessary
to produce a particular color shade.
Oswald color circle
• White makes the color shade lighter.
• Black makes the color shade darker.
• With black and white the color shade becomes
more dreary or greyer.
Indication of Colors
Hue Ring
Hue Ring is a relative arrangement of colors of ten
main colors placed in the shape of a ring. These
ten colors include, in addition to main five colors,
Red ®), Yellow (Y), Green (G), Blue (B), and purple
The Oswald color circle is based on subtractive (P), another 5 colors that are to be relatively placed
color mixing, and enables the behavior of paints between them, Yellow red (YR), Yellow green (GY),
when they are mixed together to be represented. Blue green (BG), Blue purple (BP), Red purple
(RP). Each has is divided into 4 identical spaces
Colors lying opposite each other are with an interval of 2.5 and the center is shown at
complementary colors and should not be mixed 5.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Complementary Color
In the Munsell Color Ring, the two colors located Metamerism
exactly opposite direction from each other are
termed as complementary colors. If red and blue
green, or yellow and blue purple are mixed in an
appropriate ration, they turn out a non-chromatic
color.
By making use of the relationship of
complementary color, in order to weaken the
degree of the hue, it can be attained by an addition
of a little amount of its complementary color, but,
as the color becomes slightly muddy or hard to
return to the original, it is not advised to use this
way.
Outdoor
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Indoor
Metamerism is the name of the effect which occurs
when two colors appear identical in a particular
light (e.g. artificial light), but the colors appear
different under another light source (e.g. daylight).
The cause is the fact that the human brain, aided
by the eyes, does not evaluate the wavelength,
instead it evaluates the spectral intensity of the
reflected light.
It is for this reason that color matching in practice
must only ever be performed in daylight, or under
special artificial light which is based on daylight.
Depending on the size and shape of the aluminum
Metallic and pearl pigments platelets, different metallic effects can be achieved:
• Cornflake aluminum (1) causes very strong
Colored paints achieve their color effect by the dispersion because of rough edges, low
addition of pigments. Pigments are colored, solid, brilliance, very low flop and produces grey-silver
very fine organic and inorganic particles which are shades.
insoluble in the binding material. • Dollar aluminum (2) causes hardly any
dispersion because of the smooth surface, high
brilliance, produces very light, almost white
Metallic pigments silver shades.
Aluminum platelets are added as pigment to form With metallic paints however, only a light-dark light
metallic paint. reflection effect occurs.
Colored metallic paints are produced by the extra
addition of color pigments to the metallic paint.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Pearl pigments lamp, etc. The repaired color on a car body must
be seen the same with the surrounding color under
any light source. For this reason, the mixed color
must be compared under any possible light
sources.
The color of the light source is stipulated by CIE
(Committee of International Electric Lighting)
• A light source: Electric light equivalent to that
of a tungsten electric bulb.
• B light source: Light equivalent to that of the
direct sunlight at noontime.
• C light source: Daylight including the light from
the blue sky.
The basis of pearl pigments is formed by mica, • D65 light source: Artificial light equivalent to
which is metallized with a silver or gold layer. the light at noontime.
Depending on the angles of light and observation,
the mica platelets reflect different proportions of
light. Because of this, the color of the paint appears
to the observer to change.
Pearl pigments produce a colored and light-dark
reflected light effect.
Colorimetry
Simply to compare two different colors is
Colorimetry, but it is very important for paint
repairing. There are two methods to do Colorimetry.
One is visual comparison and another is with the
use of a colorimeter. However, in actual color
repair, in particular in metallic colors and pearl
colors, it is extremely difficult to use a mechanical
device to measure colors. So, the visual approach
is mostly used in daily work places. Example of
mechanical color measuring device (Computerized
color measuring machine)
Color view angle

In comparing colors, it is not enough to see a color
only from a certain angle. For metallic colors and
pearl colors, in particular, as the color looks
different according to the direction of sight, it is
necessary to see the color from different angles.
Angles to see and their terms: The direction to see
Visual Colorimetry basic colors is basically by angles as well.
A car is viewed under all sorts of light sources 1 - from right front
including the sunlight, florescent light, mercury 2 - from 45° upper
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
3 - from slightly upper sideway Bronzing
Bronzing is a phenomenon in which a golden
metallic luster appears on the surface of a newly
painted layer. It tends to take place when blue or
green colors are used as they are without being
diluted with other color or liquid.
Metallic Base
This is a kind of paint in which tiny aluminum
particles are dispersed. There are many types of
paints of this kind. In using this paint, it is important
to understand its characteristics like its direction,
size of particles, luster and brightness, whiteness
and so forth. In particular, as the paints coated with
pigments on the surface are in markets, it is
Characteristics of Primary Colors extremely important to compare the color from
various angles and under different sources of lights.
In mixing colors, what is important is to recognize
well the characteristics of primary colors in Pearl Base
whitening, transparency, and weatherproofness. This is a special kind of paint in which pigments
Unless the problems of conditionally identical colors with pearl luster (pearl pigments) is included. There
and the directions of metallic colors are well are many different kinds depending upon colors,
understood, correct mixing colors cannot be size of pigment particles, etc. In mixing color, the
expected. most appropriate pearl base must be used that
White mixing of primary colors
corresponds to the color sample. In pearl painting,
there are two ways of painting, three coat pearl
The hue produced when white is mixed to a primary painting and the two coat pearl painting. Unlike
color is called “Whitened tint” of the color. It is very normal metallic painting, depending upon the luster
important to understand the nature of whitened tint and tint exclusive for pearl pigments, the deep tone
and its direction of the primary color and metallic of color layers can be obtained.
base in mixing metallic colors, and those of the
primary color and white. Three-coat Pearl Painting
Transparency
The paint used for this painting is a compound of
base colors and pigments with pearl luster. The
The transparency of a certain color depends upon paint layer visible to eyes is comprised of color
the amount of pigment in the primary color, but base, pearl base, and clear base.
more than that, upon the size of pigment particles.
Even if the same pigments are used, the more
transparent it is, the finer the size of the pigments
are. The level of the transparency is one of the
main factors effecting the direction of the metallic
color.
Weatherproofness
Most of the primary colors have good
weatherproofness. But it is also true that some of
them fade quickly in color if mistakenly handled.
Blotting
Blotting is a phenomenon in which the color of the Two-coat Pearl Painting
old paint layer blots up over the surface of the new
paint. Pearl chromatic pigments are used for this paint.
As aluminum powerd is also mixed, it is possible
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
to make the same paint layer as that or normal Comparison between graphite color and metallic
metallic paints. color. If viewed from the right front, metallic or pearl
brightness or shine is visible on the metallic or two
coat pearl painting mixed with graphite pigment in
low luminosity over the whole area, but if viewed
from low angles, its luminosity becomes much
lower and deeper with no more brightness and
shine left.
Pearl Pigments
Graphite Color
Aluminium Pigments
Metallic Color
MIO Base
MIO is a ferric oxide of a crystal structure of size
15 m. This pigment has unique features that are
not shared by the conventional pigments as follows:
It can be painted very thick, almost ten times that
of aluminum pigment. Even its side surface reflects
Graphite Base the incoming light strongly.
Graphite pigment is one of the graphite allotropes. The paint surface is so flat that the reflected light
It has been used as a pigment for conductible is still very strong.
primer for plastic paints. However metallic luster When exposed to light, it shines strongly and three
and brightness have been reassessed and it being dimensionally like a diamond.
widely used.
Its drawback is that, because of its heavy specific
As compared to carbon pigments widely used for gravity, it tends to be deposited in the paint. Indoors
black, the size of a particle is almost 5 times that or in the shadow, it looks to be a dark and deep
of a carbon pigment and, in spite of its dark gray solid color, but under the direct sunlight, it appears
luster, the gap between particles is too large to to be shining like lots of diamonds buried under
secure tight paint adherence.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
the paint surface. Because of this unique feature,
it is impossible to mix color using a metallic base
or pearl base in its place.
Crystal Blue
The phthalocyanine pigment used as ordinary blue
color is crystallized and flaked for this crystal blue
Opal White pigment. The light reflected on the surface
brightens like bronze and the light penetrated
Though the composition of pigments are the same
through the surface shines blue.
as that for ordinary white paints, this paint appears
almost half transparent as the size of pigments is Crystal Brown
very small and, more than that, titanium dioxide is
used. Because of this, the concealing capacity is The main content of this pigment is a flake-like iron
so limited that it is normally used as opal base (opal oxide that is also used for red rust colored pigment.
color) with other color or aluminum pigments mixed. It cannot be so thick and shines like pearl mica.
Color Matching Equipment

In order to conduct mixing colors and measuring
paints as needed accurately and quickly, the
following instruments and devices are needed.
Containers needed for mixing colors

According to the amount of paints needed, get
prepared with several containers of 0.2 to 18 liters.
A feature of Opal Color

This paint has the same paint layer structure as
that of metallic paints with fine grain titanium (micro
titanium) used as a base coat. If this paint is mixed,
yellowish metallic base color is seen from the right
front. If seen from a low angle sideways, it looks
bluish. So, as a whole, it has a charm of a two color
opal tone.
Churning Bars and Spatulas

There are also some churning bars combined
spatulas. Depending upon the amount of paints
needed, select churning bars and spatulas of
proper lengths and sizes.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Test Plates Spouted Agitator Cover

Plates, thick papers or magnetic sheets. Used as Used to prevent the solvent content in the paint
a paint test on which paint colors etc. are tested. from evaporating. The paints are easily agitated in
it.
Churning Equipment
This is a sort of an electrically powered shelf. Using
this churning instrument, a number of coat cans
and or gallon cans containing paints can be
churned all at the same time. There is a power
shelf that can churn as many as 75 cans.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Metric Color Mixing Device Color Mixing Work
This device has several metric functions for mixing
paints. It allows measures up to 6 kg at an
increments of 0.1 kg. This device can be used not
Work Environment
only for normal mixing colors but also for mixing a
A good work environment is necessary for car body
necessary amount of hardener and or thinner in a
paint repairs.
two-liquid mixing type paint.
• Abundant natural light.
• Fluorscent lights of wide range of colors.
• The surrounding wall painted with non-chromatic
color.
• Workspace with a drier, sprayer and all other
necessary tools and instruments well arranged.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Step of Mixing Colors • Compare the color with that of the actual car. If
no substantial difference is found in hue,
Mixing color specification is available direction, and shade of color, mix the color
1. Confirm the color difference between the color according to the mixing color spec.
card attached to the color sample book and the • If the difference is too great, instead of following
color surrounding the damaged area on the actual the color spec., before mixing the colors, make
car. an adjustment in accordance to the color
difference in the amounts of primary colors
• In a case that the color sample is not available beforehand.
but the mixing color spec. is available, use a
small amount of paints, make a preliminary color
mixing. After making a test spraying, make a
test sample for the color and compare the
colors.
• In a case that the difference between the color
sample and the actual color on the car is too
great. Confirm whether there is a different color
mixing specs on the actual car color system or
not.
3. Painting with a spatula and color comparison.

Test-paint the mixed color on a test plate and
confirm whether or not it is the correct color after
it dries.
4. test painting and color comparison. Under the

same condition as for the actual color repair,
conduct a test painting. Take note that, in
particular, pearl colors and metallic colors change
greatly if painted under different painting conditions.
Compare the direction, conditionally identical
2. Measure necessary amounts of colors. colors, the size of paint particles, brightness etc.
of the color on the dried painted test plate with
those of the actual car from every angle and under
different light sources.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
5. Fine color adjustments. As a rule, make a fine 2. Select primary colors. Comparing with the body
adjustment using a small amount of the paint used color, select the most appropriate colors of which
in the color spec.; however, where necessary, a direction, hue, and other factors are close to the
new color can be added. Make repeated color body color. At the same time, confirm their
mixing tests until the desired color is obtained. roughness of metallic or pearl base particles and
their brightness.
Mixing colors specification is not available

3. Preparatory mixing color. Select the most
When the whole body color has been replaced with appropriate primary colors; it is not necessary to
another color different from the original or when let the color match with that of the body. Confirm
the mixing colors spec. is not available. Use the the hue, direction and other factors of the color
following steps to match the color quickly. only from the selected approximated color.
1. Select approximate colors. Select several
approximate colors of which spec. is known, from
the color samples.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Item Description 6. Final color mixing. Based upon the color finally
determined and its mixing ratio, mix the necessary
1 Paint amount of colors.
4. Spatula painting and color comparison. Paint 7. Test painting and color comparison. Under the
the preparatory mixed color on a test plate and same condition as for the actual color repair,
confirm if the color is the one desired after it has conduct a test painting. Take note that, in
dried up. particular, pearl colors and metallic colors change
greatly if painted under different painting conditions.
Compare the direction, conditionally identical
colors, the size of paint particles, brightness etc.
of the color on the dried painted test plate with
those of the actual car from every angle and under
different light sources.
8. Fine color adjustment. Where necessary, a new
color can be added. Make repeated color mixing
tests until the desired color is obtained. The color
mixing is completed.
Color codes and their determination

5. Test painting and color comparison. Paint the
preparatory mixing color on a test panel using a It is necessary to determine the correct color shade
spray gun and confirm whether or not the color is of the original paintwork in order to perform a
the one desired. Repeat the process until the professional and perfect paint repair.
desired color and its mixing ratio is found.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
The original paint color shade can be found by:
• Inspection of the vehicle type plate with the color
code stamped on it.
– Later design
– Earlier design
• Color shade catalog or color shade system of
the manufacturer.
• The bare bodyshell plate with color designation.
Color shade catalog or color shade system

of the repair paint manufacturer.
The repair paint manufacturers offer a variety of

possible systems for the determining the production
color shade of motor vehicles. There are electronic
systems, color card systems and manuals for the
determination of color shades.
Most repair paint manufacturers use the following
systems:
• A tabular system based on the following
parameters:
– Color code
– Make
– Model Because of the many parameters used, in a tabular
– Build year system the color shade can also be determined by
– Color or color name the lack of a parameter.
– Ancillary codes When using the color cards, emphasis is placed
• A system with color cards based on the following on matching of the original color shade with the
parameters: color shade samples. For this reason this method
is very helpful when the other parameters are not
– Make
available.
– Color shade
Comparison of the results of both methods
– Build year
increases the certainty of using the correct original
color shade and its formulation.
Additional certainty can be achieved during color
shade determination by making a color sample
plate. Here it is however important to apply the
complete paint structure with base paint and clear
lacquer onto a sample plate (1) in order to carry
out a color shade and color coverage test.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Various tinted fillers are used during factory
painting. In order to achieve the exact color shade
of the factory applied paint, attention should be
paid that the correctly matched fillers are used.
The color shade comparison is done by comparing

the vehicle paintwork with the sample plate (1).
The color coverage test is possible by using the
black test stripe (2): If the test stripe (2) is still
visible after test painting of the sample plate (1),
The repair paint manufacturers offer suitable
the coverage is not good enough.
precolored primers. The use of filler color cards
By using this determination of the original color allows the matching color shade to be determined.
shade, the formulation and information on any very
slight fine adjustments which may be necessary
can be established. Color Influencing Factors
Some of the colour influencing factors are
Matching tinted filler to the color code • Environment
NOTE: Color samples must always be made from • Product
the same materials as the subsequent repair • Application
painting. Perform color shade matching in the fully
hardened state, in natural light or under suitable • Equipment
artificial light.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225847en
http://vnx.su
Tips and Tricks

Comparing paint structures
Masking Process
It may happen that an area remains visible,
especially when the area of the repair is small. The Masking is conducted when lower coat (primer
reason for this is the structural variation in the paint surfacing) and top coat are painted.
surface at the repair location compared with the
original paint finish. The original paint finish has a The purpose of masking is not only to prevent the
slight orange peel effect while the repair areas is paint from adhering to unnecessary area other than
extremely smooth. the repaired one, but also not to dirty the car or not
to let dust and dirt in the car.
This effect can be reduced by fine sanding using
P3000 of the area around the repair location and According to where the repaired area is or what
then polishing. kind of painting method is employed, the work
processes or methods are different.
NOTE: When water based paints are used, all
Etching substrate materials must be stable towards water.
If the substrate can be etched during the solvent Plan the masking work:
test, suitable preparation must be done. • Determine the sequence of masking work.
Job steps: Sometimes after masking film has been applied,
it is difficult or impossible to reach certain areas.
NOTE: Follow the manufacturer specific
instructions. • Prepare the masking material.
• Start with small difficult areas.
• Sand the damaged area extensively using an
eccentric sander and P80 or P120 abrasive Pay special attention to the areas of profiled seals,
sheets. Finish off sanding with P150 or P180. edges, openings and paint transitions.
• Remove the sanding dust and clean the area
of the damage using silicone remover.
Masking Tools
• Apply polyester stopper to the bare panel and
to the damaged area. Masking paper
• Sand the dried polyester stopper to an even
Masking paper is pasted to cover a part of the
surface using P80 - P150. Finish sanding using
panel to prevent there to be attached by paint, paint
P180 - P240. If required apply more stopper,
mist etc. during paint work.
again only on the bare panel.
• Wet sand the residual old paint finish using There are several different kinds of masking papers
P600 - P800. Transitions with P400 - P600. available. Some of them have an anti-solvent
Clean with silicone remover. penetration effect; some have a high heat proofing
effect, or a liquid type-masking agent that can be
• Prime bare metal areas with acid primer.
applied with a spraying gun.
• After the acid primer has been left exposed to
the air for the correct evaporation time, apply Masking Tape
2-component primer filler in thin layers over the
Masking tape is often used together with a masking
complete repair area, leaving enough air
paper to cover a part of the panel that should not
exposure time in between coats.
be spoiled by paint mist or it is also used by itself
• After the filler has dried, sand wet with P800 or for the same purpose.
sand dry with P400. Sanded through areas must
be covered again with 2-component Nonstop Normally, masking tapes made of paper are widely
filler primer. used, but there are also metallic tapes, which have
a heatproof effect and plastic tapes which can be
Another possible method of preventing etching of neatly cut, are used, depending upon the purposes.
the substrate is to use water-base primer and filler
materials. Masking tape is available in various widths for
special application areas. In practice however, a
wide tape has proved best for almost all areas,
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
also taking into account the time required for
masking work.
Composition:
Back surface treatment agent: to prevent a tape
from sticking to another tape.
Backing: Tape base material to maintain paper
toughness.
Primer: Enhance adherence of glue to the backing
material of the paper.
Adhesive: Glue the tape to the panel tightly.
NOTE: Use of differing masking materials is often
much more time-consuming.
Advantages
• Good coverage. Narrower tapes must often be
applied in several layers.
• More resistant to tearing.
• Wide tapes can be applied deep into joints and
therefore protect from paint mist and
contamination.
• Removal is often easier.
Masking tapes for two tone color painting:

This type of tape is called a vinyl tape, a hemming
tape, or line tape. It is ideal for the ending of a
curved surface or the ending of two-tone color. The
use of this type of tape ensures clear cut-lined
painting.
Selection of masking tapes:

The tape made of normal paper is usually used for
fixing masking papers. Apart from that, there is
another tape made of strong Japanese paper that
has heat-proofing, anti-solvent effects. Further, it
is manufactured so that it does not leave glue
residue after the tape has been peeled off.
The plastic tape is ideal for bordering, hemming,
line drawing, or for the ending of curved surface Tapes for paint stripe:
or two-tone color.
As this type of tape has cut-in of various widths,
In the quality of the backing surface, there are two so, it can be used for paint linings of various widths.
kinds, one is tape with a flat surface and another
has a creped surface. As a creped tape shrinks to
some extent, it is used for the curved surface.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
Paper Dispenser Sheet Dispenser

In this device, rolled masking paper and masking Using this stand it is easy to take out the polyvinyl
tape are combined in a set. Therefore, it is possible sheet.
to draw out the needed size of a masking paper
with tapes already pasted on it where it is needed.
This device makes it possible to set the masking
papers of different sizes simultaneously.
Magnet
It is used to fix a vinyl sheet on the vehicle or press
tight a wrinkled vinyl sheet in a pulled state. With
the use of this magnet, it is possible to shift the
position of a vinyl sheet from one place to another
for easy repair work.
Polyvinyl Sheet
This plastic sheet is composed of three combined
layers, polyethylene, polypropylene, and polymer Item Description
for the automotive use as masking sheet. It has a
1 Magnet
paint mist absorption effect and, even after the
paint is dried up, it never drops paint as powder.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
Special Covers
There are body covers of a variety of uses. One
cover covers a whole body, another covers just a
half part of a vehicle body. In addition, there are
wheel covers, or sheet covers that protect the cabin
from being unnecessarily paint-stained.
2. To paint an individual panel.
Item Description
1 Seat cover
2 Wheel cover
3 Body cover
Trim Cord
This cord is used to prevent the rubber strips
around glass from being paint-stained. By inserting
it between the rubber stripe and body, the stripe
can be separated from the body.
3. To paint an individual panel (block painting) and

to paint the adjoining panel in gradation.
Item Description
1 Weatherstrip
2 Cord
Methods of Masking
Masking work can be divided into four groups.
1. To paint a whole vehicle.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
Endings of Adjoining Panels
Vinyl masking (In the case of masking a door):
The inside of the door where paint mist tends to
attach to is masked beforehand. Cover the whole
vehicle other than the door with vinyl sheet and
close the door with the vinyl sheet in place so as
to prevent entry of paint mist from the door opening
into the inside of the cabin.
End of painting if a featureline is on the panel:

If only a part of a panel is repaired, there is a way
to make the color difference from the old paint
surface less conspicuous and finish the end of
painting neat. Making the end line of paint by
folding up the masking tape can get rid of the steps.
Item Description
1 Vinyl sheet
Ending of body sealed panel:

When the body sealing area is inside the panel,
align the end of painting with the body sealing area,
which makes the steps at the sealing area less
conspicuous.
Item Description
1 Masking tape
2 Glued surface
3 End of painting
End of Enamel Gradated Clear Block Painting

If the enamel paint is painted with gradation and
clear coat is block-painted on the panel, the
bordering are with the adjoining panel is only
clear-painted. As clear coat is transparent, unless
Even at the end of the sealing area, by painting there is no conspicuous step, small irregularities
with the masking tape folded up as shown in the cannot be recognized. Further, if paint is applied
figure, it is possible to make the steps far less with gradation along the edge area after clear coat
conspicuous. is applied, and the masking paper or tape is peeled
off, the step looks less conspicuous.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
3. Without ending the tape just at the outer panel
corner, place the tape so that it ends further inside
the corner.
Item Description
1 Deside on enamel base colour
2 Enamel gradated pigment 4. Mask the whole door.
3 Clear coat area
Example of Masking Process

Outer panel and door edge:
1. Place the masking tape with the glued surface
toward the painted surface at the outer panel
corner area.
Reverse Masking
Fold up the masking paper and make a rounded
area so that paint mist is slightly attached on its
end of painting. For the flat surface area, use a
masking paper and for the corner area, used a
masking tape. There are two ways of masking in
reverse way. One is to use a tape and another is
to use a masking paper.
2. Close the door.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
To make masking at the corner (rounded) area of

the part, place the masking tape with some margin.
Do not paste it tightly. It is not good to connect
another piece of tape at the corner area.
Tunnel Masking
To paint a pillar or something like that, this masking
method makes the step at the painting end less
conspicuous by lifting the masking paper.
Depending upon the number of gradated paintings, Masking in Primer Surfacer Painting
painting is carried out with the masking tape lifted
at two or three stages. Key Points
Make reverse masking around the repair area.
Masking with External Attached Parts Installed

When masking with the external attached parts Burrs of the painting layer tends to grow at the door
installed, make masking with a gap identical to the edge area. Remove burrs by polishing, if
thickness of the paint layer left. If masking is made necessary.
without the gap of the depth, the tape is joined to
the paint layer, making it difficult to peel off the tape
later.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
4. To prevent paint mist from adhering to the front

openings of the rear door and the center door pillar,
Masking Process for Top Coating attach a masking tape to the flange area to mask
the center pillar together.
Rear Door
1. Cover the outer handle and door protector
installing holes with tapes from the inside of the
door to prevent entry of paint mist.
5. In order to prevent entry of paint mist from the

front door opening into the cabin, insert a vinyl
sheet between the front door and body and close
the front door. Then turn back the vinyl, and cover
2. Cover the rear door rear inner panel with the the door glass with masking paper.
masking paper up to the body sealing edge to
prevent entry of paint mist.
Front Door and Front Fender

3. Insert a vinyl sheet between the rear door and 1. To prevent adherence of paint mist to the lower
the body as shown in the figure below, to prevent part of the front pillar, place masking tape between
entry of paint mist from the body openings and the front pillar and front fender.
close the door and then place masking paper on
it.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
2. Cover the outer handle and door protector 5. In order to prevent entry of paint mist from the
installing holes from the inside of the door. front door opening into the cabin, insert a vinyl
sheet between the front door and the body and
close the door. Then place masking paper.
3. Put masking tape over the front area of the front

door ending at front door hinge, and place masking
tape over the door harness to prevent adherence Item Description
of paint mist to it.
1 Front door
2 Vinyl sheet
6. Open the hood and place masking paper along
the front fender as shown.
4. Place masking paper to cover the rear inside

surface of the front door.
7. Close the engine hood, turn back the paper

toward the hood so that the paper does not stick
to the fender.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
8. Place a masking vinyl sheet as shown below to 2. Close the trunk lid, turn back the paper toward
cover everything other than the front fender. Turn the trunk lid so that the paper does not stick to the
back the paper on the hood and fix it with tape, rear outer panel, and cover the rear window glass
and masking paper covering the door glass. with masking paper.
3. Place masking tape on the rear of the outer
panel along the sealing area. Place a masking vinyl
sheet to cover the roof rear window and trunk lid
and fix the papers with tape at the vinyl sheet.
4. Place a tape along the press line of the outer
panel rear door opening so that the glued surface
of the masking tape faces the outer panel.
9. To prevent paint mist from adhering to the wheel

or dust from coming out of the wheelhouse, place
a masking paper or vinyl sheet over the
wheelhouse and wheel.
5. Close the rear door and turn back the tape

toward the door side and place masking paper,
and attach it with tape.
Rear Side Outer Panel

1. Open the trunk lid and place masking paper over
the inside of the outer panel trunk lid opening.
6. Place masking paper over the rear door.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
Place masking sheet until the end of it comes to
the door opening trim and side garnish installing
flange because the end of the masking is hidden
when the door opening trim and side garnish are
installed.
7. Place a vinyl sheet to cover the whole part

except the outer panel. Place a masking sheet to
cover the rear wheelhouse and wheel to prevent
paint mist from adhering to the wheel or dust from
coming out of the wheelhouse. On the rear pillar
where the painting is gradated, use the tunnel
Trunk opening area:
masking method.
Place masking sheet to cover the trunk lid opening
along the weather strip installing flange because
the end of the masking tape is hidden when the
weather strip is installed in position.
Masking in a Whole Vehicle Painting

Inside the door panel:
Place masking sheet until the edge of it comes to
the inside of the door lining because the end of the Engine compartment:
masking paper is hidden when the door lining is Place masking sheet to cover the engine
later placed in position. compartment opening along the front engine fender
installing area.
Door opening:
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
Color shade problems Another practical tool for removal of paint faults
which lie proud of the surface is the paint plane.
If a vehicle color shade is taken from a vehicle on NOTE: Guide the tool carefully with the minimum
a hot summer day and the mixed color applied, of force. It must not tilt, otherwise more serious
this may cause color shade problems. Some colors damage may easily be caused.
change so much at higher temperatures that it can
lead to an incorrect result. Red color shades are
particularly prone to this shade behavior.
This means that color determination should always
be done on the bodywork when it is at about the
same temperature as the later working temperature
will be. The best temperature of the item is between
15° and 25° C.
Isopropanol and water

Painted surfaces are very easily cleaned using a
mixture of 70% water and 30% isopropanol (can
be obtained through a laboratory supplies specialist This tool allows paint faults to be carefully removed
or a pharmacist). in shavings. Afterwards the surface must be
polished using suitable materials.
Temperature reduction spray

Shading
If finishing work must be performed on touched-up
surfaces and newly painted plastic parts, problems Even when all the rules, steps and corresponding
may arise. The paint and the transitions are not instructions have been followed concerning
yet fully hardened. possible shades, it may happen that the mixed
color shade does not exactly match the vehicle
NOTE: When working with the polishing machine, color.
make certain that each operating run lasts no
longer than about 5 - 10 seconds, in order to In these cases, shading must be done. Because
prevent the paint becoming warm. there is no fixed formula for this, experience and
a trained eye are important. Some rules must be
Even so, in order to be able to polish over followed for shading.
transitions, temperature reduction spray must be
applied to the surface. The transition area is then NOTE: Self-made color sample plates of the
alternately sprayed and polished until a perfect current colors are very helpful for determining the
transition surface is achieved. color shade. Refer to the chapter Color
Determination and Color Theory.
Paint faults on soft plastic components where
elasticizer additive has been used in painting must • When shading, if possible only use the paint
be wet sanded using grade P2000 - P2500 paper. mixture that is also allotted in the color shade
formula.
In doing this the sanding location and the • Observe the rules concerning contrary colors
surroundings are sprayed with temperature (complementary colors) and partner colors
reduction spray and the paint faults sanded out by according to the Oswald color circle.
hand. Afterwards the location is polished as
described above. • Complementary colors are not recommended
during shading because they mutually inhibit
and lead to muddy mixtures.
Paint plane
Dirt inclusions and paint runs can be removed with Sanding marks
the sanding cylinder ("Finiball") and hand sanding
or eccentric sander in a wet sanding process. In certain circumstances, the recommended
sanding methods up to now are no longer suitable
for light metallic color shades. Wet sanding with
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
grade P1200 paper or a grey sanding pad can
cause sanding scratches which can become very
visible under certain lights.
In order to achieve an excellent paint result on
difficult color shades, follow these working rules:
• Sand filler as before, rub down area to be
painted with 3M ultra fine matting sponge and
3M matting gel.
painted with soaked 3M wet sand paper P1500
- P2000.
painted with 3M 260 L P1000 eccentric
(Interface Pad).
Improving touch-up work

During application of special effect base paints,
the effect particles align themselves exactly parallel
to the surface in the paint layer while it is still liquid.
This means a particular thickness of the paint layer
is required.
Because during painting the layer thickness in the
transition zones reduces from normal to zero, the
effect particles can no longer align themselves.
This leads to lighter, darker or cloudy zones.
If 1-component clear lacquer is sprayed before the
base coat, this effect is prevented. An optically
perfect transition will result.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225849en
http://vnx.su
502-00-1 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System 502-00-1
.
SECTION 502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting
System
CONTENTS PAGE
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications...................................................................................................................... 502-00-2

Crossmember..................................................................................................................... 502-00-3
http://vnx.su
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Stabilizer bar connecting link to stabilizer bar 55 41 -
Lower arm ball joint to wheel knuckle 48 35 -
Engine support insulator retaining bolts 80 59 -
Steering gear retaining bolts 48 35 -
Crossmember front retaining bolts 70 52 -
Crossmember rear retaining bolts 175 129 -
Exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining 44 32 -
nuts - Vehicles with 1.25L, 1.4L or 1.6L engine
Exhaust flexible pipe to muffler and tailpipe 47 35 -
assembly retaining nuts - Vehicles with diesel
engine
Exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining 47 35 -
nuts - Vehicles with 2.0L engine
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152599en
http://vnx.su
Crossmember
Special Tool(s) • Remove the heat shield.
Alignment Pins, Subframe
205-524 (15-122)
205524
General Equipment
Securing strap
Transmission jack TIE0025402
5 mm Allen key
4. Remove the engine support insulator.
Materials
Name Specification
Grease SA-M1C9107-A
Removal
All vehicles
1. Remove the front wheels and tires.
and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal TIE0027065
and Installation).
2. NOTE: Use a 5 mm Allen key to prevent the 5.
CAUTION: Over bending of the exhaust
ball joint from rotating.
flexible pipe may cause damage resulting in
Detach the stabilizer bar connecting link from failure.
the stabilizer bar on both sides.
Support the exhaust flexible pipe with a
support wrap or splint.
TIE0008508
TIE0014991
3.
CAUTION: Protect the ball joint seal using
a soft cloth to prevent damage. 6.
CAUTION: Take care when removing the
Detach the lower arm ball joint from the exhaust hanger insulator to prevent damage.
wheel knuckle on both sides.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su
Remove the exhaust hanger insulator. • Discard the gasket (if equipped) and nuts.
TIE0027067 E56839
Vehicles with 1.25L, 1.4L or 1.6L engine Vehicles with 2.0L engine
7. 9.
CAUTION: Twisting the exhaust flexible CAUTION: Twisting the exhaust flexible
pipe more than two degrees may cause pipe more than two degrees may cause
damage resulting in failure. damage resulting in failure.
NOTE: Use a pry-bar to prevent the exhaust NOTE: Use a pry-bar to prevent the exhaust
flexible pipe from twisting when removing the flexible pipe from twisting when removing the
exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining
nuts. nuts.
Disconnect the exhaust flexible pipe from Disconnect the exhaust flexible pipe from
the catalytic converter. the catalytic converter.
• Remove and discard the exhaust flexible pipe • Remove and discard the exhaust flexible pipe
to catalytic converter gasket and retaining to catalytic converter gasket and retaining
nuts. nuts.
TIE0026656 E56965
Vehicles with diesel engine All vehicles

8. 10. Detach the steering gear from the
CAUTION: Twisting the exhaust flexible crossmember.
pipe more than two degrees may cause
damage resulting in failure.
NOTE: Use a pry-bar to prevent the exhaust
flexible pipe from twisting when removing the
exhaust flexible pipe to muffler and tailpipe
assembly retaining nuts.
Disconnect the exhaust flexible pipe from
the muffler and tailpipe assembly.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su
• Using cable ties, support the steering gear Remove the lower arms.
on both sides.
TIE0030990
TIE0027076
11. Using a transmission jack and wooden Installation

block, support the crossmember and lower
arm assembly. All vehicles
12. Secure the crossmember and lower arm 1. NOTE: If installing a new crossmember,
assembly to the transmission jack using a install the lower arms.
securing strap. NOTE: Do not fully tighten the lower arm to
13. Remove the crossmember retaining bolts crossmember retaining bolts at this stage.
on both sides. Install the lower arms.
TIE0030765 TIE0030990
14. Using the transmission jack and wooden 2. Using the transmission jack and wooden
block, remove the crossmember and lower block, position the crossmember and lower
arm assembly. arm assembly.
15. NOTE: If a new crossmember is to be 3. NOTE: Use the inner crossmember retaining
installed remove the lower arms. bolt to locate the special tools.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su
Install the special tools on both sides. 8. Attach the steering gear to the crossmember.
48 Nm
48 Nm
205-524
TIE0030768 TIE0027077
4.
CAUTION: While tightening the
Vehicles with 1.25L, 1.4L or 1.6L engine
crossmember retaining bolts, make sure the 9.
CAUTION: Twisting the exhaust flexible
crossmember does not move.
pipe more than two degrees may cause
Install the crossmember retaining bolts on damage resulting in failure.
both sides.
NOTE: Use a pry-bar to prevent the exhaust
flexible pipe from twisting when installing the
exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining
nuts.
NOTE: Coat the exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic
63 Nm converter studs with grease.
NOTE: Install a new exhaust flexible pipe to
catalytic converter gasket and retaining nuts.
175 Nm
Connect the exhaust flexible pipe to the
120 Nm catalytic converter.
E0030775
5. Remove the special tools. 44 Nm
6. Install the crossmember inner retaining bolts

on both sides.
TIE0026657
Vehicles with diesel engine

175 Nm 10.
WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are
installed.
TIE0030774 Attach the exhaust flexible pipe to the
catalytic converter.
7. Remove the transmission jack and wooden
block.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su
• Install a new exhaust flange gasket (if Check the exhaust hanger insulator for
equipped). damage. Install a new exhaust hanger
insulator if required.
47 Nm
TIE0031074
TIE0027067
Vehicles with 2.0L engine
11. 13.
CAUTION: Twisting the exhaust flexible CAUTION: Over bending of the exhaust
pipe more than two degrees may cause flexible pipe may cause damage resulting
damage resulting in failure. in failure.
NOTE: Use a pry-bar to prevent the exhaust Remove the exhaust flexible pipe support
flexible pipe from twisting when installing the wrap or splint.
exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic converter retaining
nuts.
NOTE: Coat the exhaust flexible pipe to catalytic
converter studs with grease.
NOTE: Install a new exhaust flexible pipe to
catalytic converter gasket and retaining nuts.
Connect the exhaust flexible pipe to the
catalytic converter.
47 Nm TIE0014991
14. Install the engine support insulator.
48 Nm
E56966
All vehicles
12.
CAUTION: Take care when installing the
exhaust hanger insulator to prevent TIE0027066
damage.
15.
CAUTION: Make sure that the heat shield
is installed to prevent damage to the ball
joint.
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su
Attach the heat shield to the wheel knuckle 18. Install the front wheels and tires.
on both sides. For additional information, refer to: Wheel
and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
19. NOTE: The lower arm to crossmember
retaining bolts must be tightened with the
vehicle weight on the road wheels.
Tighten the lower arm to crossmember
retaining bolts on both sides.
1. Tighten the lower arm to crossmember front
bolt in two stages.
• Stage 1: 80 Nm.
TIE0025424
• Stage 2: 55 degrees.
2. Tighten the lower arm to crossmember rear
16. retaining bolts.
CAUTION: The lower arm pinch bolt
must be installed from the rear of the wheel
knuckle.
Attach the lower arm ball joint to the wheel
knuckle on both sides. 1
48 Nm
2 55 Nm
TIE0030234
20. Check the toe setting and adjust as

necessary.
TIE0029892
17. NOTE: Use a 5 mm Allen key to prevent the

ball joint from rotating.
Attach the stabilizer bar connecting link to
the stabilizer bar on both sides.
55 Nm
TIE45225
2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G152600en
http://vnx.su

Figo-Brm B517 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Figo-Brm B517 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Figo-Brm B517 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components described in the document?

What are the main components described in the document?

What repair procedures are outlined?

What repair procedures are outlined?

GROUP

FORD FIGO B517

Body and Paint 5

Body and Paint

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

This design allows repairs to be performed easily

The plastic front end module acts among other

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

Rear end design features

damage on the body structure. Sectional

Rear longitudinal member As already featured on some models of Ford, this

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

Item Description Item Description

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

The fascia/crash padding is secured to a cross-car

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268358en

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225357en

2. Remove the front wheels.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225361en

12. Remove the fender.

8. Remove the fender inner retaining bolt. x3

9. Remove the front bumper cover.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225361en

6. Remove the wiper arm nuts on both sides.

4. NOTE: Mark the position of the hood hinge

7. Remove the wiper arms on both sides.

8. Remove the cowl panel grill.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225359en

9. Remove the hood hinges on both sides.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225359en

Radiator Grille Opening Panel

4. Release the hood latch release cable.

7. Detach the power steering pump (PSP)

5. NOTE: Vehicles with 1.4L/1.6L Duratec

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225363en

9. Remove the radiator grill opening panel

10. Remove the radiator grille opening panel.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225363en

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268499en

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1268594en

Front Door Trim Panel(43 705 0)

Vehicles with power windows

Vehicles with manual windows

6. Remove the screw.

3. Remove the door pull handle screw cover.

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en

14. Release the locking tangs and remove the

Vehicles with power windows

2010.25 Figo 2/2010 G1225365en